PCS-902

PCS-902
Line Distance Relay

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay i

Date: 2017-06-08
Preface
DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
NOTICE! is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected
equipment.
DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
WARNING!
Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.
WARNING!
Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
 Earthing
Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.
 Operating environment
ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
ii PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
Preface
environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.
 Printed circuit board
Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.
 External circuit
Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.
NOTICE!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.
Copyright © 2017 NR. All rights reserved.
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China Fax: +86-25-87178999
Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China Website: www.nrec.com/en
P/N: ZL_PCS-902_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R2.10
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay iii

Date: 2017-06-08
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this device.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this device, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this device.
5 Management
Introduce the management function (measurement and recording) of this device.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this device and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module.
7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this device through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce configurable function of the device and all configurable signals are listed.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this device can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
iv PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
Preface
11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this device. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this device is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this device is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this device, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this device.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this device is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this device is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
&
AND gate
≥1
OR gate
Comparator
BI
Binary signal via opto-coupler
SET I>
Input signal from comparator with setting
EN
Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay v

Date: 2017-06-08
Preface
SIG
Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
XXX
Output signal
Timer
t
t
Timer (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
10ms 0ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (0ms), non-settable]
[XXX] 0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
0ms [XXX]
Timer (delay dropoff, settable)
[XXX] [XXX]
Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)
IDMT
Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
---xxx is the symbol
Symbol Corresponding Relationship
Basic
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 R, Y, B
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N RN,YN, BN
ABC L123 RYB
U (voltage) V U
Example
Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN IR, IY, IB, IN
Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3 UR, UY, UB
Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31 URY, UYB, UBR
U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2 UN, U1, U2
vi PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Features ........................................................................................................... 1-7
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of PCS-902 for single circuit breaker ................................. 1-1
Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of PCS-902 for double circuit breakers .............................. 1-2
Figure 1.1-3 Functional diagram of PCS-902............................................................................ 1-3
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 1-a

Date: 2017-06-08
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
-02-27
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
PCS-902 is a digital line distance protection with the main and back-up protection functions, which
is designed for overhead line or cables and hybrid transmission lines of various voltage levels.
52 52
PCS-902 Optical fibre channel or PLC channel PCS-902
Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre, MUX or PLC
Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of PCS-902 for single circuit breaker
In the case of main protection, PCS-902 provides dual-channels pilot distance protection (PUTT,
POTT, blocking and unblocking) and pilot directional earth-fault protection (selectable for
independent communication channel or sharing channel with POTT), which can clear any internal
fault instantaneously for the whole line with the aid of protection signal. Deviation of power
frequency component (DPFC) distance protection with fixed forward direction can perform
extremely high speed operation for close-up faults. There is direct transfer trip (DTT) feature
incorporated in the device.
PCS-902 also includes distance protection (1 forward zones and 4 settable forward or reverse
zone distance protection with selectable mho or quadrilateral characteristic, dedicated pilot
distance zone for pilot distance protection), out-of-step protection, 4 stages directional earth fault
protection, 4 stages directional phase overcurrent protection, 4 stages directional
negative-sequence overcurrent protection, 3 stages voltage protection (under/over voltage
protection), 1 stage negative-sequence overvoltage protection, 4 stages frequency protection
(under/over frequency protection), broken conductor protection, reverse power protection, pole
discrepancy protection, breaker failure protection, thermal overload protection, and dead zone
protection etc. Morever, a backup overcurrent and earth fault protection will be automatically
enabled when VT circuit fails.
In addition, stub differential protection is provided for one and a half breakers arrangement when
transmission line is put into maintenance.
PCS-902 can be configured to support single circuit breaker application or double circuit breakers
application by PCS-Explorer. If the device is applied to double circuit breakers mode, all protection
functions related to the number of circuit breaker will be affected, including circuit breaker position
supervision, breaker failure protection, dead zone protection, pole discrepancy protection,
synchrocheck, automatic reclosure, trip logic, CT circuit supervision, control and synchrocheck for
manual closing.
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 1-1

Date: 2017-06-08
1 Introduction
Bus1
Single-phase
voltage
52
PCS-902 Line 1
Three-phase
voltage
52
Line 2
Single-phase
voltage
52
Bus2
Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of PCS-902 for double circuit breakers
PCS-902 has selectable mode of single-phase tripping or three-phase tripping and configurable
auto-reclosing mode for 1-pole, 3-poles and 1/3-pole operation.
PCS-902 with appropriate selection of integrated protection functions can be applied for various
voltage levels and primary equipment such as cables, overhead lines, interconnectors and
transformer feeder, etc. It also supports configurable binary inputs, binary outputs, LEDs and IEC
61850 protocol.
1-2 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
-02-27
1 Introduction
BUS
52
81
85 21 50/51P 50/51G 50/51Q 50GVT 50PVT 50BF 49 46BC 32R 62PD FR
21D 59Q
78
FL 59P
Data Transmit/Receive
27P
50DZ 87STB (Only for one and a half breakers arrangement)
SOTF 25 79
LINE
Figure 1.1-3 Functional diagram of PCS-902
No. Function ANSI

1 Pilot protection 85
2 DPFC distance protection 21D
3 Distance protection 21
4 Out-of-step protection 78
5 Phase overcurrent protection 50/51P
6 Earth fault protection 50/51G
7 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection 50/51Q
8 Overvoltage protection 59P
9 Undervoltage protection 27P
10 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection 59Q
11 Frequency protection 81
12 Broken conductor protection 46BC
13 Reverse power protection 32R
14 Breaker failure protection 50BF
15 Thermal overload protection 49
16 Stub differential protection 87STB
17 Dead zone protection 50DZ
18 Pole discrepancy protection 62PD
19 Switch onto fault SOTF
20 Phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure 50PVT
21 Earth fault protection when VT circuit failure 50GVT
22 Synchronism check 25
23 Automatic reclosure 79
24 Fault recorder FR

Date: 2017-06-08
1 Introduction
25 Fault location FL
1.2 Function
1. Protection Function
 Distance protection (including eight zones)
 One zone DPFC distance protection with fixed forward direction
 One zone distance protection with fixed forward direction (including phase-to-ground and
phase-to-phase, mho or quadrilateral characteristic)
 One zone pilot distance protection with fixed forward direction (including phase-to-ground
and phase-to-phase, mho or quadrilateral characteristic)
 One zone pilot distance protection with fixed reverse direction (including phase-to-ground
and phase-to-phase, mho or quadrilateral characteristic)
 Four zones distance protection with settable forward or reverse direction (including
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase, mho or quadrilateral characteristic)
 Load encroachment for mho and quadrilateral characteristic distance element
 Power swing blocking releasing, selectable for each of above mentioned zones
 Out-of-step protection
 Overcurrent protection
 Four stages phase overcurrent protection, selectable time characteristic (definite-time or

inverse-time) and directionality (forward direction, reverse direction or non-directional)
 Four stages directional earth fault protection, selectable time characteristic (definite-time
or inverse-time) and directionality (forward direction, reverse direction or non-directional)
 Four stages negative-sequence overcurrent protection, selectable time characteristic

(definite-time or inverse-time) and directionality (forward direction, reverse direction or
non-directional)
 Breaker failure protection
 Optional instantaneously re-tripping
 One stage with two delay timers
 Thermal overload protection
 Stub differential protection
 Dead zone protection
 Pole discrepancy protection
 Broken conductor protection

Date: 2017-06-08
-02-27
1 Introduction
 Reverse power protection
 Switch onto fault (SOTF)
 Via distance measurement elements
 Via dedicated earth fault element
 Backup protection when VT circuit failure
 Phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure
 Ground overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure
 Voltage protection
 Three stages overvoltage protection
 Three stages undervoltage protection
 One stage negative-sequence overvoltage protection
 Frequency protection
 Four stages overfrequency protection
 Four stages underfrequency protection
 df/dt block criterion for underfrequency protection
 Control function
 Synchro-checking
 Automatic reclosure (single shot or multi-shot (max. 4) for 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR)
 Pilot scheme logic
 Phase-segregated communication logic of distance protection
 Weak infeed logic of pilot distance protection
 Weak infeed logic of pilot directional earth fault protection
 Communication scheme of optical pilot channel (Optional)
 Direct optical link
 Connection to a communication network, support G.703 and C37.94 protocol
 Dual-channels redundancy
2. Measurement and control function
 Remote control (open and closing)
 Synchronism check for remote and manual closing
 Energy metering (active and reactive energy are calculated in import respectively export

Date: 2017-06-08
1 Introduction
direction)
3. Logic
 User programmable logic
4. Additional function
 Fault location
 Fault phase selection
 Parallel line compensation for fault location
 VT circuit supervision
 CT circuit supervision
 Self diagnostic
 DC power supply supervision
 Event Recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs.
 Disturbance recorder including 32 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)
 Four kinds of clock synchronization methods
 Conventional
 PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level
 IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
 PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the optical coupler
 PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the optical coupler
 SAS
 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
 Advanced
 IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588
 IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
 PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface
 NoTimeSync

Date: 2017-06-08
-02-27
1 Introduction
5. Monitoring
 Number of circuit breaker operation (single-phase tripping, three-phase tripping and

reclosing)
 Channel status
 Frequency
6. Communication
 Optional 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
 1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization
 Optional 2 or 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform
to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
 Optional 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0
protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
 GOOSE and SV communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)
7. User Interface
 Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.
 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting
 1 RS-232 or RS-485 rear ports for printer
 Language switchover—English+ selected language
 Auxiliary software—PCS-Explorer
1.3 Features
 The intelligent device integrated with protection, control and monitor provides powerful
protection function, flexible protection configuration, user programmable logic and
configurable binary input and binary output, which can meet with various application
requirements.
 High-performance hardware platform and modularized design, fault detector DSP＋protection

DSP. Fault detector DSP manages fault detector and protection DSP manages protection
calucation. Their data acquisition system is completely independent in electronic circuit. DC
power supply of output relay is controlled by the operation of fault detector element, which
prevents maloperation due to error from ADC or damage of any apparatus.
 Fast fault clearance for faults within the protected line, the operating time is less than 10 ms
for close-up faults, less than 15ms for faults in the middle of protected line and less than 25ms
for remote end faults.
 The unique DPFC distance element integrated in the protective device provides extremely
high speed operation and insensitive to power swing.

Date: 2017-06-08
1 Introduction
 Self-adaptive floating threshold which only reflects deviation of power frequency component
improves the protection sensitivity and stability under the condition of load fluctuation and
system disturbance.
 Advanced and reliable power swing blocking releasing feature which ensure distance
protection operate correctly for internal fault during power swing and prevent distance
protection from maloperation during power swing
 Flexible automatic reclosure supports various initiation modes and check modes
 Multiple setting groups with password protection and setting value saved permanently before
modification
 Powerful PC tool software can fulfill protection function configuration, modify setting and
waveform analysis.

Date: 2017-06-08
-02-27
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2 Technical Data ................................................................................... 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 AC Current Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Specifications.............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-4
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5.1 Environmental Tests............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-6
2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-7

2.7 Terminals ......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.8 Measurement Scope and Accuracy ............................................................... 2-7
2.9 Management Function .................................................................................... 2-8
2.9.1 Control Performance............................................................................................................ 2-8

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
2.9.2 Clock Performance .............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.9.3 Fault and Disturbance Recording ........................................................................................ 2-8
2.9.4 Binary Input Signal............................................................................................................... 2-8
2.10 Protective Functions..................................................................................... 2-8

2.10.1 Fault Detector .................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.10.2 Distance Protection ............................................................................................................ 2-8
2.10.3 Phase Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................................... 2-9
2.10.4 Earth Fault Protection ........................................................................................................ 2-9
2.10.5 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection ...................................................................... 2-9
2.10.6 Overvoltage Protection ...................................................................................................... 2-9
2.10.7 Undervoltage Protection .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.10.8 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection .................................................................... 2-10
2.10.9 Overfrequency Protection ................................................................................................ 2-10
2.10.10 Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................................ 2-10
2.10.11 Breaker Failure Protection ............................................................................................. 2-10
2.10.12 Thermal Overload Protection ......................................................................................... 2-10
2.10.13 Stub Differential Protection .............................................................................................2-11
2.10.14 Dead Zone Protection .....................................................................................................2-11
2.10.15 Pole Discrepancy Protection ..........................................................................................2-11
2.10.16 Broken Conductor Protection .........................................................................................2-11
2.10.17 Reverse Power Protection ..............................................................................................2-11
2.10.18 Auto-reclosing .................................................................................................................2-11
2.10.19 Transient Overreach ...................................................................................................... 2-12
2.10.20 Fault Locator .................................................................................................................. 2-12

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications

NOTICE!
“System phase sequence”, which can be set by PCS-Explorer, this setting informs the
device of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on
the device, labeled as A, B and C, must be connected to system phase A, B and C for
correct operation.
2.1.1 AC Current Input

Phase rotation ABC or ACB
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated current (In) 1A 5A
0.05In~40In (It should measure current without beyond full scale
Linear to
against 20 times of related current and value of DC offset by 100%.)
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In
-for 10s 30In
-for 1s 100In
-for half a cycle 250In
Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In
Number Up to 7 current input according to various applications
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input

Phase rotation ABC or ACB
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~170V
Thermal withstand Phase-to-ground Phase-to-phase
-continuously 200V 346V
-10s 260V 450V
-1s 300V 519V
Burden at rated < 0.20VA/phase @Un
Number Up to 6 voltage input according to various applications
2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc/220Vdc/250Vdc 110Vac/220Vac
Permissible voltage range 88~300Vdc 88~264Vac
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition <30W
Operating condition <35W

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
2.1.4 Binary Input

1. Settable pickup voltage and dropoff voltage
Rated voltage 110Vdc 220Vdc

Rated current drain 1.1mA 2.2mA
On value 85-132Vdc (default set) 170-264Vdc (default set)
Off value <66Vdc <132Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage 300Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
Number Up to 54 binary input according to various hardware configurations
2. Fixed pickup voltage and dropoff voltage
Rated voltage 110Vdc 125Vdc 220Vdc 220Vdc

Rated current drain 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.85mA
On value 77-132Vdc 87.5-150Vdc 154-264Vdc 176-264Vdc
Off value <55Vdc <62.5Vdc <110Vdc <140Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage 300Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
Number Up to 54 binary input according to various hardware configurations
2.1.5 Binary Output

1. Tripping/signaling contact
Output mode Potential free contact

Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 8A
Pickup time (Typical Value) <5ms
Dropoff time <5ms
0.65A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
12A@3s
18A@1s
Short duration current
[email protected]
[email protected]
Durability (Loaded contact) 10000 operations
Number Up to 55 binary output according to various hardware configurations
2. Heavy-capacity tripping contact

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
Maximal system voltage 250Vdc

Continuous carry 10A
Pickup time <1ms
Dropoff time <10ms
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 10A
15A@3s
30A@1s
3. Fast signaling contact

Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 5A
Pickup time <1ms
Dropoff time <5ms
0.65A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=0ms) 0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
8A@3s
12A@1s
[email protected]
[email protected]
2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Mounting Way Flush mounted
Chassis color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 15kg
Chassis material Aluminum alloy
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Front side IP51
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree Ⅱ
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Max. transmission distance 500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45 ST (Multi mode)
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-TX 100Base-FX
Max. transmission distance 100m 2km (1310nm)
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST
Fibre type Multi mode
Max. transmission distance 2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Connector type LC

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
Max. transmission distance 2km

Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.3 For Pilot Channel (only for Dedicated Optical Channel)

Connector type FC ST
Fibre type Single mode Multi mode
Wave length 1310nm 1550nm 850nm
Max. transmission distance 40km 100km 2km
Transmission power -11.0dBm ~ -7.0dBm -5.0dBm ~ 0dBm -20dBm ~ -12dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -36dBm Min. -36dBm Min. -30dBm
2.4.3.4 For Synchronization Port

Connector type ST
Wave length 850nm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type EPSON® 300K printer
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Max. transmission distance 500m
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class Ⅰ
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class Ⅰ
2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
measurements
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-26:2013
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class Ⅲ 2.5kV
Differential mode: class Ⅲ 1.0kV
IEC 60255-26:2013 class Ⅳ
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-26:2013 class Ⅲ
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Radio frequency interference tests Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-26:2013
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class Ⅳ, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class Ⅳ, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-26:2013
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class Ⅳ, 1.2/50us
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-26:2013
Conducted RF Electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class Ⅲ , 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity class Ⅴ, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
class Ⅴ, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
immunity class Ⅴ, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m

Auxiliary power supply performance IEC 60255-26:2013
- Voltage dips Up to 200ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Certifications
 ISO9001:2008
 ISO14001:2004
 OHSAS18001:2007
 ISO10012:2003
 CMMI L5
 EMC: 2014/30/EU, EN60255-26:2013
 Products safety (LVD): 2014/35/EU, EN60255-27:2014
2.7 Terminals
Connection Type Wire Size
2
AC current Screw terminals, 2.5mm lead
AC voltage Screw terminals, 1.5mm2 lead
Power supply Screw terminals, 1.0mm2~2.5mm2 lead
2 2
Contact I/O Screw terminals, 1.0mm ~2.5mm lead
Grounding (Earthing) Connection BVR type, 2.5mm²~6.0mm2 lead
2.8 Measurement Scope and Accuracy

Item Range Accuracy
Phase range 0°~ 360° ≤±3°
Frequency fn±3 Hz ≤ 0.02Hz
Currents from protection measurement current transformers
≤ 2.0% of rating (0.05~1.00In)
Current 0.05~5.00In
≤ 2.0% of applied quantities (1.00~5.00In)
≤ 1.0% of rating (0.05~1.00Un)
Voltage 0.05~1.50Un
≤ 1.0% of applied quantities (1.00~1.50Un)
0.05~1.50Un ≤ 3.0% of rating (0.05~1.00In, 0.05~1.00Un)
Active power (W)
0.05~5.00In ≤ 3.0% of applied quantities (1.00~5.00In, 1.00~1.50Un)
0.05~1.50Un ≤ 3.0% of rating (0.05~1.00In, 0.05~1.00Un)
Reactive power (VAr)
0.05~1.50Un ≤ 3.0% of rating (0.05~1.00In, 0.05~1.00Un)
Apparent power (VA)
0.05~1.50Un ≤ 3.0% of rating (0.05~1.00In, 0.05~1.00Un)
Energy (Wh)

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
0.05~1.50Un ≤ 3.0% of rating (0.05~1.00In, 0.05~1.00Un)

Energy (VAh)
2.9 Management Function

2.9.1 Control Performance
Control mode Local or remote

Accuracy of local control ≤ 1s
Accuracy of remote control ≤ 3s
2.9.2 Clock Performance
Real time clock accuracy ≤ 3s/day

Accuracy of GPS synchronization ≤ 1ms
External time synchronization IRIG-B (200-98), PPS, IEEE1588 or SNTP protocol
2.9.3 Fault and Disturbance Recording

Maximum duration 10000 sampled points (24 sampled points per cycle)
Recording position 10 cycles before pickup of trigger element
2.9.4 Binary Input Signal
Resolution of binary input signal ≤ 1ms

Binary input mode Potential-free contact
Resolution of SOE ≤ 2ms
2.10 Protective Functions

2.10.1 Fault Detector
2.10.1.1 DPFC Current Element
Setting range 0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
2.10.1.2 Residual Current Element

2.10.1.3 Overvoltage Element
Setting range Un~2Unn (V)

Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
2.10.2 Distance Protection

Setting range (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting or 0.1Ω/In, whichever is greater

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
Resetting ratio 105%

Time delay 0.000~10.000 (s)
Accuracy ≤1%×Setting+30ms
2.10.3 Phase Overcurrent Protection

Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~20.000 (s)
Accuracy (definite-time characteristic) ≤1%×Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater
Accuracy (inverse-time characteristic)
(for current between 1.2 and 20 multiples of pickup)
2.10.4 Earth Fault Protection

Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~20.000 (s)
2.10.5 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection

Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~20.000 (s)
2.10.6 Overvoltage Protection

Setting range Un~2Unn (V)
Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~30.000 (s)
Accuracy (definite-time characteristic) ≤1%×Setting+30ms (at 1.2 times voltage setting)
(for voltage between 1.2 and 2 multiples of pickup)
2.10.7 Undervoltage Protection

Setting range 0~Unn (V)

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
Resetting ratio 105%

Time delay 0.000~30.000 (s)
(for voltage between 0.5 and 0.8 multiples of pickup)
2.10.8 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection

Setting range 0~Un (V)
Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~30.000 (s)
2.10.9 Overfrequency Protection

Setting range 50.00~65.00 (Hz)
Accuracy ≤ 0.02Hz
Time delay 0.000~100.000 (s)
Accuracy ≤1%×Setting+30ms (at 1.2 times frequency setting)
2.10.10 Underfrequency Protection

Setting range 45.00~60.00 (Hz)
Accuracy ≤ 0.02Hz
Time delay 0.000~100.000 (s)
Accuracy ≤1%×Setting+30ms (at 0.8 times frequency setting)
df/dt blocking setting range 0.200~20.000 (Hz/s)
Accuracy ≤ 0.02Hz/s
2.10.11 Breaker Failure Protection

Pick-up time <20ms
Drop-off time <20ms
Setting range of phase current 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Setting range of zero-sequence current 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Setting range of negative-sequence current 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Time delay (first) 0.000~10.000 (s)
Time delay (second) 0.000~10.000 (s)
2.10.12 Thermal Overload Protection

Base current setting range 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Line thermal time constant 0.100~100.000 (min)
Thermal overload coefficient for trip 1.000~3.000
Thermal overload coefficient for alarm 1.000~3.000

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
Resetting ratio 95%

Drop-off time <30ms
Time accuracy
2.10.13 Stub Differential Protection

Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~10.000 (s)
Accuracy ≤1%×Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)
2.10.14 Dead Zone Protection

Setting range 0.050In~30.000In
Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~10.000s
2.10.15 Pole Discrepancy Protection

Setting range (zero-sequence current) 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Setting range (negative-sequence current) 0.050In~30.000In (A)
Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~600.000 (s)
Accuracy ≤1%×Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)
2.10.16 Broken Conductor Protection

Setting range (I2/I1) 0.20~1.00
Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting
Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.000~600.000 (s)
2.10.17 Reverse Power Protection

Setting range 0.100In~50.000In
Accuracy ≤2% of setting or 0.5W, whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 95%
Time delay 0.010~300.000 (s)
2.10.18 Auto-reclosing
Phase difference setting range 0~89 (Deg)

Date: 2017-06-09
2 Technical Data
Accuracy 2.0Deg
Voltage difference setting range 0.02Un~0.8Un (V)
Accuracy Max(0.01Un, 2.5%)
Frequency difference setting range 0.02~1 (Hz)
Accuracy 0.01Hz
Operating time of synchronism check ≤1%×Setting+20ms
Operating time of energizing check ≤1%×Setting+20ms
Operating time of auto-reclosing ≤1%×Setting+20ms
2.10.19 Transient Overreach

Tolerance for all high-speed protection ≤2%
2.10.20 Fault Locator

Accuracy for multi-phase faults with single end feed < ±2.5%
Tolerance will be higher in case of single-phase fault with high ground resistance.

Date: 2017-06-09
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory .............................................................................. 3-a
3.1 System Parameters ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 General Application.............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Line Parameters .............................................................................................. 3-2

3.2.3 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3 Frequency Calculation.................................................................................... 3-2

3.3.3 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.4 I/O Signal ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.4 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision ............................................................ 3-4

3.4.3 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4.4 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.6 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.5 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-8

3.5.1 Application............................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.5.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP .................................................................................. 3-9

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.5.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP .................................................. 3-12
3.5.4 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-13
3.5.5 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.5.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.5.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.6 Auxiliary Element .......................................................................................... 3-14

3.6.1 General Application............................................................................................................ 3-14
3.6.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-14
3.6.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.6.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.6.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.7 Distance Protection....................................................................................... 3-22

3.7.3 DPFC Distance Protection ................................................................................................. 3-30
3.7.4 Load Encroachment........................................................................................................... 3-34
3.7.5 Mho Distance Protection.................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7.6 Quadrilateral Distance Protection ...................................................................................... 3-48
3.7.7 Pilot Distance Zone ............................................................................................................ 3-55
3.7.8 Out-of-step Protection........................................................................................................ 3-58
3.7.9 Power Swing Blocking Releasing ...................................................................................... 3-65
3.7.10 Distance SOTF Protection ............................................................................................... 3-72
3.8 Optical Pilot Channel (Option) ..................................................................... 3-79

3.8.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-86
3.8.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-87
3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-87

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.9 Pilot Distance Protection .............................................................................. 3-87

3.9.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-99
3.9.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-100
3.10 Pilot Directional Earth-fault Protection ................................................... 3-101

3.10.1 General Application........................................................................................................ 3-101
3.10.2 Function Description ...................................................................................................... 3-102
3.10.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 3-108
3.10.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-108
3.10.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-109
3.11 Current Direction ........................................................................................ 3-110

3.11.1 General Application .........................................................................................................3-110
3.11.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................3-110
3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................3-115
3.11.4 I/O Signals .......................................................................................................................3-115
3.11.5 Settings ...........................................................................................................................3-116
3.12 Phase Overcurrent Protection .................................................................. 3-116

3.12.1 General Application.........................................................................................................3-116
3.12.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................3-116
3.12.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................3-119
3.12.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................3-119
3.12.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-120
3.12.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-121
3.13 Earth Fault Protection............................................................................... 3-122

3.13.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-125
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-c

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.13.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-126
3.13.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-128
3.14 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection ........................................... 3-130

3.14.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-133
3.14.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-133
3.14.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-135
3.15 Overcurrent Protection for VT Circuit Failure......................................... 3-136

3.15.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-138
3.15.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-139
3.15.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-139
3.16 Residual Current SOTF Protection .......................................................... 3-141

3.16.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-142
3.16.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-142
3.16.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.17 Voltage Protection ..................................................................................... 3-143

3.17.1 Overvoltage Protection .................................................................................................. 3-143
3.17.2 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection .................................................................. 3-149
3.17.3 Undervoltage Protection ................................................................................................ 3-150
3.18 Frequency Protection ............................................................................... 3-157

3.18.1 Overfrequency Protection .............................................................................................. 3-157
3.18.2 Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................................ 3-159
3-d PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.19 Breaker Failure Protection ....................................................................... 3-163

3.19.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-164
3.19.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-166
3.19.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-167
3.20 Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................... 3-168

3.20.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-169
3.20.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-170
3.20.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-170
3.21 Stub Differential Protection ...................................................................... 3-171

3.21.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-173
3.21.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-173
3.21.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-174
3.22 Dead Zone Protection ............................................................................... 3-175

3.22.4 I/O Signal ....................................................................................................................... 3-176
3.22.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-177
3.22.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-177
3.23 Pole Discrepancy Protection .................................................................... 3-177

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-e

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.23.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-178
3.23.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-178
3.23.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-179
3.24 Broken Conductor Protection .................................................................. 3-180

3.24.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-181
3.24.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-181
3.24.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-182
3.25 Reverse Power Protection ........................................................................ 3-182

3.25.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-183
3.25.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-184
3.25.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-185
3.26 Synchrocheck............................................................................................ 3-185

3.26.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-195
3.26.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-196
3.26.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-198
3.27 Automatic Reclosure ................................................................................ 3-201

3-f PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.27.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-203
3.27.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-205
3.27.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-217
3.28 Transfer Trip .............................................................................................. 3-219

3.28.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-219
3.28.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-220
3.28.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-220
3.29 Trip Logic ................................................................................................... 3-220

3.29.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-221
3.29.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-222
3.29.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-226
3.30 VT Circuit Supervision .............................................................................. 3-226

3.30.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-227
3.30.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-228
3.30.6 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-229
3.31 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................. 3-229

3.31.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-230
3.31.5 Logic .............................................................................................................................. 3-230
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-g

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.32 Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing ..................................... 3-230

3.32.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-242
3.32.5 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 3-243
3.33 Faulty Phase Selection ............................................................................. 3-247

3.33.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-250
3.34 Fault Location............................................................................................ 3-251

3.34.1 Application...................................................................................................................... 3-251
3.34.4 I/O Signals ..................................................................................................................... 3-255
List of Figures
Figure 3.3-1 Logic diagram of frequency calculation.............................................................. 3-3
Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of CB position supervision ......................................................... 3-6
Figure 3.4-2 Logic diagram of trip&closing circuit supervision ............................................ 3-6
Figure 3.4-3 Logic diagram of circuit breaker position ........................................................... 3-7
Figure 3.4-4 Logic diagram of pole open states ...................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.5-1 Flow chart of protection program ...................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3.5-2 Logic diagram of fault detector .......................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (ROC) ........................................................ 3-18
Figure 3.6-2 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (ROV) ........................................................ 3-18
Figure 3.6-3 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (OC)........................................................... 3-19
Figure 3.6-4 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (UVG) ........................................................ 3-19
Figure 3.6-5 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (UVS)......................................................... 3-20
3-h PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.6-6 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (UVD) ........................................................ 3-20
Figure 3.6-7 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (OCD) ........................................................ 3-20
Figure 3.6-8 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (Startup) ................................................... 3-21
Figure 3.7-1 Operating time of single-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=1) ......................................... 3-25
Figure 3.7-2 Operating time of single-phase fault (60Hz, SIR=1) ......................................... 3-25
Figure 3.7-3 Operating time of two-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=1) ............................................. 3-26
Figure 3.7-4 Operating time of two-phase fault (60Hz, SIR=1) ............................................. 3-26
Figure 3.7-5 Operating time of three-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=1) ........................................... 3-27
Figure 3.7-6 Operating time of three-phase fault (60Hz, SIR=1) ........................................... 3-27
Figure 3.7-7 Operating time of single-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=30) ....................................... 3-28
Figure 3.7-8 Operating time of single-phase fault (60Hz, SIR=30) ....................................... 3-28
Figure 3.7-9 Operating time of two-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=30) ........................................... 3-29
Figure 3.7-10 Operating time of two-phase fault (60Hz, SIR=30) ......................................... 3-29
Figure 3.7-11 Operating time of three-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=30) ....................................... 3-30
Figure 3.7-12 Operating time of three-phase fault (60Hz, SIR=30) ....................................... 3-30
Figure 3.7-13 Operation characteristic for forward fault....................................................... 3-31
Figure 3.7-14 Operation characteristic for reverse fault ....................................................... 3-32
Figure 3.7-15 Logic diagram of DPFC distance protection................................................... 3-33
Figure 3.7-16 Distance element with load trapezoid.............................................................. 3-34
Figure 3.7-17 Phase-to-ground operation characteristic for forward fault ......................... 3-36
Figure 3.7-18 Operation Characteristic of quadrilateral distance element ......................... 3-38
Figure 3.7-19 Phase-to-phase operation characteristic for forward fault ........................... 3-38
Figure 3.7-20 Operation characteristic for reverse fault ....................................................... 3-40
Figure 3.7-21 Steady-state characteristic of three-phase short-circuit fault ...................... 3-40
Figure 3.7-22 Operation characteristic of three-phase close up short-circuit fault........... 3-41
Figure 3.7-23 Shift impedance characteristic of zone 1 and zone 2 .................................... 3-42
Figure 3.7-24 Logic diagram of enabling distance protection (Mho)................................... 3-44
Figure 3.7-25 Logic diagram of distance protection (Mho zone 1) ...................................... 3-44
Figure 3.7-26 Logic diagram of distance protection (Mho zone i) ....................................... 3-46
Figure 3.7-27 Quadrilateral forward distance element characteristics ............................... 3-48
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-i

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.7-28 Quadrilateral reverse distance element characteristic .................................. 3-49
Figure 3.7-29 Logic diagram of enabling distance protection (Quad) ................................. 3-51
Figure 3.7-30 Logic diagram of distance protection (Quad zone 1) .................................... 3-51
Figure 3.7-31 Logic diagram of distance protection (Quad zone i) ..................................... 3-53
Figure 3.7-32 Protected zone of pilot distance protection.................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.7-33 Pilot reverse weak infeed element ................................................................... 3-56
Figure 3.7-34 Logic diagram of pilot distance zone (Mho characteristic) ........................... 3-56
Figure 3.7-35 Logic diagram of pilot distance zone (Quad characteristic) ......................... 3-57
Figure 3.7-36 Dual-machine equivalent system ..................................................................... 3-59
Figure 3.7-37 Dual-machine equivalent system ..................................................................... 3-59
Figure 3.7-38 Variation curve of oscillation center voltage .................................................. 3-61
Figure 3.7-39 The variation rule of oscillation center voltage .............................................. 3-61
Figure 3.7-40 Vector diagram of the oscillation center voltage ........................................... 3-62
Figure 3.7-41 Operation characteristic of zone detector element........................................ 3-63
Figure 3.7-42 Logic diagram of out-of-step protection ......................................................... 3-64
Figure 3.7-43 Logic diagram of PSBR ..................................................................................... 3-71
Figure 3.7-44 Logic diagram of enabling distance SOTF protection ................................... 3-73
Figure 3.7-45 Logic diagram of manual closing signal ......................................................... 3-74
Figure 3.7-46 Logic diagram of manual closing signal ......................................................... 3-75
Figure 3.7-47 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection by manual closing signal ...... 3-76
Figure 3.7-48 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection by 1-pole or 3-pole AR ........... 3-77
Figure 3.7-49 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection by PD condition ...................... 3-77
Figure 3.7-50 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection ................................................... 3-78
Figure 3.8-1 Direct optical link up to 2km with 850nm .......................................................... 3-80
Figure 3.8-2 Direct optical link up to 40km with1310nm or 100km with 1550nm ............... 3-81
Figure 3.8-3 Connect to a communication network via communication convertor........... 3-81
Figure 3.8-4 Connect to a communication network via MUX-64 .......................................... 3-82
Figure 3.8-5 Connect to a communication network via MUX-2M ......................................... 3-82
Figure 3.8-6 Schematic diagram of communication channel time ...................................... 3-85
Figure 3.8-7 Logic diagram of receiving signal i.................................................................... 3-87
3-j PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.9-1 Enabling/disabling logic of pilot distance protection ...................................... 3-88
Figure 3.9-2 Logic diagram of receiving signal...................................................................... 3-89
Figure 3.9-3 Zone extension ..................................................................................................... 3-89
Figure 3.9-4 Simple schematic of PUTT .................................................................................. 3-90
Figure 3.9-5 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (PUTT) .......................................... 3-91
Figure 3.9-6 Simple schematic of POTT.................................................................................. 3-91
Figure 3.9-7 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (POTT) .......................................... 3-92
Figure 3.9-8 Simple schematic of system fault ...................................................................... 3-93
Figure 3.9-9 Simple schematic of blocking ............................................................................ 3-93
Figure 3.9-10 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (Blocking) .................................. 3-94
Figure 3.9-11 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (Unblocking) .............................. 3-95
Figure 3.9-12 Current reversal ................................................................................................. 3-95
Figure 3.9-13 Logic diagram of current reversal blocking.................................................... 3-96
Figure 3.9-14 Line fault description ......................................................................................... 3-97
Figure 3.9-15 Weak infeed logic during pickup ...................................................................... 3-97
Figure 3.9-16 Weak infeed logic without pickup .................................................................... 3-98
Figure 3.9-17 Simplified CB echo logic for POTT .................................................................. 3-98
Figure 3.10-1 Enabling/disabling logic of pilot directional earth-fault protection ........... 3-102
Figure 3.10-2 Logic diagram of receiving signal.................................................................. 3-103
Figure 3.10-3 Forward/reverse direction of zero-sequence power .................................... 3-103
Figure 3.10-4 Simple schematic of DEF (permissive scheme) ........................................... 3-104
Figure 3.10-5 Logic diagram of DEF (permissive scheme) ................................................. 3-104
Figure 3.10-6 Simple schematic of blocking ........................................................................ 3-105
Figure 3.10-7 Logic diagram of DEF (Blocking scheme) .................................................... 3-106
Figure 3.10-8 Logic diagram for unblocking ........................................................................ 3-107
Figure 3.10-9 Simplified CB Echo logic for POTT ................................................................ 3-107
Figure 3.11-1 Line fault description ....................................................................................... 3-110
Figure 3.11-2 Vector diagram of current and voltage ...........................................................3-111
Figure 3.11-3 Vector diagram of zero-sequence power....................................................... 3-113
Figure 3.12-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection .......................................... 3-120
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-k

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of earth fault protection (stage 1) ......................................... 3-126
Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of earth fault protection (stage i) .......................................... 3-127
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of negative-sequence overcurrent protection .................... 3-133
Figure 3.14-2 Logic diagram of stage 4 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection .. 3-134
Figure 3.15-1 Logic diagram of overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure................... 3-139
Figure 3.16-1 Logic diagram of residual current SOTF protection .................................... 3-142
Figure 3.17-1 Logic diagram of stage i of overvoltage protection ..................................... 3-147
Figure 3.17-2 Logic diagram of negative-sequence overvoltage protection .................... 3-150
Figure 3.17-3 Blocking logic of undervoltage protection ................................................... 3-154
Figure 3.17-4 Logic diagram of stage i of undervoltage protection................................... 3-155
Figure 3.18-1 Logic diagram of overfrequency protection (start) ...................................... 3-158
Figure 3.18-2 Logic diagram of stage i of overfrequency protection ................................ 3-159
Figure 3.18-3 Logic diagram of underfrequency protection (start) ................................... 3-161
Figure 3.18-4 Logic diagram of stage i of underfrequency protection .............................. 3-162
Figure 3.19-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection ................................................. 3-166
Figure 3.20-1 Characteristic curve of thermal overload model .......................................... 3-169
Figure 3.20-2 Logic diagram of stage i of thermal overload protection ............................ 3-170
Figure 3.21-1 3/2 breakers arrangement ............................................................................... 3-171
Figure 3.21-2 Logic diagram of stub differential protection ............................................... 3-174
Figure 3.22-1 Dead zone protection ...................................................................................... 3-177
Figure 3.23-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection............................................. 3-179
Figure 3.24-1 Logic diagram of broken conductor protection ........................................... 3-181
Figure 3.25-1 Logic diagram of stage 1 of reverse power protection................................ 3-184
Figure 3.25-2 Logic diagram of stage 2 of reverse power protection................................ 3-184
Figure 3.26-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronism voltage .......... 3-186
Figure 3.26-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement..................................... 3-188
Figure 3.26-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement..................................... 3-188
Figure 3.26-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement ................................. 3-189
Figure 3.26-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement ..................................... 3-189
Figure 3.26-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement ................... 3-190
3-l PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.26-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ....................... 3-191
Figure 3.26-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ....................... 3-192
Figure 3.26-9 Reference voltage circuit failure supervision logic ..................................... 3-193
Figure 3.26-10 Synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision logic .............................. 3-193
Figure 3.26-11 Synchrocheck mode selection ..................................................................... 3-197
Figure 3.26-12 Synchronism check ....................................................................................... 3-197
Figure 3.26-13 Dead charge check logic ............................................................................... 3-198
Figure 3.26-14 Synchrocheck logic ....................................................................................... 3-198
Figure 3.27-1 Logic diagram of AR block ............................................................................. 3-206
Figure 3.27-2 Logic diagram of AR ready ............................................................................. 3-207
Figure 3.27-3 Logic diagram of tripping condition output .................................................. 3-208
Figure 3.27-4 Single-phase tripping initiating AR ................................................................ 3-209
Figure 3.27-5 Three-phase tripping initiating AR ................................................................. 3-209
Figure 3.27-6 1-pole AR initiation .......................................................................................... 3-210
Figure 3.27-7 3-pole AR initiation .......................................................................................... 3-210
Figure 3.27-8 One-shot AR ..................................................................................................... 3-211
Figure 3.27-9 Extra time delay of AR ..................................................................................... 3-211
Figure 3.27-10 Reclosing output logic .................................................................................. 3-212
Figure 3.27-11 Wait to slave signal ........................................................................................ 3-212
Figure 3.27-12 Reclosing failure and success ..................................................................... 3-213
Figure 3.27-13 Single-phase transient fault .......................................................................... 3-216
Figure 3.27-14 Single-phase permanent fault ([CBx.79.N_Rcls]=2) ................................... 3-216
Figure 3.28-1 Logic diagram of transfer trip......................................................................... 3-220
Figure 3.29-1 Tripping logic.................................................................................................... 3-224
Figure 3.29-2 Breaker failure initiation logic ........................................................................ 3-224
Figure 3.29-3 Blocking AR logic ............................................................................................ 3-225
Figure 3.30-1 Logic of VT circuit supervision ...................................................................... 3-228
Figure 3.30-2 Logic of VT neutral point supervision ........................................................... 3-228
Figure 3.31-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure ................................................................ 3-230
Figure 3.32-1 Synchrocheck mode selection for manual closing...................................... 3-232
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-m

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.32-2 Logic diagram of closing circuit breaker 1 ................................................... 3-232
Figure 3.32-3 Logic diagram of closing circuit breaker 2 ................................................... 3-233
Figure 3.32-4 Logic diagram of closing switch (xx=02~15) ................................................ 3-234
Figure 3.32-5 Logic diagram of open circuit breaker .......................................................... 3-235
Figure 3.32-6 Logic diagram of open switch (xx=02~15) .................................................... 3-235
Figure 3.32-7 Configuration page of control output 01 (default configration) ................. 3-237
Figure 3.32-8 Configuration page of control output 02 (default configration) ................. 3-238
Figure 3.33-1 The region of faulty phase selection ............................................................. 3-248
Figure 3.33-2 The logic of faulty phase selection ................................................................ 3-250
Figure 3.34-1 Equivalent sequence network ........................................................................ 3-252
List of Tables
Table 3.1-1 System parameters .................................................................................................. 3-1
Table 3.2-1 Line parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of frequency calculation ...................................................................... 3-3
Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision.................................................................. 3-5
Table 3.4-2 Internal settings of CB position supervision ........................................................ 3-8
Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of fault detector .................................................................................. 3-13
Table 3.5-2 Settings of fault detector ...................................................................................... 3-13
Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element ............................................................................ 3-17
Table 3.6-2 Settings of auxiliary element ................................................................................ 3-21
Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of DPFC distance protection ............................................................. 3-33
Table 3.7-2 Settings of DPFC distance protection ................................................................. 3-34
Table 3.7-3 I/O signals of load encroachment ........................................................................ 3-35
Table 3.7-4 Settings of load encroachment ............................................................................ 3-35
Table 3.7-5 I/O signals of distance protection (Mho) ............................................................. 3-43
Table 3.7-6 Settings of distance protection (Mho) ................................................................. 3-46
Table 3.7-7 I/O signals of distance protection (Quad) ........................................................... 3-50
Table 3.7-8 Settings of distance protection (Quad) ............................................................... 3-53
Table 3.7-9 Settings of pilot distance zone ............................................................................. 3-57
3-n PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.7-10 I/O signals of out-of-step protection.................................................................. 3-63
Table 3.7-11 Settings of out-of-step protection ...................................................................... 3-65
Table 3.7-12 I/O signals of PSBR ............................................................................................. 3-69
Table 3.7-13 Settings of PSBR ................................................................................................. 3-72
Table 3.7-14 I/O signals of distance SOTF protection ........................................................... 3-73
Table 3.7-15 Settings of distance SOTF protection ............................................................... 3-78
Table 3.7-16 Internal settings of distance SOTF protection ................................................. 3-79
Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of pilot channel ................................................................................... 3-86
Table 3.8-2 Settings of pilot channel ....................................................................................... 3-87
Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pilot distance protection ............................................................... 3-99
Table 3.9-2 Settings of pilot distance protection ................................................................. 3-100
Table 3.9-3 Internal settings of pilot distance protection.................................................... 3-101
Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of pilot directional earth-fault protection..................................... 3-108
Table 3.10-2 Settings of pilot directional earth-fault protection ......................................... 3-109
Table 3.10-3 Internal settings of pilot distance protection.................................................. 3-110
Table 3.11-1 Direction description ......................................................................................... 3-112
Table 3.11-2 I/O signals of current direction ......................................................................... 3-115
Table 3.11-3 Settings of current direction ............................................................................. 3-116
Table 3.12-1 Inverse-time curve parameters......................................................................... 3-118
Table 3.12-2 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection ................................................... 3-119
Table 3.12-3 Settings of phase overcurrent protection ....................................................... 3-121
Table 3.13-2 I/O signals of earth fault protection ................................................................. 3-125
Table 3.13-3 Settings of earth fault protection ..................................................................... 3-128
Table 3.14-2 I/O signals of negative-sequence overcurrent protection............................. 3-133
Table 3.14-3 Settings of negative-sequence overcurrent protection................................. 3-135
Table 3.15-2 I/O signals of overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure ........................... 3-138
Table 3.15-3 Settings of overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure ............................... 3-139
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-o

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.16-1 I/O signals of residual SOTF protection .......................................................... 3-142
Table 3.16-2 Settings of residual current SOTF protection ................................................ 3-143
Table 3.17-2 I/O signals of overvoltage protection .............................................................. 3-146
Table 3.17-3 Settings of overvoltage protection .................................................................. 3-148
Table 3.17-4 I/O signals of negative-sequence overvoltage protection ............................ 3-149
Table 3.17-5 Settings of negative-sequence overvoltage protection ................................ 3-150
Table 3.17-6 Inverse-time curve parameters of phase undervoltage protection .............. 3-152
Table 3.17-7 I/O signals of undervoltage protection ............................................................ 3-153
Table 3.17-8 Settings of undervoltage protection ................................................................ 3-156
Table 3.18-1 I/O signals of overfrequency protection.......................................................... 3-158
Table 3.18-2 Settings of overfrequency protection.............................................................. 3-159
Table 3.18-3 I/O signals of underfrequency protection ....................................................... 3-161
Table 3.18-4 Settings of underfrequency protection ........................................................... 3-162
Table 3.19-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection.......................................................... 3-164
Table 3.19-2 Settings of breaker failure protection.............................................................. 3-167
Table 3.20-1 I/O signals of thermal overload protection ..................................................... 3-169
Table 3.20-2 Settings of thermal overload protection ......................................................... 3-170
Table 3.21-1 I/O signals of stub differential protection ....................................................... 3-173
Table 3.21-2 Settings of stub differential protection ........................................................... 3-174
Table 3.22-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection ................................................................. 3-176
Table 3.22-2 Settings of dead zone protection ..................................................................... 3-177
Table 3.23-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection ..................................................... 3-178
Table 3.23-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection ......................................................... 3-179
Table 3.24-1 I/O signals of broken conductor protection .................................................... 3-181
Table 3.24-2 Settings of broken conductor protection ........................................................ 3-182
Table 3.25-1 I/O signals of reverse power protection .......................................................... 3-183
Table 3.25-2 Settings of broken conductor protection ........................................................ 3-185
Table 3.26-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck ............................................................................. 3-195
Table 3.26-2 Synchrocheck settings ..................................................................................... 3-198
3-p PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.27-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing ............................................................................ 3-203
Table 3.27-2 Reclosing number.............................................................................................. 3-215
Table 3.27-3 Auto-reclosing settings ..................................................................................... 3-217
Table 3.28-1 I/O signals of transfer trip ................................................................................. 3-219
Table 3.28-2 Settings of transfer trip ..................................................................................... 3-220
Table 3.29-1 I/O signals of trip logic ...................................................................................... 3-221
Table 3.29-2 Settings of trip logic .......................................................................................... 3-226
Table 3.30-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision ............................................................... 3-227
Table 3.30-2 VTS settings ....................................................................................................... 3-229
Table 3.31-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision ............................................................... 3-230
Table 3.32-1 I/O signals of control ......................................................................................... 3-242
Table 3.32-2 Function settings ............................................................................................... 3-243
Table 3.32-3 Synchrocheck settings ..................................................................................... 3-243
Table 3.32-4 Dual point binary input settings....................................................................... 3-246
Table 3.32-5 Control settings ................................................................................................. 3-246
Table 3.32-6 Interlock settings ............................................................................................... 3-246
Table 3.33-1 Relation between ΔUOΦMAX and faulty phase.............................................. 3-248
Table 3.33-2 I/O signals of faulty phase selection ............................................................... 3-250
Table 3.34-1 I/O signals of fault location ............................................................................... 3-255
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 3-q

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3-r PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.1 System Parameters
3.1.1 General Application

The device performs various protection functions by respective algorithms with the information
(currents and voltages) acquired from primary system through current transformer and voltage
transformer, so it is important to configure analog input channels correctly.
Further to correct configuration of analog input channels, other protected system information, such
as the parameters of voltage transformer and current transformer are also required.
3.1.2 Function Description
The device generally considers transmission line as its protected object, current flows from busbar
to line is considered as the forward direction.
3.1.3 Settings
Table 3.1-1 System parameters
No. Name Range Step Unit Remark

1 Active_Grp 1~10 1 Active setting group
2 Opt_SysFreq 50 or 60 Hz System frequency
3 PrimaryEquip_Name The name of primary equipment
Primary rated value of VT (phase to
4 U1n 10.00~65500.00 0.01 kV
phase)
Secondary rated value of VT (phase to
5 U2n 80.00~220.00 0.01 V
phase)
Primary rated value of CT corresponding
6 CBx.I1n 100~30000 1 A
to circuit breaker No.x
Primary calculation base rated current of
7 I1n_Base 100~30000 1 A CT, and generally set as same as
[CB1.I1n]
Secondary calculation base rated
8 I2n_Base 1 or 5 A
current of CT
Frequency upper limit setting
The device will issue an alarm
9 f_High_FreqAlm 50~65 1 Hz
[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is
higher than the setting.
Frequency lower limit setting
The device will issue an alarm
10 f_Low_FreqAlm 45~60 1 Hz
[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is
lower than the setting.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.2 Line Parameters

When the device equips with line protection functions, line parameters of protected line are
required, especially for fault location, precise line parameters are the basic criterion for accurate
fault location.
Line parameters mainly include positive-sequence reactance, positive-sequence resistance,

zero-sequence reactance, zero-sequence resistance, mutual zero-sequence reactance, mutual
zero-sequence resistance and line length.
The positive-sequence reactance, zero-sequence reactance, positive-sequence resistance and

zero-sequence resistance are the reactance and resistance value of the whole line. In general, the
device locates the fault through calculating the impedance value from the location of the device to
fault point.
3.2.3 Settings
Table 3.2-1 Line parameters

Positive-sequence reactance of the whole
1 X1L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
line (secondary value)
Positive-sequence resistance of the whole
2 R1L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
line (secondary value)
Zero-sequence reactance of the whole line
3 X0L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
(secondary value)
Zero-sequence resistance of the whole line
4 R0L (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.010 ohm
(secondary value)
Zero-sequence mutual reactance
5 X0M (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
(secondary value)
Zero-sequence mutual resistance of the
6 R0M (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
whole line (secondary value)
7 LineLength 0.00~655.35 0.01 km Total length of the whole line
3.3 Frequency Calculation

System frequency is an important parameter to characterize power system, and the measurement
and calculation of system frequency are the basis of many protection functions. The frequency
calculation module can accurately calculate the frequency of voltage component.
The device can be applied to the power system within frequency range of 40Hz~63Hz, the
reference frequency can be set as 50Hz or 60Hz via the system setting [Opt_SysFreq].
The device provide frequency track function, which can improve the accuracy of protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
algorithms and the performance of protection functions. For the power system using 50Hz or 60Hz
as reference frequency, the frequency track function can be disabled if the fluctuation of the
frequency range is not great. For the power system that the fluctuation of the frequency range is
great, the frequency track function can be enabled to improve protection performance.
It adopts the positive-sequence voltage which derived from protection used voltage as the
calculation reference, the positive-sequence voltage can be calculated as following:
U1  (U a  U b e j120  U c e j 240) / 3
When no VT is connected to the device, the frequency track function is disabled automatically, and
then the device calculates protection algorithm using the system reference frequency. When the
device detects a fault happening to the power system or the voltage is smaller than 0.15Un, the
frequency track function is disabled.
3.3.3 Function Block Diagram
FreqCal
FreqTrack f
fn Alm_Freq
3.3.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of frequency calculation
No. Input Signal Description

It is used to enabled or disable frequency track function by the configuration
1 FreqTrack
software PCS-Explorer.
2 fn It is the system frequency, which is decided by the setting [Opt_SysFreq].
No. Output Signal Description
1 f Frequency calculation result
2 Alm_Freq Frequency abnormality alarm
3.3.5 Logic
SIG U3P
Frequency
SIG fn f
calculation
SIG FreqTrack
SIG f<[f_Low_FreqAlm] >=1

Alm_Freq
SIG f>[f_High_FreqAlm]
Figure 3.3-1 Logic diagram of frequency calculation

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.4 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision

The status of circuit breaker (CB) position is applied for protection and control functions in this
device, such as, SOTF protection, auto-reclose and VT circuit supervision, etc. The status of CB
position can be applied as input signals for other features configured by user.
The signal reflecting CB position is acquired via opto-coupler with settable delay pickup and
dropoff, and forms digital signal used by protection functions. CB position can reflect the status of
each phase by means of phase-segregated inputs.
In order to prevent that wrong status of CB position is input into the device via binary input,
appropriate monitor method is used to check the rationality of the binary input. When the binary
input of CB open position is detected, the status of CB position will be thought as incorrect and an
alarm [Alm_52b] will be issued if there is current detected in the line.
Together with the status of circuit breaker and the information of external circuit, this function can
be used to supervise control circuit of circuit breaker.
External manual closing binary input (ManCls) is only used for SOTF logic application, the control
of circuit breaker (CB) closing or opening should refer to section 3.29 (Control and Synchrocheck
for Manual Closing).

1. For phase-segregated circuit breaker
CB Position Supervision
CBx.52b_PhA CBx.Alm_52b
CBx.52b_PhB
CBx.52b_PhC
CBx.ManCls
CBx.Test
2. For non-phase segregated circuit breaker

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
CB Position Supervision
CBx.52b CBx.Alm_52b
CBx.ManCls
CBx.Test
3. Trip&closing circuit supervision (TCCS)
TCCS
CBx.52a CBx.TCCS.Alm
CBx.52b
CBx.TCCS.Input
CBx.ManCls
CBx.Test
TCCS will be disabled automatically when it is used for phase-segregated circuit breaker. x=1 or 2
3.4.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision

1 CBx.52b_PhA Normally closed contact of A-phase of circuit breaker No.x
2 CBx.52b_PhB Normally closed contact of B-phase of circuit breaker No.x
3 CBx.52b_PhC Normally closed contact of C-phase of circuit breaker No.x
Maintenance status binary input of circuit breaker No.x
If any circuit breaker is in maintenance and out of service, CBx.52b or CBx.Test
4 CBx.Test should be set as “1” in fixed, and CB No.x will be not take effect in corresponding
protection logics. (CB position supervision is still kept.) It is only available for
double circuit breakers mode.
External manual closing binary input of circuit breaker No.x, it is only applied to
5 CBx.ManCls
SOTF logic
6 CBx.52b Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker No.x
7 CBx.52a Normally open contact of three-phase of circuit breaker No.x
Control circuit failure of circuit breaker No.x (normally closed contacts of tripping
8 CBx.TCCS.Input position (52b) and closing position (52a) of three-phase circuit breaker are all
de-energized due to DC power loss of control circuit)
1 CBx.Alm_52b Circuit breaker No.x position is abnormal
2 CBx.TCCS.Alm Control circuit of circuit breaker No.x is abnormal

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
NOTICE!
The signal [CBx.52a] only take effect in the tripping/closing circuit supervision and not
affect any protection function. Only if tripping/closing circuit supervision is configured,
this signal needs to be connected to the device.
3.4.5 Logic
BI [CBx.52b_PhA] >=1
&
&
BI [CBx.52b_PhB] >=1
& &
>=1
10s 10s CBx.Alm_52b
BI [CBx.52b_PhC] >=1 >=1
&
BI [CBx.52b]
&
SIG CBx.Ia>I_Line
& >=1
SIG CBx.Ib>I_Line
&
SIG CBx.Ic>I_Line
Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of CB position supervision
BI [CBx.52a] >=1
>=1
BI [CBx.52b] [CBx.TCCS.t_DPU] [CBx.TCCS.t_DDO] CBx.TCCS.Alm
BI [CBx.TCCS.Input]
Figure 3.4-2 Logic diagram of trip&closing circuit supervision

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
BI [CB1.52b_PhA] >=1
&
52b_PhA
BI [CB1.52b_PhB] >=1
BI [CB1.52b_PhC]
>=1
BI [CB1.52b]
BI [CB1.Test]
&
52b_PhB
BI [CB2.52b_PhA] >=1
BI [CB2.52b_PhB] >=1
BI [CB2.52b_PhC]
&
>=1 52b_PhC
BI [CB2.52b]
BI [CB2.Test]
Figure 3.4-3 Logic diagram of circuit breaker position
x=1 or 2
I_Line is threshold value used to determine whether line is on-load or no-load. Default value
0.06In.
If there is any single phase tripping or breaker status [52b_Phx]=1 (x can be A, B or C) and
corresponding phase current is smaller than 0.06IN, then single pole open state is confirmed by the
device.
If there is three pole tripping or breaker status of three phases are all open and three phase
currents are all smaller than 0.06IN, then three pole open state is confirmed by the device.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 52b_PhA &

50ms 0ms
SIG Ia<I_Line
SIG 52b_PhB &

50ms 0ms
SIG Ib<I_Line
SIG 52b_PhC &

50ms 0ms
SIG Ic<I_Line
>=1
SET
SIG Trp A S Q & Pole A open
50ms 0ms
SIG FD.Pkp R CLR Q
SIG Ia<I_Line
>=1
SET
SIG Trp B S Q & Pole B open
50ms 0ms
R CLR Q
SIG Ib<I_Line
>=1
SET
SIG Trp C S Q & Pole C open
50ms 0ms
R CLR Q
SIG Ic<I_Line
Figure 3.4-4 Logic diagram of pole open states
Where:
TrpA, TrpB and TrpC are the tripping signals of the device.
3.4.6 Settings
Table 3.4-2 Internal settings of CB position supervision
No. Name Default Value Unit Remark

Pickup delay time of control circuit failure alarm for
1 CBx.TCCS.t_DPU 0.5 s
circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2)
Dropoff delay time of control circuit failure alarm for
2 CBx.TCCS.t_DDO 0.5 s
circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2)
3.5 Fault Detector (FD)

3.5.1 Application
The device has one DSP module with fault detector DSP and protection DSP for fault detector and
protection calculation respectively. Protection DSP with protection fault detector element is
responsible for calculation of protection elements, and fault detector DSP is responsible to
determine fault appearance on the protected power system. Fault detector in fault detector DSP

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
picks up to provide positive supply to output relays. The output relays can only operate when both
the fault detector in fault detector DSP and a protection element operate simultaneously.
Otherwise, the output relays would not operate. An alarm message will be issued with blocking
outputs if a protection element operates while the fault detector does not operate.
3.5.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP
Main part of FD is DPFC current detector element that detects the change of phase-to-phase
power frequency current, and residual current fault detector element that calculates the vector
sum of 3 phase currents as supplementary. They are continuously calculating the analog input
signals.
All fault detectors in this device include:
1. Fault detector based on DPFC current: DPFC current is greater than the setting value
2. Fault detector based on residual current: Residual current is greater than the setting value
3. Fault detector based on negative-sequence current: Negative-sequence current is greater

than the setting value
4. Fault detector based on phase current: Phase current is greater than the setting value
5. Fault detector based on voltage: Phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage is greater than the
setting value
6. Fault detector based on circuit breaker position: Circuit breaker position discrepancy
7. Fault detector based on thermal overload logic: Thermal overload pickup
8. Fault detector based on auxiliary element: Auxiliary element pickup
If any of the above conditions is complied, FD will operate to activate the output circuit providing
DC power supply to the output relays. The fault detector based on DPFC current and the fault
detector based on residual current are always enabled, and all protection functions are permitted
to operate when they operate.
3.5.2.1 Fault Detector Based on DPFC Current
DPFC phase-to-phase current is obtained by subtracting the phase-to-phase current from that of a
cycle before.
I(k) is the sampling value at a point.
I(k-24) is the value of a sampling point before a cycle, 24 is the sampling points in one cycle.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
200
100
-100
-200
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Original Current
100
50
-50
-100
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
DPFC current
From above figures, it is concluded that DPFC can reflect the sudden change of current at the
initial stage of a fault and has a perfect performance of fault detection.
It is used to determine whether this pickup condition is met according to Equation 3.5-1.
For multi-phase short-circuit fault, DPFC phase-to-phase current has high sensitivity to ensure the
pickup of protection device. For usual single phase to earth fault, it also has sufficient sensitivity to
pick up except the earth fault with very large fault resistance. Under this condition, DPFC current is
relative small, however, residual current is also used to judge pickup condition.
This element adopts adaptive floating threshold varied with the change of load current
continuously. The change of load current is small and steadily under normal or power swing
condition, the adaptive floating threshold with the ΔI Set is higher than the change of current under
these conditions and hence maintains the element stability.
The criterion is:
ΔIΦΦMAX>1.25ΔITh+ΔISet Equation 3.5-1
Where:
ΔIΦΦMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current (ΦΦ=AB, BC, CA)
ΔISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set])
ΔITh: The floating threshold value
The coefficient, 1.25, is an empirical value which ensures the threshold always higher than the
unbalance output value of the system.
If operation condition is met, the fault detector based on DPFC current will operate to provide DC
power supply for output relays, the pickup signal will maintain 7s after the fault detector based on
DPFC current drops off.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.5.2.2 Fault Detector Based on Residual Current
The operation condition will be met when 3I0 is greater than the setting [FD.ROC.3I0_Set]. The
fault detector based on residual current is always in service.
Where:
3I0: residual current calculates from the vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic
When the fault detector based on residual current operates and lasts for longer than 10 seconds,
an alarm [Alm_Pkp_I0] will be issued.
If operation condition is met, the fault detector based on residual current will operate to provide DC
power supply for output relay, and the pickup signal will maintain 7s after the fault detector based
on residual current drops off.
3.5.2.3 Fault Detector Based on Negative-sequence Current
The operation condition will be met when negative-sequence current (I2) is greater than the
setting [FD.NOC.I2_Set]. It can be enabled or disabled by the logic setting [FD.NOC.En].
If operation condition is met, the fault detector based on negative-sequence current will operate to
provide DC power supply for output relay, and the pickup signal will maintain 7s after the fault
detector based on negative-sequence current drops off.
3.5.2.4 Fault Detector Based on Phase Current
The fault detector based on phase current will operate to provide DC power supply for output relay
when phase overcurrent protection is enabled and meets the operation condition, and the pickup
signal will maintain 500ms after the fault detector based on phase current drops off.
3.5.2.5 Fault Detector Based on Voltage
This fault detector based on voltage includes the fault detectors of overvoltage protection,
undervoltage protection and frequency protection. The fault detector based on voltage will operate
to provide DC power supply for output relay when corresponding voltage element is enabled and
meets the operation condition, and the pickup signal will maintain 500ms after the fault detector
based on voltage drops off.
3.5.2.6 Fault Detector Based on Circuit Breaker Position
When pole discrepancy protection is enabled, i.e. the logic setting [62PD.En] is set as “1”, and if
three phases of circuit breaker are not in the same status, the fault detector based on circuit
breaker position will operate to provide DC power supply for output relays, and the pickup signal
will maintain 500ms after the the fault detector based on circuit breaker position drops off.
3.5.2.7 Fault Detector Based on Thermal Overload Logic
The fault detector based on thermal overload logic will operate to provide DC power supply for
output relay when tripping logic of thermal overload protection meets the operation condition, and
the pickup signal will maintain 500ms after the fault detector based on thermal overload logic
drops off.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.5.2.8 Fault Detector Based on Auxiliary Element
The fault detector based on auxiliary element will operate to provide DC power supply for output
relay when auxiliary element is enabled and meets the operation condition, and the pickup signal
will maintain 500ms after the fault detector based on auxiliary element drops off.
3.5.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP

The protection device is running either of the two programs: one is “Regular program” for normal
state, and the other is “Fault calculation program” after protection fault detector picks up.
Under the normal state, the protection device will perform the following tasks:
1. Calculate analog quantity
2. Read binary input
3. Hardware self-check
4. Circuit breaker position supervision
5. Analog quantity input supervision
6. Channel supervision
Once the protection fault detector element in protection calculation DSP picks up, the protection
device will switch to fault calculation program, for example the calculation of distance protection,
and to determine logic. If the fault is within the protected zone, the protection device will send
tripping command.
The protection program flow chart is shown as Figure 3.5-1.
Main program
Sampling program
No Yes
Pickup?
Regular program Fault calculation program
Figure 3.5-1 Flow chart of protection program
The protection FD pickup conditions are the same as the FD in fault detector DSP as shown below.
The operation criteria for the conditions are also the same as that in fault detector DSP. Please
refer to section 3.5.2 for details.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
FD
FD.Pkp
FD.DPFC.Pkp
FD.ROC.Pkp
FD.NOC.Pkp
3.5.5 I/O Signals

Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of fault detector

1 FD.Pkp The device picks up
2 FD.DPFC.Pkp DPFC current fault detector element operates.
3 FD.ROC.Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates.
4 FD.NOC.Pkp Negative-sequence fault detector element operates.
3.5.6 Logic
SIG Ia Calculate DPFC phase-to- ΔIab>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

phase current: >=1
ΔIab=Δ(Ia-Ib)
SIG Ib ΔIbc>[FD.DPFC.I_Set] FD.DPFC.Pkp
ΔIbc=Δ(Ib-Ic)
ΔIca=Δ(Ic-Ia)
SIG Ic ΔIca>[FD.DPFC.I_Set] >=1
0s 7s FD.Pkp
Calculate residual current:

3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set] FD.ROC.Pkp
3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic
Calculate negative-
I2>[FD.NOC.I2_Set] &
sequence current: I2
FD.NOC.Pkp
EN FD.NOC.En
Figure 3.5-2 Logic diagram of fault detector
3.5.7 Settings
Table 3.5-2 Settings of fault detector

Current setting of DPFC current fault
1 FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
detector element
Current setting of residual current fault
2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
detector element
3 FD.NOC.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting of negative-sequence

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

current fault detector element
Enabling/disabling negative-sequence
current fault detector element
4 FD.NOC.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.6 Auxiliary Element

Auxiliary element (AuxE) is mainly used to program logics to meet users’ applications or further
improve operating reliability of protection elements. Reliability of protective elements (such as
distance element or current differential element) is assured, auxiliary element is usually not
required to configure. Auxiliary elements including current change auxiliary element (AuxE.OCD),
residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC), phase current auxiliary element (AuxE.OC),
voltage change auxiliary element (AuxE.UVD), phase under voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.UVG),
phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.UVS) and residual voltage auxiliary
element (AuxE.ROV), and they can be enabled or disabled by corresponding logic setting or
binary inputs. Users can configure them according to applications via PCS-Explorer software.
1. Current change auxiliary element AuxE.OCD
It shares DPFC current element of DPFC fault detector. If DPFC fault detector operates
(FD.DPFC.Pkp=1) and current change auxiliary element is enabled, current change auxiliary
element operates.
2. Residual current auxiliary element AuxE.ROC
There are 3 stages for residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC1, AuxE.ROC2 and
AuxE.ROC3). Each residual current auxiliary element will operate instantly if calculated residual
current amplitude is larger than corresponding current setting
The criteria are:
AuxE.ROC1: 3I0>[AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set]
Where:
3I0: The calculated residual current
3. Phase current auxiliary element AuxE.OC
There are 3 stages for phase current auxiliary element (AuxE.OC1, AuxE.OC2 and AuxE.OC3).
Each phase current auxiliary element will operate instantly if phase current amplitude is larger than

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
corresponding current setting.
The criteria are:
AuxE.OC1: IΦMAX>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]
Where:
IΦMAX: The maximum phase current among three phases
4. Voltage change auxiliary element AuxE.UVD
AuxE.UVD is based on phase-to-ground voltage change measured in all three phases.
The criterion is:
Δ UΦMAX>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]
Where:
ΔUΦMAX: The maximum phase-to-ground voltage change among three phases
5. Phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVG
AuxE.UVG will operate instantly if any phase-to-ground voltage is lower than corresponding
voltage setting.
The criterion is:
UΦMIN<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]
Where:
UΦMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-ground voltages
6. Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVS
AuxE.UVS will operate instantly if any phase-to-phase voltage is lower than corresponding voltage
setting.
The criterion is:
UΦΦMIN<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]
Where:
UΦΦMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-phase voltages
7. Residual voltage auxiliary element AuxE.ROV
AuxE.ROV will operate instantly if calculated residual voltage is larger than corresponding voltage
setting.
The criterion is:

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3U0>[AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set]
Where:
3U0: The calculated residual voltage
AuxE
AuxE.OCD.En AuxE.St
AuxE.OCD.Blk AuxE.OCD.St_DDO
AuxE.ROCi.En AuxE.OCD.On
AuxE.ROCi.Blk AuxE.ROCi.St
AuxE.OCi.En AuxE.ROCi.On
AuxE.OCi.Blk AuxE.OCi.St
AuxE.UVD.En AuxE.OCi.StA
AuxE.UVD.Blk AuxE.OCi.StB
AuxE.UVG.En AuxE.OCi.StC
AuxE.UVG.Blk AuxE.OCi.On
AuxE.UVS.En AuxE.UVD.St
AuxE.UVS.Blk AuxE.UVD.St_DDO
AuxE.ROV.En AuxE.UVD.On
AuxE.ROV.Blk AuxE.UVG.St
AuxE.UVG.StA
AuxE.UVG.StB
AuxE.UVG.StC
AuxE.UVG.On
AuxE.UVS.St
AuxE.UVS.StAB
AuxE.UVS.StBC
AuxE.UVS.StCA
AuxE.UVS.On
AuxE.ROV.St
AuxE.ROV.On

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.6.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element

Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input
1 AuxE.OCD.En
or programmable logic etc.
Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
2 AuxE.OCD.Blk
Stage i of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
3 AuxE.ROCi.En
binary input or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3)
Stage i of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
4 AuxE.ROCi.Blk
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
5 AuxE.OCi.En
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
6 AuxE.OCi.Blk
Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input
7 AuxE.UVD.En
Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
8 AuxE.UVD.Blk
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
9 AuxE.UVG.En
from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
10 AuxE.UVG.Blk
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
11 AuxE.UVS.En
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
12 AuxE.UVS.Blk
Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary
13 AuxE.ROV.En
input or programmable logic etc.
Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary
14 AuxE.ROV.Blk
1 AuxE.St Any auxiliary element of the device operates.
2 AuxE.OCD.St_DDO Current change auxiliary element operates.
3 AuxE.OCD.On Current change auxiliary element is enabled.
4 AuxE.ROCi.St Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element operates. (i=1, 2, 3)
5 AuxE.ROCi.On Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled. (i=1, 2, 3)
6 AuxE.OCi.St Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates. (i=1, 2, 3)
7 AuxE.OCi.StA Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A). (i=1, 2, 3)
8 AuxE.OCi.StB Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B). (i=1, 2, 3)
9 AuxE.OCi.StC Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C). (i=1, 2, 3)
10 AuxE.OCi.On Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled. (i=1, 2, 3)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
11 AuxE.UVD.St Voltage change auxiliary element operates.

12 AuxE.UVD.St_DDO Voltage change auxiliary element operates.
13 AuxE.UVD.On Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled.
14 AuxE.UVG.St Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.
15 AuxE.UVG.StA Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).
16 AuxE.UVG.StB Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).
17 AuxE.UVG.StC Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).
18 AuxE.UVG.On Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled.
19 AuxE.UVS.St Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.
20 AuxE.UVS.StAB Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).
21 AuxE.UVS.StBC Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).
22 AuxE.UVS.StCA Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).
23 AuxE.UVS.On Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled.
24 AuxE.ROV.St Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.
25 AuxE.ROV.On Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled.
3.6.5 Logic
SET 3I0>[AuxE.ROCi.3I0_Set]
SIG AuxE.ROCi.En
&
& AuxE.ROCi.St
SIG AuxE.ROCi.Blk
AuxE.ROCi.On
EN AuxE.ROCi.En
Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (ROC)
SIG 3U0>[AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set] &

AuxE.ROV.St
SIG AuxE.ROV.En
&
SIG AuxE.ROV.Blk AuxE.ROV.On
EN AuxE.ROV.En
Figure 3.6-2 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (ROV)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG AuxE.OCi.En
&
SIG AuxE.OCi.Blk AuxE.OCi.On
EN AuxE.OCi.En
SET Ia>[AuxE.OCi.I_Set] &

AuxE.OCi.StA
SET Ib>[AuxE.OCi.I_Set] &

AuxE.OCi.StB
SET Ic>[AuxE.OCi.I_Set] &

AuxE.OCi.StC
SET Ia>[AuxE.OCi.I_Set]
&
>=1 AuxE.OCi.St
SET Ib>[AuxE.OCi.I_Set]
SET Ic>[AuxE.OCi.I_Set]
Figure 3.6-3 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (OC)
SIG AuxE.UVG.En
&
SIG AuxE.UVG.Blk AuxE.UVG.On
EN AuxE.UVG.En
SET UA<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVG.StA
SET UB<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVG.StB
SET UC<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVG.StC
SET UA<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]
&
>=1 AuxE.UVG.St
SET UB<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]
SET UC<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]
Figure 3.6-4 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (UVG)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG AuxE.UVS.En
&
SIG AuxE.UVS.Blk AuxE.UVS.On
EN AuxE.UVS.En
SET UA<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVS.StA
SET UB<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVS.StB
SET UC<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set] &

AuxE.UVS.StC
SET UA<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]
&
>=1 AuxE.UVS.St
SET UB<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]
SET UC<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]
Figure 3.6-5 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (UVS)
SET Δ Ua>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]
>=1
SET Δ Ub>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set] &
AuxE.UVD.St
SET Δ Uc>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]
0s [AuxE.UVD.t_DDO] AuxE.UVD.St_DDO
SIG AuxE.UVD.En
&
SIG AuxE.UVD.Blk AuxE.UVD.On
EN AuxE.UVD.En
Figure 3.6-6 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (UVD)
SIG AuxE.OCD.En
&
SIG AuxE.OCD.Blk AuxE.OCD.On
EN AuxE.OCD.En &
0s [AuxE.OCD.t_DDO] AuxE.OCD.St_DDO
SIG FD.DPFC.Pkp
Figure 3.6-7 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (OCD)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG AuxE.OCD.St_DDO
SIG AuxE.ROC1.St
>=1
SIG AuxE.ROC2.St >=1 >=1
AuxE.St
SIG AuxE.ROC3.St
SIG AuxE.OC1.St
>=1
SIG AuxE.OC2.St
SIG AuxE.OC3.St
SIG AuxE.UVD.St_DDO >=1

>=1
SIG AuxE.UVG.St
SIG AuxE.UVS.St >=1
SIG AuxE.ROV.St
Figure 3.6-8 Logic diagram of auxiliary element (Startup)
Where:
i=1, 2, 3
Calculate residual current: 3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic
Calculate DPFC phase voltage: △Ua=△(Ua-Ufa), △Ub=△(Ub-Ufb), △Uc=△(Uc-Ufc)
Calculate residual voltage: 3U0=Ua+Ub+Uc
3.6.6 Settings
Table 3.6-2 Settings of auxiliary element

Drop-off time delay of current change
1 AuxE.OCD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling current change
auxiliary element
2 AuxE.OCD.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting of stage i residual
3 AuxE.ROCi.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
current auxiliary element (i=1, 2, 3)
Enabling/disabling stage i residual
4 AuxE.ROCi.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
5 AuxE.OCi.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In Current setting of stage i phase current

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

auxiliary element (i=1, 2, 3)
Enabling/disabling stage i phase
6 AuxE.OCi.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for voltage change
7 AuxE.UVD.U_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
auxiliary element
Drop-off time delay of voltage change
8 AuxE.UVD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling voltage change
auxiliary element
9 AuxE.UVD.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for phase-to-ground
10 AuxE.UVG.U_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
under voltage auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling phase-to-ground
11 AuxE.UVG.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for phase-to-phase
12 AuxE.UVS.U_Set 0~Unn 0.001 V
Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase
13 AuxE.UVS.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Voltage setting for residual voltage
14 AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
auxiliary element
Enabling/disabling residual voltage
auxiliary element
15 AuxE.ROV.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.7 Distance Protection

When a fault happens on a power system, distance protection will trip circuit breaker to isolate the
fault from power system with its specific time delay if the fault is within the protected zone of
distance protection.
The device provide various distance elements, including 1 DPFC distance zone with fixed forward
direction, 1 forward zones, 4 settable forward or reverse zone, and 1 forward zone and 1 reverse
zone dedicated for pilot distance protection. For each independent distance element zone, full

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
scheme design provides continuous measurement of impedance separately in each independent

phase-to-phase measuring loops as well as in each independent phase-to-ground measuring
loops. Selection of zone characteristic between mho and quadrilateral is available. Distance
protection includes:
1. DPFC distance protection
It is independent fast protection providing extremely fast speed to clear close up fault
especially on long line and thus improves system stability.
2. Mho phase-to-phase distance protection
Zone 1: forward direction
Zone 2~5: settable forward or reverse direction
3. Mho phase-to-ground distance protection
4. Quadrilateral phase-to-phase distance protection
5. Quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance protection
6. Pilot distance protection
The pilot zone is for PUTT, POTT and blocking scheme. The forward direction element is for
sending signal for POTT and tripping upon receiving permissive signal for both PUTT and
POTT scheme. The forward direction element for blocking scheme is used to stop sending
blocking signal. The reverse direction element is only for POTT scheme with weak infeed
condition.
7. Load encroachment
It is used to prevent all distance elements from undesired trip due to load encroachment
under heavy load condition especially for long lines.
8. Out-of-step protection (OOS)
9. Power swing blocking releasing (PSBR)
For power swing with external fault, distance protection is always blocked, but for power
swing with internal fault, PSBR will operate to release the blocking for distance protection.
10. SOTF distance protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
For manual closing or automatic closing on to a fault, zone 2, 3 or 4 of distance protection will
accelerate to trip.
When VT circuit fails, VT circuit supervision logic will output a blocking signal to block all distance
protection except DPFC distance protection. The operating threshold will be increased to 1.5U N to
enhance stability.
Distance protection can select line VT or bus VT for protection algorithm by a setting
[VTS.En_LineVT]. When no VT is provided, logic setting [VTS.En_Out_VT] should be set as “1”,
all distance protection will be blocked automatically. The choice of impedance reach is as follow.
(only for reference)
The zone 1 impedance reach setting should be set to cover as much the protected line as possible
but not to respond faults beyond the protected line. The accuracy of the relay distance elements is
±2.5% in general applications, however, the error could be much larger due to errors of current
transformer, voltage transformer and inaccuracies of line parameter from which the relay settings
are calculated. It is recommended the zone 1 reach is set to 80%~85% of the protected line in
consideration the aforesaid errors and safety margin to prevent instantaneously tripping for faults
on adjacent lines. The remaining 20% of the protected line relies on the zone 2 distance elements.
With the pilot scheme distance protection, fast fault clearance could also be achieved for end zone
faults at both ends of the protected line.
The general rule for zone 2 impedance reach setting is set to cover the protected line plus 20% of
the adjacent line. However, the coverage of adjacent line should be extended in the presence of
additional infeed at the remote end of the protected line to ensure 20% coverage of adjacent line.
This assures the fast operation of zone 2 distance element for faults at the remote end of the
protected line since the fault is well within zone 2 reach. This is important for pilot protection as the
impedance reach of pilot zone is the same as that of zone 2 distance element. In a parallel line
situation, a fault cleared sequentially on a line may cause current reversal in the healthy line. If the
pilot zone settings are set to cover 50% of adjacent line and the POTT or Blocking scheme is used,
the current reversal in the healthy line could cause relay mal-operation. Therefore, current reversal
logic is required and explained in section 3.9.2.6.
For different system impedance ratio (SIR), the operating time of distance protection for different
fault location are shown as the following figures.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
35
30
25
Operating Time (ms)
20
15
10
0
0 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Fault Location (% of relay setting)
Figure 3.7-1 Operating time of single-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=1)
30
25
Operating Time (ms)
20
15
10
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
35
30
25
Operating Time (ms)
20
15
10
0
0 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Figure 3.7-3 Operating time of two-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=1)
30
25
Operating Time (ms)
20
15
10
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
35
30
25
Operating Time (ms)
20
15
10
0
0 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Figure 3.7-5 Operating time of three-phase fault (50Hz, SIR=1)
30
25
Operating Time (ms)
20
15
10
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
33
32.5
32
Operating Time (ms)
31.5
31
30.5
30
29.5
29
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
27.5
27
Operating Time (ms)
26.5
26
25.5
25
24.5
24
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
45
40
35
30
Operating Time (ms)
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
35
30
Operating Time (ms)
25
20
15
10
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
33
32
31
Operating Time (ms)
30
29
28
27
0 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
27.5
27
26.5
Operating Time (ms)
26
25.5
25
24.5
24
23.5
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
3.7.3 DPFC Distance Protection

The power system is normally treated as a balanced symmetrical three-phase network. When a
fault occurs in the power system, by applying the principle of superposition, the load current and
voltage can be calculated in the system prior to the fault and the pure fault component can be
calculated by fault current or voltage subtracted by pre-fault load current or voltage. DPFC
distance protection concerns change of current and voltage at power frequency, therefore, DPFC
distance protection is not influenced by load current.
As an independent fast protection, DPFC distance protection is mainly used to clear close up fault
of long line quickly, its protected range can set as 80%~85% of the whole line.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Since DPFC distance protection only reflects fault component and is not influenced by current
change due to load variation and power swing, power swing blocking (PSB) is this not required.
Moreover, there is no transient overreaching due to infeed current from the remote power supply
because it is not influenced by load current.
DPFC distance protection may not overreach, and its protected zone will be inverse-proportion
reduced with system impedance behind it, i.e. the protected zone will be less than setting if the
system impedance is greater. The protected zone will be close to setting value if the system
impedance is smaller. Therefore, DPFC distance protection is usually used for long transmission
line with large power source and it is recommended to disable DPFC distance protection for short
line or the line with weak power source.
3.7.3.1 Impedance Characteristic
ZZD
M F N
Z
EM EN
∆I
ZS ZK
jX
Zzd
Zk
Φ
R
Zs+Zk
-Zs
Figure 3.7-13 Operation characteristic for forward fault
Where:
ZZD: the setting of DPFC distance protection
ZS: total impedance between local system and device location
ZK: measurement impedance

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Φ: positive-sequence sensitive angle, i.e. [21-1.phi1_Reach]
Figure 3.7-13 shows the operation characteristic of DPFC distance protection on R-X plane when
a fault occurs in forward direction, which is the circle with the –Zs as the center and the│Zs+Zzd│ as
the radius. When measured impedance Z k is in the circle, DPFC distance protection will operate.
DPFC distance protection has a larger capability of enduring fault resistance than distance
protection using positive-sequence as polarized voltage.
ZZD
F M N
Z
EM EN
∆I
ZK
Z′S
jX
Z's
Zzd
Φ R
-Zk
Figure 3.7-14 Operation characteristic for reverse fault
Z'S：total impedance between remote system and protective device location
Figure 3.7-14 shows the operation characteristic of the DPFC distance element on R-X plane
when a fault occurs in reverse direction, which is the circle with the Z′S as the center and
the│Z′S-Zzd│as the radius. The region of operation is in the quadrant 1 but the measured
impedance -Zk is always in the quadrant 3, the DPFC distance protection will not operate.
The DPFC distance protection can be enabled or disabled by logic setting and binary input.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.7.3.2 Function Block Diagram
21D
21D.En 21D.Op
21D.Blk 21D.On
3.7.3.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of DPFC distance protection

DPFC distance protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
1 21D.En
programmable logic etc.
DPFC distance protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
2 21D.Blk
1 21D.Op DPFC distance protection operates.
2 21D.On DPFC distance protection is enabled.
3.7.3.4 Logic
EN [21D.En]
&
SIG 21D.En 21D.On
SIG 21D.Blk
&
SIG FD.Pkp
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
SIG Manual closing signal

>=1
SIG 3-pole reclosing signal
SET [21D.Z_Set]<0.05Ω/In
SET ZΦ<[21D.Z_Set] &

>=1 &
SIG UP<0.85Un & 21D.Op
SET ZΦΦ<[21D.Z_Set] &
SIG UPP<0.85Unn
SIG Pole open
Figure 3.7-15 Logic diagram of DPFC distance protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
NOTICE!
Pole open signal blocks DPFC distance element of corresponding phase-to-earth and
phase-to-phase DPFC distance protection, and healthy phases (operation phases) are
not affected. For example, if phase A open is confirmed, DPFC distance element of
phase A, phase AB and phase AC are blocked.
3.7.3.5 Settings
Table 3.7-2 Settings of DPFC distance protection

Impedance setting of DPFC distance
1 21D.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
protection
Enabling/disabling DPFC distance
protection
2 21D.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.7.4 Load Encroachment

When distance protection is used to protect long, heavily loaded lines, the risk of encroachment of
the load impedance into the tripping characteristic of the distance protection may exist. A load
trapezoid characteristic for all zones is used to exclude the risk of unwanted fault detection by the
distance protection during heavy load flow.
As shown below, if the measured impedance into the load area, distance elements need to be
blocked.
jX
φLoad φLoad
Load Area Load Area

R
RLoad RLoad
Figure 3.7-16 Distance element with load trapezoid
Two settings are equipped to exclude the encroachment of the load impedance:

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
RLoad: the minimum load resistance
φLoad: the load area angle
These values are common for all zones.
LoadEnch
LoadEnch.En LoadEnch.St
LoadEnch.Blk LoadEnch.On
3.7.4.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-3 I/O signals of load encroachment

Load trapezoid characteristic enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
1 LoadEnch.En
Load trapezoid characteristic blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
2 LoadEnch.Blk
Measured impedance is inside the load area.
If load trapezoid characteristic is enabled and measured impedance is inside the
1 LoadEnch.St load area, LoadEnch.St=1
If load trapezoid characteristic is disabled or measured impedance is outside the
load area, LoadEnch.St=0
2 LoadEnch.On Load trapezoid characteristic is enabled.
3.7.4.4 Settings
Table 3.7-4 Settings of load encroachment

Angle setting of load trapezoid
characteristic, it should be set
1 LoadEnch.phi 0~45 1 deg according to the maximum load area
angle (φLoad_Max), φLoad_Max+5° is
recommended.
Resistance setting of load trapezoid
characteristic, it should be set
2 LoadEnch.R_Set (0.05~200)/In 0.01 ohm according to the minimum load
resistance, 70%~90% minimum load
resistance is recommended.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Enabling/disabling load trapezoid

characteristic
3 LoadEnch.En 0,1
0: disable
1: enable
3.7.5 Mho Distance Protection

1. Phase-to-ground distance element
ZZD
M F N
Z IN
EM EN
I
ZS ZK
jX
ZZD
ZK
Φ
R
-2ZS/3
Figure 3.7-17 Phase-to-ground operation characteristic for forward fault
Where:
ZZD: the setting of distance protection
ZS: total impedance between local system and protective device location
ZK: measurement impedance
Φ: positive-sequence sensitive angle, i.e. [21-i.phi1_Reach] (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Phase-to-neutral positive sequence voltage is used as polarized signal for phase-to-ground

distance protection. Phase-to-ground distance protection is controlled by the fault detector based
on residual current.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
For zone 1, 2:
Operation voltage:
Polarized voltage:
In short line, phase shift θ1 could be applied to the polarized voltage to improve the performance
against high resistance fault. The device provides an angle-shift setting, [21Mi.ZG.phi_Shift], to set
value of θ1 among 0°, 15°and 30°. Their impedance shift characteristics towards quadrant 1 are
respectively shown as the impedance circle A, B and C in Figure 3.7-23. (i=1, 2)
For zone 3, 4, 5:
Operation voltage:
Polarized voltage:
UPΦ uses phase positive-sequence voltage as polarized voltage. For earth fault, positive-sequence
voltage is mainly formed from healthy phases, basically retaining the phase of the
positive-sequence voltage before fault.
Phase comparison equation is:
The operation characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-17. Operation characteristic of ZK on R-X plane
is a circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and -2ZS/3 as the diameter. The origin is enclosed in the
circle.
The sensitivity of phase-to-ground distance element with Mho characteristic may be not enough
during ground fault with extreme high resistance. So additional quadrilateral characteristic for
phase-to-ground distance element is adopted in the equipment to compensate the sensitivity of
Mho characteristic. The logic relationship between quadrilateral distance element and Mho
distance element is OR. It means that any ground fault in one of the two operation zones will be
cleared. The quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element can significantly improve the
sensitivity to clear ground fault with extreme high resistance. The three zones of quadrilateral
characteristic can be enabled or disabled by the logic setting [21Mi.ZGQ.En]. (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
The operation characteristic of quadrilateral distance element is shown in Figure 3.7-18:

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
jX
[21Mi.ZG.Z_Set]
12°
Φ Φ
R
12°
[21Mi.ZGQ.R_Set]
Figure 3.7-18 Operation Characteristic of quadrilateral distance element
Where:
i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Φ is the phase angle of positive sequence line impedance
[21Mi.ZG.Z_Set] is the impedance setting of corresponding zone of Mho distance protection.
[21Mi.ZGQ.R_Set] is the resistance setting of corresponding zone of quadrilateral distance

protection
The quadrilateral characteristic is a supplement to Mho characteristic for phase-to-ground

distance protection. It is used to improve sensitivity for ground fault with high resistance.
2. Phase-to-phase distance element
jX
ZZD
ZK
Φ
R
-ZS/2
Figure 3.7-19 Phase-to-phase operation characteristic for forward fault

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Phase-to-phase positive sequence voltage is used as polarized signal for phase-to-phase

distance protection.
For zone 1, 2:
Operation voltage:
Polarized voltage:
Phase shift θ2 could be applied to polarized voltage of zones 1 and 2 just like θ1 in
phase-to-ground distance element. It is also used for improving performance against high
resistance fault in short line. The device provides an angle-shift setting, [21Mi.ZP.phi_Shift], to set
value of θ2 among 0°, 15°and 30°. Their impedance shift characteristics towards quadrant 1 are
respectively shown as the impedance circle A, B and C in Figure 3.7-23. (i=1, 2)
For zone 3, 4, 5:
Operation voltage:
Polarized voltage:
Phase-to-phase positive-sequence voltage is applied as the polarized voltage of this element.
Phase comparison equation is:
The operation characteristic of phase-to-phase distance element is shown in Figure 3.7-19.

Operation characteristic of ZK on R-X plane is a circle with line connecting ends of Z ZD and -ZS/2 as
the diameter. The origin is enclosed in the circle.
Figure 3.7-20 shows operation characteristic of measured impedance -ZK on R-X plane when an
asymmetric reverse fault occurs. This characteristic is a circle with line connecting ends of Z ZD and
Z'S as the diameter. It will operate only when -ZK is in the circle. Therefore, directionality of the
distanced protection is achieved.
ZZD
F M N
Z
EM EN
IΦ
ZK
Z′S

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
jX
Z'S
ZZD
Φ
R
-ZK
Figure 3.7-20 Operation characteristic for reverse fault
Z'S: total impedance between remote system and protective device location
jX
ZZD
ZK
Φ
R
Figure 3.7-21 Steady-state characteristic of three-phase short-circuit fault
Phase-to-phase distance protection is also used for three-phase short-circuit fault. The operation
characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-21. Operation characteristic of ZK on R-X plane is a circle with
setting impedance ZZD as the diameter.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
jX
ZZD
ZK
Φ
R
Circle C
-ZS Circle B
Circle A
Figure 3.7-22 Operation characteristic of three-phase close up short-circuit fault
Where:
ZZD: the setting of distance protection (zone i)
ZS: total impedance between local system and protective device location
ZK: measured impedance
Φ: positive-sequence characteristic angle, i.e. [21-i.phi1_Reach] (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Circle A: transient characteristic
Circle B: steady-state characteristic shifting towards quadrant Ⅲ
Circle C: steady-state characteristic shifting towards quadrant Ⅰ
As shown in Figure 3.7-22, the characteristic of the distance protection for a three-phase fault on a
system is an impedance circle cross the origin, and there is a voltage dead zone around the origin.
In order to eliminate the dead zone of the distance protection for a close up three-phase fault
memorized positive-sequence voltage is adopted as polarized voltage when the
positive-sequence voltage drops down to 15%Un or below.
The transient (during process of memory) operation characteristic is shown as the impedance
circle A in the above figure. The circle takes Z ZD and -ZZS as diameter and thus the origin is within
the impedance circle. When three-phase fault happens in reverse direction, its transient
characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-20, i.e. the distance protection has a clearly defined
directionality and no dead zone during the process of memory.
For phase-to-phase distance protection, if distance protection operates with memorized polarizing
voltage, this means a close up forward fault. When the memory fades out, the operation
characteristic will be reverse offset a little to enclose the origin as impedance circle B shown in
Figure 3.7-22 to ensure keeping operating of distance protection until the fault being cleared. If
distance protection does not operate with memorized polarizing voltage, it will be a close up

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
reverse fault. When the memory fades out, the operation characteristic will be forward offset not to
enclose the origin as impedance circle C shown in Figure 3.7-22, and the distance protection will
not mal-operate even if voltage is zero.
The distance protection with such design thoroughly eliminates the dead zone when three-phase
close up fault occurs. It also has favorable directivity and will not operate for a reverse three-phase
fault at busbar.
When receiving manual closing signal or 3-pole reclosing signal, the operation characteristic of
phase to phase distance protection will always shift in reverse direction. It is ensured to enclose
the origin of impedance and without dead zone for three-phase fault, i.e. the reverse shift
impedance circle B shown in Figure 3.7-22.
jX
B: 15° C: 30°
ZZD
A: 0°
D
-ZS
Figure 3.7-23 Shift impedance characteristic of zone 1 and zone 2
The impedance characteristic of phase-to-ground distance protection is the circle with line
connecting ends of ZZD and -2ZS/3 as the diameter and that of phase-to-phase distance is the
circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and -ZS/2 as the diameter.
In order to prevent the transient overreach caused by the infeed power supply from the remote
end, the zero-sequence reactance line D is added. These measures have enhanced the capacity
against fault resistance when using distance protection in short lines.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
21M
21.En 21Mi.On
21.Blk 21Mi.Op
21Mi.ZG.En
21Mi.ZP.En
21Mi.ZG.Blk
21Mi.ZP.Blk
21Mi.En_ShortDly
21Mi.Blk_ShortDly
21M1.En_Instant
3.7.5.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-5 I/O signals of distance protection (Mho)

Distance protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
1 21.En
Distance protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
2 21.Blk
Zone i of phase-to-ground distance protection enabling input, default value is
3 21Mi.ZG.En
“1” (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Zone i of phase-to-ground distance protection blocking input, default value is
4 21Mi.ZG.Blk
“0” (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Zone i of phase-to-phase distance protection enabling input, default value is
5 21Mi.ZP.En
“1” (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Zone i of phase-to-phase distance protection blocking input, default value is
6 21Mi.ZP.Blk
“0” (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
7 21Mi.En_ShortDly Enable accelerating zone i of distance protection (i=2, 3, 4, 5)
8 21Mi.Blk_ShortDly Accelerating zone i of distance protection is disabled (i=2, 3, 4, 5)
9 21M1.En_Instant Enable zone 1 of distance protection operates without time delay
1 21Mi.On Zone i of distance protection is enabled (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
2 21Mi.Op Zone i of distance protection operates (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.7.5.4 Logic
SIG 21.En &

21.Enable
SIG 21.Blk
Figure 3.7-24 Logic diagram of enabling distance protection (Mho)
SIG 21.Enable
&
EN [21M1.ZG.En]
& 21M1.ZG.Enable
&
SIG 21M1.ZG.En
SIG 21M1.ZG.Blk >=1

& 21M1.On
EN [21M1.ZP.En]
&
SIG 21M1.ZP.En
SIG 21M1.ZP.Blk
&
SIG VTS.Alm >=1 21M1.ZP.Enable
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
SIG 21M1.Rls_PSBR
SIG FD.Pkp &

&
SIG 21M1.ZG.Enable [21M1.ZG.t_Op] 0 >=1
21M1.ZG.Op
SIG Flag.21M1.ZG & &
SIG LoadEnch.St (PG) &
SET 3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set]
>=1
SIG Flag.21M1.ZP & 21M1.Flg_PSBR
SIG LoadEnch.St (PP)

&
SIG FD.Pkp & [21M1.ZP.t_Op] 0 >=1
21M1.ZP.Op
SIG 21M1.ZP.Enable
&
SIG 21M1.En_Instant
SIG 21M1.ZG.Op >=1

21M1.Op
SIG 21M1.ZP.Op
Figure 3.7-25 Logic diagram of distance protection (Mho zone 1)
Where:
21M1.Rls_PSBR: is the signal of power swing blocking releasing signal, please refer to Figure
3.7-43.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Flag.21M1.ZG means that measured impedance by zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance

protection is within the range determined by the setting [21M1.ZG.Z_Set].
Flag.21M1.ZP means that measured impedance by zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance protection

is within the range determined by the setting [21M1.ZP.Z_Set].
LoadEnch.St (PG) means that load trapezoid characteristic for distance element is enabled and
measured phase-to-ground impedance into the load area.
LoadEnch.St (PP) means that load trapezoid characteristic for distance element is enabled and
measured phase-to-phase impedance into the load area.
SIG 21.Enable
&
EN [21Mi.ZG.En]
& 21Mi.ZG.Enable
&
SIG 21Mi.ZG.En
SIG 21Mi.ZG.Blk >=1

& 21Mi.On
EN [21Mi.ZP.En]
&
SIG 21Mi.ZP.En
SIG 21Mi.ZP.Blk
&
SIG VTS.Alm >=1 21Mi.ZP.Enable
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
SIG 21Mi.En_ShortDly &
SIG 21Mi.Blk_ShortDly
&
EN [21Mi.En_ShortDly] 21Mi.Enable_ShortDly
SIG 21Mi.On

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 21Mi.Enable_ShortDly &

[21Mi.ZG.t_ShortDly] 0 >=1
SIG 21Mi.Rls_PSBR
21Mi.ZG.Op
SIG 21Mi.ZG.Enable & &
[21Mi.ZG.t_Op] 0
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG Flag.21Mi.ZG &

SIG LoadEnch.St (PG)
>=1
& 21Mi.Flg_PSBR
SIG Flag.21Mi.ZP &

&
SIG 21Mi.ZP.Enable & [21Mi.ZP.t_Op] 0
>=1
& 21Mi.ZP.Op
SIG FD.Pkp
[21Mi.ZP.t_ShortDly] 0
SIG 21Mi.Enable_ShortDly
SIG 21Mi.ZG.Op >=1

21Mi.Op
SIG 21Mi.ZP.Op
Figure 3.7-26 Logic diagram of distance protection (Mho zone i)
Where:
i=2, 3, 4, 5
21Mi.Rls_PSBR: is the signal of power swing blocking releasing signal, please refer to Figure
3.7-43.
Flag.21Mi.ZG means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-ground distance protection

is within the range determined by the setting [21Mi.ZG.Z_Set].
Flag.21Mi.ZP means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-phase distance protection

is within the range determined by the setting [21Mi.ZP.Z_Set].
3.7.5.5 Settings
Table 3.7-6 Settings of distance protection (Mho)

Direction option for zone x of distance
protection (i=2, 3, 4, 5)
1 21-i.DirMode 0 or 1 0
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Real component of zero-sequence
2 21-i.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001 compensation coefficient for zone i (i=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Imaginary component of zero-sequence
3 21-i.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001 compensation coefficient for zone i (i=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)
Phase angle of positive-sequence
4 21-i.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 deg
impedance for zone i (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Phase shift of phase-to-ground distance
5 21Mi.ZG.phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 deg
protection for zone i (i=1, 2)
Phase shift of phase-to-phase distance
6 21Mi.ZP.phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 deg
protection for zone i (i=1, 2)
Impedance setting of zone i of
7 21Mi.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Resistance setting of zone i of
8 21Mx.ZGQ.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Time delay of zone i of phase-to-ground
9 21Mi.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
distance protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Short time delay of zone i of
10 21Mi.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=2, 3, 4, 5)
Enabling/disabling zone i of
phase-to-ground distance protection
11 21Mi.ZG.En 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance
12 21Mi.ZGQ.En 0 or 1 protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
zone i of distance protection operation
13 21Mi.ZG.En_BlkAR 0 or 1 to block AR (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
14 21Mi.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm phase-to-phase distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Time delay of zone i of phase-to-phase
15 21Mi.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
16 21Mi.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s phase-to-phase distance protection
(i=2, 3, 4, 5)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

phase-to-phase distance protection
17 21Mi.ZP.En 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase zone
i of distance protection operation to
18 21Mi.ZP.En_BlkAR 0 or 1 block AR (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling fixed accelerate zone
i of distance protection (i=2, 3, 4, 5)
19 21Mi.En_ShortDly 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.7.6 Quadrilateral Distance Protection

Features available with quadrilateral distance protection include 1 forward zone (zone 1)
phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase distance elements and 4 settable forward or reverse zones
(zone 2~5) phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase distance element. Each zone can respectively
enable or disable power swing blocking releasing. Quadrilateral distance protection will be
disabled when VT circuit fails.
1. Forward distance element
Quadrilateral forward distance element characteristic is shown as follows:
jX
A ZZD
θ
B
α φ
φ
β R
O RZD
C
Figure 3.7-27 Quadrilateral forward distance element characteristics
Where:
ZZD: impedance setting in forward direction

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
RZD: resistance setting in forward direction
φ: line positive-sequence characteristic angle
α: the angle of directional line in the second quadrant, set by the setting [21Q.Ang_Alpha]
β: the angle of directional line in the fourth quadrant, fixed at 15 °
θ: downward offset angle of the reactance line AB
2. Reverse distance element
Zone 2, 3, 4, 5 can be set as reverse direction by the setting [21-i.DirMode] (i=2, 3, 4, 5). When a
fault occurs on the busbar at the back, reverse distance element is provided to clear it with definite
time delay and is used as backup protection for reverse busbar fault.
jX
C
RZD β O
R
φ φ
α
B
θ
ZZD A
Figure 3.7-28 Quadrilateral reverse distance element characteristic
Where:
ZZD: impedance setting in reverse direction
RZD: resistance setting in reverse direction
φ: line positive-sequence characteristic angle
α: the angle of directional line, set by the setting [21Q.Ang_Alpha]
β: the angle of directional line, fixed at 15°
θ: downward offset angle of the reactance line AB
For quadrilateral distance protection, the reactance line should consider downward offset angle θ
as shown in Figure 3.7-27 and Figure 3.7-28. According to system status, the downward offset
angle can be independently set for phase-to-ground distance element and phase-to-phase
distance element. The downward offset angle of all zones can be settable by the corresponding
settings [21Qi.ZG.RCA] and [21Qi.ZP.RCA]. (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5). Phase-to-ground distance protection
is controlled by the fault detector based on residual current.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
21Q
21.En 21Qi.On
21.Blk 21Qi.Op
21Qi.ZG.En
21Qi.ZP.En
21Qi.ZG.Blk
21Qi.ZP.Blk
21Qi.En_ShortDly
21Qi.Blk_ShortDly
21Q1.En_Instant
3.7.6.3 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-7 I/O signals of distance protection (Quad)

1 21.En
2 21.Blk
Zone i of phase-to-ground distance protection enabling input, default value is
3 21Qi.ZG.En
“1” (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Zone i of phase-to-ground distance protection blocking input, default value is
4 21Qi.ZG.Blk
“0” (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Zone i of phase-to-phase distance protection enabling input, default value is “1”
5 21Qi.ZP.En
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Zone i of phase-to-phase distance protection blocking input, default value is “0”
6 21Qi.ZP.Blk
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
7 21Qi.En_ShortDly Enable accelerating zone i of distance protection (i=2, 3, 4, 5)
8 21Qi.Blk_ShortDly Accelerating zone i of distance protection is disabled (i=2, 3, 4, 5)
9 21Q1.En_Instant Enable zone 1 of distance protection operates without time delay
1 21Qi.On Zone i of distance protection is enabled (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
2 21Qi.Op Zone i of distance protection operates (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.7.6.4 Logic
SIG 21.En &

21.Enable
SIG 21.Blk
Figure 3.7-29 Logic diagram of enabling distance protection (Quad)
SIG 21.Enable
&
EN [21Q1.ZG.En]
& 21Q1.ZG.Enable
&
SIG 21Q1.ZG.En
SIG 21Q1.ZG.Blk >=1

& 21Q1.On
EN [21Q1.ZP.En]
&
SIG 21Q1.ZP.En
SIG 21Q1.ZP.Blk
&
SIG VTS.Alm >=1 21Q1.ZP.Enable
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
SIG 21Q1.ZG.Enable &

&
SIG FD.Pkp

&
& [21Q1.ZG.t_Op] 0 >=1
SET 3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set] 21Q1.ZG.Op
&
SIG Flag.21Q1.ZG
SIG 21Q1.Rls_PSBR >=1

21Q1.Flg_PSBR
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 21Q1.ZP.Enable
&
SIG LoadEnch.St (PP) & &
[21Q1.ZP.t_Op] 0 >=1
SIG Flag.21Q1.ZP 21Q1.ZP.Op
&
SIG 21Q1.En_Instant
SIG 21Q1.ZG.Op >=1

21Q1.Op
SIG 21Q1.ZP.Op
Figure 3.7-30 Logic diagram of distance protection (Quad zone 1)
Where:
21Q1. Rls_PSBR: is the signal of power swing blocking releasing signal, please refer to Figure
3.7-43.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Flag.21Q1.ZG means that measured impedance by zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance protection

is within the range determined by the settings [21Q1.ZG.Z_Set] and [21Q1.ZG.R_Set].
Flag.21Q1.ZP means that measured impedance by zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance protection

is within the range determined by the settings [21Q1.ZP.Z_Set] and [21Q1.ZP.R_Set].
SIG 21.Enable
&
EN [21Qi.ZG.En]
& 21Qi.ZG.Enable
&
SIG 21Qi.ZG.En
SIG 21Qi.ZG.Blk >=1

& 21Qi.On
EN [21Qi.ZP.En]
&
SIG 21Qi.ZP.En
SIG 21Qi.ZP.Blk
&
SIG VTS.Alm >=1 21Qi.ZP.Enable
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
SIG 21Qi.En_ShortDly &
SIG 21Qi.Blk_ShortDly
&
EN [21Qi.En_ShortDly] 21Qi.Enable_ShortDly
SIG 21Qi.On

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 21Qi.Enable_ShortDly
SIG 21Qi.ZG.Enable &

&
SIG FD.Pkp & [21Qi.ZG.t_ShortDly] 0 >=1
& 21Qi.ZG.Op
& [21Qi.ZG.t_Op] 0
SIG Flag.21Qi.ZG
>=1
SIG 21Qi.Rls_PSBR 21Qi.Flg_PSBR
SIG LoadEnch.St (PP) &

& &
SIG Flag.21Qi.ZP & [21Qi.ZP.t_ShortDly] 0 >=1
21Qi.ZP.Op
SIG 21Qi.ZP.Enable &
[21Qi.ZP.t_Op] 0
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG 21Qi.ZG.Op >=1

21Qi.Op
SIG 21Qi.ZP.Op
Figure 3.7-31 Logic diagram of distance protection (Quad zone i)
Where:
i=2, 3, 4, 5
21Qi.Z.Rls_PSBR: is the signal of power swing blocking releasing signal, please refer to Figure
3.7-43.
Flag.21Qi.ZG means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-ground distance protection

is within the range determined by the settings [21Qi.ZG.Z_Set] and [21Qi.ZG.R_Set].
Flag.21Qi.ZP means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-phase distance protection

is within the range determined by the settings [21Qi.ZP.Z_Set] and [21Qi.ZP.R_Set].
3.7.6.5 Settings
Table 3.7-8 Settings of distance protection (Quad)

1 21Q.Ang_Alpha 5~30 1 deg The angle of directional line
Direction option for zone i of distance
2 21-i.DirMode 0 or 1 0
0: Forward
1: Reverse
3 21-i.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001 compensation coefficient for zone i
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Imaginary component of
4 21-i.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001 zero-sequence compensation
coefficient for zone i (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
5 21-i.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 deg
impedance for zone i (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Downward offset angle of the
reactance line for zone i of
6 21Qi.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 deg
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
7 21Qi.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
8 21Qi.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Time delay of zone i of
9 21Qi.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
10 21Qi.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=2, 3, 4, 5)
11 21Qi.ZG.En 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
12 21Qi.ZG.En_BlkAR 0 or 1 to block AR (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Downward offset angle of the
reactance line for zone i of
13 21Qi.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 deg
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
14 21Qi.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm phase-to-phase distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
15 21Qi.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm phase-to-phase distance protection
(i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Time delay of zone i of phase-to-phase
16 21Qi.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

17 21Qi.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 0.001 s phase-to-ground distance protection
(i=2, 3, 4, 5)
18 21Qi.ZP.En 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase
19 21Qi.ZP.En_BlkAR 0 or 1 to block AR (i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling fixed accelerate
zone i of distance protection (i=2, 3, 4,
20 21Qi.En_ShortDly 0 or 1 5)
0: disable
1: enable
3.7.7 Pilot Distance Zone

An independent pilot zone distance protection is used for PUTT and POTT scheme. There is also
a reverse pilot distance element available as an option for application of POTT on weak power
source system.
Pilot.Z_Set_B Pilot.Z_Rev_B
M N
EM A B C D
Pilot.Z_Rev_A Pilot.Z_Set_A
Figure 3.7-32 Protected zone of pilot distance protection
The operation characteristic of pilot zone is same as that of zone 2, including mho and
quadrilateral characteristic.
When an internal fault occurs, distance protection at weak source end may not operate due to
small fault current. Thus, a reverse distance element is provided to coordinate with the
independent pilot distance protection to implement weak infeed logic, ensure pilot distance
protection can operate to send signal or trip in the weak end. The operation characteristic is shown
in Figure 3.7-33. The reverse weak infeed distance element is forward offset with 1/4 of the

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
reverse setting to enclose the origin.
Operation characteristics of pilot reverse weak infeed element distance are shown as below.
jX
jX
B
β 21Q.Pilot.Z_Rev/4
21M.Pilot.Z_Rev/4
21Q.Pilot.R_Rev
Φ
o R
α
R φ φ
C
θ
21M.Pilot.Z_Rev 21Q.Pilot.Z_Rev
A
Figure 3.7-33 Pilot reverse weak infeed element
Where:
Φ: positive-sequence characteristic angle, i.e. [21.Pilot.phi1_Reach]
α: the angle of directional line, set by the setting [21Q.Ang_Alpha]
β: the angle of directional line, fixed at 15°
θ: tilted angle of the reactance line AC, fixed at 12°
3.7.7.2 Logic
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 21.Enable
&
&
SIG 21M.Pilot.Rls_PSBR ZPilotP
SET Flag.21M.Pilot.Z (PG) &

>=1
SIG LoadEnch.St (PG) 21M.Zpilot.Flag_PSBR
SET Flag.21M.Pilot.Z (PP) &
Figure 3.7-34 Logic diagram of pilot distance zone (Mho characteristic)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 21.Enable
&
&
SIG 21Q.Pilot.Rls_PSBR ZPilotP
SET Flag.21Q.Pilot.Z (PG) &

>=1
SIG LoadEnch.St (PG) 21Q.Zpilot.Flag_PSBR
SET Flag.21Q.Pilot.Z (PP) &
Figure 3.7-35 Logic diagram of pilot distance zone (Quad characteristic)
Where:
21M.Pilot.Rls_PSBR, 21Q.Pilot.Rls_PSBR: Please refer to Figure 3.7-43.
Flag.21Q.Pilot.Z (PG) means that measured impedance by phase-to-ground distance element is

within the range determined by the setting [21Q.Pilot.Z_Set]. (Quad characteristic)
Flag.21Q.Pilot.Z (PP) means that measured impedance by phase-to-phase distance element is

within the range determined by the setting [21Q.Pilot.Z_Set]. (Quad characteristic)
Flag.21M.Pilot.Z (PG) means that measured impedance by phase-to-ground distance element is

within the range determined by the setting [21M.Pilot.Z_Set]. (Mho characteristic)
Flag.21M.Pilot.Z (PP) means that measured impedance by phase-to-phase distance element is

within the range determined by the setting [21M.Pilot.Z_Set]. (Mho characteristic)
3.7.7.3 Settings
Table 3.7-9 Settings of pilot distance zone

1 21.Pilot.Real_K0 30.00~89.00 0.01 deg compensation coefficient for pilot
distance protection
Imaginary component of
2 21.Pilot.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001 zero-sequence compensation
coefficient for pilot distance protection
3 21.Pilot.phi1_Reach -4.000~4.000 0.001 impedance for pilot distance
protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Impedance setting of pilot distance
4 21M.Pilot.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
protection (Mho characteristic)
Resistance setting of pilot distance
5 21M.Pilot.R_Set_Quad (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
protection (Mho characteristic)
6 21Q.Pilot.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
protection (Quad characteristic)
7 21M.Pilot.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm protection in reverse direction (Mho
characteristic)
Enabling/disabling quadrilateral
characteristic of phase-to-ground
8 21M.Pilot.En_Z_Quad 0 or 1 distance protection
0: disable
1: enable
9 21Q.Pilot.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm protection in reverse direction (Quad
characteristic)
Resistence setting of pilot distance
10 21Q.Pilot.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
protection (Quad characteristic)
Resistence setting of pilot distance
11 21Q.Pilot.R_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm protection in reverse direction (Quad
characteristic)
3.7.8 Out-of-step Protection

3.7.8.1 General Application
When the disturbance happens to the power system because of some reason (such as short
circuit, fault clear, power supply injecting or separating, etc.), the phase angle difference of the
electric potential between the synchronous generators of parallel operation will change with time,
and the voltage of each node and the current of each circuit in the system also change with time,
this phenomenon is called oscillation. The oscillation that can keep system stably and
synchronously operate is called synchronous oscillation, and that leads to lose synchronization
and that the system can't normally operate is called asynchronous oscillation.
For the power grid of loss synchronous, the voltage of each node in the tie line that synchronous or
asynchronous oscillation happens to will oscillate periodically, and where the voltage oscillation is
the most violent in each tie line is the center of synchronous or asynchronous oscillation. In
general, the voltage oscillation is more violent more close to the oscillation center. Out-of-step
center is the point where the lowest voltage appears in the tie line of asynchronous oscillation in
the process of out-of-step oscillation, i.e., the oscillation center of the tie line of asynchronous
oscillation. The phase angle of bus voltage difference on either side of out-of-step center will
change within 0°~180°~360° periodically. Considering the selectivity, the separation should be
performed within 2~3 out-of-step period or the corresponding time delay after the system is out of
step, otherwise the out-of-step oscillation among multiple generators may is developed, further

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
expanding the accident, so as to cause system separation even collapse accident. So when the
out-of-step operation time or oscillation times is greater than specified value, out-of-step protection
should operate to separate.
3.7.8.2 Function Description
In the event that the interconnected system is out-of-step, the system can be reduced as a
dual-machine system as shown in Figure 3.7-36.
EM U EN
I
ZLine
Figure 3.7-36 Dual-machine equivalent system
For the sake of easy analysis, assumptions have to be made as follows:
1. The potential of the two machines are E M and EN respectively, and their amplitude are both
equal to E1.
2. The equivalent impedance angle of system is 90°
Taking EN as reference vector, whose initial phase angle is 0° and angle velocity is ω. At the side
M, the initial phase angle of equivalent potential E M is α (i.e., during normal operation condition,
the system′s power angle δ is α), whose increment of the angle velocity is Δω relative to side N, so
EN  E1  cos(  t )
EM  E1  cos((  )  t   )
Suppose the power angle between both sides of the system is
    t  
The equivalent system vector diagram of Figure 3.7-36 is illustrated in Figure 3.7-37.
EM U U cos  EN
U SCV
E1 E1
 
2
Figure 3.7-37 Dual-machine equivalent system

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Where:
USCV is the voltage of oscillation center
U is the measured voltage by the device
As shown in Figure 3.7-37, the voltage of oscillation center USCV is:

U SCV  U cos   E1  cos( )
2
In the case that the system is in synchronous condition, Δω=0, the voltage of oscillation center
maintains be unchanged, that is:

U SCV  cos( )
2
Make calculus for the voltage of oscillation center,
d (U SCV ) E  d ( )
  1  sin( ) 
dt 2 2 dt
The above equation describe the relationship between the voltage change rate of oscillation
d ( )
center and system slip frequency , which indicates the voltage varation of oscillation center
dt
is independent of system impedance.
When the power angle is 180°, the voltage varation of oscillation center is maximum, and when the
power angle is 0°, the voltage varation of oscillation center is minimum.
In the case that the system is in out-of-step condition, the voltage of oscillation center varies
periodically with the oscillation cycle as 180°, that is:
If the value of Δω is larger than 0, namely accelerating out-of-step condition, the variation trend of
δ is 0°－360°(0°)－360°, the variation curve of oscillation center voltage is shown in Figure 3.7-38
(a)
If the value of Δω is less than 0, namely decelerating out-of-step condition, the variation trend of δ
is 360°－0°(360°)－0°, the variation curve of oscillation center voltage is shown in Figure 3.7-38
(b)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
U U
1 1
t t
0 0
-1 -1
(a) (b)
Figure 3.7-38 Variation curve of oscillation center voltage
According to the above analysis, it can be shown that there is certain functional relation between
the oscillation center voltage and power angle δ, thus the oscillation center voltage (Ucosφ) can
be used to reflect the variation of power angle. Power angle varies continuously as an
electrical quantity. As a result, the oscillation center voltage varies continuously during
out-of-step oscillation, crossing the zero point. However, sudden variation or discontinuous
change is a distinguished feature of oscillation center voltage during fault occurrence or
clearance. During synchronous oscillation, the oscillation center voltage also varies
continuously but it does not cross the zero point. Therefore, the oscillation center voltage can
be used to discriminate among out-of-step oscillation, short-circuit fault and synchronous
oscillation.
The variation range of oscillation center voltage (Ucosφ) can be divided into seven zones on the
variation plane, as shown in Figure 3.7-39.
From the above analysis, the variation rules of oscillation center voltage (Ucosφ) during
out-of-step oscillation are as follows:
1. During accelerating out-of-step condition, the variation rule of Ucosφ is 0 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 –

6–0
2. During decelerating out-of-step condition, the variation rule of Ucosφ is 0 – 6 – 5 – 4 – 3 – 2 –

1–0
U U
1 1
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
t t
0 4 0 4
5 5
6 6
-1
0 0
-1
Figure 3.7-39 The variation rule of oscillation center voltage

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
If the oscillation center voltage varies as the above mentioned rules, the relay consider it as
out-of-step condition and issues tripping command after the time delay (i.e., the setting
[78.N_Limit]), performing separation.
The above analysis is based on the assumption that system impedance angle is 90°, while in
practical system it is not, thus angle compensation is required. As shown in Figure 3.7-40, setting
the system impedance angle φ L in the device, the angle compensation is made to the oscillation
center voltage,
U SCV  U cos(  90   L )
I'
EM U EN
U cos 
 
2
Figure 3.7-40 Vector diagram of the oscillation center voltage
In order to locate the distance between the oscillation center and where the device is equipped,
setting impedance measurement element is used to confirm the operation range of separation
device, the operation characteristic of zone relay based on impedance discrimination is shown
in Figure 3.7-41.
EM EN
ZM Z L ine ZN
I
U
Z Re v Relay Z Fwd

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
jX ZN
Z Fwd
R
Z Re v δ
O
ZM
Figure 3.7-41 Operation characteristic of zone detector element
Where:
ZM and ZN are respective system impedances.
ZFwd is the impedance from zone relay location to side-N system
ZRev is the impedance from zone relay location to side-M system
The measured impedance is the impedance of phase-BC, zone relay meet the operation criterion
when the measured impedance is within the range of operation characteristic. Out-of-step
protection will operate when both zone relay and out-of-step relay operate.
In order to prevent out-of-step protection from being initiated under normal conditions, the device
calculates in real-time the voltage vector of two points (ZFwd and ZRev) based on measured voltage
and current, so as to calculate the phase angle between two voltage (δ), which participates in logic
discrimination of out-of-step protection.
78
78.En 78.On
78.Blk 78.St
78.Clr_Counter 78.St_Zone
78.Op
3.7.8.4 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-10 I/O signals of out-of-step protection

Out-of-step protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
1 78.En

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Out-of-step protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or

2 78.Blk
3 78.Clr_Counter Clear the counter
1 78.On Out-of-step protection is enabled.
2 78.St Out-of-step protection starts.
Zone detector element of out-of-step protection starts, whose operation
3 78.St_Zone
characteristic is shown as Figure 3.7-41.
4 78.Op Out-of-step protection operates.
3.7.8.5 Logic
SIG 78.En &

&
EN [78.En] 78.On
SIG 78.Blk
&
SIG VTS.Alm t1 t2 78.St
SIG Ia>0.12In
&
SIG Ib>0.12In &
SIG Ic>0.12In
&
SIG |δ|>[78.phi_Start]
SIG U1<0.95Un &
SIG
&
8>dδ/dt>0.2
Counter>[78.N_Limit] >=1
SIG Ucosφ from + to -
SIG 78.Clr_Counter
&
Counter>[78.N_Limit]
SIG Ucosφ - to +
&
EN [78.En_Trp] 78.Op
SIG δ<[78.phi_Trp] &

>=1
SIG
&
78.St_Zone
SIG 78.St
Figure 3.7-42 Logic diagram of out-of-step protection
Where:
U1 is positive-sequence voltage.
t1 is the pickup time delay of discriminating oscillation, internal fixed value is 40ms
t2 is the dropoff time delay of discriminating oscillation, internal fixed value is 3s

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
In order to prevent out-of-step protection from maloperation under normal conditions or faulty
conditions, the system will be think as oscillation only the following conditions are all met.
1. Measured positive-sequence voltage (U1) is smaller than 0.95Un.
2. Three phase currents are all greater than 0.12In.
3. The change rate of power angle (dδ/dt) is within 0.2~8.
4. The power angle (δ) is greater than the minimum start angle ([78.Phi_Start]).
3.7.8.6 Settings
Table 3.7-11 Settings of out-of-step protection

Enabling/disabling out-of-step protection
1 78.En 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling out-of-step protection
operate to trip
2 78.En_Trp 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
The forward impedance setting of zone
3 78.Z_Fwd (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
detector element
The reversal impedance setting of zone
4 78.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
detector element
5 78.phi1_Reach 30.00~89.00 0.01 deg The system impedance angle
The minimum start angle, which generally
6 78.phi_Start 0~180 1 deg should be greater than maximum load
angle.
It is the maximum tripping angle after
out-of-step protection operating, which is
used to prevent the circuit breaker from
7 78.phi_Trp 0~180.00 0.01 deg
incorrect operaion due to too large current
during tripping. It is generally set based on
the breaking capacity of circuit breaker.
The number setting of out-of-step cycle,
8 78.N_Limit 1~20 1
and it is set as 2~3 generally
3.7.9 Power Swing Blocking Releasing
When power swing occurs on the power system, the impedance measured by the distance
measuring element may vary from the load impedance area into the operating zone of the
distance element. The distance measuring element may operate due to the power swing occurs in
many points of interconnected power systems. To keep the stability of whole power system,
tripping due to operation of the distance measuring element during a power swing is generally not
allowed. Our distance protection adopts power swing blocking releasing to avoid maloperation

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
resulting from power swing. In another word, distance protection is blocked all along under the
normal condition and power swing when the respective logic settings are enabled. Only when fault
(internal fault or power swing with internal fault) is detected, power swing blocking for distance
protection is released by PSBR element.
Power swing blocking for distance element will be released if any of the following PSBR elements
operates. Each distance zone elements has respective setting for selection this function.
 Fault detector PSBR element (FD PSBR)
 Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element (UF PSBR)
 Symmetrical fault PSBR element (SF PSBR)
1. Fault detector PSBR element
If any of the following condition is matched, FD PSBR will operate for 160ms.
Positive sequence current is lower than the setting [21.I_PSBR] before general fault detector
element operates.
As shown in figure below, assuming that normal load impedance locates at position 1 and the
impedance locates at position 2 when positive-sequence current is lower than the setting
[21.I_PSBR], it means FD operates between point 1 and point 2 if operation condition for FD
PSBR mentioned above is fulfilled (point 3 as an example), and then FD PSBR will operate for
160ms.
[21.I_PSBR]
FD
Normal load
impedance
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
2. Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element
The operation criterion:
I0+I2>m×I1
The “m”, an empirical value, is internal fixed coefficient which can ensure UF PSBR operation
during power swing with internal unsymmetrical fault, while no operation during power swing or
power swing with external fault.
This decision mainly utilizes the "discrepancy" that there is no negative-sequence or

zero-sequence current during power swing, and there are negative-sequence and zero-sequence
currents in case of asymmetric fault. In addition, value of m is used to differentiate internal
asymmetric fault and external asymmetric fault in case of power swing.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
 In case of power swing or both power swing and external fault, asymmetric fault discriminating
element will not operate and distance protection will be blocked:
In case of power swing but no fault, I0 and I2 are near zero, but I1 is very large. Asymmetric fault
discriminating element will not operate.
In case of both power swing and external fault, if center of power swing is in scope of protection,
both phase-to-phase and grounding impedance relays may operate. At this time, selection of
value of m is used to ensure no operation of asymmetric fault discriminating element, blocking of
distance protection, and no incorrect operation without selectivity. If power swing center is not on
this line, distance protection will not operate incorrectly without selectivity due to power swing.
 In case of internal asymmetric fault, asymmetric fault discriminating element operates and
distance protection will be release to clear internal fault:
In case of both power swing and internal fault, if at the instant of short circuit, system electric
potential angle is not laid out, asymmetric fault discriminating element will operate at once. If at the
instant of short circuit, system electric potential angle is laid out, asymmetric fault discriminating
element will operate when system angle gradually decreases, or local side tripping may be
activated after immediate operation of opposite side asymmetric fault discriminating element and
releasing of distance protection tripping. In case of normal internal asymmetric phase-to-phase or
grounding fault in the system, relatively large zero-sequence or negative-sequence component will
exist. At this time, the above equation is true and distance protection will be released.
3. Symmetrical fault PSBR element
If a three-phase fault occurs and FD PSBR is invalid (160ms after FD operates), neither FD PSBR
nor UF PSBR will be able to release the distance protection. Thus, SF PSBR is provided for this
case specially. This detection is based on measuring the voltage at power swing center, during
power swing, U1cosΦ will constantly change periodically.
UOS=U1×COSΦ
Where:
Φ: the angle between positive sequence voltage and current
U1: the positive sequence voltage
As shown in the figure below, assume system connection impedance angle of 90°, current vector
will be perpendicular to the line connecting E M and EN, and have the same phase as power swing
center voltage. During normal operation of system or power swing, U1cosΦ just reflects
positive-sequence voltage of power swing center. In case of 3-phase short circuit, U1cosΦ is
voltage drop on arc resistor, transition resistance is arc resistance, and voltage drop on arc resistor
is less than 5%UN. In actual system, line impedance angle is not 90°. Through compensation of
angle Φ, power swing center voltage can be measured accurately. After compensation, power
swing center voltage is U1cos(Φ＋90o－ΦL), where ΦL is line impedance angle.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
I
EM U EN
UOS
During power swing, power swing center voltage U 1cosΦ has the following characteristics: When
electric potential phase angle difference between power supplies at two sides is 180o, U1cosΦ＝0
and change rate dU1cosΦ/dt is the maximum. When this phase angle difference is near 0 o, power
swing center voltage change rate dU 1cosΦ/dt is the minimum. During short circuit, U 1cosΦ
remains unchanged and dU1cosΦ/dt＝0. However, in early stage of short circuit when normal state
enters short circuit state, dU1cosΦ/dt is very large. Therefore, use of dU 1cosΦ/dt solely to
differentiate power swing and short circuit is not complete.
For these reasons, the method to release distance protection on condition that power swing center
voltage U1cosΦ is less than a setting and after a short delay can be used as symmetric fault
discriminating element. This element can accurately differentiate power swing and 3-phase short
circuit fault, and constitute a complete power swing blocking scheme with other elements. The
element to open distance protection if U 1cosΦ is less than a certain setting and after a delay is
easy to realize and has short delay, and can trip fault more quickly and accurately trip 3-phase
short circuit fault during power swing.
The criterion of SF PSBR element comprises the following two parts:
 when -0.03UN<UOS<0.08UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 150ms.
 when -0.1UN<UOS<0.25UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 500ms.
The second criterion is a backup of the first criterion allowing longer monitoring period of voltage
variation.
To reduce the time delay for SF PSBR element during power swing, the change rate of voltage at
power swing center is also used which can release SF PSBR element quickly for the fault occurred
during power swing. The typical release time is less than 60ms.
21Mi
21Mi.En_PSBR 21Mi.Rls_PSBR
21Mi.Blk_PSBR 21M.Pilot.Rls_PSBR
21M.Pilot.En_PSBR
21M.Pilot.Blk_PSBR

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
21Qi
21Qi.En_PSBR 21Qi.Rls_PSBR
21Qi.Blk_PSBR 21Q.Pilot.Rls_PSBR
21Q.Pilot.En_PSBR
21Q.Pilot.Blk_PSBR
3.7.9.2 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-12 I/O signals of PSBR

Enabling power swing blocking releasing of zone i (Mho characteristic, i=1, 2, 3,
1 21Mi.En_PSBR
4, 5)
Enabling power swing blocking releasing of zone i (Quad characteristic, i=1, 2,
2 21Qi.En_PSBR
3, 4, 5)
Blocking power swing blocking releasing of zone i (Mho characteristic, i=1, 2, 3,
3 21Mi.Blk_PSBR
4, 5)
Blocking power swing blocking releasing of zone i (Quad characteristic, i=1, 2,
4 21Qi.Blk_PSBR
3, 4, 5)
Enabling power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Mho
5 21M.Pilot.En_PSBR
characteristic)
Blocking power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Mho
6 21M.Pilot.Blk_PSBR
characteristic)
Enabling power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Quad
7 21Q.Pilot.En_PSBR
characteristic)
Blocking power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Quad
8 21Q.Pilot.Blk_PSBR
characteristic)
1 21Mi.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release zone i (Mho characteristic, i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
2 21Qi.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release zone i (Quad characteristic, i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
3 21M.Pilot.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release pilot distance zone (Mho characteristic)
4 21Q.Pilot.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release pilot distance zone (Quad characteristic)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.7.9.3 Logic
SIG 21Mi.En_PSBR &

21Mi.Enable_PSBR
SIG 21Mi.Blk_PSBR
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 21Mi.Flg_PSBR
SIG 21Mi.Enable_PSBR &

>=1
EN [21Mi.En_PSBR]
&
SIG Symmetrical |U1cosΦ |< t 0ms Unblocking for SF >=1 21Mi.Rls_PSBR
>=1
&
SIG Unsymmetrical |I0|+|I2|>
Unblocking for UF
SIG 21Mi.Flg_PSBR
SET I1>[21.I_PSBR] 0 3s & &

0 160ms >=1
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG 21Qi.En_PSBR &

21Qi.Enable_PSBR
SIG 21Qi.Blk_PSBR
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 21Qi.Flg_PSBR
SIG 21Qi.Enable_PSBR &

>=1
EN [21Qi.En_PSBR]
&
SIG Symmetrical |U1cosΦ |< t 0ms Unblocking for SF >=1 21Qi.Rls_PSBR
>=1
&
Unblocking for UF
SIG 21Qi.Flg_PSBR
SET I1>[21.I_PSBR] 0 3s & &

0 160ms >=1
SIG FD.Pkp

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 21M.Pilot.En_PSBR &

21M.Pilot.Enable_PSBR
SIG 21M.Pilot.Blk_PSBR
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 21M.Pilot.Flg_PSBR
SIG 21M.Pilot.Enable_PSBR &

>=1
EN [21M.Pilot.En_PSBR]
&
SIG Symmetrical |U1cosΦ|< t 0ms Unblocking for SF >=1 21M.Pilot.Rls_PSBR
>=1
&
Unblocking for UF
SIG 21M.Pilot.Flg_PSBR
SET I1>[21.I_PSBR] 0 3s & &

0 160ms >=1
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG 21Q.Pilot.En_PSBR &

21Q.Pilot.Enable_PSBR
SIG 21Q.Pilot.Blk_PSBR
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 21Q.Pilot.Flg_PSBR
SIG 21Q.Pilot.Enable_PSBR &

>=1
EN [21Q.Pilot.En_PSBR]
&
SIG Symmetrical |U1cosΦ|< t 0ms Unblocking for SF >=1 21Q.Pilot.Rls_PSBR
>=1
&
Unblocking for UF
SIG 21Q.Pilot.Flg_PSBR
SET I1>[21.I_PSBR] 0 3s & &

0 160ms >=1
SIG FD.Pkp
Figure 3.7-43 Logic diagram of PSBR
Where:
i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5
21Mi.Flg_PSBR: Please refer to Figure 3.7-25 and Figure 3.7-26

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
21Qi.Flg_PSBR: Please refer to Figure 3.7-30 and Figure 3.7-31
21M.Pilot.Flg_PSBR and 21Q.Pilot.Flg_PSBR: Please refer to Figure 3.7-34 and Figure 3.7-35
3.7.9.4 Settings
Table 3.7-13 Settings of PSBR

Enabling/disabling zone i of distance
protection controlled by PSBR (Mho
1 21Mi.En_PSBR 0 or 1 characteristic, i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling zone i of distance
protection controlled by PSBR (Quad
2 21Qi.En_PSBR 0 or 1 characteristic, i=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling pilot distance
zone controlled by PSBR (Mho
3 21M.Pilot.En_PSBR 0 or 1 characteristic)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling pilot distance
zone controlled by PSBR (Quad
4 21Q.Pilot.En_PSBR 0 or 1 characteristic)
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting for power swing
5 21.I_PSBR (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
blocking
3.7.10 Distance SOTF Protection
When the circuit breaker is closed manually or automatically, it is possible to switch on to a fault.
This is especially critical if the line in the remote station is grounded, since the distance protection
would not clear the fault until overreach zones (zone 2 and/or zone 3) time delays have elapsed. In
this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is required. The SOTF (switch onto fault)
protection is a complementary function to the distance protection. With distance SOTF protection,
a fast trip is achieved for a fault on the whole line, when the line is being energized. It shall be
responsive to all types of faults anywhere within the protected line.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
21SOTF
21SOTF.En 21SOTF.On
21SOTF.Blk 21SOTF.Op
21SOTF.Op_PDF
3.7.10.2 I/O Signals
Table 3.7-14 I/O signals of distance SOTF protection

Distance SOTF protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
1 21SOTF.En
Distance SOTF protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
2 21SOTF.Blk
Accelerate distance protection to trip when manual closing or auto-reclosing to
1 21SOTF.Op
fault
Accelerate distance protection to trip when another fault happened under pole
2 21SOTF.Op_PDF
discrepancy conditions
3 21SOTF.On Accelerate distance protection is enabled.
3.7.10.3 Logic
SIG 21SOTF.En &

&
SIG 21SOTF.Blk 21SOTF.On
EN [21SOTF.En]
Figure 3.7-44 Logic diagram of enabling distance SOTF protection
Distance SOTF protection can be enabled or disabled, and can be initiated by several cases,
including manual closing signal, 3-pole reclosing, 1-pole reclosing and pole discrepancy
conditions.
1. For single circuit breaker mode

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG CB1.52b_PhA
>=1
SIG CB1.52b_PhB
SIG CB1.52b_PhC
&
SIG FD.Pkp
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=CBPos
>=1
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=ManClsBI/CBPos
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=All
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=ManClsBI
>=1
& >=1
SIG FD.Pkp 0 400ms Manual closing signal
SIG ManCls
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=All >=1
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=AutoInit &

SIG Ua<[SOTF.U_Ddl]
&
SIG Ub<[SOTF.U_Ddl]
SIG Uc<[SOTF.U_Ddl]
SIG FD.Pkp >=1 &

[SOTF.t_DdL] 0ms Dead line
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG Ia<0.06In
&
SIG Ib<0.06In
SIG Ic<0.06In
SIG 79.Close (3P) 0ms 400ms 3-pole reclosing signal
SIG 79.Close (1P) 0ms 400ms 1-pole reclosing signal
Figure 3.7-45 Logic diagram of manual closing signal
For double circuit breakers mode, the phase's open status corresponding to the line is invalid
unless both circuit breakers are in open position.
2. For double circuit breakers mode

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
BI [CB1.52b_PhA] &
BI [CB2.52b_PhA]
BI [CB1.52b_PhB] & >=1
BI [CB2.52b_PhB]
BI [CB1.52b_PhC] &
BI [CB2.52b_PhC]
&
SIG FD.Pkp
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=CBPos
>=1
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=ManClsBI
>=1
& >=1
SIG FD.Pkp 0ms 400ms Manual closing signal
SIG ManCls
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=All >=1

&
SET [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls]=AutoInit
SIG Ua<[SOTF.U_Ddl]
&
SIG Ub<[SOTF.U_Ddl]
SIG Uc<[SOTF.U_Ddl]
SIG FD.Pkp >=1 &

[SOTF.t_DdL] 0ms Dead line
SIG VTS.Alm
SIG Ia<0.06In
&
SIG Ib<0.06In
SIG Ic<0.06In
SIG 79.Close(3P) 0ms 400ms 3-pole reclosing signal
SIG 79.Close(1P) 0ms 400ms 1-pole reclosing signal
Figure 3.7-46 Logic diagram of manual closing signal
For accelerated tripping mode by manual closing signal, manual closing signal can be from circuit
breaker position, external binary signal of manual closing or dead line check.
When the circuit breaker is in open position while the device does not pick up, or external manual
closing binary input is energized, then manual closing signal will be kept for 400ms, which will
enable SOTF logic.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
When the initiation mode of SOTF protection is set as “AutoInit” (i.e., [SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls] is
set as “AutoInit”), distance SOTF protection will be initiated by dead line check. When three
phases currents are all smaller than 0.06In and no fault detector element operates, SOTF logic will
be enabled only for 400ms if three phase voltages are all smaller than the setting [SOTF.U_Ddl]
with the time delay [SOTF.t_Ddl].
SIG 21SOTF.On &
SIG FD.Pkp
&
& [21SOTF.t_ManCls] 0 21SOTF.Op_ManCls
EN [21SOTF.En_ManCls]
EN [21SOTF.Z2.En_ManCls] &
SIG 21M(21Q)2.Flg_PSBR
EN [21SOTF.Z3.En_ManCls] & >=1
EN [21SOTF.Z4.En_ManCls] &
Figure 3.7-47 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection by manual closing signal

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG FD.Pkp &

&
SIG 21SOTF.On [21SOTF.t_3PAR] 0 >=1
21SOTF.Op_AR
EN [21SOTF.En_3PAR] &
SIG 3-pole reclosing signal
EN [21SOTF.Z2.En_3PAR] &
>=1
EN [21SOTF.Z2.En_PSBR] &
SIG 21M(21Q)2.Rls_PSBR
EN [21SOTF.Z3.En_3PAR] & &

>=1 >=1
EN [21SOTF.Z4.En_3PAR] &
>=1
EN [21SOTF.En_1PAR]
&
& [21SOTF.t_1PAR] 0
SIG PD signal
Figure 3.7-48 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection by 1-pole or 3-pole AR
For single-phase permanent fault, distance SOTF protection for 1-pole reclosing onto the faulty
phase will trip three-phase circuit breaker.
SIG 21SOTF.On &
SIG FD.Pkp
&
EN [21SOTF.En_PDF] [21SOTF.t_PDF] 0 21SOTF.Op_PDF
&
SIG 21M(21Q)2.Rls_PSBR &
SIG PD signal
Figure 3.7-49 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection by PD condition
Under pole discrepancy condition after single-phase tripping, distance SOTF protection will
accelerate to operate if another fault happens to the healthy phase.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 21SOTF.Op_ManCls >=1

21SOTF.Op
SIG 21SOTF.Op_AR
Figure 3.7-50 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection
3.7.10.4 Settings
Table 3.7-15 Settings of distance SOTF protection

Enabling/disabling distance SOTF
protection
1 21SOTF.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
distance SOTF protection for
2 21SOTF.Zi.En_ManCls 0 or 1 manual closing (i=2, 3, 4)
1: enable
0: disable
distance SOTF protection for
3 21SOTF.Zi.En_3PAR 0 or 1 3-pole reclosing (i=2, 3, 4)
1: enable
0: disable
Enabling/disabling zone i
controlled by PSB of distance
SOTF protection for 3-pole
4 21SOTF.Zi.En_PSBR 0 or 1
reclosing (i=2, 3, 4)
1: enable
0: disable
Enabling/disabling distance SOTF
protection under pole discrepancy
5 21SOTF.En_PDF 0 or 1 conditions
1: enable
0: disable
Time delay of distance protection
6 21SOTF.t_PDF 0.000~10.000 0.001 s operating under pole discrepancy
conditions
Undervoltage setting of deadline
7 SOTF.U_Ddl 0~Unn 0.001 V
detection
8 SOTF.t_Ddl 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Time delay of deadline detection
ManClsBI Option of manual SOTF mode
CBPos ManClsBI: initiated by input signal
9 SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls
ManClsBI/ of manual closing
CBPos CBPos: initiated by CB position

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

AutoInit ManClsBI/CBPos: initiated by
All either input signal of manual
closing or CB position
AutoInit: initiated by no voltage
detection
All: initiated by both binary input
and no voltage detection
Table 3.7-16 Internal settings of distance SOTF protection

Enabling/disabling distance SOTF protection for
manual closing
1 21SOTF.En_ManCls 1
0: disable
1: enable
Time delay of distance protection accelerating to
2 21SOTF.t_ManCls 0.025 s
trip when manual closing
3-pole reclosing
3 21SOTF.En_3PAR 1
0: disable
1: enable
4 21SOTF.t_3PAR 0.025 s
trip when 3-pole reclosing
1-pole reclosing
5 21SOTF.En_1PAR 1
0: disable
1: enable
6 21SOTF.t_1PAR 0.025 s
trip when 1-pole reclosing
3.8 Optical Pilot Channel (Option)

When fibre optical channel is available between the devices at both ends, the devices have an
optional module to transmit permissive signal or blocking signal (subject to the scheme selected),
transfer signal and transfer trip via the fibre ports of the module. The communication rate can be
64kbits/s or 2048kbits/s via optional dedicated optical fibre channel or multiplex channel. By the
setting [FO.Protocol], the device can support G.703 or C37.94.

12 digital bits are integrated in each frame of transmission message for various applications. Each
received message frame via fibre optical channel will pass through security check to ensure the
integrity of the message consistently.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
The last four digital bits of the 12 have been assigned for pilot scheme protection. The
communication channel can be configured as single channel mode or as dual channels mode.
(FOx, x can be 1 or 2) according to the optical pilot channel module selected.
3.8.2.1 Channel Interface
The modules can communicate in two modes via multiplexer or dedicated optical fibre.
Communication through dedicated fibre is usually recommended unless the received power does
not meet with the requirement. Channel of 64kbits/s or 2048kbits/s via dedicated fibre is shown in
Figure 3.8-1 and Figure 3.8-2. Two fibre cores of optical cable are dedicated to pilot scheme
protection. For dual firbre optical channels application, two fibre cores of optical cable are normally
in service, and all data are exchanged via the other healthy core if one core is failed.
Max 2km for 62.5/125um multi-mode FO C37.94 (N*64kbits/s)
TX RX
PCS-902 PCS-902
RX TX
ST connectors ST connectors
Max 2km for 62.5/125um multi-mode FO C37.94 (N*64kbits/s)
ST connectors (FO1) ST connectors (FO1)
TX RX
RX TX
PCS-902 PCS-902
TX RX
RX TX
Figure 3.8-1 Direct optical link up to 2km with 850nm
Max 40km/100km for 9/125um single-mode FO
TX RX
PCS-902 PCS-902
RX TX
FC connectors FC connectors

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Max 40km/100km for 9/125um single-mode FO
FC connectors (FO1) FC connectors (FO1)
TX RX
RX TX
PCS-902 PCS-902
TX RX
RX TX
Figure 3.8-2 Direct optical link up to 40km with1310nm or 100km with 1550nm
Channel of 64kbits/s or 2048kbits/s via multiplexer is shown in Figure 3.8-3, Figure 3.8-4 and
Figure 3.8-5.
C37.94 (N*64kbits/s)
Multi-mode FO
Communication convertor
E Interface
TX RX Link to
PCS-902 communicate
RX TX device
O
ST connectors ST connectors
Multi-mode FO C37.94 (N*64kbits/s)
ST connectors (FO1) ST connectors (FO1) Communication convertor
E Interface
TX RX Link to
communicate
RX TX device
PCS-902
TX RX
RX TX O
Figure 3.8-3 Connect to a communication network via communication convertor

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
G.703 (64kbits/s)
Single-mode FO MUX-64
E Interface
TX RX Link to
PCS-902 communicate
RX TX device
O
G.703 (64kbits/s)
Single-mode FO
MUX-64
TX RX E
Interface
RX TX Link to
PCS-902 communicate
TX RX device
RX TX O
Figure 3.8-4 Connect to a communication network via MUX-64
G.703-E1 (2048kbits/s)
MUX-2M
Single-mode FO
E Interface
TX RX Link to
PCS-902 communicate
RX TX device
O
Single-mode FO G.703-E1 (2048kbits/s)
FC connectors (FO1) FC connectors (FO1) MUX-2M
E Interface
TX RX Link to
communicate
RX TX device
PCS-902
TX RX
RX TX O
Figure 3.8-5 Connect to a communication network via MUX-2M

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
The protection transmission data format is shown as following table.
Bit Data Frame Description

High Format The header of transmission data format
LocID The identity code of local device
Time Time used to measure channel delay
FOx.Send1~FOx.Send12 The twelve signals sent by channel No.x
low CRC
3.8.2.2 Communication Clock
Valid messages exchange is key factor for digital pilot scheme protection.
The device transmits and receives messages based on respective clocks, which are called
transmit clock (i.e. clock TX) and receive clock (i.e. clock RX) respectively. Clock RX is fixed to be
extracted from message frame, which can ensure no slip frame and no error message received.
Clock TX has two options:
1. Use internal crystal clock, which is called internal clock. (master clock)
2. Use external clock. (slave clock)
Depend on the clock used by the device at both ends, there are three modes.
1. Master-master mode
Both ends use internal clock.
2. Slave-slave mode
Both ends use external clock.
3. Master-slave mode
One of them uses internal clock, the other uses external clock
The logic setting [FOx.En_IntClock] is used in pilot scheme protection to select the communication
clock. The internal clock is enabled automatically when the logic setting [FOx.En_IntClock] is set
as “1”. Contrarily, the external clock is enabled automatically when the logic setting
[FOx.En_IntClock] is set to “0”.
If the device uses multiplex PCM channel, logic setting [FOx.En_IntClock] at both ends should be
set as “0” (Mode 2). If the device uses dedicated optical fibre channel, clock Mode 1 and Mode 3
can be used. Mode 1 is recommended in considering simplification to user, i.e. logic setting
[FOx.En_IntClock] at both ends should be set as “1”.
3.8.2.3 Identity Code
In order to ensure reliability of the device when digital communication channel is applied, settings
[FO.LocID] and [FO.RmtID] are provided as identity code to distinguish uniquely the device at
remote end using same channel.
Under normal conditions, the identity code of the device at local end should be different with that at

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
remote end. In addition, it is recommended that the identity code of all devices, i.e., the setting
[FO.LocID], should be unique in the power grid. The setting range is from 0 to 65535. Only for loop
test, they are set as the same.
The setting [FO.LocID] of the device at an end should be the same as the setting [FO.RmtID] of
the device at opposite end and the greater [FO.LocID] between the two ends is chosen as a
master end for sampling synchronism, the smaller [FO.LocID] is slave end. If the setting [FO.LocID]
is set the same as [FO.RmtID], that implies the device in loopback testing state.
The setting [FO.LocID] is packaged in the message frame and transmitted to the remote end.
When the [FO.LocID] of the device at remote end received by local device is same to the setting
[FO.RmtID] of local device, the message received from the remote end is valid, and protection
information involved in message is read. When these settings are not matched, the message is
considered as invalid and protection information involved in message is ignored, corresponding
alarms will be issued.
3.8.2.4 Channel Statistics
The device has the function of on-line channel monitoring and channel statistics. It can produce
channel statistic report automatically at 9:00 every day and the report can be printed for operator
to check the channel quality. The monitoring contents of channel status are shown as follows, and
they can be viewed by the menu “Main Menu→Test→Prot Ch Counter→Chx Counter”.
1. FOx.StartTime (starting time)
It shows the starting time of the channel status statistics of the device at local end.
2. FO.RmtID (ID code of the remote end)
It shows the ID information received by the device at local end now.
3. FOx.t_ChLag (propagation delay of channel x)
It shows the calculated communication channel time delay of the device at local end now (unit: us).
The calculation is based on the assumption of same channel path for to and from remote end. The
device measures propagation delay of communication channel based on the below principle.
Side S transmits a frame of message to side M, and meanwhile records the transmitting time “tss”
on the basis of clock on side S. When side M receives the message, it will record receiving time
“tmr” of the message with its own clock, and return a frame of message to side S at next fixed
transmitting time, meanwhile data of “tms-tmr” is included in the frame of message. Side S will
receive the message from side M at the time “tsr” and obtain the data of “tms-tmr”.
Therefore, the propagation delay of the channel “Td” is obtained through calculation:
(tsr  t ss )  (tms  t mr )
Td 
2
By using the above calculated “Td”, the device automatically compensate time synchronization of
sampling data at each end and transimission time lag.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
T1
tss tsr "S"
tmr tms "M"

Td T2
Figure 3.8-6 Schematic diagram of communication channel time
4. FOx.N_CRCFail (total number of error frame of channel x)
It shows the total number of the error frames of the device at local end from starting time of
channel statistics until now. Error frame means that this frame fails in CRC check.
5. FOx.N_FramErr (total number of abnormal messages of channel x)
It shows the total number of abnormal messages of the device at local end from starting time of
channel statistics until now.
6. FOx.N_FramLoss (total number of lost frames of channel x)
It shows the total number of the lost frames of the device at local end from starting time of channel
statistics until now.
7. FOx.N_RmtAbnor (total number of abnormal messages from the remote end of channel x)
It shows the total number of abnormal messages received from the remote end from starting time
of channel statistics until now.
8. FOx.N_CRCFailSec (total number of serious error frames of channel x)
It shows the total number of serious error frame seconds of the device at local end from starting
time of the channel statistics until now.
9. FOx.N_LossSyn (total number of loss synchronous of channel x)
It shows the total number of loss synchronous of the device at local end from starting time of the
channel statistics until now.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
FOx
FOx.En FOx.On
FOx.Sendi FOx.Recvi
FOx.Alm
FOx.Alm_ID
3.8.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of pilot channel

1 FOx.En Enabling channel x
2 FOx.Sendi Sending signal i of channel x (i=1, 2, 3, ......, 8)
Sending signal 9 of channel x (it is configured by default as sending permissive
3 FOx.Send9 signal 1 or sending A-phase permissive signal (only for phase-segregated
command scheme))
Sending signal 10 of channel x (it is configured by default as sending B-phase
4 FOx.Send10
permissive signal (only for phase-segregated command scheme))
Sending signal 11 of channel x (it is configured by default as sending C-phase
5 FOx.Send11
permissive signal (only for phase-segregated command scheme))
Sending signal 12 of channel x (it is configured by default as sending
6 FOx.Send12 permissive signal 2 only for pilot directional earth-fault protection adopting
independent pilot channel 2)
1 FOx.On Channel x is enabled.
2 FOx.Recvi Receiving signal i of channel x (i=1, 2, 3, ......, 8)
Receiving signal 9 of channel x (it is configured by default as receiving
3 FOx.Recv9 permissive signal via pilot channel 1, or receiving permissive signal of A-phase
via channel No.1 (only for phase-segregated command scheme))
4 FOx.Recv10 permissive signal of B-phase via pilot channel 1 (only for phase-segregated
command scheme))
5 FOx.Recv11 permissive signal of C-phase via pilot channel 1 (only for phase-segregated
command scheme))
6 FOx.Recv12 permissive signal 2 only for pilot directional earth-fault protection adopting
independent pilot channel 2)
7 FOx.Alm Channel x is abnormal
8 FOx.Alm_ID Received ID from the remote end is not as same as the setting [FO.RmtID] of

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
the device in local end
3.8.5 Logic
SIG Receiving transfer signal i from remote side &

FOx.Recvi
SIG FOx.Alm >=1
SIG FOx.Alm_ID
SIG FOx.En &

FOx.On
EN FOx.En
Figure 3.8-7 Logic diagram of receiving signal i
i can be 1, 2, 3, ......, 12
3.8.6 Settings
Table 3.8-2 Settings of pilot channel

1 FO.LocID 0-65535 1 Identity code of the device at local end
2 FO.RmtID 0-65535 1 Identity code of the device at remote end
3 FO.BaudRate 64 or 2048 kbps Baud rate of optical pilot channel
G.703 It is used to select protocol type, G.703 or

4 FO.Protocol
C37.94 C37.94
The setting for the times of 64kbits/s, which

5 FOx.Nx64k_C37.94 1-12 1 is an N*64kbits/s standard defined by IEEE
C37.94 standard
Option of internal clock or external clock
6 FOx.En_IntClock 0 or 1 0: external clock
1: internal clock
Enabling/disabling channel x
7 FOx.En 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
3.9 Pilot Distance Protection

The instant distance protection with underreaching setting is impossible to isolate the fault at
remote end of the line, while distance protection with overreaching setting needs a time delay to
grade with downstream protection to maintain discrimination. Pilot distance protection that
exchanges distance protection information at both ends of the line can remove the fault within this

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
line quickly, and will not operate for external fault.
Pilot distance protection requires communication channel to exchange protection information at

both ends. The channel may be dedicated or multiplexed channel through optical fiber or any other
communication media. Pilot distance protection has schemes of permissive underreaching
transfer trip (PUTT), permissive overreaching transfer trip (POTT) and blocking. The device
provides duplicated pilot distance protections with dual channels. The communication media and
mode can be independent each other.

Pilot distance protection determines whether it will send the signal to the remote end according to
the discrimination result of the distance element or direction element. Pilot distance protection can
be divided into permissive scheme and blocking scheme according to whether the signal sent is
used to permit tripping or block tripping. For permissive scheme, it can be divided into
overreaching mode or underreaching mode according to the setting of distance element and
scheme selected, furthermore, it will provide the unblocking scheme as auxiliary function. For
overreaching mode, current reversal logic and weak infeed logic are available for parallel line
operation and weak power source situation respectively.
Pilot distance protection is used to protect the whole line, and its setting is set as 1.2 times the line
length at least, so the problem of overreaching does not exist and pilot distance protection,
compared with the distance protection, it is not required to coordinate with other zones. In order to
simplify setting calculation, the downward offset angle of the reactance of pilot distance protection
with quadrilateral characteristic is fixed 12 °without setting, which has been well proved to be a
reliable angle by large project experience and test data. The angle of directional line in the second
quadrant (α) and the angle of directional line in the fourth quadrant (β) are as same as those of
distance protection with quadrilateral characteristic.
Pilot distance protection with permissive scheme receives permissive signal from the remote end,
so as to combine with local discrimination condition to accelerate tripping, so it has high security.
Blocking scheme will operate with a short time delay [85.t_DPU_Blocking1] if forward pilot zone
element operates and not receiving blocking signal before the short time delay expired.
Pilot distance protection can be enabled or disabled by input signals, logic setting and blocking
signal, as shown in Figure 3.9-1.
SIG 85-x.Z.En1
&
SIG 85-x.Z.En2
EN [85.Z.En]
&
85-x.Z.On
SIG 85-x.Z.Blk
Figure 3.9-1 Enabling/disabling logic of pilot distance protection
Pilot distance protection receives and sends signals via pilot channel, and the logic of receiving
signal is shown in Figure 3.9-2.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SET [85.Opt_PilotMode]=Blocking &

>=1
85-x.Valid_Recv1
SIG 85-x.Recv1 &

>=1
SIG 85-x.Abnor_Ch1
SIG 85-x.Unblocking1 Valid

&
SET [85.Opt_PilotMode]=PUTT >=1
SET [85.Opt_PilotMode]=POTT
Figure 3.9-2 Logic diagram of receiving signal
Pilot distance protection has the following application modes:
3.9.2.1 Zone Extension
When pilot scheme protection is out of service due to pilot channel failure or no pilot scheme
protection is provided. The fault outside zone 1 only can be cleared by zone 2 with a time delay. It
can not ensure that all faults within protected line are cleared instantaneously. As a supplement of
pilot scheme protection, zone extension can clear the fault within the whole line instantaneously.
Different with pilot distance protection, zone extension can also operate for external close up fault
in parallel line, but power supply can be restored by AR. So zone extension should be blocked
when AR is out of service and is not ready.
In order to prevent too many lines from disconnecting with system due to zone extension operate
when the circuit breaker is closed into permanent fault, zone extension should be blocked when
AR operates. For temporary fault, the line can be into service again after AR operates successfully.
For permanent fault in either local line or parallel line, distance protection with a time delay will
operate.
SIG FD.Pkp &

SIG 85-x.ZX.En1
&
SIG 85-x.ZX.En2 &
85-x.ZX.On
EN [85.ZX.En]
SIG 85-x.ZX.Blk1 >=1
SIG 85-x.ZX.Blk2
&
SIG 79.Ready & [85.t_DPU_ZX] 0ms 85-x.Op_ZX
SIG Zpilot
Figure 3.9-3 Zone extension
Zone extension uses the setting of pilot zone (ZPilot), and its operation characteristic can be Mho

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
or Quad.
3.9.2.2 Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip (PUTT)
Distance elements zone 1 (Z1) with underreaching setting and pilot zone (ZPilot) with
overreaching setting are used for this scheme. Z1 element will send permissive signal to the
remote end and release tripping after Z1 time delay expired. After receiving permissive signal with
ZPilot element pickup, a tripping signal will be released.
The signal transmission element for PUTT is set according to underreaching mode, so current
reversal need not be considered.
For PUTT, there may be a dead zone under weak power source condition. If the fault occurs
outside Z1 zone at strong power source side, Z1 at weak power supply side may not operate to trip
and transmit permissive signal, and pilot distance protection will not operate. Therefore, the
system fault can only be removed by Z2 at strong power source side with time delay.
ZPilot
Z2
Z1
M
EM A Fault B EN
Z1 N
Z2
ZPilot
Relay A Relay B
Z1 Z1
& &
85-x.Op_Z 85-x.Op_Z
ZPilot ZPilot
Figure 3.9-4 Simple schematic of PUTT
Pilot distance protection always adopts pilot channel 1, and the logic of PUTT is shown in Figure
3.9-5.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 21M1(21Q1).Op 0ms 100ms >=1

&
SIG 85-x.ExTrp 0ms 150ms 85-x.Send1
SET [85.Opt_PilotMode]=PUTT &
SIG 85-x.Z.On &

&
SIG FD.Pkp 8ms 0ms 85-x.Op_Z
SIG 85-x.Valid_Recv1
SIG ZPilot
Figure 3.9-5 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (PUTT)
3.9.2.3 Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (POTT)
ZPilot will send permissive signal to remote end once it picks up and release tripping signal upon
receiving permissive signal from the remote end.
When POTT is applied on parallel lines arrangement and the ZPilot setting covers 50% of the
parallel line, there may be a problem under current reversal condition, settings for current reversal
condition should be considered, please refer to section 3.9.2.6 for details.
Under weak power source condition, the problem of dead zone at weak power source end is
eliminated by the weak infeed logic, please refers to section 3.9.2.7 for details.
ZPilot
Z2
Zpilot_Rev
M
EM A Fault B EN
N
Zpilot_Rev Z2
ZPilot
Relay A Relay B
& &
ZPilot >=1 85-x.Op_Z 85-x.Op_Z >=1 ZPilot
WI WI
Figure 3.9-6 Simple schematic of POTT

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG Trp 0ms 200ms >=1
SIG 85-x.ExTrp 0ms 150ms
SIG 52b_PhA
& & >=1
SIG 52b_PhB &
200ms 0ms
SIG 52b_PhC &
85-x.Send1
SIG 85-x.Valid_Recv1 &
SIG 85-x.Z.FwdDir &
&
>=1 t1 t2
SIG 85-x.Z.On
SIG WI
&
& 85-x.Op_Z
SIG FD.Pkp 8ms 0ms
Figure 3.9-7 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (POTT)
Where:
t1: pickup time delay of current reversal, the setting [85.t_DPU_CR1]
t2: dropoff time delay of current reversal, the setting [85.t_DDO_CR1]
3.9.2.4 Blocking
Permissive scheme has high security, but it relies on pilot channel seriously. Pilot distance
protection will not operate when there is an internal fault with abnormal channel. Blocking scheme
could be considered as an alternative.
Blocking scheme takes use of pilot distance element Zpilot operation to terminate sending of
blocking signal. Blocking signal will be sent once fault detector picks up without pilot zone Zpilot
operation. Pilot distance protection will operate with a short time delay if pilot distance element
operates and not receiving blocking signal after timer expired.
The setting of pilot zone element Zpilot in Blocking scheme is overreaching, so current reversal
condition should be considered. However, the short time delay of pilot distance protection has an
enough margin for current reversal, that this problem has been resolved.
The short time delay must consider channel delay and with a certain margin to set. As shown in
Figure 3.9-8, an external fault happens to line MN. The fault is behind the device at M side, for
blocking scheme, the device at M side will send blocking signal to the device at N side. If channel
delay is too long, the device at side N has operated before receiving blocking signal. Hence, the
time delay of pilot distance protection adopted in blocking scheme should be set according to
channel delay.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Blocking signal
M N
EM Fault A B EN
Figure 3.9-8 Simple schematic of system fault
For blocking scheme, pilot distance protection will operate when there is an internal fault with
abnormal channel, however, it is possible that pilot distance protection issue an undesired trip
when there is an external fault with abnormal channel.
ZPilot
Zpilot_Rev
M
EM A Fault B EN
N
Zpilot_Rev
ZPilot
Relay A Relay B
FD.Pkp & & FD.Pkp
Zpilot & & Zpilot

[85.t_DPU_Blocking1] 85-x.Op_Z 85-x.Op_Z [85.t_DPU_Blocking1]
Figure 3.9-9 Simple schematic of blocking

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG Trp 0ms 200ms >=1
SIG 52b_PhB
&
SIG 52b_PhA & >=1
SIG 52b_PhC
&
200ms 0ms
&
85-x.Send1
&
SIG 85-x.Z.FwdDir >=1
SIG WI
&
SIG FD.Pkp [85.t_DPU_Blocking1] 85-x.Op_Z
SIG 85-x.Z.On
Figure 3.9-10 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (Blocking)
Current reversal logic is only used for permissive scheme. For blocking scheme, the time delay of
pilot distance protection has enough margin for current reversal, so current reversal need not be
considered.
3.9.2.5 Unblocking
Permissive scheme will trip only when it receives permissive signal from the remote end. However,
it may not receive permissive signal from the remote end when pilot channel fails. For this case,
pilot distance protection can adopt unblocking scheme. Under normal conditions, the signaling
equipment works in the pilot frequency, and when the device operates to send permissive signal,
the signaling equipment will be switched to high frequency. While pilot channel is blocked, the
signaling equipment will receive neither pilot frequency signal nor high frequency signal. The
signaling equipment will provide a contact to the device as unblocking signal. When the device
receives unblocking signal from the signaling equipment, it will recognize channel failure, and
unblocking signal will be taken as permissive signal temporarily.
The unblocking function can only be used together with PUTT and POTT.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
EN [85.En_Unblocking1]
SIG 85-x.Unblocking1 & &
[85.t_Unblocking1] 0ms
SIG Detecting multi-phase fault >=1
SET [85.Opt_PilotCh1]
&
85-x.Unblocking1 Valid
SIG Pilot distance forward element
Figure 3.9-11 Logic diagram of pilot distance protection (Unblocking)
3.9.2.6 Current Reversal
When there is a fault in one of the parallel lines, the direction of the fault current may change
during the sequence tripping of the circuit breaker at both ends as shown in Figure 3.9-12: When a
fault occurs on line C–D near breaker D, the fault current through line A-B to D will flow from A to B.
When breaker D is tripped, but breaker C is not tripped, the fault current in line A-B will then flow
from B to A. This process is the current reversal.
M N M N
Strong Weak
A B A B
source source
EM EN EM EN
C D C D
Direction of fault current Direction of fault current

flow before CB‘D’open flow after CB‘D’open
Figure 3.9-12 Current reversal
As shown above, the device A judges a forward fault while the device B judges a reverse fault
before break D is tripped. However, the device A judges a reverse fault while the device B judges a
forward fault after breaker D is tripped. There is a competition between pickup and drop off of pilot
zones in the device A and the device B when the fault measured by the device A changes from
forward direction into reverse direction and vice versa for the device B. There may be
maloperation for the device in line A-B if the forward direction of the device B has operated but the
forward direction of the device A drops off slightly slower or the forward direction of the device B
has operated but the forward direction information of the device A is still received due to the
channel delay (the permissive signal is received).
In general, the following two methods shall be adopted to solve the problem of current reversal:
1. The fault shall be measured by means of the reverse element of the device B. Once the
reverse element of the device B operates, the send signals and the tripping circuit will be
blocked for a period of time after a short time delay. This method can effectively solve the
problem of competition between the device A and the device B, but there shall be a
precondition. The reverse element of the device B must be in cooperation with the forward
element of the device A, i.e. in case of a fault in adjacent lines, if the forward element of the
device A operates, and the reverse element of the device B must also operate. Once the

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
bilateral cooperation fails, the anticipated function cannot be achieved. In addition, the
blocking time for sending signals and the tripping circuit after the reverse element of the
device B operates shall be set in combination with the channel time delay.
2. Considering the pickup and drop off time difference of distance elements and the channel time
delay between the device A and the device B, the maloperation due to current reversal shall
be eliminated by setting the time delay. The reverse direction element of the device is not
required for this method, the channel time delay and the tripping time of adjacent breaker
shall be taken into account comprehensively.
This protection device adopts the second method to eliminate the maloperation due to current
reversal.
SIG Pilot forward zone start condition &

t1 t2 Current reversal blocking
SIG Signal received conditon
Figure 3.9-13 Logic diagram of current reversal blocking
t1: [85.t_DPU_CR1]
t2: [85.t_DDO_CR1]
Referring to above figure, when signal from the remote end is received without pilot forward zone
pickup, the current reversal blocking logic is enabled after t1 delay.
The time delay of t1 [85.t_DPU_CR1] shall be set the shortest possible but allowing sufficient time
for pilot forward zone pickup, generally set as 25ms.
Once the current reversal logic is enabled, the healthy line device B transfer tripping is blocked.
The logic will be disabled by either the dropoff of signal or the pickup of pilot forward zone. A time
delay t2 [85.t_DDO_CR1] is required to avoid maloperation for the case that the pilot forward zone
(or forward element of pilot directional earth-fault protection) of device B picks up before the signal
from device A drops off. Considering the channel propagation delay and the pickup and drop-off
time difference of pilot forward zone (or pilot directional earth-fault element) with margin, t2 is
generally set between 25ms~40ms.
Because the time delay of pilot distance protection has an enough margin to current reversal,
current reversal blocking only used for permissive scheme not blocking scheme.
3.9.2.7 Weak Infeed
In case of a fault in line at one end of which there is a weak power source, the fault current
supplied to the fault point from the weak power source is very small or even nil, and the
conventional distance element could not operate. The weak infeed logic combines the protection
information from the strong power source end and the electric feature of the local end to cope with
the case.
The weak infeed logic can be only applied for BOTT and POTT. The weak infeed logic has options
for echo or both echo and tripping.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
ZPilot
Z1 Zpilot_Rev
M
EM A Fault B EN
Z1 N
Zpilot_Rev
ZPilot
Load
Figure 3.9-14 Line fault description
When the weak infeed logic is enabled, distance forward and reverse element and direction
element of directional earth-fault protection do not operate with the voltage lower than the setting
[85.U_UV_WI] after the device picks up, upon receiving signal from remote end, the weak infeed
logic will echo the signal back to remote end for 200ms if the weak infeed echo is enabled, the
weak infeed end will echo signal and release tripping according to the logic.
ZPilot_Rev at weak source end must coordinate with ZPilot_Set of the remote end. The coverage
of ZPilot_Rev must exceed that of ZPilot_Set of the remote end. ZPilot_Rev only activates in the
protection calculation when the weak infeed logic is enabled. In case of the weak infeed logic not
enabled, the setting coordination is not required.
If the device does not pick up, and the weak infeed logic is enabled, upon receiving signal from
remote end with the voltage lower than the setting [85.U_UV_WI], the weak infeed logic will echo
back to remote end for 200ms. When either weak infeed echo or weak infeed tripping is enabled,
then the weak infeed logic is deemed to be enabled. During the device picking up, the weak infeed
logic is shown in Figure 3.9-15.
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG Pilot DEF forward direction >=1
SIG Pilot DEF reverse direction

& &
SIG Pilot distance forward direction >=1 Forward direction (WI)
SIG Pilot distance reverse direction
EN [85.En_WI]
SET Up<[85.U_UV_WI] >=1 200ms 0ms &
SET Upp<[85.U_UV_WI]
Figure 3.9-15 Weak infeed logic during pickup

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
If the device does not pick up, the weak infeed logic is shown as the following figure:
SIG Signal receive condition &

&
EN [85.En_WI] WI echo
SET Up<[85.U_UV_WI] >=1

200ms 0ms &
SET Upp<[85.U_UV_WI]
Figure 3.9-16 Weak infeed logic without pickup
For permissive scheme, the signal receive condition means that the permissive signal is received
or the unblocking signal is valid.
3.9.2.8 CB Echo
A feature is also provided which enables fast tripping to be maintained along the whole length of
the protected line, even when one terminal is open. The device will initiate sending a pulse of
200ms permissive signal when signal receive condition is met during CB is in open position.
SIG FD.Pkp &

SIG 52b_PhA
&
>=1 200ms 0ms &
SIG 52b_PhB Send permissive signal
SIG 52b_PhC
SIG 85-x.Valid_Recv1 &
Figure 3.9-17 Simplified CB echo logic for POTT
CB Echo logic is only applied to permissive overreach mode not underreach mode, and it is
processed without the device pickup. This logic will be terminated immediately once the device
picks up.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
85
85-x.Z.En1 85-x.Z.On
85-x.Z.En2 85-x.ZX.On
85-x.Z.Blk 85-x.Op_Z
85-x.Abnor_Ch1 85-x.Send1
85-x.Rcv1 85-x.SendB
85-x.RcvB 85-x.SendC
85-x.RcvC 85-x.Op_ZX
85-x.ExTrp 85-x.ZX_St
85-x.Unblocking1
85-x.ZX.En1
85-x.ZX.En2
85-x.ZX.Blk1
85-x.ZX.Blk2
79.Ready
3.9.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pilot distance protection

Pilot distance protection x enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
1 85-x.Z.En1
programmable logic etc. (x=1 or 2)
Pilot distance protection x enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
2 85-x.Z.En2
Pilot distance protection x blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 85-x.Z.Blk
Input signal of indicating that pilot channel 1 is abnormal for pilot distance
4 85-x.Abnor_Ch1
protection x (x=1 or 2)
Input signal of receiving permissive signal via channel No.1 for pilot distance
protection x, or input signal of receiving permissive signal of A-phase via channel
5 85-x.Recv1
No.1 for pilot distance protection x (only for phase-segregated command scheme,
x=1 or 2)
Input signal of receiving permissive signal of B-phase via channel No.1 for pilot
6 85-x.RecvB
distance protection x (only for phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)
Input signal of receiving permissive signal of C-phase via channel No.1 for pilot
7 85-x.RecvC
distance protection x (only for phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Input signal of initiating sending permissive signal from external tripping signal for
8 85-x.ExTrp
pilot distance protection x (x=1 or 2)
9 85-x.Unblocking1 Unblocking signal 1 of pilot distance protection x (x=1 or 2)
Zone Extension enabling input 1 of pilot distance protection x, it is triggered from
10 85-x.ZX.En1
binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1 or 2)
Zone Extension enabling input 2 of pilot distance protection x, it is triggered from
11 85-x.ZX.En2
Zone Extension blocking input 1 of pilot distance protection x, it is triggered from
12 85-x.ZX.Blk1
Zone Extension blocking input 2 of pilot distance protection x, it is triggered from
13 85-x.ZX.Blk2
14 79.Ready AR has been ready for reclosing cycle.
1 85-x.Z.On Pilot distance protection x is enabled. (x=1 or 2)
2 85-x.ZX.On Zone extension protection of pilot distance protection x is enabled. (x=1 or 2)
3 85-x.Op_Z Pilot distance protection x operates. (x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending permissive signal 1 or sending A-phase permissive
4 85-x.Send1 signal of pilot distance protection x (only for phase-segregated command scheme,
x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending B-phase permissive signal of pilot distance protection x
5 85-x.SendB
(only for phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending C-phase permissive signal of pilot distance protection x
6 85-x.SendC
(only for phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)
7 85-x.Op_ZX Zone extension protection of pilot distance protection x operates. (x=1 or 2)
8 85-x.ZX_St Zone extension protection of pilot distance protection x starts (x=1 or 2)
3.9.5 Settings
Table 3.9-2 Settings of pilot distance protection

POTT
1 85.Opt_PilotMode PUTT Option of pilot scheme
Blocking
Option of phase-segregated
signal scheme or three-phase
signal scheme
2 85.Opt_Ch_PhSeg 0 or 1
0: three-phase signal scheme
1: phase-segregated signal
scheme
Enabling/disabling weak infeed
scheme
3 85.En_WI 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
4 85.U_UV_WI 0~Unn 0.001 V Undervoltage setting of weak

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

infeed logic
Enabling/disabling pilot
distance protection
5 85.Z.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling unblocking
scheme
6 85.En_Unblocking1 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Time delay for blocking
7 85.t_DPU_Blocking1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s scheme of pilot distance
protection operation
Time delay dropoff for current
8 85.t_DDO_CR1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
reversal logic
Time delay pickup for current
9 85.t_DPU_CR1 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
reversal logic
Enabling/disabling zone
extension protection
10 85.ZX.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Pickup time delay for zone
11 85.t_DPU_ZX 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
extension protection operation
Table 3.9-3 Internal settings of pilot distance protection

Pickup time delay of unblocking scheme for pilot
1 85.t_Unblocking1 0.1 s
channel 1
Option of PLC channel for pilot channel 1
2 85.Opt_PilotCh1 1 0: phase-to-phase channel
1: phase-to-ground channel
3.10 Pilot Directional Earth-fault Protection

Directional earth fault protection needs to coordinate with downstream protection with definite or
inverse time delay so it cannot clear an internal fault quickly. Pilot directional earth-fault protection
takes use of directional earth fault elements on both ends, it can detect high resistance fault and
maintain high-speed operation.
Pilot protection requires communication channel to exchange the protection information at both
ends. The channel may be dedicated or multiplexed channel through optical fiber or any other
communication media.
Pilot directional earth-fault protection can be used independently, for example, no distance

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
protection is equipped with the device but fast operation is required for the whole line, or it is used
as backup protection of pilot distance protection to enhance the sensitivity for an earth fault with
high fault resistance.
Sending permissive signal (or terminating sending signal) to the opposite end is controlled by
forward direction element. Current reversal logic is available for parallel line operation and CB
echo logic is provided once pilot directional earth fault protection is enabled. Current reversal logic
is only used for permissive scheme. For blocking scheme, current reversal need not be considered
because there is a settable time delay in pilot directional earth-fault protection.
Pilot directional earth-fault protection can be enabled or disabled by input signals, logic setting and
blocking signal, as shown in Figure 3.10-1.
SIG 85-x.DEF.En1
&
SIG 85-x.DEF.En2
EN [85.DEF.En]
&
85-x.DEF.On
SIG 85-x.DEF.Blk
Figure 3.10-1 Enabling/disabling logic of pilot directional earth-fault protection
Pilot directional earth-fault protection comprises permissive scheme and blocking scheme. It can
share pilot channel 1 ([85.DEF.En_IndepCh]=0) with pilot distance protection, or uses independent
pilot channel 2 ([85.DEF.En_IndepCh]=1) by setting logic setting [85.DEF.En_IndepCh]. For
underreach mode, pilot directional earth-fault always adopts independent pilot channel 2. The
logic of receiving signal is shown in Figure 3.10-2.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

>=1
SIG 85-x.Recv1
&
SIG 85-x.Abnor_Ch1

&
SET [85.Opt_PilotMode]=PUTT >=1 >=1
85-x.Valid_Recv_DEF
EN [85.DEF.En_IndepCh]
SET [85.Opt_PilotMode]=Blocking & &

>=1
SIG 85-x.Recv2 &
SIG 85-x.Abnor_Ch2
Figure 3.10-2 Logic diagram of receiving signal
SIG FwdDir_ROC &

85-x.FwdDir_DEF_Pilot
SIG 3I0>[85.DEF.3I0_Set]
SIG RevDir_ROC &

85-x.RevDir_DEF_Pilot
SIG FD.ROC.Pkp
Figure 3.10-3 Forward/reverse direction of zero-sequence power
3.10.2.1 Permissive Transfer Trip (PTT)
Pilot protection with permissive scheme receives permissive signal from the device of remote end,
so as to combine with local discrimination condition to accelerate tripping, so it has high security.
Operation of forward directional earth fault element is used to send permissive signal to the
remote end when the protection is enabled and will release tripping signal upon receiving
permissive signal from the remote end with further guarded by no operation of reverse directional
earth fault element. This ensures the security of the protection.
The following figure shows the schematic of permissive transfer trip.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
M
EM A Fault B EN
N
Relay A
85-x.FwdDir_DEF_Pilot & &
[85.DEF.t_DPU] 85-x.Op_DEF 85-x.Op_DEF [85.DEF.t_DPU]
Relay B
Figure 3.10-4 Simple schematic of DEF (permissive scheme)
SIG Trp 0ms [85.DEF.t_DPU]+200ms >=1
SIG 52b_PhA
& & >=1
SIG 52b_PhB &
[85.DEF.t_DPU]+200ms 0ms
SIG 52b_PhC
SIG 85-x.Valid_Recv_DEF
&
SIG FD.Pkp 85-x.Send_DEF
SIG 85-x.FwdDir_DEF_Pilot &
SIG 85-x.RevDir_DEF_Pilot
&
&
SIG 85-x.Valid_Recv_DEF t1 t2
&
SIG FD.Pkp
SET [85.Opt_PilotMode]=PUTT >=1

&
SIG 85-x.DEF.On
&
& 85-x.Op_DEF
[85.DEF.t_DPU] >=1
&
EN [85.DEF.En_IndepCh]
Figure 3.10-5 Logic diagram of DEF (permissive scheme)
t1: pickup time delay of current reversal

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
t2: dropoff time delay of current reversal
When adopting independent pilot channel 2, settings of t1 [85.t_DPU_CR2] and t2

[85.t_DDO_CR2] should be considered individually from channel 1.
When sharing pilot channel 1 with pilot distance protection, t1 and t2 are the settings
[85.t_DPU_CR1] and [85.t_DDO_CR1] respectively.
When independent pilot channel is used ([85.DEF.En_IndepCh]=1) or underreach mode is used

([85.Opt_PilotMode]=PUTT), pilot directional earth-fault protection will use independent pilot
channel 2, pilot directional earth-fault protection could be enabled to block AR by logic setting
[85.DEF.En_BlkAR] when it operates. If pilot directional earth-fault protection share pilot channel 1
([85.DEF.En_IndepCh]=0) with pilot distance protection, the logic setting [85.DEF.En_BlkAR] will
be invalid.
3.10.2.2 Blocking
Permissive scheme has high security, but it relies on pilot channel seriously. Pilot directional
earth-fault protection will not operate when there is an internal fault with abnormal channel.
Blocking scheme could be considered as an alternative.
Blocking scheme sends blocking signal when fault detector picks up and zero-sequence forward
element does not operate or both zero-sequence forward element and zero-sequence reverse
element do not operate. Pilot directional earth-fault protection will operate if forward directional
zero-sequence overcurrent element operates and not receiving blocking signal.
M
EM A Fault B EN
N
Relay A Relay B
FD.Pkp FD.Pkp
& &
85-x.RevDir_DEF_Pilot & & 85-x.RevDir_DEF_Pilot
85-x.FwdDir_DEF_Pilot 85-x.FwdDir_DEF_Pilot
& &
& 85-x.Op_DEF 85-x.Op_DEF &
[85.DEF.t_DPU] [85.DEF.t_DPU]
Figure 3.10-6 Simple schematic of blocking

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG Trp 0ms [85.DEF.t_DPU]+200ms >=1
SIG 52b_PhA
& >=1
SIG 52b_PhB &
85-x.Send_DEF
SIG 52b_PhC
SIG 85-x.FwdDir_DEF_Pilot &
SIG 85-x.RevDir_DEF_Pilot &

&
SIG 85-x.Valid_Recv_DEF [85.DEF.t_DPU] 85-x.Op_DEF
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG 85-x.DEF.On
Figure 3.10-7 Logic diagram of DEF (Blocking scheme)
When DEF shares pilot channel 1 with pilot distance protection, time delay of pilot directional
earth-fault protection will change from the setting [85.DEF.t_DPU] to the setting
[85.t_DPU_Blocking1].
Because the time delay of pilot directional earth-fault protection has enough margin for current
reversal, so blocking scheme should not consider the current reversal condition.
For blocking scheme, pilot directional earth-fault protection will operate when there is an internal
fault with abnormal channel, however, it is possible that pilot directional earth-fault protection issue
an undesired trip when there is an external fault with abnormal channel.
3.10.2.3 Unblocking
Permissive scheme will operate only when it receives permissive signal from the remote end.
However, it may not receive permissive signal from the remote end when pilot channel fails. For
this case, pilot directional earth-fault protection can adopt unblocking scheme. Under normal
conditions, the signaling equipment works in the pilot frequency, and when the device operates to
send permissive signal, the signaling equipment will be switched to high frequency. While the
channel is blocked, the signaling equipment will receive neither pilot frequency signal nor high
frequency signal. The signaling equipment will provide a contact to the device as unblocking signal.
When the device receives unblocking signal from the signaling equipment, it will recognize
channel failure, and unblocking signal will be taken as permissive signal temporarily.
The unblocking scheme can only be used together with permissive scheme.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
EN [85.En_Unblocking2] &
&
SIG 85-x.Unblocking2 & 85-x.Unblocking2 Valid
[85.t_Unblocking2] 0ms
SIG Selection of multi-phase >=1
EN [85.Opt_PilotCh2]
SIG Pilot DEF forward detection
Figure 3.10-8 Logic diagram for unblocking
3.10.2.4 Current Reversal
The reach of directional earth-fault protection is difficult to define. There may have problem for
pilot direction earth-fault protection applied on parallel line arrangement due to current reversal
phenomenon. Current reversal blocking logic using time delay method is adopted in the device. It
is the same logic as pilot distance protection. Please refer to section 3.9.2.6 for details. The only
difference is that different signal receive terminal is used if independent channel is selected.
3.10.2.5 CB Echo
When CB Echo logic is applied for DEF, the device will initiate sending a pulse of permissive signal
if signal receive condition is met during CB is in open position.
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG 52b_PhA
&
>=1
SIG 52b_PhB
SIG 52b_PhC
SIG 85-x Valid_Recv_DEF

&
& [85.DEF.t_DPU]+200ms 0ms &
EN 85-x.DEF.On 85-x Send_DEF
EN 85.DEF.En_IndepCh
Figure 3.10-9 Simplified CB Echo logic for POTT

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
85
85-x.DEF.En1 85-x.DEF.On
85-x.DEF.En2 85-x.Op_DEF
85-x.DEF.Blk 85-x.DEF_BlkAR
85-x.Rcv1
85-x.Rcv2
85-x.ExTrp
85-x.Unblocking1
85-x.Unblocking2
3.10.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of pilot directional earth-fault protection

Pilot directional earth-fault protection x enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
1 85-x.DEF.En1
input or programmable logic etc. (x=1 or 2)
Pilot directional earth-fault protection x enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
2 85-x.DEF.En2
Pilot directional earth-fault protection x blocking input, it is triggered from binary
3 85-x.DEF.Blk
Input signal of indicating that pilot channel 1 is abnormal for pilot directional
4 85-x.Abnor_Ch1
earth-fault protection x (x=1 or 2)
Input signal of indicating that pilot channel 2 is abnormal for pilot directional
5 85-x.Abnor_Ch2
Input signal of receiving permissive signal via channel 1 for pilot directional
6 85-x.Recv1
Input signal of receiving permissive signal via channel 2 for pilot directional
7 85-x.Recv2
Input signal of initiating sending permissive signal from external tripping signal
8 85-x.ExTrp
(x=1 or 2)
9 85-x.Unblocking1 Unblocking signal 1 for pilot directional earth-fault protection x (x=1 or 2)
1 85-x.DEF.On Pilot directional earth-fault protection x is enabled. (x=1 or 2)
2 85-x.Op_DEF Pilot directional earth-fault protection x operates. (x=1 or 2)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3 85-x.DEF_BlkAR Pilot directional earth-fault protection x operates to block AR. (x=1 or 2)

Output signal of sending permissive signal 1 for pilot directional earth-fault
4 85-x.Send1 protection x when pilot directional earth-fault protection sharing pilot channel 1
with pilot distance protection (x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending permissive signal 2 for pilot directional earth-fault
5 85-x.Send2 protection x when pilot directional earth-fault protection adopting independent pilot
channel 2 (x=1 or 2)
3.10.5 Settings
Table 3.10-2 Settings of pilot directional earth-fault protection

Enabling/disabling pilot directional
earth-fault protection
1 85.DEF.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling pilot directional
earth-fault protection operate to
block AR
2 85.DEF.En_BlkAR 0 or 1 0: selective phase tripping and not
blocking AR
1: three-phase tripping and blocking
AR
Enabling/disabling independent
channel for pilot directional
0: pilot directional earth-fault
3 85.DEF.En_IndepCh 0 or 1
protection sharing same channel
with pilot distance protection
1: pilot directional earth-fault
adopting independent pilot channel
Enabling/disabling unblocking
scheme for pilot DEF via pilot
4 85.En_Unblocking2 0 or 1 channel 2
0: disable
1: enable
Current setting of pilot directional
5 85.DEF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
Time delay of pilot directional
6 85.DEF.t_DPU 0.001~10.000 0.001 s
Time delay pickup for current
reversal logic when pilot directional
7 85.t_DPU_CR2 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
earth-fault protection adopts
independent pilot channel 2

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Time delay dropoff for current
reversal logic when pilot directional
8 85.t_DDO_CR2 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
earth-fault protection adopts
Table 3.10-3 Internal settings of pilot distance protection

Pickup time delay of unblocking scheme for pilot
1 85.t_Unblocking2 0.2 s
channel 2
Option of PLC channel for pilot channel 2
2 85.Opt_PilotCh2 1 0: phase-to-phase channel
1: phase-to-ground channel
3.11 Current Direction

Overcurrent protection is widely used in the power system as backup protection, but in some
cases, the direction of current is necessary to aid to complete the selective tripping. As shown
below:
L M N
EM C D A B EN
Fault
Figure 3.11-1 Line fault description
When line LM has an earth fault, the fault currents flowing through the relay A and the relay D are
of similar magnitude in most cases. It is desirable that the fault is isolated from the power system
by tripping the circuit breaker C and circuit breaker D. Hence, the overcurrent protection of relay A
and relay D require to associate with current direction to fulfill selective tripping.
Directional earth fault protection has a time delay due to coordinate with that of downstream so it
cannot clear the fault quickly. Pilot directional earth-fault protection, which is fulfilled by directional
earth fault element on both ends, it can maintain fast operation and achieve high sensitivity to
detect high resistance fault.
The module computes direction of phase current and phase-to-phase current, zero-sequence
current and negative-sequence current.
The direction of phase current and phase-to-phase current equips with an under-voltage direction
function to ensure that phase or phase-to-phase overcurrent protection has explicit directionality
when the polarized voltage is too low for close up fault.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
The direction of zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current direction equips with an
impedance compensation function to ensure that zero-sequence or negative-sequence
overcurrent protection has explicit directionality when the zero-sequence voltage or the
negative-sequence voltage is too low.
3.11.2.1 Phase/Phase-to-phase Current Direction
By setting the characteristic angle [RCA_OC] to determine the most sensitive forward angle of
phase current and phase-to-phase current, power value is calculated using phase current with
phase polarized voltage or phase-to-phase current with phase-to-phase polarized voltage to
determine the direction of phase current or phase-to-phase current respectively in forward
direction or reverse direction. When the power value is zero, neither forward direction nor reverse
direction is considered. As shown below:
jX
U
φ
θ I
R
O
Forward direction
Reverse direction
Figure 3.11-2 Vector diagram of current and voltage
Where:
φ is the setting [RCA_OC]
θ is the phase angle between polarized voltage and current
The power value is calculated as below:
P=U×[I×COS(θ-φ)]
1. If P>0, the current direction polarized by U is forward direction
2. If P<0, the current direction polarized by U is reverse direction
From above diagram can be seen, when θ=φ, P reaches to the maximum value. It is considered
as the most sensitive forward direction. Hence, φ is called as sensitivity angle of phase
overcurrent protection.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
1. Polarized voltage of phase or phase-to-phase current direction
In the event of asymmetrical fault, because phase or phase-to-phase voltage may decrease to
very low voltage whereas positive-sequence voltage does not, the polarized voltage of phase or
phase-to-phase current direction uses positive-sequence voltage to avoid wrong direction due to
too low polarized voltage. Therefore, using positive-sequence voltage as polarized voltage can
ensure that the direction determination has no dead zone for asymmetrical fault. For symmetric
fault, if positive-sequence voltage decreases to 15%Un, the device uses memorized
positive-sequence voltage as polarized voltage, the memorized positive-sequence voltage is 1.5
cycles pre-fault positive-sequence voltage.
2. Phase or phase-to-phase current direction under normal polarized voltage condition
When using normal polarized voltage to calculate phase and phase-to-phase current direction,
there are total twelve direction determination algorithm including forward direction and reverse
direction.
Table 3.11-1 Direction description
Direction Polarized Voltage Current

Forward direction U1a Ia
Phase A
Reverse direction U1a Ia
Forward direction U1b Ib
Phase B
Reverse direction U1b Ib
Forward direction U1c Ic
Phase C
Reverse direction U1c Ic
Forward direction U1ab Iab
Phase AB
Reverse direction U1ab Iab
Forward direction U1bc Ibc
Phase BC
Reverse direction U1bc Ibc
Forward direction U1ca Ica
Phase CA
Reverse direction U1ca Ica
3. Phase or phase-to-phase current direction for under-voltage conditions
When the symmetrical fault occurs on a power system, positive-sequence voltage may reduce to
less than 0.15Un, the device will switch to phase or phase-to-phase current direction for
under-voltage condition. The 1.5 cycle pre-fault positive-sequence voltage is used as polarized
voltage with reverse threshold to ensure stable direction decision when three-phase voltage goes
to approximately zero due to close up fault.
At first, the threshold is forward offset before direction is determined, and the threshold will be
reversed offset after direction is determined.
3.11.2.2 Zero-sequence/Negative-sequence Current Direction
By setting the characteristic angle [RCA_ROC] and [RCA_NegOC] to determine the most
sensitive forward angle of zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current, power value is
calculated using zero-sequence current with zero-sequence voltage or negative-sequence current

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
with negative-sequence voltage to determine the direction of zero-sequence current and

negative-sequence current respectively in forward direction or reverse direction.
When the power value is between 0 and -0.1In, neither forward direction nor reverse direction is
considered.
jX 3U0
θ-180°
-3I0
φ
R
O
3I0
θ Reverse direction
Forward direction
Figure 3.11-3 Vector diagram of zero-sequence power
Vector diagram of negative-sequence power is similar to that of zero-sequence power.
Where:
φ is the setting [RCA_ROC] or the setting [RCA_NegOC]
θ is the phase angle between zero/negative-sequence voltage and zero/negative-sequence

current
3I0: calculated zero-sequence current by vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic
The power value is calculated as below:
P=U×[I×COS(θ-φ)]
 If P>0, the direction of zero /negative-sequence current is reverse direction
 If P<-0.1InVA, the direction of zero /negative-sequence current is forward direction
1. The direction of zero-sequence current
Calculating the power value using zero-sequence current (3I0) and zero-sequence voltage (3U0)
to determine the direction of zero-sequence current
According to the equation:

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
The zero-sequence current and the zero-sequence voltage can be gained by calculation
Zero-sequence power is: P=3U0×[3I0×COS(θ-φ)]
2. The direction of negative-sequence current
Calculating the power value using negative-sequence current (3I2) and negative-sequence
voltage (3U2) to determine the direction of negative-sequence current
According to the equation:
The negative-sequence current and the negative-sequence voltage can be gained by calculation
Negative-sequence power is: P=3U2×[3I2×COS(θ-φ)]
3. The direction of zero-sequence/negative-sequence current with impedance compensation
When zero-sequence impedance or negative-sequence impedance behind the device is very

small, if the fault in forward direction happens, the measured zero-sequence voltage or
negative-sequence voltage by the device may be relatively small to determine correct direction. In
order to solve this problem, compensated zero-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage
are used for power calculation.
The compensation formula is as follows:
is the setting [Z0_Comp], which cannot exceed the total zero-sequence impedance of
the protected line
is the setting [Z2_Comp], which cannot exceed the total negative-sequence impedance
of the protected line

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
DIR
FwdDir_ROC
RevDir_ROC
FwdDir_NegOC
RevDir_NegOC
FwdDir_A
FwdDir_B
FwdDir_C
RevDir_A
RevDir_B
RevDir_C
FwdDir_AB
FwdDir_BC
FwdDir_CA
RevDir_AB
RevDir_BC
RevDir_CA
3.11.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.11-2 I/O signals of current direction

1 FwdDir_ROC The forward direction of zero-sequence power
2 RevDir_ROC The reverse direction of zero-sequence power
3 FwdDir_NegOC The forward direction of negative-sequence power
4 RevDir_NegOC The reverse direction of negative-sequence power
5 FwdDir_A The forward direction of phase-A current
6 FwdDir_B The forward direction of phase-B current
7 FwdDir_C The forward direction of phase-C current
8 RevDir_A The reverse direction of phase-A current
9 RevDir_B The reverse direction of phase-B current
10 RevDir_C The reverse direction of phase-C current
11 FwdDir_AB The forward direction of phase-AB current
12 FwdDir_BC The forward direction of phase-BC current
13 FwdDir_CA The forward direction of phase-CA current

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
14 RevDir_AB The reverse direction of phase-AB current

15 RevDir_BC The reverse direction of phase-BC current
16 RevDir_CA The reverse direction of phase-CA current
3.11.5 Settings
Table 3.11-3 Settings of current direction

The characteristic angle of directional
1 RCA_OC 30.00~89.00 0.01 deg
phase overcurrent element
The characteristic angle of directional earth
2 RCA_ROC 30.00~89.00 0.01 deg
fault element
3 RCA_NegOC 30.00~89.00 0.01 deg
negative-sequence overcurrent element
The compensated zero-sequence
4 Z0_Comp (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
impedance
The compensated negative-sequence
5 Z2_Comp (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 ohm
impedance
3.12 Phase Overcurrent Protection

When a fault occurs in power system, usually the fault current would be very large and phase
overcurrent protection operates monitoring fault current is then adopted to avoid further damage to
protected equipment. Directional element can be selected to improve the sensitivity and selectivity
of the protection. For application on feeder-transformer circuits, second harmonic can also be
selected to block phase overcurrent protection to avoid the effect of inrush current on the
protection.
Phase overcurrent protection has following functions:
1. Four-stage phase overcurrent protection with independent logic, current and time delay
settings.
2. All stages can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic. The inverse-time

characteristic is selectable among IEC and ANSI/IEEE standard inverse-time characteristics,
and a user-defined inverse-time curve is available for stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection.
3. Direction control element can be selected to control each stage phase overcurrent protection
with three options: no direction, forward direction and reverse direction.
4. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of phase overcurrent protection.
3.12.2.1 Overview
Phase overcurrent protection consists of following three elements:

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
1. Overcurrent element: each stage is independent overcurrent element.
2. Direction control element: one direction control element shared by all overcurrent elements,
and each overcurrent element can individually select protection direction.
3. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent
elements and each phase overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal from
harmonic element as a blocking input.
3.12.2.2 Phase Overcurrent Element
The operation criterion for each stage of overcurrent element is:
Ip> [50/51Pi.I_Set] Equation 3.12-1
Where:
Ip is measured phase current.
[50/51Pi.I_Set] is the current setting of stage i of overcurrent element. (i=1, 2, 3, or 4)
3.12.2.3 Direction Control Element
Please refer to section 3.11 for details.
3.12.2.4 Harmonic Blocking Element
When phase overcurrent protection is used to protect feeder-transformer circuits harmonic

blocking function can be selected for each stage of phase overcurrent element by configuring logic
setting [50/51Pi.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent maloperation due to inrush current.
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of any phase
current is greater than the setting [50/51P.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x overcurrent element if corresponding logic setting [50/51Pi.En_Hm2_Blk] enabled.
Operation criterion:
IP_2nd>[50/51P. K_Hm2]×IP Equation 3.12-2
Where:
is second harmonic of phase current
is fundamental component of phase current.
[50/51P.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of any phase current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.1In), then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.12.2.5 Characteristic Curve
All stages can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic, inverse-time operating

characteristic is as follows.
Equation 3.12-3
Where:
Iset is current setting [50/51Pi.I_Set].
Tp is time multiplier setting [50/51Pi.TMS].
α is a constant.
K is a constant.
C is a constant.
I is measured phase current from line CT
The user can select the operating characteristic from various inverse-time characteristic curves by
setting [50/51Pi.Opt_Curve], and parameters of available characteristics for selection are shown in
the following table.
Table 3.12-1 Inverse-time curve parameters
50/51Pi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic K α C

DefTime Definite time
IECN IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0.02 0
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0
ANSIE ANSI Extremely inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491
ANSI ANSI Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185
ANSIM ANSI Moderately inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114
ANSILTE ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25
ANSILTV ANSI Long-time very inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712
ANSILT ANSI Long-time inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185
UserDefine Programmable user-defined
If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may set [50/51Pi.Opt_Curve] as
“UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic with constants α, K and C. (only
stage 1)
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than setting

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
[50/51Pi.tmin], then the operating time of the protection changes to the value of setting
[50/51Pi.tmin] automatically.
Define-time or inverse-time phase overcurrent protection drops off instantaneously after fault
current disappears.
50/51Pi
50/51Pi.En1 50/51Pi.On
50/51Pi.En2 50/51Pi.StA
50/51Pi.Blk 50/51Pi.StB
50/51Pi.StC
50/51Pi.St
50/51Pi.Op
3.12.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.12-2 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection

Stage i of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
1 50/51Pi.En1
input or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Stage i of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
2 50/51Pi.En2
Stage i of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
3 50/51Pi.Blk
1 50/51Pi.On Stage i of phase overcurrent protection is enabled. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
2 50/51Pi.Op Stage i of phase overcurrent protection operates. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
3 50/51Pi.St Stage i of phase overcurrent protection starts. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
4 50/51Pi.StA Stage i of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase, i=1, 2, 3, 4).
5 50/51Pi.StB Stage i of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase, i=1, 2, 3, 4).
6 50/51Pi.StC Stage i of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase, i=1, 2, 3, 4).

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.12.5 Logic
EN [50/51Pi.En]
&
SIG 50/51Pi.En1 &
50/51Pi.On
SIG 50/51Pi.En2
>=1
SIG 50/51Pi.Blk 50/51Pi.St
SET Ia>[50/51Pi.I_Set] &

50/51Pi.StA
SET Ib>[50/51Pi.I_Set] &

50/51Pi.StB
SET Ic>[50/51Pi.I_Set] &

50/51Pi.StC
SET [50/51Pi.Opt_Dir]=Forward &
SIG Forward DIR
SET [50/51Pi.Opt_Dir]=Reverse & >=1

>=1
SIG Reverse DIR
SIG VTS.Alm &
EN [50/51Pi.En_VTS_Blk]
SET [50/51Pi.Opt_Dir]=Non_Directional
SIG Three phase currents 2nd Hm Detect & &
SIG IP_2nd>[ 50/51P.K_Hm2]×IP
SET [50/51Pi.En_Hm2_Blk]
SIG 50/51Pi.On &
SIG FD.Pkp
SET [50/51Pi.Opt_Curve]=DefTime &

[50/51Pi.t_Op] 0 >=1
50/51Pi.Op
& Timer
t
SIG 50/51Pi.St
Figure 3.12-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection
i=1, 2, 3, 4

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.12.6 Settings
Table 3.12-3 Settings of phase overcurrent protection

Setting of second harmonic
1 50/51P.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001 component for blocking phase
overcurrent elements
Current setting for stage i of phase
2 50/51Pi.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
overcurrent protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Time delay for stage i of phase
3 50/51Pi.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling stage i of phase
4 50/51Pi.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/Disabling auto-reclosing
blocked when stage i of phase
overcurrent protection operates (i=1,
5 50/51Pi.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/Disabling stage i of phase
overcurrent protection is blocked by
6 50/51Pi.En_VTS_Blk 0 or 1 VT circuit failure (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
Non_Directional
Direction option for stage i of phase
7 50/51Pi.Opt_Dir Forward
Reverse
Enabling/disabling second harmonic
blocking for stage i of phase
8 50/51Pi.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1 overcurrent protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
Option of characteristic curve for
IECST
9 50/51Pi.Opt_Curve stage i of phase overcurrent
IECLT
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
UserDefine
Time multiplier setting for stage i of
10 50/51Pi.TMS 0.010~200.000 0.001 inverse-time phase overcurrent
Minimum operating time for stage i
11 50/51Pi.tmin 0.000~20.000 0.001 s of inverse-time phase overcurrent
Constant “α” for stage 1 of
customized inverse-time
12 50/51P1.Alpha 0.010~5.000 0.001
characteristic phase overcurrent
protection
Constant “C” for stage 1 of
13 50/51P1.C 0.000~20.000 0.001
protection
Constant “K” for stage 1 of
14 50/51P1.K 0.050~20.000 0.001
protection
3.13 Earth Fault Protection

During normal operation of power system, there is trace residual current, whereas a fault current
flows to earth will result in greater residual current. Therefore, residual current is adopted for the
calculation of earth fault protection.
In order to improve the selectivity of earth fault protection in power grid with multiple power
sources, directional element can be selected to control earth fault protection. For application on
line-transformer unit, second harmonic also can be selected to block earth fault protection to avoid
the effect of sympathetic current on the protection.
Earth fault protection has following functions:
1. Four-stage earth fault protection with independent logic, current and time delay settings.

characteristic is selectable, among IEC and ANSI/IEEE standard inverse-time characteristics,
and a user-defined inverse-time curve is available for stage 1 of earth fault protection.
3. Directional element can be selected to control each stage of earth fault protection with three

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
options: no direction, forward direction and reverse direction.
4. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of earth fault protection.
5. Stage 2, 3, 4 of earth fault protection can enable short time delay to improve operation speed.
3.13.2.1 Overview
Earth fault protection consists of following three elements:
1. Overcurrent element: each stage equipped with one independent overcurrent element.
2. Directional control element: one direction control element shared by all overcurrent elements,
and each overcurrent element can individually select protection direction.
3. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent
elements and each overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal of harmonic
blocking element as a blocking input.
3.13.2.2 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element
The operation criterion for each stage of earth fault protection is:
3I0>[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] Equation 3.13-1
Where:
3I0 is the calculated residual current.
[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] is the current setting of stage i of earth fault protection. (i=1, 2, 3, or 4)
3.13.2.4 Harmonic Blocking Element
In order to prevent effects of inrush current on earth fault protection, harmonic blocking function
can be selected for each stage of earth fault element by configuring logic setting
[50/51Gi.En_Hm2_Blk].
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of residual

current is greater than the setting [50/51G.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block
stage x of earth fault protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Gi.En_Hm2_Blk] is enabled.
Operation criterion:
I0_2nd>[50/51G. K_Hm2]×I0 Equation 3.13-2
Where:
is second harmonic of residual current
is fundamental component of residual current.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
[50/51G.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.
If fundamental component of residual current is lower than the minimum operating current (0.1In)
then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not operate.
All 4 stages earth fault protection can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic,
and inverse-time operating time curve is as follows.
Equation 3.13-3
Where:
Iset is residual current setting [50/51G.3I0_Set]
Tp is time multiplier setting [50/51Gi.TMS].
K is a constant
C is a constant.
α is a constant.
3I0 is the calculated residual current.
setting [50/51Gi.Opt_Curve], and parameters of available characteristics for selection are shown
in the following table.
50/51Gi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic K α C

UserDefine Programmable User-defined

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may set [50/51Gi.Opt_Curve] as
“UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic, and constants K, α and C with
configuration tool software. (only stage 1)
[50/51Gi.tmin], then the operating time of the protection changes to the value of setting
[50/51Gi.tmin] automatically.
Define-time or inverse-time directional earth-fault protection drops off instantaneously after fault
current disappears.
50/51Gi
50/51Gi.En1 50/51Gi.On
50/51Gi.En2 50/51Gi.On_ShortDly
50/51Gi.Blk 50/51Gi.St
50/51Gi.En_ShortDly 50/51Gi.Op
50/51Gi.Blk_ShortDly
3.13.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.13-2 I/O signals of earth fault protection

Stage i of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
1 50/51Gi.En1
Stage i of earth fault protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
2 50/51Gi.En2
Stage i of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
3 50/51Gi.Blk
or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Short time delay for stage i of earth fault protection enabling input, it is
4 50/51Gi.En_ShortDly
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (i=2, 3, 4)
Short time delay for stage i of earth fault protection blocking input, it is
5 50/51Gi.Blk_ShortDly
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (i=2, 3, 4)
1 50/51Gi.On Stage i of earth fault protection is enabled. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
2 50/51Gi.On_ShortDly Short time delay for stage i of earth fault protection is enabled. (i=2, 3, 4)
3 50/51Gi.St Stage i of earth fault protection starts. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
4 50/51Gi.Op Stage i of earth fault protection operates. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.13.5 Logic
EN [50/51G1.En]
&
SIG 50/51G1.En1 &
50/51G1.On
SIG 50/51G1.En2
SIG 50/51G1.Blk
&
SIG FD.Pkp
SET 3I0>[50/51G1.3I0_Set]
EN [50/51G1.En_Abnor_Blk] >=1
SIG No abnormal conditions
&
SET [50/51G1.Opt_Dir]=Forward &

& &
& 50/51G1.St
SIG Forward DIR
>=1
SET [50/51G1.Opt_Dir]=Reverse & >=1
SIG Reverse DIR
SET [50/51G1.Opt_Dir]=Non_Directional
SIG CTS.Alm &
EN [50/51G1.En_CTS_Blk]
>=1
SIG Three phase currents 2nd Hm Detect &
SIG I0_2nd>[50/51G. K_Hm2]×I0
SET [50/51G1.En_Hm2_Blk]
SIG 50/51G1.St & Timer

t
>=1
& 50/51G1.Op
[50/51G1.t_Op] 0
SET [50/51G1.Opt_Curve]=DefTime
Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of stage 1 of earth fault protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
EN [50/51Gi.En_ShortDly]
&
SIG 50/51Gi.En_ShortDly 50/51Gi.On_ShortDly
SIG 50/51Gi.Blk_ShortDly
EN [50/51Gi.En]
&
SIG 50/51Gi.En1 &
50/51Gi.On
SIG 50/51Gi.En2
SIG 50/51Gi.Blk
&
SIG FD.Pkp
SET 3I0>[50/51Gi.3I0_Set]
EN [50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk] >=1
SIG No abnormal conditions
&
SET [50/51Gi.Opt_Dir]=Forward &

& &
& 50/51Gi.St
SIG Forward DIR
>=1
SET [50/51Gi.Opt_Dir]=Reverse & >=1
SIG Reverse DIR
SET [50/51Gi.Opt_Dir]=Non_Directional
SIG CTS.Alm &
EN [50/51Gi.En_CTS_Blk]
>=1
SIG I3P 2nd Hm Detect &
SET [50/51Gi.En_Hm2_Blk]
SIG 50/51Gi.St & Timer

t
& >=1
[50/51Gi.t_Op] 0 50/51Gi.Op
SET [50/51Gi.Opt_Curve]=DefTime
&
[50/51Gi.t_ShortDly] 0
SIG 50/51Gi.On_ShortDly
Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of stage i of earth fault protection
i=2, 3, 4

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Abnormal condition 1: when the system is under pole disagreement condition, for 1-pole AR, earth
fault protection will operate. If the logic setting [50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “1”, the stage x of
earth fault protection will be blocked. If the logic setting [50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “0”, earth
fault protection is not controlled by direction element.
Abnormal condition 2: When manually closing circuit breaker, three phases of the circuit breaker
maybe not operate simultaneously, and SOTF protection should operate. If the logic setting
[50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “1”, the stage x of earth fault protection will be blocked. If the
logic setting [50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “0”, earth fault protection is not controlled by
direction element.
Abnormal condition 3: VT circuit failure. If the logic setting [50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “1”,
the stage x of earth fault protection will be blocked. If the logic setting [50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk] is
set as “0”, earth fault protection is not controlled by direction element.
3.13.6 Settings
Table 3.13-3 Settings of earth fault protection

Setting of second harmonic
1 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001 component for blocking earth fault
elements
Current setting for stage i of earth
2 50/51Gi.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
fault protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Time delay for stage i of earth
3 50/51Gi.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling stage i of earth
4 50/51Gi.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
blocked when stage i of earth fault
5 50/51Gi.En_BlkAR 0 or 1 protection operates (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
Non_Directional
Direction option for stage i of
6 50/51Gi.Opt_Dir Forward
earth fault protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Reverse
Enabling/disabling second
harmonic blocking for stage i of
7 50/51Gi.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1 earth fault protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling blocking for
8 50/51Gi.En_Abnor_Blk 0 or 1
stage i of earth fault protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

under abnormal conditions (i=1, 2,
3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
stage i of earth fault protection
under CT failure conditions (i=1,
9 50/51Gi.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1
2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
ANSIE
10 50/51Gi.Opt_Curve stage i of earth fault protection
ANSIV
(i=1, 2, 3, 4)
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
UserDefine
Time multiplier setting for stage i
11 50/51Gi.TMS 0.010~200.000 0.001 of inverse-time earth fault
Minimum operating time for stage
12 50/51Gi.tmin 0.050~20.000 0.001 s i of inverse-time earth fault
13 50/51G1.Alpha 0.010~5.000 0.001
characteristic earth fault
protection
14 50/51G1.C 0.000~20.000 0.001
protection
15 50/51G1.K 0.050~20.000 0.001
protection
16 50/51Gi.t_ShortDly 0.000~20.000 0.001 s Short time delay for stage i of

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

earth fault protection (i=2, 3, 4)
Enabling/disabling short time
delay for stage i of earth fault
17 50/51Gi.En_ShortDly 0 or 1 protection (i=2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
3.14 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection

When an asymmetric short-circuit fault happens to the power system or the power system is under
asymmetrical three-phase operation, the power system will generate negative-sequence current.
Negative-sequence overcurrent will cause generator, motor and other equipments serious
damage, so negative-sequence overcurrent protection is used to prevent them. In order to make
negative-sequence overcurrent protection own selectivity in multiplex power supply system,
negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be controlled by direction control element.
Negative-sequence overcurrent has following functions:
1. Four-stage negative-sequence overcurrent protection with independent logic, current and

time delay settings.
2. Each stage can be selected to block AR by the setting and stage 4 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection can be selected to operate to trip or alarm.

characteristic is selectable, among IEC and ANSI/IEEE standard inverse-time characteristics,
and a user-defined inverse-time curve is available for stage 1 of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
4. Directional element can be selected to control each stage of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection with three options: no direction, forward direction and reverse direction.
5. CT circuit failure can be selected to block each stage of negative-sequence overcurrent

protection.
6. Each stage can select independent releasing threshold based on the ratio of
negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current to prevent negative-sequence
overcurrent protection from undesired operation for three-phase fault with asymmetrical
position exchange of three-phase.
3.14.2.1 Overview
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection consists of following three elements:
1. Fault detector: each stage is controlled by the fault detector based on negative-sequence

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
current. Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can operate when the fault detector based
on negative-sequence current operate and it is enabled.
2. Overcurrent element: each stage is equipped with one independent overcurrent element.
3. Directional control element: one direction control element is shared by all overcurrent
elements, and each overcurrent element can individually select protection direction.
4. Ratio element: each stage is equipped with one independent ratio element (I2/I1), usually the
same setting is applied for all stages.
3.14.2.2 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Element
The operation criterion for each stage of negative-sequence overcurrent protection is:
I2>[50/51Qi.I2_Set]
& Equation 3.14-1
I2/I1>[50/51Qi.I2/I1_Set]
Where:
I2 is the calculated negative-sequence current.
I1 is the calculaged positive-sequence current.
[50/51Qi.I2_Set] is the current setting of stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (i=1,

2, 3 or 4)
All 4 stages negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be selected as definite-time or

inverse-time characteristic, and inverse-time operating time curve is as follows.
Equation 3.14-2
Where:
Iset is negative-sequence curren setting [50/51Qi.I2_Set].
Tp is time multiplier setting [50/51Qi.TMS].
K is a constant
C is a constant.
α is a constant.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
I2 is the calculated negative-sequence current.
setting [50/51Qi.Opt_Curve], and parameters of available characteristics for selection are shown
in the following table.
50/51Qi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic K α C

UserDefine Programmable User-defined
If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may set [50/51Qi.Opt_Curve] as
“UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic, and constants K, α and C with
configuration tool software. (only stage 1)
[50/51Qi.tmin], then the operating time of the protection changes to the value of setting
[50/51Qi.tmin] automatically.
Define-time or inverse-time directional negative-sequence overcurrent protection drops off

instantaneously after fault current disappears.
50/51Qi
50/51Gi.En1 50/51Qi.On
50/51Gi.En2 50/51Qi.St
50/51Qi.Blk 50/51Qi.Op
50/51Q4.Alm

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.14.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.14-2 I/O signals of negative-sequence overcurrent protection

Stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is
1 50/51Qi.En1
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is
2 50/51Qi.En2
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered
3 50/51Qi.Blk
from binary input or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
1 50/51Qi.On Stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection is enabled. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
2 50/51Qi.St Stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection starts. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
3 50/51Qi.Op Stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection operates. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
4 50/51Q4.Alm Stage 4 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection operates to alarm.
3.14.5 Logic
EN [50/51Qi.En]
&
SIG 50/51Qi.En1 &
50/51Qi.On
SIG 50/51Qi.En2
SIG 50/51Qi.Blk
SET I2/I1>[50/51Qi.I2/I1_Set] &
SET I2>[50/51Qi.I2_Set]
EN [50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk] >=1
& & &
SIG No abnormal conditions 50/51Qi.St
& Timer
t
50/51Qi.Op
t
SET [50/51Qi.Opt_Dir]=Forward &
SIG Forward DIR

>=1
SET [50/51Qi.Opt_Dir]=Reverse & >=1
SIG Reverse DIR
SET [50/51Qi.Opt_Dir]=Non_Directional
SI G CTS.Alm &
EN [50/51Qi.En_CTS_Blk]
SI G FD.NOC.Pkp
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
i=1, 2, 3

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Abnormal condition 1: when the system is under pole disagreement condition, for 1-pole AR,
negative-sequence overcurrent protection will operate. If the logic setting [50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk]
is set as “1”, the stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection will be blocked. If the logic
setting [50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “0”, negative-sequence overcurrent protection is not
controlled by direction element.
Abnormal condition 2: When manually closing circuit breaker, three phases of the circuit breaker
maybe not operate simultaneously, and SOTF protection should operate. If the logic setting
[50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “1”, the stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection will
be blocked. If the logic setting [50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “0”, negative-sequence
overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction element.
Abnormal condition 3: VT circuit failure. If the logic setting [50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “1”,
the stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection will be blocked. If the logic setting
[50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk] is set as “0”, negative-sequence overcurrent protection is not controlled
by direction element.
EN [50/51Q4.En]
&
SIG 50/51Q4.En1 &
50/51Q4.On
SIG 50/51Q4.En2
SIG 50/51Q4.Blk
SET I2/I1>[50/51Q4.I2/I1_Set] &
SET I2>[50/51Q4.I2_Set]
EN [50/51Q4.En_Abnor_Blk] >=1
& & &
SIG No abnormal conditions 50/51Q4.St
&
SET [50/51Q4.Opt_Dir]=Forward &
SIG Forward DIR

>=1
SET [50/51Q4.Opt_Dir]=Reverse & >=1
SIG Reverse DIR
& Timer
SET [50/51Q4.Opt_Dir]=Non_Directional t
50/51Q4.Alm
t
SIG CTS.Alm &
EN [50/51Q4.En_CTS_Blk]
& Timer
SIG FD.NOC.Pkp t
50/51Q4.Op
t
EN [50/51Q4.En_Trp]
Figure 3.14-2 Logic diagram of stage 4 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.14.6 Settings
Table 3.14-3 Settings of negative-sequence overcurrent protection

Current setting for stage i of
1 50/51Qi.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A negative-sequence overcurrent
Ratio coefficient (I2/I1) for stage i of
2 50/51Qi.I2/I1_Set 0.00~1.00 0.01 negative-sequence overcurrent
Time delay for stage i of
3 50/51Qi.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s negative-sequence overcurrent
Enabling/disabling stage i of
negative-sequence overcurrent
4 50/51Qi.En 0 or 1 protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
blocked when stage i of
5 50/51Qi.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
protection operates (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
Non_Directional Direction option for stage i of
6 50/51Qi.Opt_Dir Forward negative-sequence overcurrent
Reverse protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
stage i of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection under
7 50/51Qi.En_Abnor_Blk 0 or 1
abnormal conditions (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
stage i of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection under CT
8 50/51Qi.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1
failure conditions (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
0: disable
1: enable
DefTime
IECN Option of characteristic curve for
9 50/51Qi.Opt_Curve IECV stage i of negative-sequence
IECE overcurrent protection (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
IECST

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

IECLT
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
UserDefine
10 50/51Qi.TMS 0.010~200.000 0.001 inverse-time negative-sequence
Minimum operating time for stage i
11 50/51Qi.tmin 0.050~20.000 0.001 s of inverse-time negative-sequence
12 50/51Q1.Alpha 0.010~5.000 0.001
characteristic negative-sequence
overcurrent protection
13 50/51Q1.C 0.000~20.000 0.001
14 50/51Q1.K 0.050~20.000 0.001
Enabling/Disabling stage 4 of
15 50/51Q4.En_Trp 0 or 1 protection operate to trip or alarm.
0: alarm
1: trip
3.15 Overcurrent Protection for VT Circuit Failure

When protection VT circuit fails, distance protection will be disabled. As a substitute, definite-time or
inverse-time phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection will be enabled
automatically, if selected, as backup protection of distance protection.

Phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection can be selected as definite-time
or inverse-time characteristic. The inverse-time characteristic is selectable among IEC and

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
ANSI/IEEE standard inverse-time characteristics. Define-time or inverse-time phase overcurrent

protection drops off instantaneously after fault current disappears.
The inverse-time operating characteristic is as follows.
Equation 3.15-1
Where:
Iset is current setting [50PVT.I_Set] or [50GVT.3I0_Set].
Tp is time multiplier setting [50PVT.TMS] or [50GVT.TMS].
α is a constant.
K is a constant.
C is a constant.
I is measured phase current from line CT
setting [50PVT.Opt_Curve] and [50GVT.Opt_Curve], and parameters of available characteristics
for selection are shown in the following table.
[50PVT.Opt_Curve]/[50GVT.Opt_Curve] Time Characteristic K α C

[50PVT.tmin] or [50GVT.tmin], then the operating time of the protection changes to the value of
setting [50PVT.tmin] or [50GVT.tmin] automatically.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
50PVT/50GVT
50PVT.En1 50PVT.On
50PVT.En2 50PVT.Op
50PVT.Blk 50PVT.St
50GVT.En1 50PVT.StA
50GVT.En2 50PVT.StB
50GVT.Blk 50PVT.StC
50GVT.On
50GVT.Op
50GVT.St
3.15.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.15-2 I/O signals of overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure

Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 1, it is triggered
1 50PVT.En1
Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 2, it is triggered
2 50PVT.En2
Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure blocking input, it is triggered
3 50PVT.Blk
Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 1, it is triggered
4 50GVT.En1
Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 2, it is triggered
5 50GVT.En2
Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure blocking input, it is triggered
6 50GVT.Blk
1 50PVT.On Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure is enabled.
2 50PVT.Op Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure operates.
3 50PVT.St Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts.
4 50PVT.StA Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts (A-Phase).
5 50PVT.StB Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts (B-Phase).
6 50PVT.StC Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts (C-Phase).
7 50GVT.On Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure is enabled.
8 50GVT.Op Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure operates.
9 50GVT.St Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.15.5 Logic
SIG 50PVT.En1
&
SIG 50PVT.En2 &
50PVT.On
EN [50PVT.En]
SIG 50PVT.Blk
& >=1
& [50PVT.t_Op] 0ms 50PVT.Op
SIG FD.Pkp
50PVT.St
SIG VTS.Alm
&
50PVT.StA
SET Ia>[50PVT.I_Set]
&
50PVT.StB
SET Ib>[50PVT.I_Set]
&
50PVT.StC
SET Ic>[50PVT.I_Set]
& Timer
t
>=1
& 50PVT.Op
[50PVT.t_Op] 0
SET [50PVT.Opt_Curve]=DefTime
SIG 50GVT.En1
&
SIG 50GVT.En2 &
50GVT.On
EN [50GVT.En]
SIG 50GVT.Blk
&
SIG FD.Pkp
&
SET 3I0>[50GVT.3I0_Set] 50GVT.St
SIG FD.ROC.Pkp &
SIG VTS.Alm
& Timer
t
>=1
& 50GVT.Op
[50GVT.t_Op] 0
SET [50GVT.Opt_Curve]=DefTime
Figure 3.15-1 Logic diagram of overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure
3.15.6 Settings
Table 3.15-3 Settings of overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure

1 50PVT.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting of phase overcurrent

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

protection when VT circuit failure
Time delay of definite-time phase
2 50PVT.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s overcurrent protection when VT
circuit failure
Enabling/disabling phase
overcurrent protection when VT
3 50PVT.En 0 or 1 circuit failure
0: disable
1: enable
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT Option of characteristic curve for
4 50PVT.Opt_Curve ANSIE inverse-time phase overcurrent
ANSIV protection when VT circuit failure
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
Time multiplier setting for
5 50PVT.TMS 0.010~200.000 0.001 inverse-time phase overcurrent
Minimum operating time for
6 50PVT.tmin 0.000~20.000 0.001 s inverse-time phase overcurrent
Current setting of ground
7 50GVT.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A overcurrent protection when VT
circuit failure
Time delay of definite-time ground
8 50GVT.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s overcurrent protection when VT
circuit failure
Enabling/disabling ground
overcurrent protection when VT
9 50GVT.En 0 or 1 circuit failure
0: disable
1: enable
DefTime
IECN
10 50GVT.Opt_Curve inverse-time ground overcurrent
IECV
IECE

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

IECST
IECLT
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
Time multiplier setting for
11 50GVT.TMS 0.010~200.000 0.001 inverse-time ground overcurrent
Minimum operating time for
12 50GVT.tmin 0.000~20.000 0.001 s inverse-time ground overcurrent
3.16 Residual Current SOTF Protection

When the circuit breaker is closed manually or automatically, it is possible to switch on to an

existing fault. This is especially critical if the line in the remote station is grounded, since earth fault
protection would not clear the fault until their time delays had elapsed. In this situation, however,
the fastest possible clearance is desired.
Residual current SOTF (switch onto fault) protection is a complementary function to earth fault
protection. With residual current SOTF protection, a fast trip is achieved for a fault on the line,
when the line is being energized. It shall be responsive to all types of earth faults anywhere within
the protected line, and it shall be enabled for the setting [SOTF.t_En] when the circuit is energized
either manually or via an auto-reclosing system.

Residual current SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay
of [50GSOTF.t_Op_1P] when 1-pole auto-reclosing.
Residual current SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay of
[50GSOTF.t_Op_3P] when 3-pole auto-reclosing or closing manually.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
50GSOTF
50GSOTF.En1 50GSOTF.On
50GSOTF.En2 50GSOTF.Op
50GSOTF.Blk 50GSOTF.St
3.16.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.16-1 I/O signals of residual SOTF protection

Residual current SOTF protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input
1 50GSOTF.En1
Residual current SOTF protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input
2 50GSOTF.En2
Residual current SOTF protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
3 50GSOTF.Blk
1 50GSOTF.On Residual current SOTF protection is enabled.
2 50GSOTF.Op Residual current SOTF protection operates.
3 50GSOTF.St Residual current SOTF protection starts.
3.16.5 Logic
SIG 3-pole AR signal >=1

&
SIG Manual closing signal 100ms 0ms
SET 3I0>[50GSOTF.3I0_Set] & >=1

& 50GSOTF.Op
SIG FD.ROC.Pkp
60ms 0ms
SIG 1-pole AR signal
>=1
SIG 50GSOTF.En1 50GSOTF.St
&
SIG 50GSOTF.En2 &
50GSOTF.On
SIG 50GSOTF.Blk
EN [50GSOTF.En]
Figure 3.16-1 Logic diagram of residual current SOTF protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.16.6 Settings
Table 3.16-2 Settings of residual current SOTF protection

Current setting of residual
1 50GSOTF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
current SOTF protection
Enabling/disabling residual
current SOTF protection
2 50GSOTF.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.17 Voltage Protection

Voltage protection has the function of protecting device against undervoltage and overvoltage.
Both operational states are unfavorable as overvoltage may cause insulation breakdown while
undervoltage may cause stability problem. Each voltage protection function has three individual
stages with respective time delay, but only one stage negative-sequence overvoltage protection is
available. These voltage protection functions can be switched on or off separately. Selectable
definite-time characteristic and multiple inverse-time characteristics are available.
3.17.1 Overvoltage Protection

Abnormal high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in
islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or load rejection of a generator. Even if
compensation reactors are provided to avoid line overvoltage by compensation of the line
capacitance and thus reduction of the overvoltage, the overvoltage will endanger the insulation if
the reactors fail. The line must be de-energized within a very short time.
The overvoltage protection in this device detects the phase voltages Ua, Ub and Uc or the
phase-to-phase voltages Uab, Ubc and Uca with an option of any phase or all phases operation
for output. The overvoltage protection can be used for tripping purpose as well as to initiate
transfer trip, which selectable controlled by local circuit breaker.
Phase overvoltage protection has following functions:
1. Three stages phase overvoltage protection with independent logic, voltage and time delay
settings.
2. Overvoltage protection can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic. The

inverse-time characteristic is selectable, among IEC and ANSI/IEEE standard inverse-time
characteristics.
3. Phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage can be selected for protection calculation.
4. “1-out-of-3” or “3-out-of-3” logic can be selected for protection criterion. (1-out-of-3 means any

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
of three phase voltages, 3-out-of-3 means all three phase voltages)
1. Operation Criterion
Users can select phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage for the protection calculation. If setting
[59Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set to “0”, phase voltage criterion is selected and if [59Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set
to “1”, phase-to-phase voltage criterion is selected.
When phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage is greater than any enabled stage voltage setting,
the stage protection picks up and operates after delay, which will drop off instantaneously when
fault voltage disappears.
 Phase voltage criterion
Two operation criteria of definite-time overvoltage protection are shown as follows, which of them
is applied depending on the logic setting [59Pi.Opt_1P/3P].
UΦ_max>[ 59Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-1
or
Ua>[59Pi.U_Set] & Ub>[59Pi.U_Set] & Uc>[59Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-2
Where:
UΦ_max is the maximum value among three phase-voltage.
Ua, Ub, Uc are three phase voltages.
[59Pi.U_Set] is the setting of stage i of overvoltage protection. (i=1, 2, 3)
When [59Pi.Opt_1P/3P] is set as “1”, “1-out-of-3” logic (Equation 3.17-1) is selected as operation
criterion, and when set as “0”, “3-out-of-3” logic (Equation 3.17-2) is selected.
 Phase-to-phase voltage criterion
Two operation criteria of definite-time overvoltage protection are shown as follows, which of them
UΦΦ_max>[ 59Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-3
or
Uab>[59Pi.U_Set] & Ubc>[59Pi.U_Set] & Uca>[59Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-4
[59Pi.U_Set] is the setting of stage i of overvoltage protection.
2. Characteristic Curve
Phase overvoltage protection can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic, and

inverse-time operating time curve is as follows.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Equation 3.17-5
Where:
Uset is the voltage setting [59Pi.U_Set].
Tp is time multiplier setting [59Pi.TMS].
K is a constant.
C is a constant.
α is a constant.
U is the measured voltage
Operating characteristic of overvoltage protection, can be chosen from definite-time characteristic

and 12 inverse-time characteristics by setting the logic setting [59Pi.Opt_Curve]. The parameters
of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
59Pi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic K α C

[59Pi.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of setting [59Pi.tmin] automatically.
Define-time or inverse-time phase overvoltage protection drops off instantaneously when

measured voltage is lower than reset voltage.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
59Pi
59Pi.En1 59Pi.On
59Pi.En2 59Pi.St
59Pi.Blk 59Pi.St1
59Pi.St2
59Pi.St3
59Pi.Op
59Pi.Alm
59Pi.Op_InitTT
Table 3.17-2 I/O signals of overvoltage protection

Stage i of overvoltage protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input
1 59Pi.En1
or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3)
Stage i of overvoltage protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input
2 59Pi.En2
Stage i of overvoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 59Pi.Blk
programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2, 3)
1 59Pi.On Stage i of overvoltage protection is enabled. (i=1, 2, 3)
2 59Pi.Op Stage i of overvoltage protection operates. (i=1, 2, 3)
3 59Pi.St Stage i of overvoltage protection starts. (i=1, 2, 3)
4 59Pi.St1 Stage i of overvoltage protection starts (A or AB). (i=1, 2, 3)
5 59Pi.St2 Stage i of overvoltage protection starts (B or BC). (i=1, 2, 3)
6 59Pi.St3 Stage i of overvoltage protection starts (C or CA). (i=1, 2, 3)
7 59Pi.Op_InitTT Stage i of overvoltage protection operates to initiate transfer trip. (i=1, 2, 3)
8 59Pi.Alm Stage i of overvoltage protection alarms. (i=1, 2, 3)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.17.1.5 Logic
EN [59Pi.En]
&
SIG 59Pi.En1 &
59Pi.On
SIG 59Pi.En2
SIG 59Pi.Blk
SIG 52b_PhA
&
SIG 52b_PhB & &
SIG 52b_PhC
>=1
59Pi.Op_InitTT
EN [59Pi.En_52b_TT]
&
EN [59Pi.En_TT]
EN [59Pi.Opt_1P/3P]
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG 59Pi.On
EN [59Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] Timer
& & t
>=1 t
&
SET UA>[59Pi.U_Set] &
&
SET UAB>[59Pi.U_Set]
Timer
& & t
>=1 t
SET UB>[59Pi.U_Set]
&
SET UBC>[59Pi.U_Set]
>=1 >=1
Timer
& & t
&
>=1 t
SET UC>[59Pi.U_Set]
& 59Pi.St1
&
59Pi.Op
59Pi.St2
SET UCA>[59Pi.U_Set]
59Pi.St3
EN [59Pi.En_Alm] &
59Pi.Alm
SIG 59Pi.St1
>=1
SIG 59Pi.St2 59Pi.St
SIG 59Pi.St3
Figure 3.17-1 Logic diagram of stage i of overvoltage protection
Where:
i=1, 2, 3
52b_PhA, 52b_PhB and 52b_PhC: Please refer to section 3.4.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.17.1.6 Settings
Table 3.17-3 Settings of overvoltage protection

Voltage setting for stage i of overvoltage
1 59Pi.U_Set Un~2Unn 0.001 V
protection (i=1, 2, 3)
Time delay for stage i of overvoltage
2 59Pi.t_Op 0.000~30.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling stage i of overvoltage
3 59Pi.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Option of 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3
mode for stage i of overvoltage protection
4 59Pi.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3)
0: 3-out-of-3 mode
1: 1-out-of-3 mode
Option of phase-to-phase voltage or phase
voltage for stage i of overvoltage protection
5 59Pi.Opt_Up/Upp 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3)
0: phase voltage
1: phase-to-phase voltage
protection for alarm purpose (i=1, 2, 3)
6 59Pi.En_Alm 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling transfer trip controlled
by CB open position for stage i of
7 59Pi.En_52b_TT 0 or 1 overvoltage protection (i=1, 2, 3)
0: disable
1: enable
protection operate to initiate transfer trip
8 59Pi.En_TT 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3)
0: disable
1: enable
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE Option of characteristic curve for stage i of
9 59Pi.Opt_Curve
IECST overvoltage protection (i=1, 2, 3)
IECLT
ANSIE
ANSIV

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
10 59Pi.TMS 0.010~200.000 0.001 inverse-time overvoltage protection (i=1, 2,
3)
Minimum delay for stage i of inverse-time
11 59Pi.tmin 0.050~20.000 0.001 s
overvoltage protection (i=1, 2, 3)
3.17.2 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection

On a healthy three-phase power system, negative-sequence voltage is nominally zero. However,

when an unbalance situation occurs on the primary system, the negative-sequence voltage is
produced. The device provides a one-stage negative-sequence overvoltage protection with
definite time delay characteristic.
59Q
59Q.En1 59Q.On
59Q.En2 59Q.Op
59Q.Blk 59Q.St
Table 3.17-4 I/O signals of negative-sequence overvoltage protection

Negative-sequence overvoltage protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from
1 59Q.En1
binary input or programmable logic etc.
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from
2 59Q.En2
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from
3 59Q.Blk
1 59Q.On Negative-sequence overvoltage protection is enabled.
2 59Q.Op Negative-sequence overvoltage protection operates.
3 59Q.St Negative-sequence overvoltage protection starts.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.17.2.4 Logic
SIG 59Q.En1
&
SIG 59Q.En2 &
59Q.On
EN [59Q.En]
SIG 59Q.Blk
[59Q.t_Op] 59Q.Op
&
59Q.St
SET U2>[59Q.U_Set]
Figure 3.17-2 Logic diagram of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
3.17.2.5 Settings
Table 3.17-5 Settings of negative-sequence overvoltage protection

Voltage setting for negative-sequence
1 59Q.U_Set 0~Un 0.001 V
overvoltage protection
Time delay for negative-sequence
2 59Q.t_Op 0.000~30.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling negative-sequence
3 59Q.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.17.3 Undervoltage Protection

The undervoltage protection can be applied to trip when fault occurs in a system. Two stages of
undervoltage protection are available measuring phase voltages U A, UB and UC or phase-to-phase
voltages UAB, UBC and UCA. The protection output can be selected for either any phase or all
phases operation. The undervoltage protection is normally used as decoupling system rather than
load shedding.
Phase undervoltage protection has following functions:
1. Three stages phase undervoltage protection with independent logic, voltage and time delay
settings.
2. Undervoltage protection can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic. The

inverse-time characteristic is selectable, among IEC and ANSI/IEEE standard inverse-time
characteristics.
3. Phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage can be selected for protection calculation.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
4. “1-out-of-3” or “3-out-of-3” logic can be selected for protection criterion. (1-out-of-3 means any
of three phase voltages, 3-out-of-3 means all three phase voltages)
1. Operation Criterion
Users can select phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage for the protection calculation. If setting
[27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set to “0”, phase voltage criterion is selected and if [27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set
to “1”, phase-to-phase voltage criterion is selected.
When phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage is less than any enabled stage voltage setting, the
stage protection picks up and operates after delay, which will drop off instantaneously when fault
voltage disappears.
 Phase voltage criterion
Two operation criteria of definite-time undervoltage protection are shown as follows, which of them
UΦ_min<[ 27Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-6
or
Ua<[ 27Pi.U_Set] & Ub<[27Pi.U_Set] & Uc<[27Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-7
Where:
UΦ_min is the minimum value among three phase voltages.
Ua, Ub and Uc are three phase voltages.
[27Pi.U_Set] is the setting of stage i of undervoltage protection. (i=1, 2, 3)
 Phase-to-phase voltage criterion
Two operation criteria of definite-time undervoltage protection are shown as follows, which of them
is applied depending on the logic setting [27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp].
UΦΦ_min<[ 27Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-8
or
Uab<[27Pi.U_Set] & Ubc<[27Pi.U_Set] & Uca<[27Pi.U_Set] Equation 3.17-9
Where:
UΦΦ_min is the minimum value among three phase-to-phase voltages.
Uab, Ubc and Uca are three phase-to-phase voltages.
[27Pi.U_Set] is the setting of stage i of undervoltage protection.
When the setting [27Pi.Opt_1P/3P] is set as “1”, “1-out-of-3” logic (Equation 3.17-8) is selected as
operation criterion, and when it is set as “0”, “3-out-of-3” logic (Equation 3.17-9) is selected.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
2. Characteristic Curve
Undervoltage protection can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic, and

inverse-time operating time curve is as follows.
Equation 3.17-10
Where:
Uset is the setting [27Pi.U_Set].
Tp is time multiplier setting [27Pi.TMS].
K is a constant.
C is a constant.
α is a constant.
U is the measured voltage
Operating characteristic of undervoltage protection can be chosen from definite-time characteristic

and twelve inverse-time characteristics by setting the logic setting [27Pi.Opt_Curve]. The
parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Table 3.17-6 Inverse-time curve parameters of phase undervoltage protection
27Pi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic K α C

[27Pi.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of setting [27Pi.tmin] automatically.
Define-time or inverse-time phase under voltage protection drops off instantaneously when
measured voltage is higher than reset voltage.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
27Pi
27Pi.En1 27Pi.On
27Pi.En2 27Pi.Alm
27Pi.Blk 27Pi.Op
27Pi.St
27Pi.St1
27Pi.St2
27Pi.St3
27Pi.U_Absent
Table 3.17-7 I/O signals of undervoltage protection

Stage i of undervoltage protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input
1 27Pi.En1
Stage i of undervoltage protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input
2 27Pi.En2
Stage i of undervoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
3 27Pi.Blk
1 27Pi.On Stage i of undervoltage protection is enabled. (i=1, 2, 3)
2 27Pi.Op Stage i of undervoltage protection operates. (i=1, 2, 3)
3 27Pi.Alm Stage i of undervoltage protection alarms. (i=1, 2, 3)
4 27Pi.St Stage i of undervoltage protection starts. (i=1, 2, 3)
5 27Pi.St1 Stage i of undervoltage protection starts (A or AB). (i=1, 2, 3)
6 27Pi.St2 Stage i of undervoltage protection starts (B or BC). (i=1, 2, 3)
7 27Pi.St3 Stage i of undervoltage protection starts (C or CA). (i=1, 2, 3)
No AC voltage input after the device powered on for stage i of undervoltage
8 27Pi.U_Absent
3.17.3.5 Logic
In order to prevent undervoltage protection from undesired operation, after the device powered on,
if any phase current is greater than 0.06In or circuit breaker is in closed posion, undervoltage
protection will be in service with a time delay of 100ms when the corresponding phase voltage is
greater than 0.1Un. Otherwise, undervoltage protection will be blocked by the signal
“27Pi.U_Absent”
Through settings these logic settings [27Pi.En_FD_Ctrl], [27Pi.En_Curr_Ctrl] and

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
[27Pi.En_VTS_Blk], undervoltage protection optionally can be controlled by FD element reflecting

current (including DPFC current element and residual current element), current condition and VT
circuit failure
When the setting [27Pi.En_FD_Ctrl] is set as “1”, undervoltage protection will be blocked if FD
element reflecting current does not operate.
When the setting [27Pi.En_Curr_Ctrl] is set as “1”, undervoltage protection will be blocked if
current condition (>0.06In) is not met.
When the setting [27Pi.En_VTS_Blk] is set as “1”, undervoltage protection will be blocked if VT
circuit fails.
If any phase of circuit breaker is open (binary input of normal close contact of breaker is energized)
and the corresponding phase current is smaller than 0.06In, undervoltage protection will be
blocked.
SIG VTS.Alm >=1

&
SIG VTS.Inst
EN [27Pi.En_VTS_Blk]
EN [27Pi.En_FD_Ctrl] & >=1

Block UV
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG CB Open >=1
SIG 27Pi.U_Absent
Figure 3.17-3 Blocking logic of undervoltage protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
EN [27Pi.En]
&
SIG 27Pi.En1 &
27Pi.On
SIG 27Pi.En2
SIG 27Pi.Blk
SIG Ia>0.06In >=1

UV_PhA_Curr_Rls
SIG Ib>0.06In >=1

UV_PhB_Curr_Rls
SIG Ic>0.06In >=1

UV_PhC_Curr_Rls
&
>=1
UV_PhAB_Curr_Rls
&
>=1
UV_PhBC_Curr_Rls
&
>=1
UV_PhCA_Curr_Rls
EN [27Pi.En_Curr_Ctrl]
EN [27Pi.En_Alm]
SET [27Pi.Opt_1P/3P]
SIG 27Pi.On
SIG Block UV
SET [27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp]
& & Timer &
t
SIG UV_PhA_Curr_Rls >=1 &
t
SET UA<[27Pi.U_Set]
&
SIG UV_PhB_Curr_Rls
SET UAB<[27Pi.U_Set]
Timer &
& &
t 27Pi.Op
SIG UV_PhC_Curr_Rls >=1
t
SET UB<[27Pi.U_Set]
&
&
>=1 27Pi.Alm
SIG UV_PhAB_Curr_Rls
&
SET UBC<[27Pi.U_Set] >=1
& & Timer
t
SIG UV_PhBC_Curr_Rls >=1
t
SET UC<[27Pi.U_Set]
27Pi.St1
&
27Pi.St2
SIG UV_PhCA_Curr_Rls
27Pi.St3
SET UCA<[27Pi.U_Set] >=1
27Pi.St
Figure 3.17-4 Logic diagram of stage i of undervoltage protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
i=1, 2, 3
3.17.3.6 Settings
Table 3.17-8 Settings of undervoltage protection

Voltage setting for stage i of undervoltage
1 27Pi.U_Set 0~Unn 0.001 V
Time delay for stage i of undervoltage
2 27Pi.t_Op 0.000~30.000 0.001 s
Enabling/disabling stage i of undervoltage
3 27Pi.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
protection controlled by FD element
4 27Pi.En_FD_Ctrl 0 or 1 reflecting current (i=1, 2, 3)
0: disable
1: enable
protection controlled by current condition
5 27Pi.En_Curr_Ctrl 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3)
0: disable
1: enable
protection controlled by VT circuit failure
6 27Pi.En_VTS_Blk 0 or 1 (i=1, 2, 3)
0: disable
1: enable
Option of 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3
mode for stage i of undervoltage
7 27Pi.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1 protection (i=1, 2, 3)
0: 3-out-of-3 mode
1: 1-out-of-3 mode
Option of voltage criterion adopting
phase-to-phase voltage or phase voltage
for stage i of undervoltage protection (i=1,
8 27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp 0 or 1
2, 3)
0: phase voltage
1: phase-to-phase voltage
protection operate to alarm (i=1, 2, 3)
9 27Pi.En_Alm 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage i of
10 27Pi.Opt_Curve ANSIE
undervoltage protection (i=1, 2, 3)
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
11 27Pi.TMS 0.010~200.000 0.001 inverse-time undervoltage protection (i=1,
2, 3)
Minimum delay for stage i of inverse-time
12 27Pi.tmin 0.050~20.000 0.001 s
undervoltage protection (i=1, 2, 3)
3.18 Frequency Protection

3.18.1 Overfrequency Protection
If the power frequency of regional rises due to the active power excess demand, overfrequency
protection operates to perform generator rejection to shed part of the generators automatically
according to the rising frequency so that power supply and the load are re-balanced.
The device provides four stages overfrequency protection. When system frequency is greater than
the setting [81O.f_Pkp], overfrequency protection will put into service.
In order to prevent possible maloperation of overfreqency protection in conditions of high

harmonics, voltage circuit failures and so on, such blocking measures are carried out as follows:
1. Blocking in undervoltage condition
If the positive voltage U1<0.15Un, the calculation of protection is not carried out and the output
relay will be blocked.
2. Frequency abnormality condition
When f<40Hz or f>65Hz, overfrequency protection will be blocked
Operation criteria of overfrequency protection is shown in the following equation.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
f>[81O.OFi.f_Set] Equation 3.18-1
Where:
f is system frequency.
[81O.OFi.f_Set] is the frequency setting of stage i of overfrequency protection. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
81O.OFi
81O.En1 81O.OFi.On
81O.En2 81O.St
81O.Blk 81O.OFi.Op
Table 3.18-1 I/O signals of overfrequency protection

Overfrequency protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
1 81O.En1
Overfrequency protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
2 81O.En2
Overfrequency protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 81O.Blk
1 81O.OFi.On Stage i of overfrequency protection is enabled (i=1, 2, 3, 4).
2 81O.OFi.Op Stage i of overfrequency protection operates (i=1, 2, 3, 4).
3 81O.St Overfrequency protection starts.
3.18.1.5 Logic
SIG 81O.St1 >=1
SIG 81O.St2
>=1
SIG 81O.St3 >=1 81O.St
SIG 81O.St4
Figure 3.18-1 Logic diagram of overfrequency protection (start)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 81O.En1
&
SIG 81O.En2 &
81O.OFi.On
EN [81O.OFi.En]
SIG 81O.Blk
&
SIG FD.Pkp
SIG U1<0.15Un >=1
SIG f<40 or f>65

&
SET f>[81O.f_Pkp] 50ms 0ms

81O.Sti
&
SET f>[81O.OFi.f_Set] & [81O.OFi.t_Op] 0ms 81O.OFi.Op
EN [81O.OFi.En]
Figure 3.18-2 Logic diagram of stage i of overfrequency protection
i=1, 2, 3, 4
3.18.1.6 Settings
Table 3.18-2 Settings of overfrequency protection

Frequency pickup setting for
1 81O.f_Pkp 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
overfrequency protection
Frequency setting for stage i of
2 81O.OFi.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz overfrequency protection (i=1, 2, 3,
4)
3 81O.OFi.t_Op 0.050~20.000 0.001 s overfrequency protection (i=1, 2, 3,
4)
overfrequency protection (i=1, 2, 3,
4 81O.OFi.En 0 or 1 4)
0: disable
1: enable
3.18.2 Underfrequency Protection

In case of frequency decline due to lack of active power in the power system, underfrequency
protection operates to shed part of the load according to the declined value of frequency to
re-balance the power supply and the load.
The device provides four stages underfrequency protection. When system frequency is smaller
than the setting [81U.f_Pkp], underfrequency protection will put into service.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
In order to prevent possible maloperation of underfrequency protection in conditions of high

harmonics, voltage circuit failures and so on, such blocking measures are carried out as follows:
1. Blocking in undervoltage condition
If the positive voltage U1<0.15Un, the calculation of protection is not carried out and the output
relay will be blocked.
2. df/dt blocking element
If －df/dt≥[81U.df/dt_Blk], the calculation of protection is not carried out and the output relay will
be blocked. The blocking element will not be released automatically until the system frequency
recovers to be less than the setting [81U.f_Pkp].
3. Frequency abnormality condition
When f<40Hz or f>65Hz, underfrequency protection will be blocked
Operation criteria of underfrequency protection is shown in the following equation.
f<[81U.UFi.f_Set] Equation 3.18-2
Where:
f is system frequency.
[81U.UFi.f_Set] is the frequency settings of stage i of underfrequency protection. (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
The equation of df/dt blocking function is as follows.
df/dt≥[81U.df/dt_Blk] Equation 3.18-3
Where:
df/dt is the frequency slip speed and the time step (i.e. dt) for the calucation is equal to 5 cycle.
[81U.df/dt_Blk] is the setting of df/dt blocking underfrequency protection.
Underfrequency protection can be blocked by the frequency slip speed (df/dt). If the logic setting
[81U.UFi.En_df/dt_Blk] is set as “1”, when Equation 3.18-2 and Equation 3.18-3 are met, it is
decided that a fault occurred and the corresponding stage underfrequency protection is blocked at
the same time for the purpose of waiting for operation of other related protection. The blocking
signal will not reset until the system frequency recovers, i.e. the system frequency is greater than
the setting [81U.f_Pkp]. If the logic setting is set as “0”, when Equation 3.18-2 and Equation 3.18-3
are met, the stage underfrequency protection will be released to operate.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
81U.UFi
81U.En1 81U.UFi.On
81U.En2 81U.St
81U.Blk 81U.UFi.Op
Table 3.18-3 I/O signals of underfrequency protection

Underfrequency protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
1 81U.En1
Underfrequency protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
2 81U.En2
Underfrequency protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 81U.Blk
1 81U.UFi.On Stage i of underfrequency protection is enabled (i=1, 2, 3, 4).
2 81U.UFi.Op Stage i of underfrequency protection operates (i=1, 2, 3, 4).
3 81U.St Underfrequency protection starts.
3.18.2.5 Logic
SIG 81U.St1 >=1
SIG 81U.St2
>=1
SIG 81U.St3 >=1 81U.St
SIG 81U.St4
Figure 3.18-3 Logic diagram of underfrequency protection (start)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 81U.En1
&
SIG 81U.En2
EN [81U.UFi.En]
&
81U.UFi.On
SIG 81U.Blk
&
SIG FD.Pkp &
SIG U1<0.15Un >=1
SIG f<40 or f>65
SET f<[81U.f_Pkp] 50ms 0ms

81U.Sti
SET -df/dt<[81U.df/dt_Blk] >=1 &
[81U.UFi.t_Op] 0ms 81U.UFi.Op
EN [81U.UFi.En_df/dt_Blk]
SET f<[81U.UFi.f_Set] &
EN [81U.UFi.En]
Figure 3.18-4 Logic diagram of stage i of underfrequency protection
i=1, 2, 3, 4
3.18.2.6 Settings
Table 3.18-4 Settings of underfrequency protection

Frequency pickup setting for
1 81U.f_Pkp 45.000~60.000 0.01 Hz
underfrequency protection
Rate of frequency change for
2 81U.df/dt_Blk 0.200~20.000 0.01 Hz/s
blocking underfrequency protection
Frequency setting for stage i of
3 81U.UFi.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz underfrequency protection (i=1, 2, 3,
4)
4 81U.UFi.t_Op 0.050~30.000 0.01 s underfrequency protection (i=1, 2, 3,
4)
underfrequency protection (i=1, 2, 3,
5 81U.UFi.En 0 or 1 4)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling rate of frequency
change to block stage i of
6 81U.UFi.En_df/dt_Blk 0 or 1
underfrequency protection (i=1, 2, 3,
4)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

0: disable
1: enable
3.19 Breaker Failure Protection

Duplicated protection configurations are usually adopted for EHV power system, but the primary
equipment, circuit breaker, is not duplicated. Breaker failure protection is adopted to cater circuit
breaker tripping failure.
Breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case
of a tripping failure of the circuit breaker, and clears the fault as requested by the device. To utilize
the protection information of faulty equipment and the electrical information of failure circuit
breaker to constitute the criterion of breaker failure protection, it can ensure that the adjacent
circuit breakers of failure circuit breaker are tripped with a shorter time delay, so that the affected
area is minimized, and ensure stable operation of the entire power grid to prevent generators,
transformers and other components from seriously damaged.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent breaker failure
protection for CB1 and CB2 respectively. Both breaker failure protections have the
same logic.The difference is that the prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals and settings for
circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2).

The instantaneous re-tripping function, after receiving tripping signal from other device and the
corresponding phase overcurrent element operating, is available and provides phase-segregated
binary output contact, which can ensure the circuit breaker is still tripped in case the secondary
circuit between the device and the circuit breaker is abnormal, to avoid undesired tripping of
breaker failure protection and the expansion of the affected area. Instantaneous re-tripping
function does not block AR.
When both the phase-segregated tripping contact from line protection and the corresponding
phase overcurrent element operate, or both the three-phase tripping contact and any phase
overcurrent element operate, breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to
trip local circuit breaker after time delay of [CBx.50BF.t1_Op] and trip all adjacent circuit breakers
after time delay of [CBx.50BF.t2_Op].
When the protection element except undervoltage element within this device operates and issues
tripping signal, breaker failure protection will also be initiated.
Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, zero-sequence current
criterion and negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent
element for breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_GT] from

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
generator and transformer protection. They can be enabled or disabled by logic settings
[CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P] and [CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.
For some special fault (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),
maybe faulty current is very small and current criterion of breaker failure protection is not met, in
order to make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, an input
signal [CBx.50BF.ExTrp_WOI] is equipped to initiate breaker failure protection, once the input
signal is energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in addition to
breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timer. The device takes current as priority
with CB auxiliary contact (52b) as an option criterion for breaker failure check.
50BF
CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_L CBx.50BF.On
CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_GT CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpA
CBx.50BF.ExTrp_WOI CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpB
CBx.50BF.ExTrpA CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpC
CBx.50BF.ExTrpB CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrp3P
CBx.50BF.ExTrpC CBx.50BF.Op_t1
CBx.50BF.En CBx.50BF.Op_t2
CBx.50BF.Blk
3.19.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.19-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection

1 CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_L Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection
Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer
2 CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_GT
protection
3 CBx.50BF.ExTrpA Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device
4 CBx.50BF.ExTrpB Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device
5 CBx.50BF.ExTrpC Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device
Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it is
6 CBx.50BF.ExTrp_WOI energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in
addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.
7 CBx.50BF.En Input signal of enabling breaker failure protection
Breaker failure protection blocking input, such as function blocking binary
input.
8 CBx.50BF.Blk
When the input is 1, breaker failure protection is reset and time delay is
cleared.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

1 CBx.50BF.On Breaker failure protection is enabled
2 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpA Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker
3 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpB Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker
4 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpC Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker
5 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrp3P Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker
6 CBx.50BF.Op_t1 Stage 1 of breaker failure protection operates

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.19.5 Logic
SIG CBx.50BF.En
&
EN [CBx.50BF.En] CBx.50BF.On
SIG CBx.50BF.Blk
SIG CBx.50BF.On
&
SIG FD.Pkp
EN [CBx.50BF.En_ReTrp]
EN [CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P] >=1
SET 3I0>[CBx.50BF.3I0_Set]
&
SIG CBx.BFI_A >=1 & [CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpA
BI [CBx.50BF.ExTrpA]
SET IA>[CBx.50BF.I_Set]
&
SIG CBx.BFI_B >=1 & [CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpB
BI [CBx.50BF.ExTrpB]
SET IB>[CBx.50BF.I_Set]
&
SIG CBx.BFI_C >=1 & [CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpC
BI [CBx.50BF.ExTrpC] >=1
SET IC>[CBx.50BF.I_Set] >=1
SIG CBx.BFI_3P >=1

&
& >=1
BI [CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_L]
>=1 [CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms [CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrp3P]
BI [CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_GT] >=1
&
BI [CBx.50BF.ExTrp_WOI]
&
EN [CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P] &
SET 3I0>[CBx.50BF.3I0_Set]
& >=1 >=1 [CBx.50BF.t1_Op] 0ms CBx.50BF.Op_t1
EN [CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P] & &
[CBx.50BF.t2_Op] 0ms CBx.50BF.Op_t2
SET I2>[CBx.50BF.I2_Set]
&
EN [CBx.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl]
BI [CBx.52b_PhA]
&
BI [CBx.52b_PhB]
BI [CBx.52b_PhC]
SIG CBx.50BF.On &
SIG FD.Pkp
Figure 3.19-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.19.6 Settings
Table 3.19-2 Settings of breaker failure protection

Current setting of phase current
1 CBx.50BF.I_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A
criterion for BFP
Current setting of zero-sequence
2 CBx.50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A
current criterion for BFP
Current setting of
3 CBx.50BF.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A negative-sequence current
criterion for BFP
4 CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of re-tripping for BFP
5 CBx.50BF.t1_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of stage 1 for BFP
6 CBx.50BF.t2_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of stage 2 for BFP

Enabling/disabling breaker failure
protection
7 CBx.50BF.En 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling re-trip function
for BFP
8 CBx.50BF.En_ReTrp 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling
zero-sequence current criterion
for BFP initiated by single-phase
9 CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P 0 or 1
tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling
zero-sequence current criterion
for BFP initiated by three-phase
10 CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P 0 or 1
tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling
negative-sequence current
criterion for BFP initiated by
11 CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P 0 or 1
three-phase tripping contact
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling breaker failure
protection can be initiated by
normally closed contact of circuit
12 CBx.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl 0 or 1
breaker
0: disable
1: enable

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.20 Thermal Overload Protection

During overload operation of a transmission line (specially for cable), great current results in
greater heat to lead temperature increase and if the temperature reaches too high values the
equipment might be damaged.
Thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content (temperature) continuously. This
estimation is made by using a thermal model with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.
When the temperature increases to the alarm value, the protection issues alarm signals to remind
the operator for attention, and if the temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the
protection sends trip command to disconnect the protected line.
Thermal overload protection has following functions:
 Thermal time characteristic adopting IEC 60255-8
 Two stages for alarm purpose and two stages for trip purpose
 Thermal accumulation can be cleared by external input signal
The device provides a thermal overload model which is based on the IEC60255-8 standard. The
thermal overload formulas are shown as below.
1. Cold start characteristic:
2. Hot start characteristic:
Where:
T = Time to operate (in seconds)
 = Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected, the setting [49.Tau]

IB = Full load current rating, the setting [49.Ib_Set]
I = The RMS value of the largest phase current
IP = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload
k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula, the setting [49.K]

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
ln = Natural logarithm
The characteristic curve of thermal overload model is shown in Figure 3.20-1.
t Refer to IEC60255-8
Ip
P=—
IB
P = 0.0
P = 0.6
P = 0.8
P = 0.9
kIB I
Figure 3.20-1 Characteristic curve of thermal overload model
The hot start characteristic is adopted in the device. The calculation is carried out at zero of Ip, so
users need not to set the value of Ip.
Tripping outputs of the protection is controlled by current, even if the thermal accumulation value is
greater than the setting for tripping, the protection drops off instantaneously when current
disappears. Alarm outputs of the protection is not controlled by current, and only if the thermal
accumulation value is greater than the setting for alarm, alarm output contacts, which can be
connected to block the auto-reclosure, will operate.
49
49.Clr_Cmd 49.On
49.En 49.St
49.Blk 49-i.Alm
49-i.Op
3.20.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.20-1 I/O signals of thermal overload protection

1 49.Clr_Cmd Input signal of clear thermal accumulation value
Thermal overload protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
2 49.En
3 49.Blk Thermal overload protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

1 49.On Thermal overload protection is enabled.
2 49.St Thermal overload protection starts.
3 49-i.Op Stage i of thermal overload protection operates to trip. (i=1, 2)
4 49-i.Alm Stage i of thermal overload protection operates to alarm. (i=1, 2)
3.20.5 Logic
SIG 49.En &

&
SIG 49.Blk 49.On
EN [49-i.En_Trp] >=1
EN [49-i.En_Alm]
&
SIG FD.Pkp 49.St
& Timer
t
49-i.Op
t
SIG I3P
& Timer
t
49-i.Alm
SET [49.Ib_Set]
t
BI [49.Clr_Cmd]
Figure 3.20-2 Logic diagram of stage i of thermal overload protection
i=1, 2
3.20.6 Settings
Table 3.20-2 Settings of thermal overload protection

The factor setting for stage i of
thermal overload protection which is
1 49-i.K 1.000~3.000 0.001 %
associated to the thermal state
formula (i=1, 2)
The reference current setting of the
2 49.Ib_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A
thermal overload protection
The time constant setting of the
3 49.Tau 0.100~100.000 0.001 min
IDMT overload protection
Enabling/disabling stage i of thermal
overload protection for alarm
4 49-i.En_Alm 0 or 1 purpose (i=1, 2)
0: disable
1: enable

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Enabling/disabling stage i of thermal
overload protection for trip purpose
5 49-i.En_Trp 0 or 1 (i=1, 2)
0: disable
1: enable
3.21 Stub Differential Protection

Stub differential protection is mainly designed for one and a half breakers arrangement. When line
disconnector is open and transmission line is put into maintenance, line VT is no voltage. Distance
protection is disabled, and stub differential protection is enabled. It is used to protect stub section
among two circuit breakers and line disconnector. Usually, stub differential protection is enabled
automatically by normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector.
CT1 CT2
Bus Bus
To the device
Line Line
Figure 3.21-1 3/2 breakers arrangement

3.21.2.1 Stub Differential Element
Stub differential element is composed of percentage differential principle. Stub differential element
can be controlled by normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector to enabled or disabled.
The normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector is closed when line disconnector is open.
The operation criterion is:
 
 I 1  I  2  [87STB.I_Pkp]

   
I  I
1  2  [87STB.Slop e]  I 1  I  2



Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Where:
 
I 1 、 I  2 are secondary phase currents corresponding to both circuit breakers, are formed by
phase A, B, C
3.21.2.2 Differential Current Alarm
Under normal conditions, when stub differential protection is enabled, the device will issue the
alarm signal [87STB.Alm_Diff] with the time delay if the following operation criterion is met.
 
 I 1  I  2  [87STB.I_Al m]

   
I  I
1  2  0.15  I 1  I  2


3.21.2.3 Disconnector Position Alarm
The device will issue the alarm signal [87STB.Alm_89b_DS] with the time delay of 10s if the signal
[87STB.89b_DS] is energized and the line is live, and the alarm signal will drop off with the time
delay of 10s after the abnormality disappears.
When the alarm signal of disconnector position appears, the operator should confirm the status of
disconnector position in time. The user can use programable logic to determine whether the
disconnector position alarm will blocked stub differential protection.
3.21.2.4 CT Saturation
When there is an external fault, transient CT saturation may be happened. In order to prevent stub
differential protection from undesired operation, the floating technology of adaptive restraint
current is adopted to ensure that the device does not maloperate due to the serious saturation.
87STB
87STB.En1 87STB.On
87STB.En2 87STB.On_Local
87STB.Blk 87STB.Op
87STB.89b_DS 87STB.St
87STB.89b_DS_Rmt 87STB.StA
87STB.StB
87STB.StC
87STB.Alm_Diff
87STB.Alm_89b_DS

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.21.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.21-1 I/O signals of stub differential protection

Stub differential protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
1 87STB.En1
Stub differential protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
2 87STB.En2
Stub differential protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 87STB.Blk
4 87STB.89b_DS Normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector
Normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector in remote end
5 87STB.89b_DS_Rmt In general, it is configured as receiving the signal [87STB.On_Local] from the
remote end.
Stub differential protection is enabled. (Based on disconnector position signal
1 87STB.On
in both local end and remote end)
Stub differential protection is enabled. (Based on disconnector position signal
2 87STB.On_Local
in local end)
3 87STB.Op Stub differential protection operates.
4 87STB.St Stub differential protection starts.
5 87STB.StA Phase A of stub differential protection starts.
6 87STB.StB Phase B of stub differential protection starts.
7 87STB.StC Phase C of stub differential protection starts.
8 87STB.Alm_Diff The alarm signal of differential current abnormality
9 87STB.Alm_89b_DS The alarm signal of disconnector position abnormality
3.21.5 Logic
Based on calculating vector summation of currents from dual CTs, the logic scheme of stub
differential protection is shown as Figure 3.21-2.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG Idiff>0.06In &

10s 10s 87STB.Alm_89b_DS
SIG 87STB.89b_DS
SIG 87STB.En1
&
SIG 87STB.En2 &
Enable 87STB
EN [87STB.En]
SIG 87STB.Blk
SIG Enable 87STB &

87STB.On_Local
SIG 87STB.89b_DS
>=1
& 87STB.On
SIG 87STB.89b_DS_Rmt
&
SET Idiffa>[87STB.I_Alm] &
SET IdiffA>0.15×IBiasA
& >=1
SET Idiffb>[87STB.I_Alm] & &
10s 10s 87STB.Alm_Diff
SET IdiffB>0.15×IBiasB
&
SET Idiffc>[87STB.I_Alm] &
SET IdiffC>0.15×IBiasC
EN [87STB.En_Alm]
SIG 87STB.Alm_Diff >=1 87STB.St

>=1
[87STB.t_Op] 87STB.Op
SIG 87STB.En_CTS_Blk
&
SET Idiffa>[87STB.I_Pkp] & 87STB.StA
SET IdiffA>[87STB.Slope]×IBiasA
&
SET Idiffb>[87STB.I_Pkp] & 87STB.StB
SET IdiffB>[87STB.Slope]×IBiasB
&
SET Idiffc>[87STB.I_Pkp] & 87STB.StC
SET IdiffC>[87STB.Slope]×IBiasC
Figure 3.21-2 Logic diagram of stub differential protection
3.21.6 Settings
Table 3.21-2 Settings of stub differential protection

Pickup current setting of stub
1 87STB.I_Pkp (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
differential protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Current setting of differential
2 87STB.I_ Alm (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
current alarm
Slope of current differential
3 87STB.Slope 0.5~1 0.001
protection
Time delay of stub differential
4 87STB.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
protection
Enabling/disabling stub differential
protection
5 87STB.En 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
Enabling/disabling differential
current alarm function
6 87STB.En_Alm 0 or 1
1: enable
0: disable
Enabling/disabling stub differential
protection controlled by CT circuit
7 87STB.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1 failure
1: enable
0: disable
3.22 Dead Zone Protection

Generally, fault current is very large when multi-phase fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker
(i.e. dead zone) and it will have a greater impact on the system. Breaker failure protection can
operate after a longer time delay, in order to clear the dead zone fault quickly and improve the
system stability, dead zone protection with shorter time delay (compared with breaker failure
protection) is adopted.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent dead zone
protection for CB1 and CB2 respectively. Both dead zone protections have the same
logic.The difference is that the prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals and settings for

For some wiring arrangement (for example, circuit breaker is located between CT and the line), if
fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker, line protection can operate to trip circuit breaker
quickly, but the fault have not been cleared since local circuit breaker is tripped. Here dead zone
protection is needed in order to trip relevant circuit breaker.
The criterion for dead zone protection is: when dead zone protection is enabled, binary input of
initiating dead zone protection is energized (by default, three-phase tripping signal is used to

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
initiate dead zone protection), if overcurrent element for dead zone protection operates, then
corresponding circuit breaker is tripped and three phases normally closed contact of the circuit
breaker are energized, dead zone protection will operate to trip adjacent circuit breaker after a
time delay.
50DZ
CBx.50DZ.En1 CBx.50DZ.On
CBx.50DZ.En2 CBx.50DZ.Op
CBx.50DZ.Blk CBx.50DZ.St
CBx.50DZ.Init
3.22.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.22-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection

1 CBx.50DZ.En1 Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it can be binary inputs or logic link.
2 CBx.50DZ.En2 Dead zone protection enabling input 2, it can be binary inputs or logic link.
Dead zone protection blocking input, such as function blocking binary input. When
3 CBx.50DZ.Blk
the input is 1, dead zone protection is reset and time delay is cleared.
4 CBx.50DZ.Init Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.
1 CBx.50DZ.On Dead zone protection is enabled.
2 CBx.50DZ.St Dead zone protection starts.
3 CBx.50DZ.Op Dead zone protection operates.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.22.5 Logic
EN [CBx.50DZ.En]
&
SIG CBx.50DZ.En1 &
CBx.50DZ.On
SIG CBx.50DZ.En2
SIG CBx.50DZ.Blk & CBx.50DZ.St

&
SIG FD.Pkp [CBx.50DZ.t_Op] 0ms CBx.50DZ.Op
SIG CBx.52b_PhA
&
SIG CBx.52b_PhB
SIG CBx.52b_PhC
SET Ia > [CBx.50DZ.I_Set]

>=1 &
SET Ib > [CBx.50DZ.I_Set]
SET Ic > [CBx.50DZ.I_Set]
SIG CBx.50DZ.Init >=1
SIG CBx.Trp
Figure 3.22-1 Dead zone protection
3.22.6 Settings
Table 3.22-2 Settings of dead zone protection

Current setting for dead zone
protection. This setting shall ensure the
1 CBx.50DZ.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
protection being sensitive enough if
dead zone fault occurs.
2 CBx.50DZ.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of dead zone protection.
Enabling/disabling dead zone
protection.
3 CBx.50DZ.En 0 or 1 -
1: enable
0: disable
3.23 Pole Discrepancy Protection

The pole discrepancy of circuit breaker may occur during operation of a breaker with segregated
operating gears for the three phases. The reason could be an interruption in the tripping/closing
circuits, or mechanical failure. A pole discrepancy can only be tolerated for a limited period. When
there is loading, zero-sequence or negative-sequence current will be generated in the power
system, which will result in overheat of the generator or the motor. With the load current increasing,
overcurrent elements based on zero-sequence current or negative-sequence current may operate.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Pole discrepancy protection is required to operate before the operation of these overcurrent
elements.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent pole discrepancy
protection for CB1 and CB2 respectively. Both pole discrepancy protections have the
same logic.The difference is that the prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals and settings for
Pole discrepancy protection determines three-phase breaker pole discrepancy condition by its
phase segregated CB auxiliary contacts. In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy
protection, the asymmetrical current component can be selected as addition criteria when needed.
62PD
CBx.62PD.En1 CBx.62PD.On
CBx.62PD.En2 CBx.62PD.Op
CBx.62PD.Blk CBx.62PD.St
3.23.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.23-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection

Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
1 CBx.62PD.En1
Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
2 CBx.62PD.En2
Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 CBx.62PD.Blk
1 CBx.62PD.On Pole discrepancy protection is enabled.
2 CBx.62PD.Op Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip
3 CBx.62PD.St Pole discrepancy protection starts
3.23.5 Logic
Phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device. When the state
of three phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are inconsistent, pole discrepancy
protection will be started and initiate output after a time delay [CBx.62PD.t_Op].

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Pole discrepancy protection can be blocked by external input signal [62PD.Blk]. In general, this
input signal is usually from the output of 1-pole AR initiation, so as to prevent pole discrepancy
protection from operation during 1-pole AR initiation.
SIG CBx.62PD.En1
&
SIG CBx.62PD.En2 &
62PD.On
EN [CBx.62PD.En]
SIG CBx.62PD.Blk
&
SIG FD.Pkp
EN [CBx.62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl] >=1
SET 3I0>[CBx.62PD.3I0_Set] >=1
SET I2>[CBx.62PD.I2_Set]
BI [CBx.52b_PhA] & 62PD.St

& &
SIG CBx.Ia<0.06In & [62PD.t_Op] 0ms 62PD.Op
BI [CBx.52b_PhB] &
SIG CBx.Ib<0.06In
>=1
BI [CBx.52b_PhC] &
SIG CBx.Ic<0.06In
Figure 3.23-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection
Where:
CBx.52b_PhA, CBx.52b_PhB and CBx.52b_PhC: Please refer to section 3.4.
3.23.6 Settings
Table 3.23-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection

Current setting of residual
1 CBx.62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A current criterion for pole
discrepancy protection
Current setting of
2 CBx.62PD.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In 0.001 A
criterion for pole discrepancy
protection
Time delay of pole discrepancy
3 CBx.62PD.t_Op 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
protection
Enabling/disabling pole
4 CBx.62PD.En 0 or 1 discrepancy protection
0: disable

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

1: enable
Enabling/disabling residual
current criterion and
5 CBx.62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl 0 or 1 criterion for pole discrepancy
protection
0: disable
1: enable
3.24 Broken Conductor Protection

Single-phase earthing fault and two-phases earthing fault are the most common fault on circuits,
the fault is easy to detect because the fault current will increase obviously.
Broken-conductor fault is difficult to detect since there is no increase of current but

negative-sequence current, so negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be considered to
clear broken-conductor fault. However, under heavy load condition, negative-sequence current is
relative large due to unbalance loading, but negative-sequence current because of
broken-conductor fault under light load condition is relative small. If negative-sequence current
protection is set larger than maximum negative-sequence current under loading, the protection
may be failure to operate if broken-conductor fault happens under light load condition,
negative-sequence overcurrent protection is therefore not suitable to apply for broken-conductor
fault.
The network of single-phase broken condition is similar to that of two-phases earthing fault,
positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is connected in parallel, I2/I1=
Z0/(Z0+Z2), generally, zero-sequence impedance is larger than positive-sequence impedance, i.e.
I2/I1>0.5. The network of two-phases broken condition is similar to that of single-phase earthing
fault, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is connected in series,
so I2/I1=1.

Broken-conductor fault mainly is single-phase broken or two-phases broken. According to the ratio
of negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current (I2/I1), it is used to judge whether there
is an broken-conductor fault. Negative-sequence current under normal operating condition (i.e.
unbalance current) is due to CT error and unbalance load, so the ratio of negative-sequence
current to positive-sequence current (amplitude) is relative steady. The value with margin can then
be used as the setting of broken conductor protection. It is mainly used to detect broken-conductor
fault and CT circuit failure as well.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
46BC
46BC.En1 46BC.On
46BC.En2 46BC.St
46BC.Blk 46BC.Op
46BC.Alm
3.24.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.24-1 I/O signals of broken conductor protection

Enable broken conductor protection input 1, it is triggered from binary input or
1 46BC.En1
Enable broken conductor protection input 2, it is triggered from binary input or
2 46BC.En2
Broken conductor protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 46BC.Blk
1 46BC.On Broken-conductor protection is enabled.
2 46BC.St Broken-conductor protection starts.
3 46BC.Op Broken-conductor protection operates to trip.
4 46BC.Alm Broken-conductor protection operates to alarm.
3.24.5 Logic
SIG [46BC.En1] &
SIG [46BC.En2]
& 46BC.On
SIG [46BC.Blk] 46BC.St

&
[46BC.t_Op] 0ms
SET Ia>[46BC.I_Min]
>=1
SET Ib>[46BC.I_Min]
SET Ic>[46BC.I_Min]
SET I2/I1>[46BC.I2/I1_Set]
&
46BC.Op
SET [46BC.En_Trp]
&
46BC.Alm
SET [46BC.En_Alm]
Figure 3.24-1 Logic diagram of broken conductor protection

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.24.6 Settings
Table 3.24-2 Settings of broken conductor protection

Minimum operation current of broken
1 46BC.I_Min (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A
conductor protection
Ratio setting (negative-sequence
2 46BC.I2/I1_Set 0.20~1.00 0.001 current to positive-sequence current)
of broken conductor protection
Time delay of broken conductor
3 46BC.t_Op 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
protection
Enabling/disabling broken conductor
protection to operate to trip
4 46BC.En_Trp 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling broken conductor
protection to operate to alarm
5 46BC.En_Alm 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.25 Reverse Power Protection

Due to various reasons lead to lose motivity, synchronous generator is changed to run as a motor
state, Absorbing energy from the power grid to drive a turbine (gas turbine) operation. In order to
prevent turbine blade or gas turbine gear from being damaged, reverse power protection (reversal
direction) should be configured.
Reverse power protection provides two stages: stage 1 can be set as alarm purpose or tripping
purpose, and stage 2 is only for tripping purpose. When reverse power value of the generator
detected is greater than reverse power protection setting ([32R1.P_Set]), reverse power protection
can operate to alarm or trip with the time delay. After overload protection, over-excitation
protection or loss-of-excitation protection, such as abnormal operation protection operates, the
generator needs sequential tripping. The steam valve of turbine has to be closed firstly, and
sequential tripping reverse power protection blocked by position contact of steam valve and circuit
breaker operates to trip with the time delay.
Generator power is calculated by three-phase voltage and three-phase current of generator

terminal. Positive sequence component of active power is calculated by fundamental wave of the
voltage and current. The benefits is that reverse power protection is independent of the
asymmetric component, so as to truly reflect the load of the engine power system.
The level of generator absorbing the active power will depend on the need to overcome the friction
loss, according to different types of generator units, the settings of reverse power protection will be
different. During testing in the primary side of the generator unit, the active power absorbed by the
generator can be measured by the device.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
When the device is equipped with power plant side, reverse power is negative value, and reverse
power is positive value when it is equipped with substation side.
The operation criterion:
[32R.Opt_Dir]=Reverse & P<-[32Ri.P_Set]
or
[32R.Opt_Dir]=Forward & P>[32Ri.P_Set]
32R
32Ri.En P1
32Ri.Blk 32Ri.On
32Ri.St
32Ri.Op
32R1.Alm
3.25.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.25-1 I/O signals of reverse power protection

Enable stage i of reverse power protection input 1, it is triggered from binary
1 32Ri.En
input or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2)
Stage i of reverse power protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
2 32Ri.Blk
input or programmable logic etc. (i=1, 2)
1 P1 Positive-sequence active power
2 32Ri.On Stage i of reverse power protection is enabled. (i=1, 2)
3 32Ri.St Stage i of reverse power protection starts. (i=1, 2)
4 32Ri.Op Stage i of reverse power protection operates to trip. (i=1, 2)
5 32R1.Alm Stage 1 of reverse power protection operates to alarm. (i=1, 2)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.25.5 Logic
SIG 32R1.En &
SIG 32R1.Blk
&
EN [32R1.En_Alm] >=1 32R1.On
EN [32R1.En_Trp]
SIG 32R1.On
SET [32R.Opt_Dir]=Reverse &
SIG P1<-[32R1.P_Set]
&
>=1 32R1.St
SET [32R.Opt_Dir]=Forward &
SIG P1>[32R1.P_Set]
&
[32R1.t_Alm] 0s 32R1.Alm
EN [32R1.En_Alm]
&
[32R1.t_Trp] 0s 32R1.Op
EN [32R1.En_Trp]
Figure 3.25-1 Logic diagram of stage 1 of reverse power protection
SIG 32R2.En &
SIG 32R2.Blk
&
32R2.On
EN [32R2.En_Trp]
SIG 32R2.On &

32R2.St
SET [32R.Opt_Dir]=Reverse &
>=1
SIG P1<-[32R2.P_Set]
SET [32R.Opt_Dir]=Forward &
SIG P1>[32R2.P_Set]
&
[32R2.t_Trp] 0s 32R2.Op
EN [32R2.En_Trp]
Figure 3.25-2 Logic diagram of stage 2 of reverse power protection
When stage 2 of reverse power protection is used as sequential tripping reverse power protection,
it can be selectable to be controlled by position contact of steam valve and circuit breaker

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.25.6 Settings
Table 3.25-2 Settings of broken conductor protection

Power setting of stage i of reverse
power protection (i=1, 2)
1 32Ri.P_Set (0.100~50.000)×In 0.01 W
It should be greater 0.5 times the
measured value of reverse power.
Time delay of stage i of reverse power
2 32Ri.t_Trp 0.100~3000.000 0.01 s
protection for tripping purpose (i=1, 2)
Time delay of stage 1 of reverse power
3 32R1.t_Alm 0.100~3000.000 0.01 s
protection for alarm purpose
Enabling/disabling stage i of reverse
power protection to operate to trip (i=1,
4 32Ri.En_Trp 0 or 1 2)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling stage 1 of reverse
power protection to operate to alarm
5 32R1.En_Alm 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
The directionality option (forward
Forward
6 32R.Opt_Dir direction or reverse direction) of
Reverse
reverse power protection
3.26 Synchrocheck
The purpose of synchrocheck is to ensure two systems are synchronism before they are going to
be connected.
When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between the
two systems, larger impact will be led to the system during closing. Thus auto-reclosing and
manual closing are applied with the synchrocheck to avoid this situation and maintain the system
stability. The synchrocheck includes synchronism check and dead charge check.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent synchrocheck
function for CB1 and CB2 respectively. Both synchrocheck functions have the same
logic.The difference is that the prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals and settings for

The synchronism check function is mainly to measure the electrical quantities between both sides

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
of the circuit breaker and compares them with the corresponding settings. The output is only given
if all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits.
The dead charge check function measures the amplitude of line voltage and bus voltage between
both sides of the circuit breaker, and then compare them with the live check setting [CBx.25.U_Lv]
and the dead check setting [CBx.25.U_Dd]. The output is only given when the measured
quantities comply with the criteria.
The synchrocheck in this device can be used for auto-reclosing and manual closing for both single
circuit breaker and dual circuit breakers. When applied for single circuit breaker, the comparison
relationship between reference voltage (CBx.Uref) and synchronism voltage (CBx.Usyn) for
synchronism check is as shown in Figure 3.26-1.
CBx.Uref CBx.Usyn
Figure 3.26-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronism voltage
When both line and busbar are live, the synchronism check element operates if voltage difference,
phase angle difference and frequency difference are all within their setting values.
1. The voltage difference is checked by the following equations.
CBx.Usyn≥[CBx.25.U_Lv]
CBx.Uref≥[CBx.25.U_Lv]
[CBx.25.U_Diff]≥|CBx.Usyn-CBx.Uref|
2. The phase difference is checked by the following equations.
CBx.Usyn×CBx.Uref×cosØ≥0
CBx.Usyn×CBx.Uref×sin([CBx.25.phi_Diff])≥CBx.Usyn×CBx.Uref×|sinØ|
Where,
Ø is phase difference between Usyn and Uref
3. The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.
|f(CBx.Usyn)-f(CBx.Uref)|≤[CBx.25.f_Diff]
If frequency check is disabled (i.e. [CBx.25.En_fDiffChk] is set as “0”), a detected maximum slip
cycle can also be determined by the following equation based on phase difference setting and the

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
synchronism check time setting:
f =[CBx.25.phi_Diff]/(180×[CBx.25.t_SynChk])
Where:
f is slip cycle
If frequency check is enabled (i.e. [CBx.25.En_fDiffChk] is set as “1”), [CBx.25.t_SynChk] can be

set to be a very small value (default value is 50ms).
This function module supports voltage switching. In general, voltage switching is fulfilled by
external circuit, and the busbar arrangement should be determined, including three options, single
busbar arrangement, double busbars arrangement and 1½ breakers arrangement, if using this
module to fulfill voltage switching.
Analog input defines four voltage inputs, UL1, UB1, UL2, UB2, and their usage are as follow:
UL1: it connects with three-phase protection voltages (from line or busbar), which mainly are used
by distance protection, voltage protection and so on.
UB1: it connects with single synchronism voltage (from line or busbar).
UL2: it connects with single synchronism voltage (from the other line of the same diameter in 1½
breakers arrangement). When voltage switching is available, it is only used by 1½ breakers
arrangement.
UB2: it connects with single synchronism voltage (from busbar). When voltage switching is
available, it is only used by double busbars arrangement and 1½ breakers arrangement.
The reference voltage (Uref) is determined to use phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage (UL1)
from three-phase protection voltages and by the setting [CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL1].
The synchronism voltage (Usyn) always connects with UB1 if not adopting voltage switching. It
connects with one of UB1, UL2 and UB2 according to the result of voltage switching if adopting
voltage switching.
3.26.2.1 Single Busbar Arrangement
Voltage selection function is not required for this busbar arrangement, the connection of the
voltage signals and respective VT MCB auxiliary contacts to the device is shown in the Figure
3.26-2 and Figure 3.26-3.
1. Three-phase bus voltage used for protection ([VTS.En_LineVT]=0)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Bus
 Ua
UL1 Ub CB
Uc
25.MCB_VT_UL1
UB1
25.MCB_VT_UB1
Line
Figure 3.26-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement
2. Three-phase line voltage used for protection ([VTS.En_LineVT]=1)
Bus
UB1 CB
25.MCB_VT_UB1
 Ua
UL1 Ub
Uc
25.MCB_VT_UL1 Line
Figure 3.26-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement
In the figures, the setting [VTS.En_LineVT] is used to determine protection voltage signals (Ua, Ub,
Uc) from line VT or bus VT according to the condition.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.26.2.2 Double Busbars Arrangement
Bus2
Bus1
B1D B2D
UB1
25.MCB_VT_UB1
UB2
25.MCB_VT_UB2
25.NC_UB1DS
25.NO_UB1DS CB
25.NC_UB2DS
25.NO_UB2DS
 Ua
UL1 Ub
Line
Uc
25.MCB_VT_UL1
Figure 3.26-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement
For double busbars arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals from Bus 1 and Bus 2
for synchronizing are required. Line VT signal is taken as reference to check synchronizing with
the voltage after voltage selection function. Selection approach is as follows.
For the disconnector positions, the normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts of the
disconnector for bus 1 and bus 2 are required to determine the disconnector open and closed
positions. The voltage selection logic is as follows.
BI 25.NC_UB1DS &
Voltage Selection Logic
CBx.UB1_Sel
BI 25.NO_UB1DS
BI 25.NC_UB2DS &
CBx.UB2_Sel
BI 25.NO_UB2DS
&
CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel
UB1 CBx.Usyn
UB2
Figure 3.26-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
After acquiring the disconnector open and closed positions of double busbars, use the following
logic to acquire the feeder voltage of double busbars.
DS2 CLOSED DS2 OPEN

DS1 CLOSED Keep original value Voltage from Bus 1 VT (CBx.UB1_Sel=1)
DS1 OPEN Voltage from Bus 2 VT (CBx.UB2_Sel=1) Keep original value
DS1 is disconnector of Bus 1
DS2 is disconnector of Bus 2
If voltage selection is invalid (CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel=1), keep original selection and without

switchover.
3.26.2.3 One and A Half Breakers Arrangement
For one and a half breakers arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals among Line1
VT, Line2 VT and Bus 2 VT as reference voltage to check synchronizing with Bus 1 voltage signal
for closing breaker at Bus 1 side.
Bus1
UB1
25.MCB_VT_UB1
25.NC_UB1DS
B1D
25.NO_UB1DS
 Ua Line 1
UL1 Ub
Uc
25.MCB_VT_UL1
L1D
25.NC_UL1DS
25.NO_UL1DS
Line 2
UL2
25.MCB_VT_UL2
25.NC_UL2DS
25.NO_UL2DS
L2D
25.NC_UB2DS
25.NO_UB2DS
UB2
25.MCB_VT_UB2
B2D
Bus2
Figure 3.26-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
For the circuit breaker at bus side (take bus breaker of bus 1 as an example), the device acquires
the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders and bus 2. The voltage selection logic
is as follows.
BI 25.NC_UL1DS &
CBx.UL1_Sel
BI 25.NO_UL1DS
&
BI 25.NC_UL2DS & CBx.UL2_Sel
BI 25.NO_UL2DS
&
BI 25.NC_UB2DS & CBx.UB2_Sel
BI 25.NO_UB2DS
&
CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel
UL1 CBx.Uref
UL2
UB2
UB1 CBx.Usyn
Figure 3.26-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement
For the tie breaker, the device acquires the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders
and two busbars. Either Line 1 VT or Bus 1 VT signal is selected as reference voltage to check
synchronizing with the selected voltage between Line 2 VT and Bus 2 VT. The voltage selection
logic is as follows.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
BI 25.NC_UL1DS &
CBx.UL1_Sel
BI 25.NO_UL1DS
&
BI 25.NO_UB1DS
&
UL1 CBx.Uref
UB1
BI 25.NC_UL2DS &
CBx.UL2_Sel
BI 25.NO_UL2DS
&
BI 25.NO_UB2DS
>=1
& CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel
UL2 CBx.Usyn
UB2
Figure 3.26-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement
When the voltage selection fails (including VT circuit failure and MCB failure), the device will issue
the corresponding failure signal. If the voltage selection is invalid (CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel=1), keep
original selection and without switchover.
In order to simplify description, one of the two voltages used in the synchrocheck (synchronism check
and dead charge check) which obtained after voltage selection function is regarded as line voltage,
and another is bus voltage.
3.26.2.4 Synchronism Voltage Circuit Failure Supervision
If synchronism voltage and reference voltage are used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or
dead line or busbar check, the VT circuit of synchronism voltage and reference voltage are
monitored.
Under normal conditions, the circuit breaker is in closed position but the synchronism voltage is
lower than the setting [CBx.25.U_Lv], it means that synchronism voltage circuit fails and an alarm
[CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn] or [CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref] will be issued with a time delay of 10s. If
MCB of synchronism voltage or reference voltage is open, an alarm [CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn] or
[CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref] will be issued instantaneously. After synchronism voltage reverted to
normal condition, the alarm will be reset automatically with a time delay of 10s. When synchronism
voltage circuit failure is detected, dead check in auto-reclosing logic will be disabled. If the logic
setting [CBx.25.En_NoChk] is set as “1”, synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision will be

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
disabled.
SIG FD.Pkp >=1
SIG CBx.79.Inprog
&
10s 10s >=1
SIG CBx.Uref<[CBx.25.U_Lv] &
CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref
SIG 25.MCB_VT_Uref
SIG CBx.25.On_SynChk >=1

SIG CBx.25.On_DdL_DdB
>=1
SIG CBx.25.On_DdL_LvB
SIG CBx.25.On_LvL_DdB
&
SIG CBx.25.Blk_VTS_UL
Figure 3.26-9 Reference voltage circuit failure supervision logic
SIG FD.Pkp >=1
SIG CBx.79.Inprog
&
10s 10s >=1
SIG CBx.Usyn<[CBx.25.U_Lv] &
CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn
SIG 25.MCB_VT_Usyn
SIG CBx.25.On_SynChk >=1

SIG CBx.25.On_DdL_DdB
>=1
SIG CBx.25.On_DdL_LvB
SIG CBx.25.On_LvL_DdB
&
SIG CBx.25.Blk_VTS_UB
Figure 3.26-10 Synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision logic
As shown in Figure 3.26-9 and Figure 3.26-10, 25.MCB_VT_Uref is MCB signal corresponding to
reference voltage after switching and 25.MCB_VT_Usyn is MCB signal corresponding to
synchronism voltage after switching.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
25
CBx.25.Blk_Chk CBx.UL1_Sel
CBx.25.Blk_SynChk CBx.UL2_Sel
CBx.25.Blk_DdChk CBx.UB1_Sel
CBx.25.Start_Chk CBx.UB2_Sel
CBx.25.Start_3PLvChk CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel
CBx.25.Sel_SynChk CBx.25.Ok_fDiffChk
CBx.25.Sel_DdL_DdB CBx.25.Ok_UDiffChk
CBx.25.Sel_DdL_LvB CBx.25.Ok_phiDiffChk
CBx.25.Sel_LvL_DdB CBx.25.Ok_DdL_DdB
CBx.25.Sel_NoChk CBx.25.Ok_DdL_LvB
CBx.25.Blk_VTS_Uref CBx.25.Ok_LvL_DdB
CBx.25.Blk_VTS_Usyn CBx.25.Chk_LvL
25.MCB_VT_UL1 CBx.25.Chk_DdL
25.MCB_VT_UL2 CBx.25.Chk_LvB
25.MCB_VT_UB1 CBx.25.Chk_DdB
25.MCB_VT_UB2 CBx.25.Ok_DdChk
25.NC_UL1DS CBx.25.Ok_SynChk
25.NO_UL1DS CBx.25.Ok_Chk
25.NC_UB1DS CBx.25.Ok_3PLvChk
25.NO_UB1DS CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref
25.NC_UL2DS CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn
25.NO_UL2DS CBx.25.f_Ref
25.NC_UB2DS CBx.25.f_Syn
25.NO_UB2DS CBx.25.U_Diff
CBx.25.f_Diff
CBx.25.Phi_Diff

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.26.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.26-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck

1 CBx.25.Blk_Chk Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.
Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the
2 CBx.25.Blk_SynChk
output of synchronism check is “0”.
3 CBx.25.Blk_DdChk Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.
Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal of
4 CBx.25.Start_Chk
AR from auto-reclosing module.
Input signal of starting live three-phase check, usually it was starting signal
5 CBx.25.Start_3PLvChk
of 1-pole AR
6 CBx.25.Sel_ SynChk Synchronism check is selected.
7 CBx.25.Sel_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus check is selected.
8 CBx.25.Sel_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus check is selected.
9 CBx.25.Sel_ LvL_DdB Live line and live bus check is selected.
10 CBx.25.Sel_ NoChk No check is selected.
11 CBx.25.Blk_VTS_Usyn VT circuit supervision (Usyn) is blocked
12 CBx.25.Blk_VTS_Uref VT circuit supervision (Uref) is blocked
13 25.MCB_VT_UL1 Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UL1)
15 25.MCB_VT_UB1 Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UB1)
17 25.NC_UL1DS Normally closed contact of disconnector (UL1)
18 25.NO_UL1DS Normally open contact of disconnector (UL1)
19 25.NC_UB1DS Normally closed contact of disconnector (UB1)
20 25.NO_UB1DS Normally open contact of disconnector (UB1)
1 CBx.UL1_Sel To select voltage of Line 1
3 CBx.UB1_Sel To select voltage of Bus 1
5 CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid.
To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check of AR
6 CBx.25.Ok_fDiffChk
is met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.f_Diff].
To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of AR is
7 CBx.25.Ok_UDiffChk
met, voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.U_Diff]
To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met,
8 CBx.25.Ok_phiDiffChk
phase difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.phi_Diff].

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
9 CBx.25.Ok_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus condition is met

10 CBx.25.Ok_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus condition is met
11 CBx.25.Ok_LvL_DdB Live line and dead bus condition is met
12 CBx.25.Chk_LvL Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
13 CBx.25.Chk_DdL Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
14 CBx.25.Chk_LvB Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
15 CBx.25.Chk_DdB Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
16 CBx.25.Ok_DdChk To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met
17 CBx.25.Ok_SynChk To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met
18 CBx.25.Ok_Chk To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met
19 CBx.25.Ok_3PLvChk To indicate that live three-phase check condition is met
20 CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref Reference voltage circuit is abnormal
21 CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal
22 CBx.25.f_Ref Frequency of the voltage used by protection calculation
23 CBx.25.f_Syn Frequency of the voltage used by synchrocheck
24 CBx.25.U_Diff Voltage difference for synchronism check
25 CBx.25.f_Diff Frequency difference for synchronism check
26 CBx.25.phi_Diff Phase difference for synchronism check
3.26.5 Logic
3.26.5.1 Synchronism Check Logic
The frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages from both sides of
the circuit breaker are calculated in the device, they are used as input conditions of the
synchronism check. When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltages of both
ends meets the requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference,
and there is no synchronism check blocking signal, it is regarded that the synchronism check
conditions are met.
Synchronism check logic is usually used for 3-pole AR, and 1-pole AR usually adopts no check
logic. However, the circuit breaker at local end can not reclosed unless the circuit breaker at
remote end is reclosed successfully. In order to meet this requirement, live three-phase check can
be used for 1-pole AR, determined by the setting [CBx.25.En_3PLvChk], ensure that three-phase
voltages is restored to normal at local end after the circuit breaker at remote end is reclosed.
Synchrocheck mode can be determined by the setting [CBx.25.SetOpt] or external signal. As

shown in Figure 3.26-11, when the setting [CBx.25.SetOpt] is set as “1”, synchrocheck mode is
determined by the setting. Otherwise, synchrocheck mode is determined by external signal.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
1
EN [CBx.25.En_SynChk]
CBx.25.On_SynChk
SIG CBx.25.Sel_SynChk
0
EN [CBx.25.SetOpt]
1
EN [CBx.25.En_DdL_DdB]
CBx.25.On_DdL_DdB
SIG CBx.25.Sel_SynChk
0
EN [CBx.25.SetOpt]
1
EN [CBx.25.En_LvL_DdB]
CBx.25.On_LvL_DdB
SIG CBx.25.Sel_LvL_DdB
0
EN [CBx.25.SetOpt]
1
EN [CBx.25.En_DdL_LvB]
CBx.25.On_DdL_LvB
SIG CBx.25.Sel_DdL_LvB
0
EN [CBx.25.SetOpt]
1
EN [CBx.25.En_NoChk]
CBx.25.On_NoChk
SIG CBx.25.Sel_NoChk
0
EN [CBx.25.SetOpt]
Figure 3.26-11 Synchrocheck mode selection
EN [CBx.25.En_3PLvChk]
SIG CBx.Uref.a>[CBx.25.U_Lv]
>=1
&
SIG CBx.Uref.b>[CBx.25.U_Lv]
SIG CBx.Uref.c>[CBx.25.U_Lv]
&
SIG CBx.25.Start_3PLvChk 200ms 0ms CBx.25.Ok_3PLvChk
SIG CBx.25.Blk_Chk >=1

&
SIG CBx.25.Blk_SynChk
SIG CBx.25.On_SynChk
&
SIG CBx.25.Start_Chk
SIG CBx.Usyn>[CBx.25.U_Lv]
& &
SIG CBx.Uref>[CBx.25.U_Lv] 50ms 0ms & [CBx.25.t_SynChk] 0ms CBx.25.Ok_SynChk
SIG CBx.25.Ok_UdiffChk
SIG CBx.25.Ok_phiDiffChk
SIG CBx.25.Ok_fDiffChk
Figure 3.26-12 Synchronism check

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.26.5.2 Dead Charge Check Logic
The dead charge check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check,
dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be
enabled and disabled by the corresponding logic settings. The device can calculate the measured
bus voltage and line voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with the
settings [CBx.25.U_Lv] and [CBx.25.U_Dd]. When the voltage is higher than [CBx.25.U_Lv], the
bus/line is regarded as live. When the voltage is lower than [CBx.25.U_Dd], the bus/line is
regarded as dead.
SIG CBx.25.Blk_Chk >=1

&
SIG CBx.25.Blk_DdChk &
>=1 [CBx.25.t_DdChk] 0ms CBx.25.Ok_DdChk
SIG CBx.25.Start_Chk
SIG CBx.25.On_DdL_DdB &

CBx.25.Ok_DdL_DdB
SIG CBx.Uref<[CBx.25.U_Dd] &
SIG CBx.Usyn<[CBx.25.U_Dd]
SIG CBx.25.On_DdL_LvB &

CBx.25.Ok_DdL_LvB
SIG CBx.Uref<[CBx.25.U_Dd] &
SIG CBx.Usyn>[CBx.25.U_Lv]
SIG CBx.25.On_LvL_DdB &

CBx.25.Ok_LvL_DdB
SIG CBx.Uref>[CBx.25.U_Lv] &
SIG CBx.Usyn<[CBx.25.U_Dd]
SIG CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn >=1
SIG CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref
Figure 3.26-13 Dead charge check logic
3.26.5.3 Synchrocheck Logic
SIG CBx.25.Ok_SynChk
>=1
SIG CBx.25.On_NoChk CBx.25.Ok_Chk
SIG CBx.25.Ok_DdChk
Figure 3.26-14 Synchrocheck logic
3.26.6 Settings
Table 3.26-2 Synchrocheck settings

1 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL1 Ua Voltage selecting mode of line 1.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Ub Ua: A-phase voltage
Uc Ub: B-phase voltage
Uab Uc: C-phase voltage
Ubc Uab: AB-phase voltage
Uca Ubc: BC-phase voltage
Uca: CA-phase voltage
Voltage selecting mode of bus 1.
Ua
Ua: A-phase voltage
Ub
Ub: B-phase voltage
Uc
2 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB1 Uc: C-phase voltage
Uab
Uab: AB-phase voltage
Ubc
Ubc: BC-phase voltage
Uca
Voltage selecting mode of line 2.
Ua
Ua: A-phase voltage
Ub
Ub: B-phase voltage
Uc
3 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL2 Uc: C-phase voltage
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Voltage selecting mode of bus 2.
Ua
Ua: A-phase voltage
Ub
Ub: B-phase voltage
Uc
4 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB2 Uc: C-phase voltage
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Option of circuit breaker
configuration, and it should be
set as “NoVoltSel” if no voltage
selection is adopted.
NoVoltSel DblBusOneCB: one circuit
DblBusOneCB breaker for double busbar

5 CBx.CBConfigMode
3/2BusCB 3/2BusCB: bus side circuit
3/2TieCB breaker for one and a half
breakers
3/2TieCB: line side circuit
breaker for one and a half
breakers
6 CBx.25.U_Dd 0.05Un~0.8Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of dead check
7 CBx.25.U_Lv 0.5Un~Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of live check

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Compensation coefficient for
8 CBx.25.K_Usyn 0.20-5.00
synchronism voltage
Phase difference limit of
9 CBx.25.phi_Diff 0~ 89 1 deg
synchronism check for AR
Compensation for phase
10 CBx.25.phi_Comp 0~359 1 deg difference between two
synchronism voltages
Frequency difference limit of
11 CBx.25.f_Diff 0.02~1.00 0.01 Hz
Voltage difference limit of
12 CBx.25.U_Diff 0.02Un~0.8Un V
Time delay to confirm dead
13 CBx.25.t_DdChk 0.010~25.000 s
check condition
Time delay to confirm
14 CBx.25.t_SynChk 0.010~25.000 s
synchronism check condition
Enabling/disabling frequency
difference check
15 CBx.25.En_fDiffChk 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Synchrocheck mode selection
16 CBx.25.SetOpt 0, 1 1 0: determined by external signal
1: determined by the setting
Enabling/disabling synchronism
check
17 CBx.25.En_SynChk 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line and
dead bus (DLDB) check
18 CBx.25.En_DdL_DdB 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line and
live bus (DLLB) check
19 CBx.25.En_DdL_LvB 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling live line and
dead bus (LLDB) check
20 CBx.25.En_LvL_DdB 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling AR without
any check
21 CBx.25.En_NoChk 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
22 CBx.25.En_3PLvChk 0 or 1 Enabling/disabling live

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

three-phase check of line
0: disable
1: enable
3.27 Automatic Reclosure

To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, the device is installed on the
transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances. Faults caused by
lightning, wind, or tree branches could be transient in nature and may disappear once the circuit is
de-energized. According to statistics, for overhead transmission line, 80%~90% of the faults on
overhead lines are the transient faults. Auto-reclosing systems are installed to restore the faulted
section of the transmission system once the fault is extinguished (providing it is a transient fault).
For certain transmission systems, auto-reclosure is used to improve system stability by restoring
critical transmission paths as soon as possible.
Besides overhead lines, other equipment failure, such as cables, busbar, transformer fault and so
on, are generally permanent fault, and auto-reclosing is not initiated after faulty feeder is tripped.
For some mixed circuits, such as overhead line with a transformer unit, hybrid transmission lines,
etc., it is required to ensure that auto-reclosing is only initiated for faults overhead line section, or
make a choice according to the situation.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent automatic
reclosure function for CB1 and CB2 respectively. Both automatic reclosure functions
have the same logic.The difference is that the prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals and
settings for circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2).

This auto-reclosing logic can be used with either integrated device or external device. When the
auto-reclosure is used with integrated device, the internal protection logic can initiate AR,
moreover, a tripping contact from external device can be connected to the device via opto-coupler
input to initiate integrated AR function.
When external auto-reclosure is used, the device can output some configurable output to initiate
external AR, such as, contact of initiating AR, phase-segregated tripping contact, single-phase
tripping contact, three-phase tripping contact and contact of blocking AR. According to
requirement, these contacts can be selectively connected to external auto-reclosure device to
initiate AR.
For phase-segregated circuit breaker, AR mode can be 1-pole AR for single-phase fault and
3-pole AR for multi-phase fault, or always 3-pole AR for any kinds of fault according to system
requirement. For persistent fault or multi-shot AR number preset value is reached, the device will
send final tripping command. The device will provide appropriate tripping command based on

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
faulty phase selection if adopting 1-pole AR.
AR can be enabled or disabled by logic setting or external signal via binary input. When AR is
enabled, the device will output contact [CBx.79.On], otherwise, output contact [CBx.79.Off]. After
some reclosing conditions, such as, CB position, CB pressure and so on, is satisfied, the device
will output contact [CBx.79.Ready].
According to requirement, the device can be set as one-shot or multi-shot AR. When adopting
multi-shot AR, the AR mode of first time reclosing can be set as 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole
AR. The rest AR mode is only 3-pole AR and its number is determined by the maximum 3-pole
reclosing number.
For one-shot AR or first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be selected by logic setting
[CBx.79.En_1PAR], [CBx.79.En_3PAR] and [CBx.79.En_1P/3PAR] or external signal via binary
inputs. When 3-pole or 1/3-pole AR mode is selected, the following three types of check modes
can be selected: dead charge check, synchronism check and no check.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
79
CBx.79.En CBx.79.On
CBx.79.Blk CBx.79.Off
CBx.79.Sel_1PAR CBx.79.Close
CBx.79.Sel_3PAR CBx.79.Ready
CBx.79.Sel_1P/3PAR CBx.79.AR_Blkd
CBx.79.Trp CBx.79.Active
CBx.79.Trp3P CBx.79.Inprog
CBx.79.TrpA CBx.79.Inprog_1P
CBx.79.TrpB CBx.79.Inprog_3P
CBx.79.TrpC CBx.79.Inprog_3PS1
CBx.79.LockOut CBx.79.Inprog_3PS2
CBx.79.PLC_Lost CBx.79.Inprog_3PS3
CBx.79.WaitMaster CBx.79.Inprog_3PS4
CBx.79.CB_Healthy CBx.79.WaitToSlave
CBx.79.Clr_Counter CBx.79.Perm_Trp1P
CBx.79.Ok_Chk CBx.79.Perm_Trp3P
CBx.79.Ok_3PLvChk CBx.79.Rcls_Status
CBx.79.Fail_Rcls
CBx.79.Succ_Rcls
CBx.79.Fail_Chk
CBx.79.Mode_1PAR
CBx.79.Mode_3PAR
CBx.79.Mode_1/3PAR
3.27.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.27-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing

Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
1 CBx.79.En
enabling AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input
Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
2 CBx.79.Blk
disabling AR will be controlled by the external input

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit

3 CBx.79.Sel_1PAR
breaker
4 CBx.79.Sel_3PAR
breaker
Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit
5 CBx.79.Sel_1P/3PAR
breaker
6 CBx.79.Trp Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
7 CBx.79.Trp3P Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
8 CBx.79.TrpA Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
9 CBx.79.TrpB Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
10 CBx.79.TrpC Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the
11 CBx.79.LockOut operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection
and busbar differential protection, etc.
12 CBx.79.PLC_Lost Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost
Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master
13 CBx.79.WaitMaster
AR (when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to
14 CBx.79.CB_Healthy
perform the close function
15 CBx.79.Clr_Counter Clear the reclosing counter
16 CBx.79.Ok_Chk Synchrocheck condition of AR is met
17 CBx.79.Ok_3PLvChk Live three-phase check condition of AR is met
1 CBx.79.On Automatic reclosure is enabled
2 CBx.79.Off Automatic reclosure is disabled
3 CBx.79.Close Output of auto-reclosing signal
4 CBx.79.Ready Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle
5 CBx.79.AR_Blkd Automatic reclosure is blocked
6 CBx.79.Active Automatic reclosing logic is actived
7 CBx.79.Inprog Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress
8 CBx.79.Inprog_1P The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress
9 CBx.79.Inprog_3P 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
10 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS1 First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
11 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS2 Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
12 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS3 Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
13 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS4 Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave
14 CBx.79.WaitToSlave
(when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
15 CBx.79.Perm_Trp1P
operates
Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
operates
17 CBx.79.Rcls_Status Automatic reclosure status

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
0: AR is ready.
1: AR is in progress.
2: AR is successful.
18 CBx.79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails
19 CBx.79.Succ_Rcls Auto-reclosing is successful
20 CBx.79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails
21 CBx.79.Mode_1PAR Output of 1-pole AR mode
23 CBx.79.Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode
Automatic reclosure counter
24 CBx.79.N_Total_Rcls Recorded number of all reclosing attempts
25 CBx.79.N_1PS1 Recorded number of first 1-pole reclosing attempts
26 CBx.79.N_3PS1 Recorded number of first 3-pole reclosing attempts
27 CBx.79.N_3PS2 Recorded number of second 3-pole reclosing attempts
28 CBx.79.N_3PS3 Recorded number of third 3-pole reclosing attempts
29 CBx.79.N_3PS4 Recorded number of fourth 3-pole reclosing attempts
3.27.5 Logic
3.27.5.1 AR Ready
For the first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be 1-pole AR or 3-pole AR, however, the
selection is valid only to the first reclosing, after that it can only be 3-pole AR. When logic setting
[CBx.79.SetOpt] is set as “1”, AR mode is determined by logic settings. When logic setting
[CBx.79.SetOpt] is set as “0”, AR mode is determined by external signal via binary inputs.
An auto-reclosure must be ready to operate before performing reclosing. The output signal
[CBx.79.Ready] means that the auto-reclosure can perform at least one time of reclosing function,
i.e., breaker open-close-open.
When the device is energized or after the settings are modified, AR can not be ready unless the
following conditions are met:
1. AR function is enabled.
2. The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal.
3. The duration of the circuit breaker in closed position before fault occurrence is not less than
the setting [CBx.79.t_CBClsd].
4. There is no block signal of auto-reclosing.
After the auto-reclosure operates, the auto-reclosure must reset, i.e., [CBx.79.Active]=0, in
addition to the above conditions for reclosing again.
When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and in excess of the time
delay [CBx.79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked, as shown in Figure 3.27-1.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG Any tripping signal [CBx.79.t_PersistTrp] 0ms

>=1
SIG CBx.79.LockOut 0ms [CBx.79.t_DDO_BlkAR] >=1
CBx.79.AR_Blkd
SIG 1-pole AR Initiation [CBx.79.t_SecFault] 0ms &
SIG Any tripping signal
EN [CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk]
SIG CBx.79.Sel_1PAR &

&
EN [CBx.79.N_Rcls]=1
SIG Three phase trip >=1

SIG Phase A open &
SIG Phase B open
& >=1
&
SIG Phase C open
Figure 3.27-1 Logic diagram of AR block
The input signal [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before auto-reclosure gets ready.
Because most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary
that circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the time delay of AR is exhausted,
AR will be blocked if the input signal [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay
[CBx.79.t_CBReady]. If this function is not required, the input signal [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] can be
not to configure, and its state will be thought as “1” by default.
In orde to block AR reliably even if the signal of manually open circuit breaker not connected to the
input of blocking AR, when the circuit breaker is open by manually and there is CB position input
under normal conditions, AR will be blocked with the time delay of 100ms if AR is not initated and
no any trip signal.
When auto-reclosure is blocked, auto-reclosing failure, synchrocheck failure or last shot is

reached, or when the internal blocking condition of AR is met (such as, zone 3 of distance
protection operates, the device operates for multi-phase fault, three-phase fault and so on. These
flags of blocking AR have been configured in the device, additional configuration is not required.),
auto-reclosure will be discharged immediately and next auto-reclosing will be disabled.
When the input signal [CBx.79.LockOut] is energized, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately.
The blocking flag of AR will be also controlled by the internal blocking condition of AR. When the
blocking flag of AR is valid, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately. The logic of AR ready is
shown in Figure 3.27-2.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
>=1
SIG 3 CB closed [CBx.79.t_CBClsd] 100ms &
SIG CBx.79.Active >=1
SIG Any tripping signal

& &
100ms 0 CBx.79.Ready
SIG CBx.79.Inprog
SIG [CBx.79.CB_Healthy] 0ms [CBx.79.t_CBReady] &

SIG CBx.79.AR_Blkd >=1
>=1
SIG CBx.TRP.BlkAR &
SIG CBx.79.Fail_Rcls
>=1
SIG CBx.79.Fail_Chk
SIG Last shot is made
EN [CBx.79.En] &
>=1
EN [CBx.79.En_ExtCtrl] CBx.79.On
&
SIG CBx.79.En &
SIG CBx.79.Blk
Figure 3.27-2 Logic diagram of AR ready
When a fault occurs under pole disagreement condition, blocking AR can be enabled or disabled.
The time delay [CBx.79.t_SecFault] is used to discriminate another fault which begins after 1-pole
AR initiated. AR will be blocked if another fault happens after this time delay if the logic setting
[CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as “1”, and 3-pole AR will be initiated if [CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk] is set
as “1”.
AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, but the blocking
condition of AR will drop off with a time delay [CBx.79.t_DDO_BlkAR] after blocking signal
disappears.
When one-shot and 1-pole AR is enabled, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately if there are
binary inputs of multi-phase CB position is energized.
When any protection element operates to trip, the device will output a signal [CBx.79.Active] until
AR drop off (Reset Command). Any tripping signal can be from external protection device or
internal protection element.
AR function can be enabled by internal logic settings of AR mode or external signal via binary
inputs in addition to internal logic setting [CBx.79.En]. When logic setting [CBx.79.En_ExtCtrl] is
set as “1”, AR enable are determined by external signal via binary inputs and logic settings. When
logic setting [CBx.79.En_ExtCtrl] set as “0”, AR enable are determined only by logic settings.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
For one-shot reclosing, if 1-pole AR mode is selected, auto-reclosure will reset when there is
three-phase tripping signal or input signal of multi-phase open position.
SIG CBx.79.On
SIG CBx.79.Mode_3PAR
SIG CBx.79.Ready
SIG CBx.79.Trp
SIG CBx.79.Trp3P
SIG CBx.79.TrpA Logic CBx.79.Perm_Trp3P
SIG CBx.79.TrpB CBx.79.Perm_Trp1P
SIG CBx.79.TrpC
SIG Phase A open
SIG Phase B open
SIG Phase C open
Figure 3.27-3 Logic diagram of tripping condition output
When AR is enabled, the device will output the signal [CBx.79.Perm_Trp3P] if AR is not ready, or
AR mode is set as 3-Pole AR, or another fault occurs after the circuit breaker is open.
3.27.5.2 AR Initiation
AR mode can be selected by external signal via binary inputs or internal logic settings. If the logic
setting [CBx.79.SetOpt] set as “1”, AR mode is determined by the internal logic settings. If the logic
settings [CBx.79.SetOpt] set as “0”, AR mode is determined by the external inputs.
1. AR initiated by tripping signal of line protection
AR can be initiated by tripping signal of line protection, and the tripping signal may be from internal
trip signal or external trip signal.
When selecting 1-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, line single-phase fault will trigger 1-pole AR. When AR
is ready to reclosing (“CBx.79.Ready”=1) and the single-phase tripping command is received, this
single-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 1-pole AR will be initiated after the
single-phase tripping command drops off. The single-phase tripping command kept in the device
will be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence (Reset Command). Its logic is
shown in Figure 3.27-4.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG Reset Command &

>=1
SIG Single-phase Trip
&
&
SIG CBx.79.Ready 1-pole AR Initiation
SIG CBx.79.Sel_1PAR >=1
SIG CBx.79.Sel_1P/3PAR
Figure 3.27-4 Single-phase tripping initiating AR
When selecting 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, three-phase tripping will trigger 3-pole AR. When AR is
ready to reclosing (“CBx.79.Ready”=1) and the three-phase tripping command is received, this
three-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 3-pole AR will be initiated after the
three-phase tripping command drops off. The three-phase tripping command kept in the device will
be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence (Reset Command). Its logic is shown
in Figure 3.27-5.
SIG Reset Command &

>=1
SIG Three-phase Trip
&
&
SIG CBx.79.Ready 3-pole AR Initiation
Figure 3.27-5 Three-phase tripping initiating AR
2. AR initiated by CB state
A logic setting [CBx.79.En_CBInit] is available for selection that AR is initiated by CB state. Under
normal conditions, when AR is ready to reclosing (“CBx.79.Ready”=1), AR will be initiated if circuit
breaker is open and corresponding phase current is nil. AR initiated by CB state can be divided
into initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR, their logics are shown in Figure 3.27-6 and Figure 3.27-7
respectively. Usually normally closed contact of circuit breaker is used to reflect CB state.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG Phase A open >=1
SIG Phase B open &

&
SIG Phase C open

&
EN [CBx.79.En_CBInit] &
1-pole AR Initiation
SIG CBx.79.Ready
Figure 3.27-6 1-pole AR initiation
SIG Phase A open

&
SIG Phase B open
SIG Phase C open
EN [CBx.79.En_CBInit] & &

3-pole AR Initiation
SIG CBx.79.Ready
EN [CBx.79.Sel_3PAR] >=1
EN [CBx.79.Sel_1P/3PAR]
Figure 3.27-7 3-pole AR initiation
3.27.5.3 AR Reclosing
After AR is initiated, the device will output the initiating contact of AR. For 1-pole AR, in order to
prevent pole discrepancy protection from maloperation under pole discrepancy conditions, the
contact of “1-pole AR initiation” can be used to block pole discrepancy protection.
When the dead time delay of AR expires after AR is initiated, as for 1-pole AR, when the setting
[CBx.25.En_3PLvChk] is set as “0”, the result of synchronism check will not be judged, and
reclosing command will be output directly. When the setting [CBx.25.En_3PLvChk] is set as “1”,
the reclosing is not permissible unless live three-phase check is met. As far as the 3-pole AR, if the
synchronism check is enabled, the release of reclosing command shall be subject to the result of
synchronism check. After the dead time delay of AR expires, if the synchronism check is still
unsuccessful within the time delay [CBx.79.t_wait_Chk], the signal of synchronism check failure
(CBx.79.Fail_Syn) will be output and the AR will be blocked. If 3-pole AR with no-check is enabled,
the condition of synchronism check success (CBx.25.Ok_Chk) will always be established. And the
signal of synchronism check success (CBx.25.Ok_Chk) from the synchronism check logic can be
applied by auto-reclosing function inside the device or external auto-reclosure device.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
CBx.79.Inprog_1P
SIG 1-pole AR Initiation >=1
CBx.79.Inprog
SIG 3-pole AR Initiation
CBx.79.Inprog_3P
SIG 1-pole AR Initiation [CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1] 0ms &

>=1
AR Pulse
&
SIG CBx.79.Ok_3PLvChk
SIG 3-pole AR Initiation [CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1] 0ms &
>=1
& [CBx.79.t_Wait_Chk] 0ms CBx.79.Fail_Chk
SIG CBx.79.Ok_Chk
Figure 3.27-8 One-shot AR
In the process of channel abnormality, an internal fault occurs on the transmission line, backup
protection at both ends of line will operate to trip the circuit breaker of each end. The operation
time of backup protection at both ends of the line is possibly non-accordant, whilst the time delay
of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and insulation recovery ability for transient fault, so
the time delay of AR shall be considered comprehensively according to the operation time of the
device at both ends. When the communication channel of main protection is abnormal (input
signal [CBx.79.PLC_Lost] is energized), and the logic setting [CBx.79.En_AddDly] is set as “1”,
then the dead time delay of AR shall be equal to the original dead time delay of AR plus the extra
time delay [CBx.79.t_AddDly], so as to ensure the recovery of insulation intensity of fault point
when reclosing after transient fault. This extra time delay [CBx.79.t_AddDly] is only valid for the
first shot AR.
>=1
SIG Any tripping signal &
SIG CBx.79.PLC_Lost
&
SIG CBx.79.Active
&
Extend AR time
EN [CBx.79.En_AddDly]
Figure 3.27-9 Extra time delay of AR
Reclosing pulse length may be set through the setting [CBx.79.t_PW_AR]. For the circuit breaker
without anti-pump interlock, a logic setting [CBx.79.En_CutPulse] is available to control the
reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during reclosing, the

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto fault. After the
reclosing command is issued, AR will drop off with time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim], and can carry
out next reclosing.
SIG WaitMasterValid &

0ms 50ms
SIG AR Pulse >=1
0ms [CBx.79.t_PW_AR] & CBx.79.AR_Out
SIG Single-phase Trip >=1
SIG Three-phase Trip &
EN [CBx.79.En_CutPulse]
>=1
&
SIG CBx.79.AR_Out [CBx.79.t_Reclaim] 0ms Reset Command
Figure 3.27-10 Reclosing output logic
The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the
reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of
the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given.
SIG 1-pole AR Initiation >=1

0ms [CBx.79.t_Fail] >=1
SIG 3-pole AR Initiation &
CBx.79.WaitToSlave
SIG CBx.79.Fail_Rcls
SET [CBx.79.Opt_Priority]=High
Figure 3.27-11 Wait to slave signal
The output signal “CBx.79.WaitToSlave” is usually configured to the signal “CBx.79.WaitMaster” of

slave AR. Slave AR is permissible to reclosing only if master AR is reclosed successfully.
3.27.5.4 Reclosing Failure and Success
For transient fault, the fault will be cleared after the device operates to trip. After the reclosing
command is issued, AR will drop off after time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next
reclosing. When the reclosing is unsuccessful or the reclosing condition is not met after AR
initiated, the reclosing will be considered as unsuccessful, including the following cases.
1. If any protection element operates to trip when AR is enabled ([CBx.79.On]=1) and AR is not
ready ([CBx.79.Ready]=0), the device will output the signal (CBx.79.Fail_Rcls).
2. For one-shot AR, if the tripping command is received again within reclaim time after the

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.
3. For multi-shot AR, if the reclosing times are equal to the setting value of AR number and the
tripping command is received again after the last reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall
be considered as unsuccessful.
4. The logic setting [CBx.79.En_FailCheck] is available to judge whether the reclosing is

successful by CB state, when it is set as “1”. If CB is still in open position with a time delay
[CBx.79.t_Fail] after the reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as
unsuccessful. For this case, the device will issue a signal (CBx.79.Fail_Rcls) to indicate that
the reclosing is unsuccessful, and this signal will drop off after (Reset Command). AR will be
blocked if the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.
SET [CBx.79.Opt_Priority]=Low &

WaitMaster Valid
SIG CBx.79.WaitMaster
SIG CBx.79.On
&
SIG CBx.79.Ready
SIG Any tripping command & >=1

0ms 200ms >=1
SIG Last shot is made CBx.79.Fail_Rcls
SIG CBx.79.Inprog &
SIG CBx.79.AR_Blkd
SIG WaitMasterValid &

[CBx.79.t_WaitMaster] 0ms
>=1
&
SIG AR Pulse [CBx.79.t_Fail] 0ms &
SIG 3 CB closed
EN [CBx.79.En_FailCheck] &
& CBx.79.Succ_Rcls
0ms [CBx.79.t_Fail]
Figure 3.27-12 Reclosing failure and success
After unsuccessful AR is confirmed, AR will be blocked. AR will not enter into the ready state
unless the circuit breaker position drops off , and can only begin to enter into the ready state again
after the circuit breaker is closed.
3.27.5.5 Reclosing Numbers Control
The device may be set up into one-shot or multi-shot AR. Through the setting [CBx.79.N_Rcls],
the maximum number of reclosing attempts may be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR
is selected. Some corresponding settings may be hidden if one-shot AR is selected.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
1. 1-pole AR
[CBx.79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1-pole AR mode, 1-pole AR will be
initiated only for single-phase fault and respective faulty phase selected, otherwise, AR will be
blocked. For single-phase transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and
1-pole AR is initiated. After the dead time delay for 1-pole AR is expired, the device will send
reclosing pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim] to
ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the
reclosing is performed, and the device will output the signal of reclosing failure [CBx.79.Fail_Rcls].
[CBx.79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1-pole AR mode, the
first reclosing is 1-pole AR, and the subsequent reclosing can only be 3-pole AR. For single-phase
transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and then 1-pole AR is initiated.
After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and
then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next
reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and then 3-pole AR is initiated. At this time, the time delay applies the setting [CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2].
After the time delay is expired, if the reclosing condition is met, the device will send reclosing pulse.
The sequence is repeated until the reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing
number [CBx.79.N_Rcls] is reached. If the first fault is multi-phase fault, the device operates to trip
three-phase and initiate 3-pole AR. At this time, the time delay applies the setting
[CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1]. For the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1-pole AR mode, please
refer to Figure 3.27-13.
2. 3-pole AR
[CBx.79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 3-pole AR mode, line protection
device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be initiated.
After the dead time delay for 3-pole AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then
the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next
reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and the device will output the signal of reclosing failure [CBx.79.Fail_Rcls].
[CBx.79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 3-pole AR mode, line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be
initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing
pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim] to ready for
the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay
for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the
reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [CBx.79.N_Rcls] is reached.
3. 1/3-pole AR
[CBx.79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1/3-pole AR mode, line protection
device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 1-pole AR will be initiated
for single-phase fault and 3-pole AR will be initiated for multi-phase fault. After respective dead
time delay for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
drop off after the time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent
fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the device will
output the signal of reclosing failure [CBx.79.Fail_Rcls].
[CBx.79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1/3-pole AR mode, line
protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and AR will be
initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing
pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [CBx.79.t_Reclaim] to ready for
the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is
performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay
for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the
reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [CBx.79.N_Rcls] is reached. For
the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1/3-pole AR mode, please refer to Figure 3.27-14.
The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.
Table 3.27-2 Reclosing number
1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

Setting Value
N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR
1 1 0 0 1 1 1
2 1 1 0 2 1 2
3 1 2 0 3 1 3
4 1 3 0 4 1 4
N-1AR: the reclosing number of 1-pole AR
N-3AR: the reclosing number of 3-pole AR
4. Coordination between dual auto-reclosures
Duplicated protection configurations are normally applied for UHV lines. If reclosing function is
integrated within line protections, the auto-reclosing function can be enabled in any or both of the
line protections without coordination.
If both sets of reclosing functions are enabled, when one of them first recloses onto a permanent
fault, the other will block the reclosing pulse according to the latest condition of the faulty phase.
For one-shot AR mode, if the current is detected in the faulty phase, AR will be blocked
immediately to prevent the circuit breaker from repetitive reclosing. For multi-shot AR mode, if the
current is detected in the faulty phase, the current reclosing pulse will be blocked and go into the
next reclosing pulse logic automatically. If the maximum permitted reclosing number
[CBx.79.N_Rcls] is reached, the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay
[CBx.79.t_Reclaim].
For one-shot or multi-shot AR, there is a corresponding reclosing counter at each stage. After
reclosing pulse is sent, the corresponding reclosing counter will plus 1 and the reclosing counter
may be cleared by the submenu “Clear Counter”. If the circuit breaker is reclosed by other
devices during AR initiation, the auto-reclosure will go into the next reclosing pulse logic.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.27.5.6 AR Time Sequence Diagram
The following two examples indicate typical time sequence of AR process for transient fault and
permanent fault respectively.
Signal
Fault
Trip
CB 52b
Open
CBx.79.t_Reclaim [CBx.79.t_Reclaim]
CBx.79.Active
CBx.79.Inprog [CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1]
CBx.79.Inprog_1P [CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1]
CBx.79.Ok_Chk
AR Out [CBx.79.t_PW_AR]
CBx.79.Perm_Trp3P
CBx.79.Fail_Rcls
Time
Figure 3.27-13 Single-phase transient fault
Signal
Fault
Trip
Open Open
52b
CBx.79.t_Reclaim [CBx.79.t_Reclaim]
CBx.79.Active
CBx.79.Inprog
CBx.79.Inprog_1P [CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1]
CBx.79.Inprog_3PS2 [CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2]
CBx.79.Ok_Chk
AR Out [CBx.79.t_PW_AR] [CBx.79.t_PW_AR]
CBx.79.Perm_Trp3P
CBx.79.Fail_Rcls 200ms
Time
Figure 3.27-14 Single-phase permanent fault ([CBx.79.N_Rcls]=2)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.27.6 Settings
Table 3.27-3 Auto-reclosing settings

Maximum number of reclosing
1 CBx.79.N_Rcls 1~4 1
attempts
Dead time of first shot 1-pole
2 CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
Dead time of first shot 3-pole
3 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
Dead time of second shot 3-pole
4 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
Dead time of third shot 3-pole
5 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS3 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole
6 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS4 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
reclosing
Time delay of circuit breaker in
7 CBx.79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
closed position before reclosing
Time delay to wait for CB healthy,
and begin to timing when the input
signal [79.CB_Healthy] is
8 CBx.79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
de-energized and if it is not
energized within this time delay, AR
will be blocked.
Maximum wait time for synchronism
9 CBx.79.t_Wait_Chk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
check
Time delay allow for CB status
10 CBx.79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 0.001 s change to conform reclosing
successful
11 CBx.79.t_PW_AR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Pulse width of AR closing signal
12 CBx.79.t_Reclaim 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Reclaim time of AR
Time delay of excessive trip signal to

13 CBx.79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
block auto-reclosing
Drop-off time delay of blocking AR,
when blocking signal for AR
14 CBx.79.t_DDO_BlkAR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
disappears, AR blocking condition
drops off after this time delay
Additional time delay for
15 CBx.79.t_AddDly 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
auto-reclosing
Maximum wait time for reclosing
16 CBx.79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
permissive signal from master AR
Time delay of discriminating another
17 CBx.79.t_SecFault 0.000~600.000 0.001 s
fault, and begin to times after 1-pole

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

AR initiated, 3-pole AR will be
initiated if another fault happens
during this time delay. AR will be
blocked if another fault happens
after that.
Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing
blocked when a fault occurs under
18 CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk 0 or 1 pole disagreement condition
0: disable
1: enable
with an additional dead time delay
19 CBx.79.En_AddDly 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling adjust the length
of reclosing pulse
20 CBx.79.En_CutPulse 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling confirm whether
AR is successful by checking CB
21 CBx.79.En_FailCheck 0 or 1 state
0: disable
1: enable
22 CBx.79.En 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling AR by external
input signal besides logic setting
[79.En]
23 CBx.79.En_ExtCtrl 0 or 1
0: only logic setting
1: logic setting and external input
signal
Enabling/disabling AR be initiated by
open state of circuit breaker
24 CBx.79.En_CBInit 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Option of AR priority
None: single-breaker arrangement
None, High or High: master AR of multi-breaker
25 CBx.79.Opt_Priority
Low arrangement
Low: slave AR of multi-breaker
arrangement
26 CBx.79.SetOpt 0 or 1 Control option of AR mode

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

1: select AR mode by internal logic
settings
0: select AR mode by external input
signals
Enabling/disabling 1-pole AR mode
27 CBx.79.En_1PAR 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling 3-pole AR mode
28 CBx.79.En_3PAR 0 or 1 0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling 1/3-pole AR
mode
29 CBx.79.En_1P/3PAR 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.28 Transfer Trip

This function module provides a binary input [TT.Init] for receiving transfer trip from the remote end.
This feature ensures simultaneous tripping at both ends.

Transfer trip can be controlled by local fault detector by logic settings [TT.En_FD_Ctrl]. In addition,
the binary input [TT.Init] is always supervised, and the device will issue an alarm [TT.Alm] and
block transfer trip once the binary input is energized for longer than 4s and drop off after resumed
to normal with a time delay of 10s.
TT
TT.Init TT.Alm
TT.En TT.Op
TT.Blk TT.On
3.28.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.28-1 I/O signals of transfer trip

1 TT.Init Input signal of initiating transfer trip after receiving transfer trip
2 TT.En Transfer trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
etc.
Transfer trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic
3 TT.Blk
etc.
1 TT.Alm Input signal of receiving transfer trip is abnormal
2 TT.Op Transfer trip operates
3 TT.On Transfer trip is enabled
3.28.5 Logic
SIG TT.En &

TT.On
SIG TT.Blk
BI TT.Init 4s 10s TT.Alm
SIG TT.Alm
EN [TT.En_FD_Ctrl] >=1 &

TT.Op
SIG FD.Pkp
BI TT.Init
Figure 3.28-1 Logic diagram of transfer trip
3.28.6 Settings
Table 3.28-2 Settings of transfer trip

1 TT.t_Op 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Time delay of transfer trip
Transfer trip controlled by local fault detector
element
2 TT.En_FD_Ctrl 0 or 1 0: not controlled by local fault detector
element
1: controlled by local fault detector element
3.29 Trip Logic

For any enabled protection tripping elements, their operation signal will convert to appropriate
tripping signals through trip logics and then trigger output contacts by configuration.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent trip logic for CB1
and CB2 respectively. Both trip logics have the same logic.The difference is that the
prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals for circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2). For trip logic
settings, only the setting [En_Trp3P] will be added the prefix “CBx.” for circuit breaker

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
No.x, which means that both circuit breakers corresponding to the same line protection
can be set different trip mode.
This module gathers signals from phase selection and protection tripping elements and then
converts the operation signal from protection tripping elements to appropriate tripping signals.
The device can implement phase-segregated tripping or three-phase tripping, and may output the
contact of blocking AR and the contact of initiating breaker failure protection.
TRP
CBx.TRP.En CBx.TrpA
CBx.TRP.Blk CBx.TrpB
Faulty phase selection CBx.TrpC
CBx.PrepTrp3P CBx.Trp
Line tripping element CBx.Trp3P
Breaker tripping element CBx.BFI_A
Initiating BFP element CBx.BFI_B
CBx.BFI_C
CBx.BFI
CBx.Trp3P_PSFail
CBx.TRP.BlkAR
CBx.TRP.On
3.29.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.29-1 I/O signals of trip logic

Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable
1 CBx.TRP.En
logic etc.
Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable

2 CBx.TRP.Blk
logic etc.
Faulty phase selection (phase The result of fault phase selection
3
A, phase B, phase C) If multi-phase is selected, three-phase breakers will be tripped.
Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping
4 CBx.PrepTrp3P When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any
kind of faults.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
All operation signals of various line protection tripping elements, such

5 Line tripping element
as distance protection, overcurrent protection, etc.
All protection tripping elements concerned with breaker, such as pole
6 Breaker tripping element
discrepancy protection, etc.
Tripping element to initiate BFP, except undervoltage protection,
7 Initiating BFP element
tripping elements of all protections initiate BFP
1 CBx.TRP.On Tripping logic is enabled.
2 CBx.TrpA Tripping A-phase circuit breaker
3 CBx.TrpB Tripping B-phase circuit breaker
4 CBx.TrpC Tripping C-phase circuit breaker
5 CBx.Trp Tripping any phase circuit breaker
6 CBx.Trp3P Tripping three-phase circuit breaker
Protection tripping signal of A-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI
7 CBx.BFI_A
signal shall be reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.
Protection tripping signal of B-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI
8 CBx.BFI_B
Protection tripping signal of C-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI
9 CBx.BFI_ C
Protection tripping signal configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
10 CBx.BFI
reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.
11 CBx.Trp3P_PSFail Initiating three-phase tripping due to failure in fault phase selection
12 CBx.TRP.BlkAR Blocking auto-reclosing
3.29.5 Logic
After tripping signal is issued, the tripping pulse will be kept as same as the setting [t_Dwell_Trp] at
least. When the time delay is expired, for phase-segregated tripping, the tripping signal will drop
off immediately if the faulty current of corresponding phase is less than 0.06In (In is secondary
rated current), otherwise the tripping signal will be always kept until the faulty current of
corresponding phase is less than 0.06In. For three-phase tripping, the tripping signal will drop off
immediately if three-phase currents are all less than 0.06In, otherwise the tripping signal will be
always kept until three-phase currents are all less than 0.06In.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
& >=1
SIG FPS (phase A) &
& >=1
SIG FPS (phase B) &
& >=1
SIG FPS (phase C) &
SIG Line tripping element
SIG CBx.TRP.En &

CBx.TRP.On
SIG CBx.TRP.Blk
SIG Breaker tripping element

&
SIG CBx.PrepTrp3P >=1 >=1

&
EN [CBX.En_3PTrp]
SIG CBx.Trp
SIG Line tripping element & >=1

SIG FPS (phase A) &
SIG FPS (phase B) & >=1
SIG FPS (phase C) &
CBx.Trp3P_PSFail
>=1
&
200ms 0ms
SIG Line tripping element
&
SIG CBx.TrpA [t_Dwell_Trp] 0 & CBx.TrpA
SIG Ia<0.06In
&
SIG CBx.TrpB [t_Dwell_Trp] 0 & CBx.TrpB
SIG Ib<0.06In
&
SIG CBx.TrpC [t_Dwell_Trp] 0 & CBx.TrpC
SIG Ic<0.06In
SIG CBx.TrpA
>=1
SIG CBx.TrpB CBx.Trp
SIG CBx.TrpC

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG CBx.TrpA
&
SIG CBx.TrpB CBx.Trp3P
SIG CBx.TrpC
Figure 3.29-1 Tripping logic
>=1
Except undervoltage protection, &
tripping elements of all CBx.BFI
protections all initiate BFP
SIG Initiating BFP element &

CBx.BFI_A
SIG CBx.TrpA
&
CBx.BFI_B
SIG CBx.TrpB
&
CBx.BFI_C
SIG CBx.TrpC
Figure 3.29-2 Breaker failure initiation logic

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 85-1.Op_DEF >=1
SIG 85-2.Op_DEF &
EN [85.DEF.En_BlkAR]
SIG 78.Op
SIG Yi.ZP.Op & >=1 >=1

>=1
EN [Yi.ZP.En_BlkAR]
SIG Yi.ZG.Op &
EN [Yi.ZG.En_BlkAR]
SIG 50/51Pm.Op &
EN [50/51Pm.En_BlkAR]
SIG 50/51Gm.Op & >=1
EN [50/51Gm.En_BlkAR]
SIG 50/51Qm.Op &
EN [50/51Qm.En_BlkAR]
SIG 50PVT.Op
>=1
SIG 50GVT.Op
SIG 46BC.Op
SIG 81O.OFm.Op
>=1 >=1
SIG 81U.UFm.Op
SIG TT.Op
SIG CBx.50BF.Op_t1
>=1
SIG CBx.50BF.Op_t2
SIG CBx.50DZ.Op
SIG 49-1.Op
>=1
SIG 49-2.Op
SIG 50STB.Op >=1 >=1 >=1

CBx.BlkAR
SIG 32R1.Op
>=1
SIG 32R2.Op
SIG CBx.62PD.Op
SIG 59Pz.Op
>=1
SIG 27Pz.Op
SIG 59Q.Op
EN En_MPF_Blk_AR &
SIG Multi-phase fault
EN En_3PF_Blk_AR & >=1
SIG Three-phase fault
EN En_PhSF_Blk_AR &
SIG Phase selection failure
SIG 21SOTF.Op >=1 >=1

&
SIG 50GSOTF.Op
Figure 3.29-3 Blocking AR logic

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Y can be 21M or 21Q
i can be 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
m can be 1, 2, 3 or 4
z can be 1, 2 or 3
x can be 1 or 2
3.29.6 Settings
Table 3.29-2 Settings of trip logic

Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing blocked
when multi-phase fault happens
1 En_MPF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
when three-phase fault happens
2 En_3PF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
when faulty phase selection fails
3 En_PhSF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
The dwell time of tripping command, empirical
value is 0.04
4 t_Dwell_Trp 0.000~10.000 0.001 s The tripping contact shall drop off under
conditions of no current or protection tripping
element drop-off.
Enabling/disabling three-phase tripping mode
for any fault conditions
5 CBx.En_Trp3P 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
3.30 VT Circuit Supervision

The purpose of VT circuit supervision is to detect whether VT circuit is normal. Because some
protection functions, such as distance protection, under-voltage protection and so on, will be
influenced by VT circuit failure, these protection functions should be disabled when VT circuit fails.
VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit fault,
poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The device can detect them and issue an
alarm signal to block relevant protection functions. However, the alarm of VT circuit failure should
not be issued when the following cases happen.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
1. Line VT is used as protection VT and the protected line is out of service.
2. Only current protection functions are enabled and VT is not connected to the device.

VT circuit supervision can detect failure of single-phase, two-phase and three-phase on protection
VT. Under normal condition, the device continuously supervises input voltage from VT, VT circuit
failure signal will be activated if residual voltage exceeds the threshold value or positive-sequence
voltage is lower than the threshold value. If the device is under pickup state due to system fault or
other abnormality, VT circuit supervision will be disabled.
Under normal conditions, the device detect residual voltage greater than 8% of Unn to determine
single-phase or two-phase VT circuit failure, and detect positive-sequence voltage less than
0.3Unn to determine three-phase VT circuit failure. Upon detecting abnormality on VT circuit, an
alarm will comes up with the time delay [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with the time delay [VTS.t_DDO]
after VT circuit restored to normal.
VT (secondary circuit) MCB auxiliary contact as a binary input can be connected to the binary
input circuit of the device. If MCB is open (i.e. [VTS.MCB_VT] is energized), the device will
consider the VT circuit is not in a good condition and issues an alarm without a time delay.
When VT is not connected into the device, the alarm will be not issued if the logic setting
[VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as “1”. However, the alarm is still issued if the binary input [VTS.MCB_VT]
is energized, no matter that the logic setting [VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as “1” or “0”.
When VT neutral point fails, third harmonic of residual voltage is comparatively large. If third
harmonic amplitude of residual voltage is larger than 0.2Unn and without operation of fault
detector element, VT neutral point failure alarm signal [VTNS.Alm] will be issued with the time
delay [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with the time delay [VTS.t_DDO] after three phases voltage
restored to normal.
VTS VTNS
VTS.En VTS.Alm VTNS.En VTNS.Alm
VTS.Blk VTNS.Blk
VTS.MCB_VT
3.30.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.30-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision

1 VTS.En VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
logic etc.
VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable
2 VTS.Blk
logic etc.
VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
3 VTNS.En
VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
4 VTNS.Blk
5 VTS.MCB_VT Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact
1 VTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails
2 VTNS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails
3.30.5 Logic
SIG FD.Pkp >=1

&
SIG 79.Inprog
SIG 3U0>0.08Unn
SIG U1<0.3Unn
>=1
&
If the signal [FD.Pkp] or [CBx.79.Inprog] operates,
EN [VTS.En_LineVT] >=1 the circuit of time delay will be interrupted.
SIG 52b_PhA
&
&
SIG 52b_PhB
[VTS.t_DPU] [VTS.t_DDO] &
SIG 52b_PhC
>=1 >=1
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT] & VTS.Alm
BI [VTS.MCB_VT]
EN [VTS.En]
&
SIG [VTS.En]
SIG [VTS.Blk]
Figure 3.30-1 Logic of VT circuit supervision
&
SIG FD.Pkp >=1
SIG 79.Inprog
If the signal [FD.Pkp] or [CBx.79.Inprog] operates,
the circuit of time delay will be interrupted.
SIG U03>0.2Unn & >=1
[VTS.t_DPU] [VTS.t_DDO] & VTNS.Alm
EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]
EN [VTS.En]
&
SIG [VTNS.En]
SIG [VTNS.Blk]
Figure 3.30-2 Logic of VT neutral point supervision

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Where:
Unn: rated phase-to-phase voltage
U03: third harmonic amplitude of neutral point residual voltage
If there is already a VTS alarm before FD operated, VTS will continue to block distance protection,
that is VTS will be latched when FD operates.
3.30.6 Settings
Table 3.30-2 VTS settings

1 VTS.t_DPU 0.200~100.000 0.001 s Pickup time delay of VT circuit supervision
2 VTS.t_DDO 0.200~100.000 0.001 s Dropoff time delay of VT circuit supervision
No voltage used for protection calculation
1: enable
0: disable
3 VTS.En_Out_VT 0 or 1
In general, when VT is not connected to the
device, this logic setting should be set as
“1”
Voltage selection for protection calculation
from busbar VT or line VT
4 VTS.En_LineVT 0 or 1
1: line VT
0: busbar VT
Alarm function of VT circuit supervision
5 VTS.En 0 or 1 1: enable
0: disable
3.31 CT Circuit Supervision

The purpose of the CT circuit supervision is to detect any abnormality on CT secondary circuit.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent CT circuit
supervision function for CB1 and CB2 respectively. Both CT circuit supervision
functions have the same logic.The difference is that the prefix “CBx.” is added to all
signals for circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2).

Under normal conditions, CT secondary signal is continuously supervised by detecting the
residual current and voltage. If residual current is larger than 10%In whereas residual voltage is
less than 3V, an error in CT circuit is considered, the concerned protection functions are blocked
and an alarm is issued with a time delay of 10s and drop off with a time delay of 10s after CT
circuit is restored to normal condition.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
CTS
CBx.CTS.En CBx.CTS.Alm
CBx.CTS.Blk
3.31.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.31-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision

CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
1 CBx.CTS.En
CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
2 CBx.CTS.Blk
1 CBx.CTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails
3.31.5 Logic
SIG CBx.CTS.En &

&
SIG CBx.CTS.Blk 10s 10s CBx.CTS.Alm
SIG 3I0>0.1In
&
SIG 3U0<3V
SIG IA<0.06In
>=1
SIG IB<0.06In
SIG IC<0.06In
Figure 3.31-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure
3.32 Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing
The purpose of control is to open or close primary equipment, including circuit breaker (CB),
disconnector (DS) and earth switch (ES), or to issue outputs for signaling purpose. Synchronism
check and dead check are also provided for the control processes as below:
1. Local manual closing CB
2. Local closing CB by access the menu “Local Cmd→Control”
3. Remote closing CB from SCADA (i.e., local HMI system) or control center (CC)
Programmable interlocking logics within a bay and amongst different bays are provided by using

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
PCS-Explorer.
NOTICE!
For double circuit breakers mode, the device will provide independent control and
synchrocheck function of manual closing for CB1 and CB2 respectively. Both control
and synchrocheck for manual closing functions have the same logic.The difference is
that the prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals and settings for circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or
2).
1. Control
High reliability is ensured by adopting the principle of selection before operation (abbreviated
SBO). When the binary input [BI_Maintenance] is energized as “1”, remote control from
SCADA/CC will be disabled, but local control will not be influenced.
The integrated control process is as follow:
1) The control source (SCADA/CC, or local LCD control operation, or manual control operation)
sends control selection command to this device
2) This device sends back the control selection result (success or failure) to the control source
after logic judgment
3) The control source sends control operation command to this device if the control selection
result is “success”. The control source will send control cancellation command to this device if
the control selection result is “failure”.
4) This device sends back the control operation result (success or failure) to the control source
after logic judgment.
Logic calculation result of interlocking is input to the remote control module as a criterion of remote
operation. When the enabling parameter of remote open/close interlock is “1”, remote control
module determines whether it can be output according to the calculation result of interlocking. If
the current breaker position or programmable part can meet the interlocking condition, remote
control can be output normally, otherwise remote operation is blocked. When the enabling
parameter of remote open/close interlock is “0”, interlocking function is disabled and remote
control will be output directly without the judgment of interlocking.
Holding time of each binary output contact can be set by configuring corresponding settings and is
often configured as 250ms. However, for the control circuits without latched relays, the holding
time must be longer to ensure successful control operation.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
1
EN [MCBrd.CBx.25.En_SynChk]
MCBrd.CBx.25.On_SynChk
SIG MCBrd.CBx.25.Sel_SynChk
0
EN [MCBrd.CBx.25.SetOpt]
1
EN [MCBrd.CBx.25.En_NoChk]
MCBrd.CBx.25.On_NoChk
SIG MCBrd.CBx.25.Sel_NoChk
0
EN [MCBrd.CBx.25.SetOpt]
Figure 3.32-1 Synchrocheck mode selection for manual closing
SIG CSWI01.CILO.Disable >=1
SIG BIinput.CILO.Disable
>=1
EN [CSWI01.En_Cls_Blk]
SIG CSWI01.CILO.EnCls
SIG CSWI01.RmtCtrl >=1

&
SIG BIinput.RmtCtrl >=1 &
[CSWI01.t_PW_Cls] 0ms CSWI01.Op_Cls
SIG CSWI01.Cmd_RmtCtrl
SIG CSWI01.LocCtrl >=1
&
SIG BIinput.LocCtrl
SIG CSWI01.ManSynCls >=1
SIG CSWI01.Cmd_LocCtrl
SIG MCBrd.CB1.25.On_SynChk >=1
SIG MCBrd.CB1.25.Ok_Chk
SIG MCBrd.CB1.Alm_VTS & &

&
EN [MCBrd.CB1.En_Alm_VTS]
EN [MCBrd.CB1.25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk]
EN [MCBrd.CB1.En_Alm_VTS] &
&
SIG MCBrd.CB1.Alm_VTS
EN [MCBrd.CB1.25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk]
EN [MCBrd.CB1.25.En_LvL_DdB]
>=1 & >=1
EN [MCBrd.CB1.25.En_DdL_LvB] >=1
EN [MCBrd.CB1.25.En_DdL_DdB]
SIG MCBrd.CB1.25.On_NoChk
Figure 3.32-2 Logic diagram of closing circuit breaker 1

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
>=1
EN [CSWI02.En_Cls_Blk]
SIG CSWI02.CILO.EnCls

&
SIG BIinput.RmtCtrl >=1 &
[CSWI02.t_PW_Cls] 0ms CSWI02.Op_Cls
&
SIG BIinput.LocCtrl
SIG CSWI02.ManSynCls >=1
SIG MCBrd.CB2.25.On_SynChk >=1
SIG MCBrd.CB2.Alm_VTS & &

&
EN [MCBrd.CB2.En_Alm_VTS]
EN [MCBrd.CB2.25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk]
EN [MCBrd.CB2.En_Alm_VTS] &
&
SIG MCBrd.CB2.Alm_VTS
EN [MCBrd.CB2.25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk]
EN [MCBrd.CB2.25.En_LvL_DdB]
>=1 & >=1
EN [MCBrd.CB2.25.En_DdL_LvB] >=1
EN [MCBrd.CB2.25.En_DdL_DdB]
SIG MCBrd.CB2.25.On_NoChk
Figure 3.32-3 Logic diagram of closing circuit breaker 2
As shown in Figure 3.32-3, for double circuit breakers application, both the first closing command
“CSWI01.Op_Cls” and the second closing command “CSWI02.Op_Cls”, which are controlled by
synchrocheck logic, can be used for CB closing, otherwise, the logic of the second closing
command “CSWI02.Op_Cls” should comply with Figure 3.32-4.
After receiving a closing command, this device will continuously check whether the 2 voltages
(Incoming voltage and reference voltage) involved in synchronism check (or dead check) can meet
the criteria. Within the duration of [MCBrd.CBx.25.t_Wait_Chk], if the synchronism check (or dead
check) criteria are not met, the signal “MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk” will be set as “0”; if the
synchronism check (or dead check) criteria are met, the signal “MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk” will be
set as “1”.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
When any of the following criteria is fulfilled, an alarm signal [MCBrd.CBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued
with a time delay of 1.25s, and drop off with a time delay of 10s after three phases voltage restored
to normal. The alarm signal will block the closing command for circuit breaker.
1. The negative-sequence voltage is greater than 8V.
2. The positive-sequence voltage is smaller than 30V, and any phase current is greater than
0.04In.
SIG CSWIxx.CILO.Disable >=1
>=1
EN [CSWIxx.En_Cls_Blk] &
[CSWIxx.t_PW_Cls] 0ms [CSWIxx.Op_Cls]
SIG CSWIxx.CILO.EnCls
SIG CSWIxx.RmtCtrl >=1

&
SIG BIinput.RmtCtrl >=1
SIG CSWIxx.Cmd_RmtCtrl
SIG CSWIxx.LocCtrl >=1

&
SIG BIinput.LocCtrl
SIG CSWIxx.Cmd_LocCtrl
Figure 3.32-4 Logic diagram of closing switch (xx=02~15)
Access the menu “Local Cmd→Control” to issue control command locally, and this signal
“CSWIxx.Cmd_LocCtrl” will be set as “1”. Remote control commands from SCADA/CC can be
transmitted via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol or IEC 61850 protocol, and this signal
“CSWIxx.Cmd_RmtCtrl” will be set as “1”.
>=1
EN [CSWI01.En_Opn_Blk] &
[CSWI01.t_PW_Opn] 0ms CSWI01.Op_Opn
SIG CSWI01.CILO.EnOpn

&

&
SIG BIinput.LocCtrl
SIG CSWI01.ManOpn >=1

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
>=1
EN [CSWI02.En_Opn_Blk] &
[CSWI02.t_PW_Opn] 0ms CSWI02.Op_Opn
SIG CSWI02.CILO.EnOpn

&

&
SIG BIinput.LocCtrl
SIG CSWI02.ManOpn >=1
Figure 3.32-5 Logic diagram of open circuit breaker
SIG CSWIxx.CILO.Disable >=1
>=1
EN [CSWIxx.En_Opn_Blk] &
[CSWIxx.t_PW_Opn] 0ms CSWIxx.Op_Opn
SIG CSWIxx.CILO.EnOpn
SIG CSWIxx.RmtCtrl >=1

&
SIG CSWIxx.Cmd_RmtCtrl
SIG CSWIxx.LocCtrl >=1

&
SIG BIinput.LocCtrl
SIG CSWIxx.Cmd_LocCtrl
Figure 3.32-6 Logic diagram of open switch (xx=02~15)
The control output fulfills signal output circuit, and opens or closes circuit breaker, disconnector
and earth switch according to the control command. Object manipulation strictly performs three
steps: selection, check and excute, and perform output relay check, to ensure that the remote
control can be excuted safely and reliably.
When logic interlock is enabled, the device can receive the programmable interlock logic. The
device can automatically initiate the interlock logic to determine whether to allow control
operations. The device provides corresponding settings ([CSWIxx.En_Opn_Blk] and
[CSWIxx.En_Cls_Blk]) for each control object. When they are set as “1”, the interlock function of
the corresponding control object is enabled. The interlock logic can be configured by using

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
PCS-Explorer, and downloaded to the device via the Ethernet port. If the interlock function is
enabled, but it is not configured the interlock logic, the result of the logic output is 0.
The control record is a file which is used to store remote control command records of this device
circularly. If the record number is to 256, the storage area of the control record will be full. If this
device has received a new remote command, this device will delete the oldest remote control
record, and then store the latest remote control record.
There are 15 configuration pages corresponding to 15 control outputs in totall respectively. Each
configuration page can finish some signals configuration, including remote control, local control,
disable interlock blocking, and so on.
In order to conveniently configure control output, the same output signals, including
“BIinput.RmtCtrl”, “BIinput.LocCtrl” and “BIinput.CILO.Disable”, are available after processing
binary signals internally, as shown in figure below.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.32-7 Configuration page of control output 01 (default configration)

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.32-8 Configuration page of control output 02 (default configration)
Control output 03~15 is as same as control output 02.
The configuration rule about remote control and local control to binary outputs is as bellow:
X means that it is not configured.
Remot Local
CSWIxx. BIinput. CSWIxx. BIinput. Control Mode
RmtCtrl RmtCtrl LocCtrl LocCtrl
X X X X Neither Local control nor remote control are permissible.
0 X X X
Only local control is permissible.
X 0 X X
1 X X X
Only remote control is permissible.
X 1 X X
X X 0 X
X X X 0
X X 1 X
Only local control is permissible.
X X X 1
0 X 0 X
0 X X 0
Neither Local control nor remote control are permissible.
X 0 0 X
X 0 X 0
0 X 1 X
X 0 1 X Only local control is permissible.
0 X X 1

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
X 0 X 1
1 X 0 X
1 X X 0
X 1 0 X
X 1 X 0
1 X 1 X
1 X X 1
Both Local control and remote control are permissible.
X 1 1 X
X 1 X 1
For remote control or local control, they can be configured by either of “CSWIxx.RmtCtrl” and
“BIinput.RmtCtrl”, or either of “CSWIxx.LocCtrl” and “BIinput.LocCtrl”.
2. Synchrocheck
Three synchrocheck modes are designed for CB closing: no check mode, dead check mode and
synchronism check mode, if any one of the condition of three synchrocheck modes satisfied, then
synchrocheck signal “MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk” will be asserted.
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them with the corresponding settings. The output is only given if all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits. Compared to the synchronism check for auto-reclosing, an
additional criterion is applied to check the rate of frequency change (df/dt) between both sides of
the CB.
When the following four conditions are all met, the synchronism check is successful.
1) Phase angle difference between incoming voltage and reference voltage is less than the
setting [MCBrd.CBx.25.phi_Diff]
2) Frequency difference between incoming voltage and reference voltage is less than
[MCBrd.CBx.25.f_Diff]
3) Voltage difference between between incoming voltage and reference voltage is less than
[MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Diff]
4) Rate of frequency change between incoming voltage and reference voltage is less than
[MCBrd.CBx.25.df/dt]
The dead check function measures the amplitude of line voltage and bus voltage at both sides of
the circuit breaker, and then compare them with the live check setting [MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Lv] and
the dead check setting [MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Dd]. The dead check is successful when the measured
quantities comply with the criteria.
When this device is set to work in no check mode and receives a closing command, CB will be
closed without synchronism check and dead check.
Synchrocheck for manual closing also supports voltage switching. In general, voltage switching is
fulfilled by external circuit ([CBx.CBConfigMode]=NoVoltSel). If using this module to fulfill voltage
switching, the busbar arrangement should be determined by the setting [CBx.CBConfigMode],

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
including:
 Double busbars arrangement ([CBx.CBConfigMode]=DblBusOneCB)
 1½ breakers arrangement ([CBx.CBConfigMode]=3/2BusCB or 3/2TieCB)
Analog input defines four voltage inputs, UL1, UB1, UL2, UB2, and their usage are as follow:
UL1: it connects with three-phase protection voltages (from line or busbar), which mainly are used
by distance protection, voltage protection and so on. According to the voltage switching result,
synchrocheck logic choose one voltage to be used for synchrocheck function, synchrocheck
function requires to judgment the phase identification information of the voltage, which is
determined by the setting [MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL1]. If voltage switching function is not
used, the reference voltage will be selected from UL1 fixedly.
UB1: according to the voltage switching result, synchrocheck logic determined whether the voltage
is used for synchrocheck function. Synchrocheck function requires to judgment the phase
identification information of the voltage, which is determined by the setting
[MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB1]. If voltage switching function is not used, UB1 will be taken as
the synchronism voltage.
UL2: according to the voltage switching result, synchrocheck logic determined whether the voltage
[MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL2]. When voltage switching is available, it is only available for 1½
breakers arrangement, it is fixedly connected to the voltage of the other line of the same diameter
in 1½ breakers arrangement.
UB2: according to the voltage switching result, synchrocheck logic determined whether the voltage
[MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB2]. When voltage switching is available, it is connected to
synchronism voltage for double busbars arrangement or 1½ breakers arrangement.
Synchrocheck for manual closing supports voltage switching function, and the switching logic is as
same as that of synchrocheck for protection closing. The setting [CBx.CBConfigMode] should be
set according to the actual primary busbar arrangement, otherwise, the voltage switching of
synchrocheck for manual closing will fail, so as to block manual closing with synchrocheck.
During dead charge check, when only single-phase voltage is connected to UL1, live voltage is
valid if the setting [VTS.En] should be set as “0” and the connected single-phase voltage is higher
than the setting [MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Lv], otherwise, live voltage is regarded as live only when three
phases voltages are all higher than [MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Lv].

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
CSWI01
CSWI01.CILO.EnOpn CSWI01.Op_Opn
CSWI01.CILO.EnCls CSWI01.Op_Cls
CSWI01.RmtCtrl
CSWI01.LocCtrl
CSWI01.CILO.Disable
CSWI02
CSWI02.CILO.EnOpn CSWI02.Op_Opn
CSWI02.CILO.EnCls CSWI02.Op_Cls
CSWI02.RmtCtrl
CSWI02.LocCtrl
CSWI02.CILO.Disable
CSWIxx
CSWIxx.CILO.EnOpn CSWIxx.Op_Opn
CSWIxx.CILO.EnCls CSWIxx.Op_Cls
CSWIxx.RmtCtrl
CSWIxx.LocCtrl
CSWIxx.CILO.Disable
BIinput
BIinput.RmtCtrl BIinput.RmtCtrl
BIinput.LocCtrl BIinput.LocCtrl
BIinput.CILO.Disable BIinput.CILO.Disable
CSWI01.ManSynCls
CSWI01.ManOpn
CSWI02.ManSynCls
CSWI02.ManOpn
xx can be from 02 or 03 to 15

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.32.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.32-1 I/O signals of control

From receiving a closing command, this device will continuously check
whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage)
involved in synchronism check (or dead check) can meet the criteria.
1 MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk Within the duration of [MCBrd.CBx.25.t_Wait_Chk], if the synchronism
check (or dead check) criteria are not met, [MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk] will
be set as “0”; if the synchronism check (or dead check) criteria are met,
[MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk] will be set as “1”.
It is used to indicate the interlock status of open output for binary output
2 CSWIxx.CILO.EnOpn
No.xx. (xx=01~15)
It is used to indicate the interlock status of closing output for binary
3 CSWIxx.CILO.EnCls
output No.xx. (xx=01~15)
It is used to select the local control to binary output No.xx. When the
4 CSWIxx.LocCtrl local control is active, binary output No.xx can only be locally controlled.
(xx=01~15)
It is used to select the remote control to binary output No.xx. When the
5 CSWIxx.RmtCtrl remote control is active, binary output No.xx can only be remotely
controlled from SCADA or control centers. (xx=01~15)
It is used to disable the interlock blocking function for control output. If
6 CSWIxx.CILO.Disable the signal “CSWIxx.CILO.Disable” is “1”, binary output No.xx will not be
blocked by interlock conditions. (xx=01~15)
It is used to select the local control to all binary outputs. When the local
7 BIinput.LocCtrl
control is active, all binary outputs can only be locally controlled.
It is used to select the remote control to all binary outputs. When the
8 BIinput.RmtCtrl remote control is active, all binary outputs can only be remotely
controlled from SCADA or control centers.
9 BIinput.CILO.Disable the signal “BIinput.CILO.Disable” is “1”, all binary outputs will not be
blocked by interlock conditions.
When the condition of local control is met and the signal
10 CSWI01.ManSynCls “CSWI01.ManSynCls” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlCls01] is closed
to execute manually closing the circuit breaker with synschrochcek.
11 CSWI01.ManOpn “CSWI01.ManOpn” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlOpn01] is closed
to execute manually open the circuit breaker.
“CSWI02.ManSynCls” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlCls02] is closed
12 CSWI02.ManSynCls
to execute manually closing the circuit breaker with synschrochcek. (for
double circuit breakers application)
13 CSWI02.ManOpn
“CSWI02.ManOpn” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlOpn02] is closed

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
to execute manually open the circuit breaker. (for double circuit breakers
application)
14 MCBrd.CBx.25.Sel_SynChk Synchronism check for manual closing is selected.
15 MCBrd.CBx.25.Sel_NoChk No check for manual closing is selected.
1 CSWIxx.Op_Opn Open output of binary output No.xx. (xx=01~15)
2 CSWIxx.Op_Cls Closing output of binary output No.xx. (xx=01~15)
3 BIinput.RmtCtrl In order to be convenient to user configure control output, three same
output signals with input signals are available. The relationship with 15
4 BIinput.LocCtrl
binary output have been configured inside the device. The user only
assigns a specific binary input to input signal, the relevant function can
5 BIinput.CILO.Disable be gained. If some binary output need not be controlled by three signals,
please cancle the configuration by PCS-Explorer, and configure it
independently.
6 MCBrd.CBx.Alm_VTS VT circuit of circuit breaker No.x is abnormal.
3.32.5 Settings
Table 3.32-2 Function settings

Enabling/disabling alarm function
when VT circuit is abnormal
1 MCBrd.CBx.En_Alm_VTS 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Table 3.32-3 Synchrocheck settings

Voltage selecting mode of
Ua line 1
1 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL1
Voltage selecting mode of
Ua bus 1
2 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB1
3 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL2 Ua Voltage selecting mode for

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Ub line 2
Uc Ua: A-phase voltage
Uab Ub: B-phase voltage
Ubc Uc: C-phase voltage
Uca Uab: AB-phase voltage
Voltage selecting mode for
Ua bus 2
4 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB2
Voltage threshold of dead
5 MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Dd 0.05Un~0.8Un 0.001 V
check for manual closing
Voltage threshold of live
6 MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Lv 0.5Un~Un 0.001 V
Compensation coefficient of
7 MCBrd.CBx.25.K_Usyn 0.20-5.00 synchronism voltage for
manual closing
Phase difference limit of
8 MCBrd.CBx.25.phi_Diff 0~ 89 1 deg synchronism check for
manual closing
Compensation of phase
difference between two
9 MCBrd.CBx.25.phi_Comp 0~359 1
synchronous voltages for
manual closing
10 MCBrd.CBx.25.f_Diff 0.02~1.00 0.01 Hz synchronism check for
manual closing
Voltage difference limit of
11 MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Diff 0.02Un~0.8Un 0.01 V synchronism check for
manual closing
Synchrocheck mode
selection for manual closing
12 MCBrd.CBx.25.SetOpt 0, 1 1 0: determined by external
signal
1: determined by the setting
Enabling/disabling
13 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_SynChk 0 or 1 synchronism check for
manual clsoing

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line
and dead bus (DLDB) check
14 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_DdL_DdB 0 or 1 for manual closing
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling dead line
and live bus (DLLB) check
15 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_DdL_LvB 0 or 1 for manual closing
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling live line
and dead bus (LLDB) check
16 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_LvL_DdB 0 or 1 for manual closing
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling manual
closing without any check
17 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_NoChk 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Threshold of rate of
frequency change between
18 MCBrd.CBx.25.df/dt 0.00~3.00 0.01 Hz/s both sides of CB for
synchronism check of
manual closing
Circuit breaker closing time
for manual closing
19 MCBrd.CBx.25.t_Close_CB 20~1000 1 ms It is the time from receiving
closing command pulse till
the CB is completely closed.
From receiving a closing
command, this device will
continuously check whether
between incoming voltage
and reference voltage
involved in synchronism
20 MCBrd.CBx.25.t_Wait_Chk 5~30 0.001 s
check (or dead check) can
meet the criteria. If the
synchronism check (or dead
check) criteria are not met
within the duration of this
time delay, the failure of

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

synchronism-check (or dead
check) will be confirmed.
Enabling/disabling block
synchronism check for
manual closing when VT
21 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk 0 or 1
circuit is abnormal
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling block
dead check for manual
closing when VT circuit is
22 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk 0 or 1
abnormal
0: disable
1: enable
Table 3.32-4 Dual point binary input settings

It is applied to configure the debouncing time
1 CSWIxx.t_DPU_DPS 0~60000 1 ms for dual-point binary input No.xx. (xx=01,
02….15)
Table 3.32-5 Control settings

It is applied to configure the holding time to
1 CSWIxx.t_PW_Opn 0~65535 1 ms open CB or disconnector for binary output
No.xx. (xx=01, 02….15)
It is applied to configure the holding time to
2 CSWIxx.t_PW_Cls 0~65535 1 ms close CB or disconnector for binary output
No.xx. (xx=01, 02….15)
Table 3.32-6 Interlock settings

Enabling/disabling open output of binary
output No.xx controlled by the interlocking
1 CSWIxx.En_Opn_Blk 0 or 1 logic (xx=01, 02….15)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling closing output of binary
output No.xx controlled by the interlocking
2 CSWIxx.En_Cls_Blk 0 or 1 logic (xx=01, 02….15)
0: disable
1: enable

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.33 Faulty Phase Selection

Faulty phase selection is used to discriminate faulty phase for all kinds of fault type. If protection
element operates, faulty phase selection is succeeded and the device output tripping command.
Faulty phase selection is adaptive to both earthed system and unearthed system. For unearthed
system, earthed protection elements should be disabled, such as phase-to-ground distance
protection, earth fault protection, and only phase-to-phase protection elements are enabled, such
as phase-to-phase distance protection, phase overcurrent protection.
1. Detecting the variation of operating voltage
2. Detecting the phase difference between I0 and I2A
3. When phase overcurrent element operates, pickup phase due to overcurrent is judged as
faulty phase.
4. When phase overvoltage element operates, pickup phase due to overvoltage is judged as
faulty phase.
5. When phase undervoltage element operates, pickup phase due to undervoltage is judged as
faulty phase.

3.33.2.1 Variation of Operating Voltage (Faulty Phase Selection Element 1)
1. Variation of phase operating voltage
1) Phase A: ΔUOPA
2) Phase B: ΔUOPB
3) Phase C: ΔUOPC
2. Variation of phase-to-phase operating voltage
1) Phase AB: ΔUOPAB
2) Phase BC: ΔUOPBC
3) Phase CA: ΔUOPCA
ΔUOΦMAX=Max(ΔUOPA, ΔUOPB, ΔUOPC)
ΔUOΦΦMAX=Max(ΔUOPAB, ΔUOPBC, ΔUOPCA)
If ΔUOΦMAX is several times higher than the variation of operating voltages of other two phases, the
single-phase fault is ensured, otherwise, the multi-phase fault is ensured.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.33-1 Relation between ΔUOΦMAX and faulty phase
ΔUOΦMAX or ΔUOΦΦMAX Fault phase
ΔUOPA Phase A
ΔUOPB Phase B
ΔUOPC Phase C
ΔUOPAB Phase AB
ΔUOPBC Phase BC
ΔUOPCA Phase CA
3.33.2.2 I0 and I2A (Faulty Phase Selection Element 2)
The phase selection algorithm uses the angle relation between I 0 and I2A of the device. As shown
in Figure 3.33-1, there are three faulty phase selection regions.
Region A
60° -60°
Region B Region C
180°
Figure 3.33-1 The region of faulty phase selection
Depended on the phase relation between I0 and I2A, the faulty phase can be determined.
1. -60º<Arg(I0/I2A)<60º, region A is selected, possible faulty phase is phase A or phase BC.
2. 60º<Arg(I0/I2A)<180º, region B is selected, possible faulty phase is phase B or phase CA.
3. 180º<Arg(I0/I2A)<300º, region C is selected, possible faulty phase is phase C or phase AB.
For single-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of faulty phase are in-phase and its distance element
operates.
For phase-to-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of non-faulty phase are in-phase but its distance element
does not operate.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.33.2.3 Phase Current or Phase Voltage (Faulty Phase Selection Element 3)
When phase overcurrent element or phase voltage element, the corresponding phase which is
overcurrent, overvoltage or undervoltage will be judged as faulty phase.
SIG 50/51Pi.Op &
SIG 50/51Pi.StA
SIG 87STB.Op & >=1
SIG 87STB.StA
>=1
Phase A
SIG 50PVT.Op &
SIG 50PVT.StA
SIG 27Pz.Op &

>=1
SIG 27Pz.St1
SIG 59Pz.Op &
SIG 59Pz.St1
SIG 50/51Pi.Op &
SIG 50/51Pi.StB
SIG 87STB.Op & >=1
SIG 87STB.StB
>=1
Phase B
SIG 50PVT.Op &
SIG 50PVT.StB
SIG 27Pz.Op &

>=1
SIG 27Pz.St2
SIG 59Pz.Op &
SIG 59Pz.St2

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
SIG 50/51Pi.Op &
SIG 50/51Pi.StC
SIG 87STB.Op & >=1
SIG 87STB.StC
>=1
Phase C
SIG 50PVT.Op &
SIG 50PVT.StC
SIG 27Pz.Op &

>=1
SIG 27Pz.St3
SIG 59Pz.Op &
SIG 59Pz.St3
Figure 3.33-2 The logic of faulty phase selection
i= 1, 2, 3, 4
z=1, 2, 3
PhSel
PhSA
PhSB
PhSC
GndFlt
3.33.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.33-2 I/O signals of faulty phase selection

1 PhSA Phase-A is selected as faulty phase
2 PhSB Phase-B is selected as faulty phase
3 PhSC Phase-C is selected as faulty phase
4 GndFlt Earth fault
NOTICE!
For single phase earth fault, for example phase-A earth fault, PhsA” and “GndFlt”
operate. For phase-to-phase fault, for example phase-BC short-circuit fault, “PhsB”

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
and “PhsC” operate. For two phase earth fault, for example phase-BC earth fault,
“PhsB”, “PhsC” and “GndFlt” operate. For three phases fault, “PhsA”, “PhsB” and
“PhsC” operate.
3.34 Fault Location
3.34.1 Application
The main objective of line protection is fast, selective and reliable operation for faults on a
protected line section. Besides this, information on distance to fault is very important for those
involved in operation and maintenance. Reliable information on the fault location greatly
decreases the outage of the protected lines and increases the total availability of a power system.
This fault location function cannot be used for the transmission line with series compensation.

3.34.2.1 Fundamental Principle
The fault location is an essential function to various line protection devices, after selecting faulty
phase, it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high accuracy. Thus, the fault can
be quickly located for repairs. The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents,
double-end infeed and additional fault resistance. Both double-end fault location and single-end
fault location are available in line differential relay, but only single-end fault location is provided in
other relays. The calculation equation is:
Where:
Dist: The distance of fault location according to the Zcalc (km)
Zcalc: The impedance value calculated from the location of protection device to fault point
Zl: The impedance value of the whole line + mutual impedance
Length: The input length of transmission line (km)
3.34.2.2 Mutual Compensation
When an earth fault occurred on a line of parallel lines arrangement, a distance relay at one end of
the faulty line will tend to underreach whilst the distance relay at the other end will tend to
overreach. Usually the degree of underreach or overreach is acceptable, however, for cases
where precise fault location is required for long lines with high mutual coupling, mutual
compensation is then required to improve the distance measurement. Practically, the mutual effect
between the parallel lines is insignificant to positive and negative sequence and thus the mutual
compensation is only for zero sequence

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
A Ia B
ZM
k
C Ic D
kZL (1-k)ZL
ZS
ZL
The principle in the application of mutual compensation is shown as follows with the aid of
following sequence network diagram figure. The diagram indicates a parallel lines arrangement
with an earth fault at location k on line CD.
The equivalent sequence network for an earth fault on a parallel lines arrangement with single
source is shown as below.
Ia1 ZL1
ZS1
kZL1 (1-k)ZL1
Ic1
Ia2 ZL2
ZS2
kZL2 (1-k)ZL2
Ic2
Ia0 ZL0
ZS0
Z0M
kZL0 (1-k)ZL0
Ic0
Figure 3.34-1 Equivalent sequence network
The device at location C without mutual compensation will have voltage U RC and current IRC
measured as shown in the expression
URC is the voltage of the device at location C.
If the line is fully transposed, ZL1=ZL2, Then

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
The impedance presented to the device is:
For an earth fault, ,
With the mutual compensation enabled,
(Actual distance of the fault)
The residual current from the parallel line should be added to the device. It should be connected to
terminal 08 and star point of the parallel line CT connected to terminal 07 as shown in the following
figure. Please note the connection diagram and the terminal numbers are for reference only. The
final connection terminals are subject to the device configuration at site.

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
P2 S2 P2 S2
P1 S1 P1 S1
02 01 02 01
04 03 04 03
06 05 06 05
08 07 08 07
NOTICE!
The mutual compensation only is to improve the accuracy of fault location for parallel
lines arrangement, and it is not used by settings calculation of earth fault protections.
FL
FPS_Fault Fault_Location
FD.Pkp Fault_Phase
Fault_Phase_Curr
Fault_Resid_Curr

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory
3.34.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.34-1 I/O signals of fault location

1 FPS_Fault Faulty phase selection
1 Fault_Location The result of fault location
2 Faulty_Phase The selected faulty phase
3 Fault_Phase_Curr Maximum faulty current
4 Fault_Resid_Curr Maximum residual current

Date: 2017-06-08
3 Operation Theory

Date: 2017-06-08
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4 Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-a
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Supervision Alarms ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Relay Self-supervision.................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring ................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring .................................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.3 Check Setting ...................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 AC Input Monitoring ........................................................................................ 4-8

4.4.1 Voltage/current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment......................................................... 4-8
4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 4-8
4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ........................................................................ 4-8

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ......................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision ................................................................................................. 4-9
List of Tables
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description..................................................................................................... 4-1
Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 4-5

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
Protection system is in quiescent state under normal conditions, and it is required to respond
promptly for faults occurred on power system. When the device is in energizing process before the
LED “HEALTHY” is on, the device need to be checked to ensure no abnormality. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup and
during normal operation, plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a defect is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the device,
the device will be blocked with indication and alarm of relay out of service. It is suggested a trial
recovery of the device by re-energization. Please contact supplier if the device is still failure.
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed by a LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. The failure alarm is also recorded in event recording report
and can be printed If required.
4.2 Supervision Alarms

Hardware circuit and operation status of the device are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work. However, if severe hardware failure or abnormality, such as PWR module failure,
DC converter failure and so on, are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and the LED
“HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts BO_FAIL will be given. The
protective device then can not work normally and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.
All the alarm signals and the corresponding handling suggestions are listed below.
NOTICE!
If the device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find out its
reason with the help of self-diagnostic record. If the reason can not be found at site,
please notify the factory NR. Please do not simply press button “TARGET RESET” on
the protection panel or re-energize on the device.
Table 4.2-1 Alarm description
No. Item Description Blocking Device

Fail Signals
The device fails.
1 Fail_Device This signal will be pick up if any fail signal picks up and it Blocked
will drop off when all fail signals drop off.
Set value of any setting is out of scope.
2 Fail_Setting_OvRange Blocked
This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

latched unless the recommended handling suggestion is
adopted.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in modules
3 Fail_BoardConfig Blocked
and the designing drawing of an applied-specific project.
After config file is updated, settings of the file and
settings saved on the device are not matched.
4 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be Blocked
adopted.
Error is found during checking memory data.
5 Fail_Memory Blocked
adopted.
Error is found during checking settings.
6 Fail_Settings Blocked
adopted.
DSP chip is damaged.
7 Fail_DSP Blocked
adopted.
Communication between two DSP chips is abnormal
8 Fail_DSP_Comm This signal will pick up instantaneously and will drop off Blocked
instantaneously.
Software configuation is incorrect.
9 Fail_Config Blocked
adopted.
AC current and voltage samplings are abnormal.
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 200ms and
10 Fail_Sample Blocked
will be latched unless the recommended handling
suggestion is adopted.
For DSP plug-in module for measurement and control in
11 MCBrd.Fail_Sample Blocked
slot 06, AC current and voltage samplings are abnormal
Error is found during checking the settings of DSP
12 MCBrd.Fail_Settings Blocked
plug-in module for measurement and control in slot 06.
Alarm Signals
The device is abnormal.
13 Alm_Device This signal will be pick up if any alarm signal picks up Unblocked
and it will drop off when all alarm signals drop off.
14 Alm_Insuf_Memory The memory of MON plug-in module is insufficient. Unblocked
The device is in the communication test mode.
15 Alm_CommTest Unblocked
This signal will pick up instantaneously and will drop off

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

instantaneously.
The error is found during MON module checking
settings of device.
16 Alm_Settings_MON Unblocked
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and will
be latched unless re-powering or rebooting the device.
The error is found during checking the version of
software downloaded to the device.
17 Alm_Version Unblocked
instantaneously.
The active group set by settings in device and that set
by binary input are not matched.
18 Alm_BI_SettingGrp Unblocked
instantaneously.
Data frame is abnormal between two DSP modules.
19 Alm_DSP_Frame This signal will pick up instantaneously and will drop off Unblocked
instantaneously.
The power supply of BI plug-in module in slot xx is
abnormal.
20 Bxx.Alm_OptoDC Unblocked
drop off with a time delay of 10s.
Fault detector element operates for longer than 50s.
21 Alm_Pkp_FD This signal will pick up with a time delay of 50s and will Unblocked
Neutral current fault detector element operates for
longer than 10s.
22 Alm_Pkp_I0 Unblocked
Protection VT circuit fails.
23 VTS.Alm This signal will pick up with a time delay [VTS.t_DPU] Unblocked
and will drop off with a time delay [VTS.t_DDO].
Protection VT circuit of neutral point fails.
24 VTNS.Alm This signal will pick up with a time delay [VTS.t_DPU] Unblocked
and will drop off with a time delay [VTS.t_DDO].
VT circuit of circuit breaker No.x is abnormal.
25 MCBrd.CBx.Alm_VTS This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s and will Unblocked
CT circuit of corresponding circuit breaker No.x fails.
26 CBx.CTS.Alm This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and will Unblocked
The auxiliary normally closed contact (52b) of
corresponding circuit breaker No.x is abnormal.
27 CBx.Alm_52b Unblocked

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

The device is in maintenance state.
28 BI_Maintenance This signal will pick up with a time delay of 150ms and Unblocked
will drop off with a time delay of 150ms.
29 Alm_TimeSyn Time synchronization abnormality alarm. Unblocked
Frequency of the system is higher than 65Hz or lower

than 45Hz.
30 Alm_Freq Unblocked
will drop off with a time delay of 10s.
Spare alarm signals
Alm_Sparexx
31 The time delay of pickup and dropoff for these alarm Unblocked
(xx=01~08)
signals can be set by PCS-Explorer.
Protection Element Alarm Signals
Channel x is abnormal
32 FOx.Alm This signal will pick up with a time delay of 100ms and Unblocked
Received ID from the remote end is not as same as the
setting [FOx.RmtID] of the device in local end
33 FOx.Alm_ID Unblocked
No valid frame of channel x is received.
34 FOx.Alm_NoValFram This signal will pick up with a time delay of 100ms and Unblocked
Rate of error code of channel x is larger than 40 error
codes per second.
35 FOx.Alm_CRC Unblocked
with a time delay of 10s.
Channelx is out of service due to receive error codes
after device picking up.
36 FOx.Alm_Off Unblocked
instantaneously.
Optical fibre of channel x is connected wrongly.
37 FOx.Alm_Connect This signal will pick up with a time delay of 100ms and Unblocked
Stage 3 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection
38 50/51Q3.Alm Unblocked
operates to alarm.
39 27P1.Alm Stage 1 of undervoltage protection alarms. Unblocked
42 59P1.Alm Stage 1 of overvoltage protection alarms. Unblocked
45 49-1.Alm Stage 1 of thermal overload protection operates to Unblocked

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

alarm.
Stage 2 of thermal overload protection operates to
46 49-2.Alm Unblocked
alarm.
Differential current is abnormal.
47 87STB.Alm_Diff This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1s and will Unblocked
disconnector position is abnormal.
48 87STB.Alm_89b_DS This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1s and will Unblocked
49 46BC.Alm Broken-conductor protection operates to alarm. Unblocked
Voltage selection corresponding to circuit breaker No.x
50 CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel Unblocked
is invalid.
Synchronism voltage circuit corresponding to circuit
breaker No.x is abnormal.
51 CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn Unblocked
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s and will
Reference voltage circuit corresponding to circuit
breaker No.x is abnormal.
52 CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref Unblocked
This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s and will
Auto-reclosing corresponding to circuit breaker No.x
53 CBx.79.Fail_Rcls Unblocked
fails.
Synchrocheck for AR corresponding to circuit breaker
54 CBx.79.Fail_Chk Unblocked
No.x fails.
Input signal of receiving transfer trip is energized for
55 TT.Alm longer than 4s and it will drop off with a time delay of Unblocked
10s.
Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting
No. Item Handling suggestion

Fail Signals
The signal is issued with other specific fail signals, and please refer to the
1 Fail_Device
handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
Please reset setting values according to the range described in the instruction
2 Fail_Setting_OvRange manual, then re-power or reboot the device and the device will restore to
normal operation state.
1. Go to the menu “Information→Borad Info”, check the abnormality
information.
3 Fail_BoardConfig 2. For the abnormality board, if the board is not used, then remove, and if the
board is used, then check whether the board is installed properly and work
normally.
Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD, and
4 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd
go to the menu “Settings” and select “Confirm_Settings” item to comfirm

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

settings. Then, the device will restore to normal operation stage.
5 Fail_Memory Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
6 Fail_Settings Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Chips are damaged and please inform the manufacture or the agent replacing
7 Fail_DSP
the module.
8 Fail_DSP_Comm Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Please inform configuration engineers to check and confirm visualization
9 Fail_Config
functions of the device
1. Please make the device out of service.
2. Then check if the analog input modules and wiring connectors connected to
10 Fail_Sample
those modules are installed at the position.
3. Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation state.
1. Please make the device out of service.
2. Then check if analog input modules and wiring connectors connected to
11 MCBrd.Fail_Sample
those modules are installed at the position.
3. Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation state.
12 MCBrd.Fail_Settings Please inform the manufacturer or the agent for repair.
Alarm Signals
The signal is issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to the
13 Alm_Device
handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.
14 Alm_Insuf_Memory Please replace MON plug-in module.
No special treatment is needed, and disable the communication test function
15 Alm_CommTest
after the completion of the test.
16 Alm_Settings_MON Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
Users may pay no attention to the alarm signal in the project commissioning
stage, but it is needed to download the latest package file (including correct
version checksum file) provided by R&D engineer to make the alarm signal
17 Alm_Version
disappear. Then users get the correct software version. It is not allowed that
the alarm signal is issued on the device already has been put into service. the
devices having being put into service so that the alarm signal disappears.
Please check the value of setting [Active_Grp] and binary input of indiating
active group, and make them matched. Then the “ALARM” LED will be
18 Alm_BI_SettingGrp
extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the
device will restore to normal operation state.
19 Alm_DSP_Frame Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.
1. check whether the binary input module is connected to the power supply.
2. check whether the voltage of power supply is in the required range.
20 Bxx.Alm_OptoDC 3. After the voltage for binary input module restores to normal range, the
“ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will
disappear and the device will restore to normal operation state.
Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set
21 Alm_Pkp_FD reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then
the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

operation state.
Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set
reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then
22 Alm_Pkp_I0
the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal
operation state.
Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
23 VTS.Alm
eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit of neutral point. After
24 VTNS.Alm
the abnormality is eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.
Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
25 MCBrd.CBx.Alm_VTS
Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
26 CBx.CTS.Alm
Please check the auxiliary contact of CB. After the abnormality is eliminated,
27 CBx.Alm_52b
the device returns to normal operation state.
After maintenance is finished, please de-energized the binary input
28 BI_Maintenance [BI_Maintenance] and then the alarm will disappear and the device restore to
normal operation state.
1. check whether the selected clock synchronization mode matches the clock
synchronization source;
2. check whether the wiring connection between the device and the clock
synchronization source is correct
29 Alm_TimeSyn 3. check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization (i.e.
[Opt_TimeSyn]) is set correctly. If there is no clock synchronization, please
set the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] as ”No TimeSyn”.
4. After the abnormality is removed, the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished

and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the device will
restore to normal operation state.
30 Alm_Freq Adjust the system operating mode
Alm_Sparexx Find the reason according to specific problem. (These signals are
31
(xx=01~08) user-defined.)
Operation Alarm Signals
32 FOx.Alm Please check the conncetion of optical fibre channel.
33 FOx.Alm_ID Please check the conncetion of optical fibre channel.
34 FOx.Alm_NoValFram Please check the conncetion of optical fibre channel.
35 FOx.Alm_CRC Please check the conncetion of optical fibre channel.
36 FOx.Alm_Off Please check the conncetion of optical fibre channel.
Please check the conncetion of optical fibre channel. (For example, receiving
37 FOx.Alm_Connect
and sending are inconsistent, or channel 1 and channel 2 are inconsistent)
Please check the corresponding current circuit. After the abnormality is
38 87STB.Alm_Diff
eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off automatically and device returns to

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

normal operation state with a time delay of 10s.
Please check the corresponding binary input secondary circuit. After the
39 87STB.Alm_89b_DS abnormality is eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off automatically and device
returns to normal operation state with a time delay of 10s.
Please check the corresponding binary input secondary circuit. After the
40 TT.Alm abnormality is eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off automatically and device
returns to normal operation state with a time delay of 10s.
4.3 Relay Self-supervision
4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring

All chips on DSP module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or having errors. If
any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the alarm signal [Fail_DSP] is issued with
the device being blocked.
4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring

When neutral current fault detector picks up and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Alm_Pkp_I0] will be issued without the device blocked. When any fault detector picks up for
longer than 50s, an alarm will be issued [Alm_Pkp_FD] without the device blocked.
4.3.3 Check Setting

This relay has 10 setting groups, only one Setting group could be activiated (is active) at a time.
The settings of active setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are
checked to be unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued,
and the device is also blocked.
4.4 AC Input Monitoring

4.4.1 Voltage/current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment
Zero point of voltage and current may drift due to variation of temperature or other environment
factors. The device continually traces the drift and adjust it to normal value automatically.
4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring

AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are monitored and if
the samples of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are detected to be wrong or inconsistent
between them, the alarm signal [Fail_Sample] will be issued and the device will be blocked.
4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision
Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,
an alarm [Bxx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued.

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision

If 52b of three phases are energized ,which indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no
current detected in the line, the line will be considered to be out of service. SOTF protection will be
enabled after 50ms.
If 52b of three phases are energized that indicates circuit breaker is open but there is still current
detected in the line (the measured current is greater than a settable threshold value) or
three-phase circuit breaker is in pole disagreement, an alarm signal [Alm_52b] will be issued after
10 seconds.

Date: 2016-10-14
4 Supervision

Date: 2016-10-14
5 Management
5 Management
Table of Contents
5 Management ...................................................................................... 5-a
5.1 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Measurement Values ........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Metering Value ..................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2 Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-6

5.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.3 Disturbance Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-7
5.2.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-8

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
5.1 Measurement
PCS-902 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The current full
scale of relay is 40 times of rated current, and there is no effect to the performance of IED due to
overflowing of current full scale. The device samples 24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS
value in each interval and updated the LCD display in every 0.5 second. The measurement data
can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local/remote PC via software tool.
Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through LCD screen.
NOTICE!
This device can be configured to support single circuit breaker application or double
circuit breakers application by PCS-Explorer. For double circuit breakers mode, the
prefix “CBx.” is added to related measurement quantities for circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or
2).
5.1.1 Measurement Values

Access path: MainMenu  “Measurements”  “Measurements1”
“Measurements1” is used to display measured values from protection calculation DSP. The
measurement values can be displayed in primary value or secondary value by the setting
[Opt_Display_Status].
No. Symbol Definition Resolution Unit
1 CBx.Ia Phase-A current corresponding to circuit breaker No.x 0.000 A
2 CBx.Ib Phase-B current corresponding to circuit breaker No.x 0.000 A
3 CBx.Ic Phase-C current corresponding to circuit breaker No.x 0.000 A
4 CBx.3I0 Residual current corresponding to circuit breaker No.x 0.000 A
Phase-A current (summation current for double circuit

5 Ia 0.000 A
breakers mode)
Phase-B current (summation current for double circuit

6 Ib 0.000 A
breakers mode)
Phase-C current (summation current for double circuit

7 Ic 0.000 A
breakers mode)
8 I1 The positive-sequence current 0.000 A
9 I2 The negative-sequence current 0.000 A
Residual current (summation current for double circuit

10 3I0 0.000 A
breakers mode)
11 3I0Adj Residual current from parallel line 0.000 A
12 Ua Phase-A protection voltage 0.000 V
13 Ub Phase-B protection voltage 0.000 V
14 Uc Phase-C protection voltage 0.000 V
15 Uab Phase-AB protection voltage 0.000 V

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
16 Ubc Phase-BC protection voltage 0.000 V
17 Uca Phase-CA protection voltage 0.000 V
18 UB1 The voltage of busbar No.1 0.000 V
19 UL2 The voltage of line No.2 0.000 V
20 UB2 The voltage of busbar No.2 0.000 V
21 U1 The positive-sequence voltage 0.000 V
22 U2 The negative-sequence voltage 0.000 V
23 3U0 The calculated residual voltage 0.000 V
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and phase-B

24 Ang (Ua-Ub) 0 deg
voltage
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and phase-C

25 Ang (Ub-Uc) 0 deg
voltage
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and phase-A

26 Ang (Uc-Ua) 0 deg
voltage
Phase angle between phase-A voltage and phase-A

27 Ang (Ua-Ia) 0 deg
current
Phase angle between phase-B voltage and phase-B

28 Ang (Ub-Ib) 0 deg
current
Phase angle between phase-C voltage and phase-C

29 Ang (Uc-Ic) 0 deg
current
Phase angle between phase-A current and phase-B

30 CBx.Ang (Ia-Ib) 0 deg
current corresponding to circuit breaker No.x
Phase angle between phase-B current and phase-C

31 CBx.Ang (Ib-Ic) 0 deg
Phase angle between phase-C current and phase-A

32 CBx.Ang (Ic-Ia) 0 deg
33 f Frequency of protection voltage 0.000 Hz
34 P1 The positive-sequence active power 0.000 W
Frequency of synchronism voltage corresponding to

35 CBx.25.f_Syn 0.000 Hz
circuit breaker No.x
Frequency difference between protection voltage and

36 CBx.25.f_Diff synchronism voltages corresponding to circuit breaker 0.000 Hz
No.x
Phase angle difference between protection voltage and

37 CBx.25.phi_Diff synchronism voltages corresponding to circuit breaker 0 V
No.x
Voltage difference between protection voltage and

38 CBx.25.U_Diff 0.000 V
synchronism voltages corresponding to circuit breaker

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
No.x
“Measurements2” is used to display measured values from fault detector DSP. The measurement
values can be displayed in primary value or secondary value by the setting [Opt_Display_Status].
Phase-A current corresponding to circuit

1 CBx.Ia 0.000 A
breaker No.x
Phase-B current corresponding to circuit

2 CBx.Ib 0.000 A
breaker No.x
Phase-C current corresponding to circuit

3 CBx.Ic 0.000 A
breaker No.x
Phase-A current (summation current for double

4 Ia 0.000 A
circuit breakers mode)
Phase-B current (summation current for double

5 Ib 0.000 A
Phase-C current (summation current for double

6 Ic 0.000 A
Phase-A thermal accumulation of stage 1 of

7 49-1.Accu_A 0.000 %
Phase-B thermal accumulation of stage 1 of

8 49-1.Accu_B 0.000 %
Phase-C thermal accumulation of stage 1 of

9 49-1.Accu_C 0.000 %
Phase-A thermal accumulation of stage 2 of

10 49-2.Accu_A 0.000 %
Phase-B thermal accumulation of stage 2 of

11 49-2.Accu_B 0.000 %
Phase-C thermal accumulation of stage 2 of

12 49-2.Accu_C 0.000 %
“Measurements3” is used to display measured values of other calculated quantities related to the
measurement and control. The measurement values are always displayed in primary value.
The primary value of phase-A current corresponding to circuit

1 CBx.Ia 0.000 A
breaker No.x
2 CBx.Ib The primary value of phase-B current corresponding to circuit 0.000 A

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
breaker No.x
The primary value of phase-C current corresponding to circuit

3 CBx.Ic 0.000 A
breaker No.x
The primary value of positive-sequence current corresponding

4 CBx.I1 0.000 A
The primary value of negative-sequence current

5 CBx.I2 0.000 A
corresponding to circuit breaker No.x
The primary value of calculated residual current

6 CBx.3I0 0.000 A
The primary value of phase-A current (summation current for

7 Ia 0.000 A
double circuit breakers mode)
The primary value of phase-B current (summation current for

8 Ib 0.000 A
The primary value of phase-C current (summation current for

9 Ic 0.000 A
10 Ua The primary value of phase-A voltage 0.000 kV
11 Ub The primary value of phase-B voltage 0.000 kV
12 Uc The primary value of phase-C voltage 0.000 kV
13 Uab The primary value of phase-AB voltage 0.000 kV
14 Ubc The primary value of phase-BC voltage 0.000 kV
15 Uca The primary value of phase-CA voltage 0.000 kV
16 U1 The primary value of positive-sequence voltage 0.000 kV
17 U2 The primary value of negative-sequence voltage 0.000 kV
18 3U0 The primary value of calculated residual voltage 0.000 kV
19 UB1 The primary value of voltage of busbar No.1 0.000 kV
20 UL2 The primary value of voltage of line No.2 0.000 kV
21 UB2 The primary value of voltage of busbar No.2 0.000 kV
22 f Frequency of protection voltage 0.000 Hz
23 UB1.f Frequency of busbar 1 voltage 0.000 Hz
24 UL2.f Frequency of line 2 voltage 0.000 Hz
25 UB2.f Frequency of busbar 2 voltage 0.000 Hz
The primary value of active power corresponding to circuit

26 CBx.P 0.000 MW
breaker No.x
The primary value of reactive power corresponding to circuit

27 CBx.Q 0.000 MVAr
breaker No.x
The primary value of apparent power corresponding to circuit

28 CBx.S 0.000 MVA
breaker No.x

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
The value of power factor corresponding to circuit breaker

29 CBx.Cos 0.000 -
No.x
The primary value of phase-A active power corresponding to

30 CBx.Pa 0.000 MW
The primary value of phase-B active power corresponding to

31 CBx.Pb 0.000 MW
The primary value of phase-C active power corresponding to

32 CBx.Pc 0.000 MW
The primary value of phase-A reactive power corresponding to

33 CBx.Qa 0.000 MVAr
The primary value of phase-B reactive power corresponding

34 CBx.Qb 0.000 MVAr
The primary value of phase-C reactive power corresponding

35 CBx.Qc 0.000 MVAr
The value of phase-A power factor corresponding to circuit

36 CBx.Cosa 0.000 -
breaker No.x
The value of phase-B power factor corresponding to circuit

37 CBx.Cosb 0.000 -
breaker No.x
The value of phase-C power factor corresponding to circuit

38 CBx.Cosc 0.000 -
breaker No.x
The frequency difference between reference side and

39 CBx.f_Diff incoming side for manual closing synchrocheck corresponding 0.000 Hz
The rate of frequency change between reference side and

40 CBx.df/dt incoming side for manual closing synchrocheck corresponding 0.000 Hz/s
Phase angle difference between reference side and incoming

41 CBx.phi_Diff side for manual closing synchrocheck corresponding to circuit 0.00 deg
breaker No.x
The primary value of voltage difference between reference

42 CBx.U_Diff side and incoming side for manual closing synchrocheck 0.000 kV
5.1.2 Metering Value

Access path: MainMenu  “Measurements”  “Metering”
“Metering” is used to display metering values of active and reactive energy. The metering values
are always displayed in primary value.

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
1 PHr+_Pri The primary positive active energy 0.000 MWh
2 PHr-_Pri The primary negative active energy 0.000 MWh
3 QHr+_Pri The primary positive reactive energy 0.000 MVAh
4 QHr-_Pri The primary negative reactive energy 0.000 MVAh
5.2 Recording
5.2.1 Overview
PCS-902 provides the following recording functions:
1. Event recording
2. Disturbance recording
3. Present recording
All the recording information except waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing.
Waveform could only be printed or extracted with PCS-Explorer software tool and a waveform
analysis software.
5.2.2 Event Recording

5.2.2.1 Overview
The device can store the latest 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory,
and when the available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the
latest one.
5.2.2.2 Disturbance Records
When any protection element operates or drops off, such as fault detector, distance protection etc.,
they will be logged in event records.
5.2.2.3 Supervision Events
The device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or abnormal
condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged in event
records.
5.2.2.4 Binary Events
When there is a binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from “0” to “1”
or from “1” to “0”, it will be logged in event records.
5.2.2.5 Control Logs
When the total number of control command records reaches 256, “Control_Logs” memory area
will be full. If the device receives a new control command now, the oldest control command record
will be deleted, and then the latest control command record will be stored and displayed.

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
5.2.2.6 Device Logs
If an operator implements some operations on the device, such as reboot protective device,
modify setting, etc., they will be logged in event records.
5.2.3 Disturbance Recording

5.2.3.1 Application
Disturbance records can be used to have a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Analysis of
the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.
5.2.3.2 Design
A disturbance record consists of fault record and fault waveform. The disturbance record can be
initiated by fault detector element, tripping element, reclosing element or configurable signal
[BI_TrigDFR].
5.2.3.3 Capacity and Information of Disturbance Records
The device can store up to 32 disturbance records with waveform in non-volatile memory. It is
based on first in first out queue that the oldest disturbance record will be overwritten by the latest
one.
For each disturbance record, the following items are included:
1. Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the record and displayed on LCD
screen.
2. Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via clock synchronized
device if connected. The date and time is recorded when a system fault is detected.
3. Relative operating time
An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the record.
4. Faulty phase
5. Fault location
To get accurate result of fault location, the following settings shall be set correctly:
1) Positive-sequence line reactance [X1L]
2) Positive-sequence line resistance [R1L]
3) Zero-sequence line reactance [X0L]
4) Zero-sequence line resistance [R0L]

Date: 2017-06-09
5 Management
5) Zero-sequence line mutual reactance [X0M]
6) Zero-sequence line mutual resistance [R0M]
7) Line positive-sequence sensitive angle [21-x.phi1_Reach] or [21.Pilot.phi1_Reach]
8) Line zero-sequence sensitive angle [21-x.Real_K0] and [21-x.Imag_K0]
9) Line length in km [LineLength]
6. Protection elements
5.2.3.4 Capacity and Information of Fault Waveform
MON module can store 32 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory. If a new
fault occurs when 32 fault waveform have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest
one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each waveform recording includes pre-fault waveform that is determined by the setting
[Num_Cyc_PreTrigDFR] and post-fault waveform that is 250 cycles at least, and a completed
waveform recording can record 500 cycles at most. Each cycle waveform is high-frequency
recording at a rate of 1200Hz or 1440Hz (24 points per cycle).
5.2.4 Present Recording

Present recording is a waveform triggered manually on on the device′s LCD or remotely through
PCS-Explorer software. Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance
recording.
Each waveform recording includes pre-fault waveform that is determined by the setting
[Num_Cyc_PreTrigDFR] and 250-cycles post-fault waveform. Each cycle waveform is
high-frequency recording at a rate of 1200Hz or 1440Hz (24 points per cycle).

Date: 2017-06-09
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6 Hardware ............................................................................................ 6-a
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only) ........................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only) ............................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.3 Plug-in Module Description ............................................................................ 6-9

6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply) ................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor) ...........................................................................................6-11
6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input) ....................................................................................... 6-14
6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Process) ................................................................................ 6-27
6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV) .................................................................... 6-27
6.3.6 CH Plug-in Module (Fibre Optical Channel Interface) ....................................................... 6-32
6.3.7 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input)........................................................................................ 6-34
6.3.8 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output) ................................................................................... 6-41
6.3.9 HMI Module........................................................................................................................ 6-45
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position ..................................................................... 6-1
Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram .................................................................................................. 6-2
Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-902 ........................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-902 ................................................................................ 6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-902 (conventional CT/VT) ................................................ 6-5
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-902 (ECT/EVT) .................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-10
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-10

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-12
Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal ............................................................ 6-13
Figure 6.3-5 Jumpers of clock synchronization port ............................................................ 6-14
Figure 6.3-6 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ....................................... 6-15
Figure 6.3-7 Current connection of AI plug-in module (NR1401) ......................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module (NR1401) ...................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-9 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module (NR1401) ...................................... 6-17
Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module for one CT group input (NR1401) ........................ 6-17
Figure 6.3-11 Current connection of AI plug-in module (NR1408) ....................................... 6-19
Figure 6.3-12 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module (NR1408) .................................... 6-19
Figure 6.3-13 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module (NR1408) .................................... 6-20
Figure 6.3-14 View of AI plug-in module for one CT group input (NR1408) ........................ 6-20
Figure 6.3-16 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module (NR1401) ....................................... 6-22
Figure 6.3-17 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input (NR1401) ........................ 6-23
Figure 6.3-19 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module (NR1401) ....................................... 6-25
Figure 6.3-20 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input (NR1401) ........................ 6-25
Figure 6.3-21 View of DSP plug-in module ............................................................................. 6-27
Figure 6.3-22 View of NET-DSP plug-in module ..................................................................... 6-28
Figure 6.3-23 View of CH plug-in module ............................................................................... 6-32
Figure 6.3-24 Voltage dependence for binary inputs ............................................................. 6-34
Figure 6.3-25 Debouncing technique ...................................................................................... 6-35
Figure 6.3-26 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503) ................................................................ 6-35
Figure 6.3-27 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504) ................................................................ 6-37
Figure 6.3-28 View of BI plug-in module (NR1508A).............................................................. 6-38
Figure 6.3-29 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A) ............................................................ 6-42
Figure 6.3-30 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C) ............................................................ 6-42
Figure 6.3-31 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F) ............................................................ 6-43
Figure 6.3-32 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521G) ........................................................... 6-44

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Figure 6.3-33 View of BO plug-in module (NR1580A) ............................................................ 6-44
List of Tables
Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module ............................ 6-10
Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (NR1401) ......................................................... 6-17
Table 6.3-6 Encoding of IEC 61850-7-3 quality .......................................................................... 6-29
PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 6-c

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
6-d PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
6.1 Overview
PCS-902 adopts 32-bit microchip processor CPU produced by FREESCALE as control core for
management and monitoring function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal processor DSP
for all the protection calculation. 24 points are sampled in every cycle and parallel processing of
sampled data can be realized in each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of
the device.
PCS-902 is comprised of intelligent plug-in modules, except that few particular plug-in modules’
position cannot be changed in the whole device (gray plug-in modules as shown in Figure 6.1-1),
other plug-in modules like AI (analog input) and IO (binary input and binary output) can be flexibly
configured in the remaining slot positions.
MON module
PWR module
DSP module
DSP module
CH Module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
BI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position
PCS-902 has 16 slots, PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module, DSP plug-in module and CH
plug-in module are assigned at fixed slots.
Besides 5 fixed modules are shown in above figure, there are 12 slots can be flexibly configured.
AI plug-in module, BI plug-in module and BO plug-in module can be configured at position
between slot 02, 03 and 06~15. It should be pay attention that AI plug-in module will occupy two
slots.
This device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and the new
platform major characteristics are of high reliability, networking and great capability in
anti-interference. See Figure 6.1-2 for hardware diagram.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Output Relay
Binary Input
External
Protection
Conventional CT/VT A/D Calculation
DSP
ECVT
Fault
A/D Detector Pickup
DSP Relay
ECVT
ETHERNET
LCD +E
Clock SYN
Power
Uaux LED CPU
Supply
RJ45
Keypad
PRINT
Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram
The working process of the device is as shown in above figure: current and voltage from
conventional CT/VT are converted into small voltage signal and sent to DSP module after filtered
and A/D conversion for protection calculation and fault detector respectively (ECVT signal is sent
to the device without small signal and A/D convertion). When DSP module completes all the
protection calculation, the result will be recorded in 32-bit CPU on MON module. DSP module
carries out fault detector, protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module perfomes
SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between the
device and SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. When fault detector detects a fault
and picks up, positive power supply for output relay is provided.
The items can be flexibly configured depending on the situations like sampling method of the
device (conventional CT/VT or ECT/EVT), and the mode of binary output (conventional binary
output or GOOSE binary output). The configurations for PCS-900 series based on microcomputer
are classified into standard and optional modules.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-902 module configuration
Module ID Module description Remark

NR1101/NR1102 Management and monitor module (MON module) standard
NR1401/NR1408 Analog input module (AI module) standard
NR1161 Protection calculation and fault detector module (DSP module) standard
NR1213/NR1214 Protection communication channel module (CH module) option
NR1503/NR1504/NR1508 Binary input module (BI module) standard
NR1521/NR1580 Binary output module (BO module) standard
NR1301 Power supply module (PWR module) standard

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Module ID Module description Remark

GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP
NR1136 option
module)
Human machine interface module (HMI module) standard
 MON module provides functions like communication with SAS, event record, setting
management etc.
 AI module converts AC current and voltage from current transformers and voltage
transformers respectively to small voltage signal.
 DSP module performs filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector calculation.
 CH module performs information exchange with the remote device through a dedicated
optical fibre channel, multiplex optical fibre channel or PLC channel.
 BI module provides binary inputs via opto-couplers with rating voltage among
24V/110V/125V/220V/250V (configurable).
 BO module provides output contacts for tripping, and signal output contact for annunciation
signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal etc.
 PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into various DC voltage levels for modules of
the device.
 NET-DSP module receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV) from
merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.
 HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicators and multiplex RJ45 ports for user
as human-machine interface.
PCS-902 is made of a 4U height 19” chassis for flush mounting. Components mounted on its front
include a 320×240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and a multiplex RJ45
port. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the equipment for these functions.
Following figures show front and rear views of PCS-902 respectively.
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-902
2 12
ALARM
3 13
4 14
GRP
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-902

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (ALARM),
others are configurable.
For the 9-button keypad, “ENT” is “enter”, “GRP” is “group number” and “ESC” is “escape”.
NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1213 NR1161 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
5V OK ALM
TX
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
RX
ON
TX
OFF
RX
DANGER
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-902
6.2 Typical Wiring

6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only)
NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1213 NR1161 NR1504 NR1521A NR1521C NR1521C NR1521F NR1301
MON module
PWR module
DSP module
DSP module
CH Module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Power supply supervision 0801

CH-TX
CH-RX BI_01 + 0802

Dedicated Channel
*BI plug-in module can be independent common terminal

Or or
Telecom Equipment
…
CH-TX
CH-RX BI_06 + 0807
Fibre Optic Not used 0808

FC/PC Type (Rear)
BI_07 + 0809
0201
0202 Ia
…
0203
0204 Ib BI_12 + 0814
0205
To parallel line Ic Not used 0815
0206
0207 BI_13 + 0816
From parallel line 0208 IM0
…
0213
Protection Voltage
0214 Ua BI_18 + 0821

0215
Ub - 0822
0216
0217
Uc 1101
Controlled by fault
0218
detector element
BO_01 1102
1103
0219
Synchronism Voltage
BO_02 1104
0220 UB1
…
1121
0221 BO_11
UL2 1122
0222
0223
1201
Signal Binary Output
0224 UB2
BO_01 1202
1203
PWR+ P110 BO_02
External DC power Power 1204
…
supply P111 Supply 1221

PWR-
P107 BO_11 1222
OPTO+
Power supply for
opto-coupler (24V) P108
OPTO- 1301
P102 BO_01 1302

BO_FAIL
(option)
P103 BO_ALM 1303

P101 BO_02 1304
COM
…
P105 BO_FAIL 1321

P106 BO_11 1322
BO_ALM
P104 COM
1501
A 0101 BO_CtrlOpn1 1502
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial
Signal Binary Output (option)
B 0102
COM
1503
SGND 0103 BO_CtrlCls1 1504
0104
…
SYN+ 0101 1517

Clock SYN
BO_CtrlOpn5 1518
SYN- 0102
SGND 0103 1519
BO_CtrlCls5 1520
0104
1521
PRINTER
RTS 0105 BO_Ctrl 1522

PRINT
TXD 0106
Multiplex P112
SGND 0107 RJ45 (Front)
0225
Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-902 (conventional CT/VT)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
PCS-902 (conventional CT/VT and conventional binary input and binary output)
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1213 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
MON AI DSP CH BI BI BO BO BO BO PWR
PCS-902 (conventional CT/VT and GOOSE binary input and binary output)
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1213 NR1136 NR1504 NR1301

NET-
MON AI DSP CH BI PWR
DSP
6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only)
NR1102 NR1161 NR1213 NR1161 NR1136 NR1503 NR1521A NR1521C NR1301
NET-DSP Module
MON module
PWR module
DSP module
DSP module
CH Module
BO module
BO module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
CH-TX BI_01 + 0801
*BI plug-in module can be common negative

- 0802
CH-RX
Dedicated Channel
Or or BI_02 + 0803
Telecom Equipment
CH-TX - 0804
terminal
CH-RX BI_03 + 0805
Fibre Optic FC/PC Type (Rear) - 0806
…
BI_11 + 0821
Phase A RX
FO interface for SV channel

SV from
ECT/EVT - 0822
MU
Phase B
(LC Type)
Up to 8
Phase C TX 1101
Controlled by fault
detector element
BO_01 1102
…
1103
BO_02 1104
…
1121
BO_11 1122
PWR+ P110
External DC power Power
1201

supply P111 Supply
PWR- BO_01 1202
OPTO+ P107
Power supply for 1203
opto-coupler (24V) P108 BO_02 1204
OPTO-
…
1221
P102 BO_FAIL BO_11 1222
P103 BO_ALM
P101 COM 1501
P105 BO_FAIL BO_CtrlOpn1 1502
P106
Signal Binary Output (option)
BO_ALM 1503
P104 COM BO_CtrlCls1 1504
…
A 0101
B 0102 1517
COM
BO_CtrlOpn5 1518
SGND 0103
0104 1519
BO_CtrlCls5 1520
SYN+ 0101 1521
Clock SYN
SYN- 0102 BO_Ctrl 1522

SGND 0103
0104 IRIG-B
PRINTER
RTS 0105
PRINT
P112
TXD 0106
Multiplex
SGND 0107 RJ45 (Front) 0225 Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-902 (ECT/EVT)
PCS-902 ECT/EVT, GOOSE binary input and binary output
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1161 NR1213 NR1136 NR1504 NR1301

NET-
MON DSP CH BI PWR
DSP
PCS-902 ECT/EVT, conventional binary input and binary output
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
Module ID NR1102 NR1161 NR1213 NR1136 NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301
NET-
MON DSP CH BI BI BO BO BO BO PWR
DSP

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECT/EVT), the
merging unit will merge the sample data from ECT/EVT, and then send it to the device through
multi-mode optical fibre. DSP module receives the data from merging unit through the optical-fibre
interface to complete the protection calculation and fault detector.
The difference between the hardware platform based on ECT/EVT and the hardware platform
based on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sampled values only, and the device
receives the sampled value from merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.
6.2.3 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:
According to the maximum load current.
-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:
According to the maximum fault current.
-Rated secondary current Isn
-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor Kalf=Ipal/Ipn
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Performance verification
Esl > Esl′
Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Rated resistance burden (ohms)
Rbn 2
Rbn=Sbn/Isn
Sbn Rated burden (VAs)
Esl′ Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn

k stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Ipcf
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Real resistance burden (ohms)
Rb
Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc
Rc Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)
RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
For example:
1. Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)
= 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V
2. Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A
Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
= 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn
= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Thus, Esl > Esl′
6.3 Plug-in Module Description

The device consists of PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module, DSP plug-in module, AI plug-in
module, BI plug-in module, BO plug-in module, CH plug-in module and NET-DSP plug-in module.
Terminal definitions and application of each plug-in module are introduced as follows.
6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply)

PWR module is a DC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output. It has an
input voltage range as described in Chapter 2 “Technical Data”. The standardized output voltages
are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power
supply in this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on PWR module. The terminal definition of the connector is described

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
as below.
NR1301
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
ON
OFF
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module
The power switch in the dotted box of above figure maybe is not existed.
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module
Terminal definition and description is shown as follows:
Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module
Terminal No. Symbol Description
01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1
02 BO_FAIL Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
03 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2
05 BO_FAIL Device failure output 2 (04-05, NC)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
06 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)
07 OPTO+ Positive power supply for BI module (24V)
08 OPTO- Negative power supply for BI module (24V)
09 Blank Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)
12 GND Grounded connection of the power supply
NOTICE!
The standard rated voltage of PWR module is self-adaptive to 88~300 Vdc. If input
voltage is out of range, an alarm signal (Fail_Device) will be issued. For non-standard
rated voltage power supply module please specify when place order, and check if the
rated voltage of power supply module is the same as the voltage of power source
before the device being put into service.
PWR module provides terminal 12 and grounding screw for device grounding. Terminal
12 shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the earth copper bar
of panel via dedicated grounding wire.
Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent EMI, so
effective grounding must be ensured before the device is put into service.
PCS-902, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These
capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not
applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a
year.
6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor)

MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet
controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete device, human
machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module comprises 100BaseT Ethernet
interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces that exchange information with above system by
using IEC 61850, PPS/IRIG-B differential time synchronization interface and RS-232 printing
interface.
Modules with various combinations of memory and interface are available as shown in the table
below.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
CAUTION!
Do NOT look into the end of an optical fiber connected to an optical port.
Do NOT look into an optical port/connector.
A direct sight to laser light may cause temporary or permanent blindness.
NR1102D NR1102I NR1101E
TX
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RX
TX
RX
ETHERNET
Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module
Module ID Memory Interface Terminal No. Usage Physical Layer

4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock Twisted pair wire
RS-485
03 SGND synchronization
NR1102D 128M DDR
04
05 RTS
RS-232 06 TXD To printer Cable
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
01 SYN+
NR1102I 128M DDR 02 SYN- To clock
RS-485 Twisted pair wire
04
RS-232 05 RTS To printer Cable

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Module ID Memory Interface Terminal No. Usage Physical Layer

06 TXD
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 A
02 B
RS-485 To SCADA
03 SGND
04
05 A
06 B Twisted pair wire
RS-485 To SCADA
07 SGND
NR1101E 128M DDR 08
09 SYN+
10 SYN- To clock
RS-485
12
13 RTS
RS-232 14 TXD To printer Cable
15 SGND
16
The correct connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cable with two pairs of
twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to connect
the “+” and “–” terminals of difference signal. The other pair of twisted pairs are used to connect
the signal ground of the communication interface. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports. The free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device, and it is
used to connect the external shields of the cable when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of the cable shall be grounded at one of the ends only.
Twisted pair wire

A 01
B 02
COM
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

SYN+ 01
Clock SYN
SYN- 02
SGND 03
04
Cable
RTS 05
PRINT
TXD 06
SGND 07
Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Pin1
Pin2
Pin3
Figure 6.3-5 Jumpers of clock synchronization port
NOTICE!
As shown in Figure 6.3-5, the external receiving mode of IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface can be set by the jumper J8&J9.
Jumper RS-485 TTL

J8 Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected. (RS-485+) Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected. (TTL+)
J9 Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected. (RS-485-) Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected. (TTL-)
6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)

AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT. It is assigned to
slot numbers 02 and 03. However, the module is not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.
For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as
below.
Plug
Socket
In
Out
plug is not put in the socket

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
In
Out
Put the plug in the socket
Figure 6.3-6 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed
There are three types of AI module with rating 1A (NR1401), 5A (NR1401) or 1A/5A (NR1408).
Please declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. Maximum linear range of the
current converter is 40In.
1. One CT group input without synchronism voltage switchover (optional NR1401 or NR1408)
 NR1401
For one CT group input, three phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) and residual current from parallel line
(for mutual compensation) are input to AI module separately. Terminal 01, 03, 05 and 07 are
polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side.
Three phase voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) for protection calculation and one synchronism voltage are
input to AI module. The synchronism voltage could be any phase-to-ground voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage.
If the auto-reclosing is enabled but synchronism check is not required, the synchronism voltage
should be disconnected.
In order to accurately locate the fault for parallel lines arrangement, residual current from parallel
line is required to be connected to the device to eliminate the mutual effect between the parallel
lines. Otherwise, residual current from parallel line is not necessary.
Relevant description about parallel line to refer to section “Fault Location”.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
P2 S2 P2 S2
P1 S1 P1 S1
02 01 02 01
04 03 04 03
06 05 06 05
08 07 08 07
Figure 6.3-7 Current connection of AI plug-in module (NR1401)
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module (NR1401)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
Ia 01 Ian 02
NR1401
Ib 03 Ibn 04
Ic 05 Icn 06
IM0 07 IM0n 08
09 10
11 12
Ua 13 Uan 14
Ub 15 Ubn 16
Uc 17 Ucn 18
Us 19 Usn 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module for one CT group input (NR1401)
Table 6.3-3 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.
Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (NR1401)
Terminal No. Definition Definition

01 Ia The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware

02 Ian The current of A-phase
03 Ib The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
04 Ibn The current of B-phase
05 Ic The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
06 Icn The current of C-phase
07 IM0 Residual current of parallel line (Polarity mark)
08 IM0n Residual current of parallel line
09 Reserve
10 Reserve
11 Reserve
12 Reserve
13 Ua The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)
14 Uan The voltage of A-phase
15 Ub The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)
16 Ubn The voltage of B-phase
17 Uc The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)
18 Ucn The voltage of C-phase
19 Us Synchronism voltage (Polarity mark)
20 Usn Synchronism voltage
21 Reserve
22 Reserve
23 Reserve
24 Reserve
25 GND Ground
 NR1408
For one CT group input, three phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) and residual current from parallel line
(for mutual compensation) are input to AI module separately. Terminal 01 (or 03), 05 (or 07), 09 (or
11) and 13 (or 15) are polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at
line side.
In order to accurately locate the fault for parallel lines arrangement, residual current from parallel
line is required to be connected to the device to eliminate the mutual effect between the parallel
lines. Otherwise, residual current from parallel line is not necessary.
Relevant description about parallel line to refer to section “Fault Location”.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
P2 S2 P2 S2
P1 S1 P1 S1
02/04 01/03 02/04 01/03
06/08 05/07 06/08 05/07
10/12 09/11 10/12 09/11
14/16 13/15 14/16 13/15
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Ia-1A 01 Ian-1A 02
NR1408
Ia-5A 03 Ian-5A 04
Ib-1A 05 Ibn-1A 06
Ib-5A 07 Ibn-5A 08
Ic-1A 09 Icn-1A 10
Ic-5A 11 Icn-5A 12
IM0-1A 13 IM0n-1A 14
IM0-5A 15 IM0n-5A 16
Ua 17 Uan 18
Ub 19 Ubn 20
Uc 21 Ucn 22
Us 23 Usn 24
Figure 6.3-14 View of AI plug-in module for one CT group input (NR1408)

01 Ia-1A The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware

02 Ian-1A The current of A-phase
03 Ia-5A The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)
04 Ian-5A The current of A-phase
05 Ib-1A The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
06 Ibn-1A The current of B-phase
07 Ib-5A The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
08 Ibn-5A The current of B-phase
09 Ic-1A The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
10 Icn-1A The current of C-phase
11 Ic-5A The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
12 Icn-5A The current of C-phase
13 IM0-1A Residual current of parallel line (Polarity mark)
14 IM0n-1A Residual current of parallel line
15 IM0-5A Residual current of parallel line (Polarity mark)
16 IM0n-5A Residual current of parallel line
25 GND Ground
2. Two CT groups input with synchronism voltage switchover (only NR1401)
For two circuit breakers configuration with two CT groups input, three phase currents
corresponding to CB1 and CB2 respectively (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1 and Ia2, Ib2, Ic2) are input to AI module.
Terminal 01, 03, 05, 07, 09 and 11 are polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT
installed on line is at line side.
Three phase voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) are input to AI module. UB1, UB2 and UL2 are the
synchronism voltage from bus VT and line VT used for synchrocheck, it could be any
phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device can automatically switch
synchronism voltage according to auxiliary contact of CB position or DS position.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
P2 P1 P1 P2 A
S2 S1 S1 S2 C
02 01
04 03
06 05
08 07
10 09
12 11
A B C A B C
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 6.3-16 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module (NR1401)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Ia1 01 Ia1n 02
NR1401
Ib1 03 Ib1n 04
Ic1 05 Ic1n 06
Ia2 07 Ia2n 08
Ib2 09 Ib2n 10
Ic2 11 Ic2n 12
Ua 13 Uan 14
Ub 15 Ubn 16
Uc 17 Ucn 18
UB1 19 UB1n 20
UL2 21 UL2n 22
UB2 23 UB2n 24
Figure 6.3-17 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input (NR1401)

01 Ia1 The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)
02 Ia1n The current of A-phase
03 Ib1 The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)
04 Ib1n The current of B-phase
05 Ic1 The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)
06 Ic1n The current of C-phase
19 UB1 The voltage of bus 1 (Polarity mark)
20 UB1n The voltage of bus 1

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware

21 UL2 The voltage of line 2 (Polarity mark)
22 UL2n The voltage of line 2
23 UB2 The voltage of bus 2 (Polarity mark)
24 UB2n The voltage of bus 2
25 GND Ground
3. Two CT groups input without synchronism voltage switchover (only NR1401)
For two circuit breakers configuration with two CT groups input, three phase currents
corresponding to CB1 and CB2 respectively (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1 and Ia2, Ib2, Ic2), and residual current
from parallel line (for mutual compensation) are input to AI module. Terminal 01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11
and 13 are polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side.
P2 P1 P1 P2 A
S2 S1 S1 S2 C
02 01
04 03
06 05
08 07
10 09
12 11
To parallel line
14 13
From parallel line

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
A B C A B C
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 6.3-19 Voltage connection of AI plug-in module (NR1401)
Ia1 01 Ia1n 02
NR1401
Ib1 03 Ib1n 04
Ic1 05 Ic1n 06
Ia2 07 Ia2n 08
Ib2 09 Ib2n 10
Ic2 11 Ic2n 12
IM0 13 IM0n 14
Ua 15 Uan 16
Ub 17 Ubn 18
Uc 19 Ucn 20
Us 21 Usn 22
23 24
Figure 6.3-20 View of AI plug-in module for two CT group input (NR1401)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware

13 IM0 Residual current of parallel line (Polarity mark)
14 IM0n Residual current of parallel line
23 Reserve
24 Reserve
25 GND Ground

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Process)
NR1161
Figure 6.3-21 View of DSP plug-in module
This device can be equipped with 2 DSP plug-in modules at most and 1 DSP plug-in module at
least. The default DSP plug-in module is necessary, which mainly is responsible for protection
function including fault detector and protection calculation.
The default module consists of high-performance double DSP (digital signal processor),16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and manage other peripherals. One
of double DSP is responsible for protection calculation, and can fulfill analog data acquisition,
protection logic calculation and tripping output. The other is responsible for fault detector, and can
fulfill analog data acquisition, fault detector and providing power supply to output relay.
When the module is connected with conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through AI plug-in module. When the module is connected with ECT/EVT, it can
receive the real-time synchronous sampled value from merging unit through NET-DSP plug-in
module.
The other module is optional and it is not required unless control and manual closing with
synchronism check are equppied with this device. The default DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot
04 and the option DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot 06.
6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV)

NOTICE!
NET-DSP plug-in module is only applied in process level of digital substation.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
NR1136A NR1136C
RX
Figure 6.3-22 View of NET-DSP plug-in module
This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), 2~8 100Mbit/s
optical-fibre interface (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE and
SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols. It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent control
device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit).
This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected. This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.
CAUTION!
The device can output q data by GOOSE, and an output signal is provided “Output_q”. This signal
is used to indicate the quality of all output signals. According to the standard definition about the
quality by IEC 61850, the value of this signal is “0” under normal conditions, and it will be “2048”
(Bit1 is “1”, and other bits is “0”) when the device is under maintenance condtion.
The definition of each bit about quality signal by IEC 61850 is as below.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Table 6.3-6 Encoding of IEC 61850-7-3 quality
Bit (s) IEC 61850-7-3 Bit-String

Bit Attribute name Attribute value Value Default
Good 00 00
Invalid 01
0-1 Validity
Reserved 10
Questionable 11
2 Overflow TRUE FALSE
3 OutofRange TRUE FALSE
4 BadReference TRUE FALSE
5 Oscillatory TRUE FALSE
6 Failure TRUE FALSE
7 OldData TRUE FALSE
8 Inconsistent TRUE FALSE
9 Inaccurate TRUE FALSE
Process 0 0
10 Source
Subsituted 1
11 Test TRUE FALSE
12 OperatorBlocked TRUE FALSE
The method of adding q data is as bellow steps.
1. Step1: Open the DEV file and find “MMS_GOOSE_Out” page.
2. Step2: Taking “PTRC_out” module as an example, which can be found in “Symbol Library”
and instanced as bellow.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
3. Step3: Double click the instanced module, the parameter list is displayed as bellow. Tr1~Tr8
are used for sending signals, q1~q8 are used for q data, the relationship between them is one
to one. Only one total q data can be added to all 8 sending signals by “batch_q”.
4. Step4: The output q data, named “Output_q” in variable library, is used for all sending signals.
The path is shown as bellow which is marked in red color.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
5. Step5: Put the mouse on the “Output_q” signal, hold the left button of the mouse and drag it to
the corresponding position, and then release. The detail is as bellow.
After the above steps, save the modifications and compress driver file. Check the latest GOOSE
and CID file.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
6.3.6 CH Plug-in Module (Fibre Optical Channel Interface)
NR1213 NR1213 NR1213 NR1213
TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX
TX TX
RX RX
NR1213A NR1213A-100 NR1213B NR1213B-100
NR1213 NR1213
NR1214 NR1214
TX TX
RX RX
TX1 TX1
RX1 RX1
TX1
TX1 TX1
RX1
RX1 RX1
NR1213F NR1213F-100 NR1214A NR1214B
Figure 6.3-23 View of CH plug-in module

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Type Wavelength Application

NR1213A 1310nm Single-mode, single channel, transmission distance <40 km
NR1213A-100 1550nm Single-mode, single channel, transmission distance <100 km
NR1213B 1310nm Single-mode, dual channels, transmission distance <40 km
NR1213B-100 1550nm Single-mode, dual channels, transmission distance <100 km
1310nm Single-mode, single channel, transmission distance <40 km
NR1213F
830nm Multi-mode, single channel, transmission distance <2 km
1550nm Single-mode, single channel, transmission distance <100 km
NR1213F-100
830nm Multi-mode, single channel, transmission distance <2 km
NR1214A 830nm Multi-mode, single channel, transmission distance <2 km
NR1214B 830nm Multi-mode, dual channels, transmission distance <2 km
PCS-902 series can exchange information with the device at the remote end through a dedicated
optical fibre channel or multiplex channel. The module transmits and receives optical signal using
FC/PC or ST optical connector.
The parameters are shown as follows:
Item Type1 Type2 Type3

Fiber Optic Single mode, Rec.G652 Single mode, Rec.G652 Multi mode, Rec.G652
Wavelength 1310nm 1550nm 830nm
Transmission power -13.0±3.0 dBm -5.0 dBm±3.0 dBm -12dBm~-20 dBm
Receiving sensitivity Min.-37 dBm Min.-36 dBm Min.-30 dBm
Transmission distance Max.40 km Max.100 km Max.2 km
Optical overload point Min.-3 dBm Min.-3 dBm Min.-8 dBm
NOTICE!
When using dedicated optical fibre channel, if the transmission distance is longer than
50km, the transmitted power may be enchanced to ensure received power larger than
receiving sensitivity. Please notify supplier before ordering and it will be considered as
special project using 1550nm laser diode.
When using multiplex channel, the sending power of the device is fixed.
When using channel multiplexing equipment, the parameters are shown as follows:
1. Channel type: digital optical fibre or digital microwave.
2. Interface standard: 2048kbit/s E1
The device′s requirements on the channel are shown as follows:
1. The routine of both direction shall be same to each other, so the time delays of both direction
are the same.
2. The maximum one-way channel propagation delay shall be less than 15 ms.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
CAUTION!
6.3.7 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input)

There are five kinds of BI modules available, NR1503A, NR1503AR, NR1504A, NR1504AR and
NR1508A. Up to 3 BI modules can be equipped with one device.
Voltage
264
176
154
140
110
87.5
77
62.5
55
Operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
0 110V 125V 220V 220V
Figure 6.3-24 Voltage dependence for binary inputs
The well-designed debouncing technique is adopted in this device, and the state change of binary
input within “Debouncing time” will be ignored. As shown in Figure 6.3-25.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Binary input state
Validate binary input state

change & write it into SOE
record
1
Debouncing time
Time
T0 T1
Figure 6.3-25 Debouncing technique
1. NR1503
Each BI module is with a 22-pin connector for 11 binary inputs, and its rated voltage can be
selected to be 110Vdc, 125Vdc, 220Vdc. Each binary input of NR1503A and NR1503AR has
independent negative power input of opto-coupler and can be configurable. NR1503A′s pickup
voltage and dropoff voltage are fixed value, and the range is from 55%Un to 70%Un. NR1503AR′s
pickup voltage and dropoff voltage are settable by the setting [xx.U_Pickup_BI] and
[xx.U_Dropoff_BI] from 55%Un to 80%Un.
BI_01 01
NR1503 Opto01- 02
BI_02 03
Opto02- 04
BI_03 05
Opto03- 06
BI_04 07
Opto04- 08
BI_05 09
Opto05- 10
BI_06 11
Opto06- 12
BI_07 13
Opto07- 14
BI_08 15
Opto08- 16
BI_09 17
Opto09- 18
BI_10 19
Opto10- 20
BI_11 21
Opto11- 22
Figure 6.3-26 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
[BI_n] can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-Explorer software (n=01, 02, ……).
Terminal description for NR1503 is shown as follows.

01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1
02 Opto01- Negative supply of configurable binary input 1
2. NR1504
Each BI module is with a 22-pin connector for 18 binary inputs, and its rated voltage can be
selected to be 110Vdc, 125Vdc, 220Vdc. All binary inputs of NR1504A and NR1504AR share one
common negative power input and can be configurable. NR1504A′s pickup voltage and dropoff
voltage are fixed value, and the range is from 55%Un to 70%Un. NR1504AR′s pickup voltage and
dropoff voltage are settable by the setting [xx.U_Pickup_BI] and [xx.U_Dropoff_BI] from 55%Un to
80%Un.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
Opto+ 01
NR1504 BI_01 02
BI_02 03
BI_03 04
BI_04 05
BI_05 06
BI_06 07
08
BI_07 09
BI_08 10
BI_09 11
BI_10 12
BI_11 13
BI_12 14
15
BI_13 16
BI_14 17
BI_15 18
BI_16 19
BI_17 20
BI_18 21
COM- 22
Figure 6.3-27 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504)
Terminal description for NR1504 is shown as follows.

01 Opto+ Positive supply of power supply of the module
08 Blank Not used
15 Blank Not used

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware

22 COM- Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs
3. NR1508
NR1508A is with a 22-pin connector for 11 binary inputs, and its rated voltage is 220Vdc. Each
binary input of NR1508A has independent negative power input of opto-coupler and can be
configurable. NR1508A′s pickup voltage and dropoff voltage are fixed value, and the range is from
75%Un to 80%Un.
BI_01 01
NR1508A Opto01- 02
BI_02 03
Opto02- 04
BI_03 05
Opto03- 06
BI_04 07
Opto04- 08
BI_05 09
Opto05- 10
BI_06 11
Opto06- 12
BI_07 13
Opto07- 14
BI_08 15
Opto08- 16
BI_09 17
Opto09- 18
BI_10 19
Opto10- 20
BI_11 21
Opto11- 22
Figure 6.3-28 View of BI plug-in module (NR1508A)
Terminal description for NR 1508A is shown as follows.


Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware

NOTICE!
A default configuration is given for first four binary signals (BI_01, BI_02, BI_03, BI_04)
in first BI plug-in module, and they are [BI_TimeSyn], [BI_Print], [BI_Maintenance] and
[BI_RstTarg] respectively. They can alos be configured as other signals. Because the
first binary signal [BI_01] is set as [BI_TimeSyn] by default (the state change
information of binary signal [BI_TimeSyn] does not need be displayed), new binary
signal should be added to state change message if it is set as other signal.
1. Binary input: [BI_TimeSyn]
It is used to receive clock synchronization signal from clock synchronization device, the binary
input [BI_TimeSyn] will change from “0” to “1” once pulse signal is received. When the device
adopts “Conventional” mode as clock synchronization mode (refer to section “Communication
Settings”), the device can receives PPM (pulse per minute) and PPS (pulse per second). If the
setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as other values, this binary input is invalid.
2. Binary input: [BI_Print]
It is used to manually trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_AutoPrint]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_AutoPrint]=1), report will be printed
automatically as soon as it is formed.
3. Binary input: [BI_Maintenance]
It is used to block communication export when this binary input is energized. During device
maintenance or testing, this binary input is then energized not to send reports via communication
port, local display and printing still work as usual. This binary input should be de-energized when
the device is restored back to normal.
The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for digital substation communication adopting
IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
1) Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message
a) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.
b) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the sent message changes
to “1”.
c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and circuit
breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.
d) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client
discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it correspondingly.
If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message will not be displayed on
real-time message window, audio alarm not issued, but the picture is refreshed so as to ensure
that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The maintenance message will be
stored, and can be inquired, in independent window.
2) Processing mechanism for GOOSE message
a) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by the
protection device changes to “1”.
b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test” in the
GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e [BI_Maintenance]), the
message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.
3) Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message
a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling
data in the SV message sent change “1”.
b) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling data
in the SV message received is “1”, the relevant protection functions will be disabled, but under
maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display the magnitude of sampling
data.
c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module
configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices and dual
merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in maintenance state will
not affect the normal operation of the other.
4. Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]
It is used to reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing a button
on the panel.
NOTICE!
The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 110V, 125V, 220V or 250V, which must be
specified when placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated voltage of BI
module complies with site DC supply rating before put the relay in service.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
There three binary signals are fixed for measurement functions, they are [BI_Rmt/Loc],
[BI_ManSynCls] and [BI_ManOpen] respectively.
5. Binary input: [BI_Rmt/Loc]
It is used to select the remote control or the local control.
“1”: the remote control, all the binary outputs can only be remotely controlled by SCADA or control
centers.
“0” the local control, each binary output can only be applied to open/close CB/DS/ES locally. Each
binary output can also be applied issue a signal locally.
6. Binary input: [BI_ManSynCls]
When the device is under local control condition (i.e. [BI_Rmt/Loc] is de-energized), the manual
synchronism check for closing circuit breaker will be initiated if it is energized.
7. Binary input: [BI_ManOpen]
When the device is under local control condition (i.e. [BI_Rmt/Loc] is de-energized), the manual
control for open circuit breaker will be initiated if it is energized.
6.3.8 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output)

Three standard binary output modules, NR1521A, NR1521C and NR1521G, and two optional
binary output module, NR1521F and NR1580A, can be selected. The contacts provided by
NR1521A, NR1521C, NR1521G, NR1521F and NR1580A are all normally open (NO) contacts.
Output contact can be configured as a specified tripping output contact and a signal output contact
respectively by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement.
The following signals can be configured to output contacts controlled by fault detector or output
contacts without controlled by fault detector.
 Pickup signals of fault detector elements (FD)
 Operation signals of protection elements (Op)
 Start signals of protection elements (St)
 Tripping signals, reclosing signal, AR failure signal, breaker failure signal
However, the signals which will be control the circuit breaker directly or initate breaker failure
protection must be configured to output contacts controlled by fault detector.
The following signals must be configured to output contacts without controlled by fault detector.
 Enable signals of protection elements (On)
 Alarm signals of protection elements (Alm)
 Blocking signals of protection elements (Fail)
 Related signals with voltage switchover and synchrocheck and related signals with AR except
reclosing signal and AR failure signal.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
NR1521A can provide 11 output contacts controlled by fault detector.
01
BO_01
NR1521A 02
03
BO_02
04
05
BO_03
06
07
BO_04
08
09
BO_05
10
11
BO_06
12
13
BO_07
14
15
BO_08
16
17
BO_09
18
19
BO_10
20
21
BO_11
22
Figure 6.3-29 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A)
NR1521C can provide 11 output contacts without controlled by fault detector.
01
BO_01
NR1521C 02
03
BO_02
04
05
BO_03
06
07
BO_04
08
09
BO_05
10
11
BO_06
12
13
BO_07
14
15
BO_08
16
17
BO_09
18
19
BO_10
20
21
BO_11
22
Figure 6.3-30 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is dedicatedly for remote/manual open or closing to circuit breaker,
disconnector and earth switch. 5 pairs of binary outputs (one for open and the other for closing)
can be provided by this BO plug-in module configured in slot 15 if measurement and control
function is equipped with the device. More binary outputs can be provided by another BO plug-in
modules that can be configured in slot 11, 12, 13, 14 if open or closing contacts is not enough.
First pair of binary outputs are used to remote/manual open or close circuit breaker, and second
pair of binary outputs are also used to remote/manual open or close circuit breaker for double
circuit breakers application.
A normally open contact is presented via terminal 21-22 designated as ROS (i.e. remote operation
signal). Whenever any of binary output contacts for open or closing is closed, ROS contact will
close to issue a signal indicating that this device is undergoing a remote operation.
BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is displayed as shown in the following figure.
01
BO_CtrlOpn01
NR1521F 02
03
BO_CtrlCls01
04
05
BO_CtrlOpn02
06
07
BO_CtrlCls02
08
09
BO_CtrlOpn03
10
11
BO_CtrlCls03
12
13
BO_CtrlOpn04
14
15
BO_CtrlCls04
16
17
BO_CtrlOpn05
18
19
BO_CtrlCls05
20
21
BO_Ctrl
22
Figure 6.3-31 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F)
NR1521G can provide 11 output contacts without controlled by fault detector. The first four output
contacts are in parallel with instantaneous operating contacts which are recommended to be
configured as fast signaling contacts to send PLC signal.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
01
BO_01
NR1521G 02
03
BO_02
04
05
BO_03
06
07
BO_04
08
09
BO_05
10
11
BO_06
12
13
BO_07
14
15
BO_08
16
17
BO_09
18
19
BO_10
20
21
BO_11
22
Figure 6.3-32 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521G)
NR1580A can provide 6 output contacts with controlled by fault detector. It is a heavy-capacity
binary output plug-in module, which can be used to control the circuit breaker directly.
+ 01
NR1580A BO_01 02
- 03
04
+ 05
BO_02 06
- 07
08
+ 09
BO_03 10
- 11
12
+ 13
BO_04 14
- 15
16
+ 17
BO_05 18
- 19
20
+ 21
BO_06
- 22
Figure 6.3-33 View of BO plug-in module (NR1580A)

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware
6.3.9 HMI Module

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, LED and ARM processor.
The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display module,
keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through LAN port etc. The liquid crystal
display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting, which has a
user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

Date: 2016-10-14

6 Hardware

Date: 2016-10-14

7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7 Settings .............................................................................................. 7-a
7.1 System Settings .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Device Setup.................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Access Path .......................................................................................................................7-11
7.3 Protection Settings ........................................................................................ 7-11

7.3.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................. 7-12
7.3.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.4 Logic Link Settings ....................................................................................... 7-49

7.4.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-50
7.5 Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing Settings .......................... 7-50
7.5.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-56
List of Tables
Table 7.1-1 System settings ....................................................................................................... 7-1
Table 7.2-1 Device settings......................................................................................................... 7-2
Table 7.2-2 Communication settings ........................................................................................... 7-4

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
The device has some setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, communication settings, system
settings, device settings, logic link settings and measurement and control settings are common for
all protection setting groups.
NOTICE!
All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current
by CT ratio. Zero-sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or
3U0 and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.
7.1 System Settings

7.1.1 Setting Description
Table 7.1-1 System settings
No. Item Range Unit

1 Active_Grp 1~10
2 Opt_SysFreq 50 or 60 Hz
3 PrimaryEquip_Name Maximum 12 character
4 U1n 10.00~65500.00 kV
5 U2n 80.00~220.00 V
6 CBx.I1n 100~30000 A
7 I1n_Base 100~30000 A
8 I2n_Base 1 or 5 A
9 f_High_FreqAlm 50~65 Hz
10 f_Low_FreqAlm 45~60 Hz
1. Active_Grp
The number of active setting group, 10 setting groups can be configured for protection settings,
and only one is active at a time
2. PrimaryEquip_Name
It is recognized by the device automatically. Such setting is used for printing messages
3. Opt_SysFreq
It is option of system frequency, and can be set as 50Hz or 60Hz
4. Un1
Primary rated voltage of VT
5. Un2
Secondary rated voltage of VT

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
6. CBx.I1n
Primary rated value of CT corresponding to circuit breaker No.x
7. I1n_Base
Primary calculation base rated current of CT
8. I2n_Base
Secondary calculation base rated current of CT
9. f_High_FreqAlm
It is frequency upper limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system
frequency is higher than the setting.
10. f_Low_FreqAlm
It is frequency lower limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system
frequency is lower than the setting.
7.1.2 Access Path

MainMenu“Settings”“System Settings”
7.2 Device Setup

7.2.1.1 Device Settings
Table 7.2-1 Device settings
No. Item Range

1 HDR_EncodeMode GB18030, UTF-8
2 Opt_Caption_103 Current_language, Fixed_Chinese, Fixed_English
3 En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg 0 or 1
4 Opt_DualNetMode_MMS 0, 1 or 2
5 Bxx.Un_BinaryInput 24V, 30V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V
6 Bxx.U_Pickup_BI 55%Un~80%Un
7 Bxx.U_Dropoff_BI 55%Un~80%Un
8 En_MDisk 0 or 1
1. HDR_EncodeMode
Select encoding format of header (HDR) file COMTRADE recording file
Default value is “UTF-8”.
2. Opt_Caption_103
Select the caption language sent to SAS via IEC103 protocol

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
Default value of [Opt_Caption_103] is “Current_language”, and please set it to “Fixed_Chinese” if

the SAS is supplied by China Manufacturer.
3. En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg
It is used to enable or disable that IEC 61850 communication program uploads tha variation of
data quality.
0: disable
1: enable
4. Opt_DualNetMode_MM
It is used to select network mode of MMS network for the communication with SCADA
0: Single network
1: Hot standby mode (always two ports in service)
2: Cold standby mode (only one port in service)
5. Bxx.Un_BinaryInput
This setting is used to set voltage level of binary input module. If low-voltage BI module is
equipped, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement, and if high-voltage BI
module is equipped, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
Bxx: this plug-in module is inserted in slot xx.
6. Bxx.U_Pickup_BI
This setting is used to set pickup voltage of binary input module. Bxx: this plug-in module is
inserted in slot xx.
7. Bxx.U_Dropoff_BI
This setting is used to set dropoff voltage of binary input module. Bxx: this plug-in module is
inserted in slot xx.
8. En_MDisk
1: Use moveable disk to realize the backup and recovery function.
0: Moveable disk will be disabled.
A moveable mdisk is implemented on the MON plug-in module to backup and restore programs,
settings and configurations.
If MON plug-in module is broken, remove the mdisk and put it into a new MON plug-in module, use
the menu on HMI to restore the backup programs and configurations. If DSP plug-in module is
broken, after a new DSP plug-in module is installed, use the menu on HMI to restore the backup
programs and configurations. If the moveable mdisk is broken, after a new mdisk is installed on
the MON plug-in module, use the menu on HMI to back up the current programs and
configurations into the new mdisk.

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
The default setting is 0
7.2.1.2 Communication Settings
Table 7.2-2 Communication settings
No. Item Range

1 IEDNAME
2 IP_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
3 Mask_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
4 IP_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
5 Mask_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
6 En_LAN2 Disable or enable
7 IP_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
8 Mask_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
10 IP_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
11 Mask_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
13 Gateway 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
14 En_Broadcast Disable or enable
15 Addr_RS485A 0~255
16 Baud_RS485A 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
17 Protocol_RS485A IEC103, Modbus, Resv1

18 Addr_RS485B 0~255
19 Baud_RS485B 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
20 Protocol_RS485B IEC103, Modbus, Resv1
21 Threshold_Measmt_Net 0~100%
22 Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535s
23 Format_Measmt 0, 1
24 Baud_Printer 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)
25 En_AutoPrint Disable or enable
26 Opt_TimeSyn Conventional, SAS, Advanced or NoTImeSyn
27 IP_Server_SNTP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
28 IP_StandbyServer_SNTP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
29 OffsetHour_UTC -12~+12 (hrs)
30 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60 (min)
31 Opt_Display_Status PriValue, SecValue
32 Num_Cyc_PreTrigDFR 0~140 (cycles)
33 En_TCPx_DNP 0 or 1
34 Addr_Slave_TCPx_DNP 0~65519
35 Addr_Master_TCPx_DNP 0~65519

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
No. Item Range

36 IP_Master_TCPx_DNP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
37 Opt_Map_TCPx_DNP 0~4
BISingleBit
38 Obj01DefltVar_TCPx_DNP
BIWithStatus
BIChWoutT
39 Obj02DefltVar_TCPx_DNP BIChWithAbsTime
BIChWithRelTime
AI32Int
AI16Int
40 Obj30DefltVar_TCPx_DNP AI32IntWoutF
AI16IntWoutF
AI32Flt
AI32IntEvWoutT
41 Obj32DefltVar_TCPx_DNP AI16IntEvWoutT
AI32FltEvWoutT
AO32Int
42 Obj40DefltVar_TCPx_DNP AO16Int
AO32Flt
43 t_AppLayer_TCPx_DNP 0~5 (s)
44 t_KeepAlive_TCPx_DNP 0~7200 (s)
45 En_UR_TCPx_DNP 0 or 1
46 Num_URRetry_TCPx_DNP 2~10
47 t_UROfflRetry_TCPx_DNP 1~5000 (s)
48 Class_BI_TCPx_DNP 0~3
49 Class_AI_TCPx_DNP 0~3
50 t_Select_TCPx_DNP 0~240 (s)
51 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCPx_DNP 0~3600 (s)
1. IEDNAME
IED name of this device. If this setting is modified, the IED name in ".cid" file will be changed
simultaneously and vice versa.
2. IP_LAN1, IP_LAN2, IP_LAN3, IP_LAN4
IP address of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4
3. Mask_LAN1, Mask_LAN2, Mask_LAN3, Mask_LAN4
Subnet mask of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4
4. En_LAN2, En_LAN3, En_LAN4
Put Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 in service
They are used for Ethernet communication based on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. When the IEC

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
61850 protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.
Ethernet port 1 is always in service by default.
5. Gateway
IP address of Gateway (router)
6. En_Broadcast
This setting is only used only for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. If NR network IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is used, the setting must be set as “1”.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network
1: the device sends UDP messages through network
7. Addr_RS485A, Addr_RS485B
They are the device′s communication address used to communicate with the SCADA or RTU via
serial ports (port A and port B).
8. Baud_RS485A, Baud_RS485B
Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port A or B
9. Protocol_RS485A, Protocol_RS485B
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port A or B
IEC103: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Modbus: Modbus Protocol
Resv1: Reserved 1
NOTICE!
Above table listed all the communication settings, the device delivered to the user
maybe only show some settings of them according to the communication interface
configuration. If only the Ethernet ports are applied, the settings about the serial ports
(port A and port B) are not listed in this submenu. And the settings about the Ethernet
ports only listed in this submenu according to the actual number of Ethernet ports.
The standard arrangement of the Ethernet port is two, at most four (predetermined
when ordering). Set the IP address according to actual arrangement of Ethernet
numbers and the un-useful port/ports need not be configured. If PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software is connected with this device through the Ethernet,
the IP address of PCS-Explorer must be set as one of the available IP address of this
device.
10. Threshold_Measmt_Net
Threshold value of sending measurement values to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103 or

IEC61850 protocol via Ethernet port.

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
Default value: “1%”
11. Period_Measmt_Net
The time period for equipment sends measurement data to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103
protocol via Ethernet port.
Default value: “60”
12. Format_Measmt
The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC
60870-5-103 protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard
13. Baud_Printer
Baud rate of printer port
14. En_AutoPrint
If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as “1”. Otherwise, it
should be set to “0”.
15. Opt_TimeSyn
There are four selections for clock synchronization of device shown as follow.
 Conventional
PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level
IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]
 SAS
SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
 Advanced
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588
IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
PPS (Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface
 NoTimeSync

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the device, please select this option and the
alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.
“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by the device, but “Advanced”
mode is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]
may be issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.
2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal

connected to NET-DSP module, “SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.
3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without time
synchronization signal. But the device can be still synchronized if receiving time
synchronization signal.
NOTICE!
The clock message via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is invalid when the device receives
the IRIG-B signal through RCS-485 port.
16. IP_Server_SNTP
It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.
17. IP_StandbyServer_SNTP
Both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are ineffective unless SNTP clock

synchronization is valid.
When both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as "000.000.000.000", the

device receives broadcast SNTP synchronization message.
When either [IP_Server_SNTP] or [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as "000.000.000.000", the

device adopts the setting whose value is not equal to "000.000.000.000" as SNTP server address
and receives unicast SNTP synchronization message.
If neither [IP_Server_SNTP] nor [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as "000.000.000.000", the

device adopts the setting [IP_Server_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP
synchronization message. If the device does not receive any server response after 30s, it adopts
the setting [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP
synchronization message.
The device will switch between [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] repeatedly if it

does not receive any server response in 30s.

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
18. OffsetHour_UTC, OffsetMinute_UTC
If the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, the time tags of communication messages are
required according to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is used to set the hour offset of the current time zone to the GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time) zone; for example, if a relay is applied in China, the time zone of China is
east 8th time zone, so this setting is set as “8”. The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is used to set the
minute offset of the current time zone to the GMT zone.
st nd rd th th
Time zone GMT zone East 1 East 2 East 3 East 4 East 5
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5
th th th th th
Time zone East 6 East 7 East 8 East 9 East 10 East 11th
Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11
th st nd rd th th
Time zone East/West 12 West 1 West 2 West 3 West 4 West 5
Setting 12/-12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
th th th th th th
Time zone West 6 West 7 West 8 West 9 West 10 West 11
Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11
19. Opt_Display_Status
This setting is used to set display mode of current and voltage in fault records, primary value or
secondary value. The sampled values of current and voltage are displayed as secondary value by
default. When it is set as primary value, both secondary voltage and secondary current are
converted into primary voltage and primary current according to rated secondary and primary
value of VT and CT respectively.
20. Num_Cyc_PreTrigDFR
The setting is used to set the cycle number recorded by the device before the trigger element
operating.
21. En_TCPx_DNP
The logic setting is used to enable or disable network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
1: enable
0: disable
When network No.x DNP client is not configured to be in service by PCS-Explorer, DNP client
settings corresponding to network No.x will be hidden.
22. Addr_Slave_TCPx_DNP
It is the slave address of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
23. Addr_Master_TCPx_DNP
It is the master address of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
24. IP_Master_TCPx_DNP
It is the IP address of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
25. Opt_Map_TCPx_DNP
It is the communication map number of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
26. Obj01DefltVar_TCPx_DNP
It is the “OBJ1” default variation of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
BISingleBit: Binary Input format is packed with single bit
BIWithStatus: Binary Input with status flag
BIChWoutT: Binary Input Event without time-of-occurrence
BIChWithAbsTime: Binary Input Event with absolute time-of-occurrence
BIChWithRelTime: Binary Input Event with relative time-of-occurrence
AI32Int: Analog Input with a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value
AI16Int: Analog Input with a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value
AI32IntWoutF: Analog Input with a 32-bit (but without flags)
AI16IntWoutF: Analog Input with a 16-bit (but without flags)
AI32Flt: Analog Input with a flag octet and a single-precision, floating-point value
AI32IntEvWoutT: Analog Input Event with a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value (but
without time-of-occurence)
AI16IntEvWoutT: Analog Input Event with a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value (but
without time-of-occurence)
AI32FltEvWoutT: Analog Input Event with single-precision, floating-point value (but without
time-of-occurence)
AO32Int: Analog Output with a flag octet and a 32-bit, signed integer value

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
AO16Int: Analog Output with a flag octet and a 16-bit, signed integer value
AO32Flt: Analog Output with a flag octet and a single-precision, floating-point value
31. t_AppLayer_TCPx_DNP
It is the timeout of application layer of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
32. t_KeepAlive_TCPx_DNP
It is the heartbeat time interval of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
33. En_UR_TCPx_DNP
The logic setting is used to enable or disable the unsolicited message function of network No.x
DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
1: enable
0: disable
34. Num_URRetry_TCPx_DNP
It is the online retransmission number of the unsolicited message of network No.x DNP client. (x=1,
2, 3, 4)
35. t_UROfflRetry_TCPx_DNP
It is the offline timeout of the unsolicited message of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
36. Class_BI_TCPx_DNP
It is the class level of the “Binary Input” of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
37. Class_AI_TCPx_DNP
It is the class level of the “Analog Input” of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
38. t_Select_TCPx_DNP
It is the selection timeout of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
39. t_TimeSynIntvl_TCPx_DNP
It is the time interval of the time synchronization function of network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
7.2.2 Access Path

MainMenu“Settings”“Device Setup”
7.3 Protection Settings

All protection settings are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT.
Unn: rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage
Un: rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
In: rated secondary current

7.3.1.1 Line Parameters Settings
No. Item Remark Range

1 X1L Positive sequence reactance of the line (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
2 R1L Positive sequence resistance of the line (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
3 X0L Zero-sequence reactance of the line (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
4 R0L Zero-sequence resistance of the line (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
5 X0M Line mutual zero-sequence reactance (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
6 R0M Line mutual zero-sequence resistance (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
7 LineLength Total length of the line 0.00~655.35 (km)
7.3.1.2 Fault Detector Settings (FD)

Current setting of DPFC current fault detector
1 FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
Current setting of residual current fault detector
2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
Current setting of negative-sequence current fault
3 FD.NOC.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
detector element
Enable negative-sequence current fault detector
4 FD.NOC.En 0 or 1
element
7.3.1.3 Auxiliary Element Settings (AuxE)

Drop-off time delay of current change auxiliary
1 AuxE.OCD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 (s)
element
2 AuxE.OCD.En Enable current change auxiliary element 0 or 1
Current setting of stage 1 residual current auxiliary
3 AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
4 AuxE.ROC1.En Enable stage 1 residual current auxiliary element 0 or 1
5 AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
7 AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
Current setting of stage 1 phase current auxiliary
9 AuxE.OC1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
10 AuxE.OC1.En Enable stage 1 phase current auxiliary element 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

11 AuxE.OC2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
13 AuxE.OC3.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
element
15 AuxE.UVD.U_Set Voltage setting for voltage change auxiliary element 0~Un (V)
Drop-off time delay of voltage change auxiliary
16 AuxE.UVD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 (s)
element
17 AuxE.UVD.En Enable voltage change auxiliary element 0 or 1
Voltage setting for phase-to-ground under voltage
18 AuxE.UVG.U_Set 0~Un (V)
auxiliary element
Enable phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary
19 AuxE.UVG.En 0 or 1
element
Voltage setting for phase-to-phase under voltage
20 AuxE.UVS.U_Set 0~Unn (V)
auxiliary element
Enable phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary
21 AuxE.UVS.En 0 or 1
element
22 AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set Voltage setting for residual voltage auxiliary element 0~Un (V)
23 AuxE.ROV.En Enable residual voltage auxiliary element 0 or 1
7.3.1.4 DPFC Distance Protection Settings (21D)

1 21D.Z_Set Impedance setting of DPFC distance protection (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
2 21D.En Enable DPFC distance protection 0 or 1
7.3.1.5 Load Encroachment Settings (LoadEnch)

Angle setting of load trapezoid characteristic, it should
1 LoadEnch.phi be set according to the maximum load area angle 0~45 (deg)
(φLoad_Max), φLoad_Max+5°is recommended.
Resistance setting of load trapezoid characteristic, it
should be set according to the minimum load
2 LoadEnch.R_Set (0.05~200)/In (ohm)
resistance, 70%~90% minimum load resistance is
recommended.
3 LoadEnch.En Enable load trapezoid characteristic 0 or 1
7.3.1.6 Distance Protection Settings with Mho Characteristic (21M)

Real component of zero-sequence compensation
1 21-1.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
coefficient for zone 1
2 21-1.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
compensation coefficient for zone 1

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
Phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for

3 21-1.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 1
Phase shift of phase-to-ground distance protection for
4 21M1.ZG.phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 (deg)
zone 1
Phase shift of phase-to-phase distance protection for
5 21M1.ZP.phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 (deg)
zone 1
Impedance setting of zone 1 of phase-to-ground
6 21M1.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
distance protection
Resistance setting of zone 1 of phase-to-ground
7 21M1.ZGQ.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
distance protection
Time delay of zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance
8 21M1.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
9 21M1.ZG.En Enable zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance protection 0 or 1
Enable zone 1 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground
10 21M1.ZGQ.En 0 or 1
distance protection
Enable phase-to-ground zone 1 of distance protection
11 21M1.ZG.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
operation to block AR
Impedance setting of zone 1 of phase-to-phase
12 21M1.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
distance protection
Time delay of zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance
13 21M1.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
14 21M1.ZP.En Enable zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance protection 0 or 1
Enable phase-to-phase zone 1 of distance protection
15 21M1.ZP.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
16 21-2. DirMode Direction option for zone 2 of distance protection 0 or 1
17 21-2.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
18 21-2.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
19 21-2.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 2
Phase shift of phase-to-ground distance protection for
20 21M2.ZG.phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 (deg)
zone 2
Phase shift of phase-to-phase distance protection for
21 21M2.ZP.phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 (deg)
zone 2
distance protection
distance protection
24 21M2.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
Short time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground

25 21M2.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
27 21M2.ZGQ.En 0 or 1
distance protection
distance protection
30 21M2.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
Short time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-phase distance
31 21M2.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
34 21M2.En_ShortDly Enable fixed accelerate zone 2 of distance protection 0 or 1
36 21-3.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
37 21-3.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
38 21-3.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 3
distance protection
distance protection
41 21M3.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
42 21M3.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
43 21M3.ZG.En Enable zone 3 of phase-to-ground distance protectio 0 or 1
44 21M3.ZGQ.En 0 or 1
distance protection
distance protection
47 21M3.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings

48 21M3.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
53 21-4.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
54 21-4.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
55 21-4.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 4
distance protection
distance protection
58 21M4.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
59 21M4.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
61 21M4.ZGQ.En 0 or 1
distance protection
distance protection
64 21M4.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
65 21M4.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
70 21-5.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
71 21-5.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

72 21-5.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 5
distance protection
distance protection
75 21M5.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
76 21M5.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
78 21M5.ZGQ.En 0 or 1
distance protection
distance protection
81 21M5.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
82 21M5.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
7.3.1.7 Distance Protection Settings with Quad Characteristic (21Q)

1 21Q.Ang_Alpha The angle of directional line 5~30 (deg)
2 21-1.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
3 21-1.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
4 21-1.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 1
Downward offset angle of the reactance line for zone
5 21Q1.ZG.RCA 0~45 (deg)
1 of phase-to-ground distance protection
6 21Q1.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
distance protection
7 21Q1.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
distance protection
8 21Q1.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
9 21Q1.ZG.En Enable zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance protection 0 or 1

10 21Q1.ZG.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
11 21Q1.ZP.RCA 0~45
1 of phase-to-phase distance protection
12 21Q1.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
distance protection
Resistance setting of zone 1 of phase-to-phase
13 21Q1.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
distance protection
14 21Q1.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
15 21Q1.ZP.En Enable zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance protection 0 or 1
16 21Q1.ZP.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
18 21-2.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
19 21-2.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
20 21-2.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 2
21 21Q2.ZG.RCA 0~45 (deg)
distance protection
distance protection
24 21Q2.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
25 21Q2.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
28 21Q2.ZP.RCA 0~45
distance protection
distance protection
31 21Q2.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

32 21Q2.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
35 21Q2.En_ShortDly Enable fixed accelerate zone 2 of distance protection 0 or 1
37 21-3.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
38 21-3.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
39 21-3.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 3
40 21Q3.ZG.RCA 0~45 (deg)
distance protection
distance protection
43 21Q3.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
44 21Q3.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
47 21Q3.ZP.RCA 0~45
distance protection
distance protection
50 21Q3.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
51 21Q3.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings

56 21-4.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
57 21-4.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
58 21-4.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 4
59 21Q4.ZG.RCA 0~45 (deg)
distance protection
distance protection
62 21Q4.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
63 21Q4.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
66 21Q4.ZP.RCA 0~45
distance protection
distance protection
69 21Q4.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
70 21Q4.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
75 21-5.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000
76 21-5.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
77 21-5.phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
zone 5
78 21Q5.ZG.RCA 0~45 (deg)

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

distance protection
distance protection
81 21Q5.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
82 21Q5.ZG.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
85 21Q5.ZP.RCA 0~45
distance protection
distance protection
88 21Q5.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
protection
89 21Q5.ZP.t_ShortDly 0.000~10.000 (s)
distance protection
90 21Q5.ZP.En Enable zone x of phase-to-phase distance protection 0 or 1
7.3.1.8 Pilot Distance Zone Settings

1 21.Pilot.Real_K0 30.00~89.00 (deg)
coefficient for pilot distance protection
2 21.Pilot.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000
compensation coefficient for pilot distance protection
Phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for pilot
3 21.Pilot.phi1_Reach -4.000~4.000
distance protection
Impedance setting of pilot distance protection (Mho
4 21M.Pilot.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
characteristic)
Resistance setting of pilot distance protection (Mho
5 21M.Pilot.R_Set_Quad (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
characteristic)
Impedance setting of pilot distance protection (Quad
6 21Q.Pilot.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
characteristic)
Impedance setting of pilot distance protection in
7 21M.Pilot.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
reverse direction (Mho characteristic)

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
Enable quadrilateral characteristic of phase-to-ground

8 21M.Pilot.En_Z_Quad 0 or 1
distance protection
Impedance setting of pilot distance protection in
9 21Q.Pilot.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
reverse direction (Quad characteristic)
Resistence setting of pilot distance protection (Quad
10 21Q.Pilot.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
characteristic)
Resistence setting of pilot distance protection in
11 21Q.Pilot.R_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
reverse direction (Quad characteristic)
7.3.1.9 Out-of-step Protection Settings (78)

1 78.En Enable out-of-step protection 0 or 1
2 78.En_Trp Enable out-of-step protection operate to trip 0 or 1
The forward impedance setting of zone detector
3 78.Z_Fwd (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
element
The reversal impedance setting of zone detector
4 78.Z_Rev (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
element
5 78.phi1_Reach The system impedance angle 30.00~89.00 (deg)
The minimum start angle, which generally should be
6 78.phi_Start 0~180 (deg)
greater than maximum load angle.
It is the maximum tripping angle after out-of-step
protection operating, which is used to prevent the
7 78.phi_Trp circuit breaker from incorrect operaion due to too 0~180.00 (deg)
large current during tripping. It is generally set based
on the breaking capacity of circuit breaker.
The number setting of out-of-step cycle, and it is set
8 78.N_Limit 1~20
as 2~3 generally
7.3.1.10 Power Swing Blocking Releasing Settings (PSBR)

Enable zone 1 of distance protection controlled by
1 21M1.En_PSBR 0 or 1
PSBR (Mho characteristic)
2 21Q1.En_PSBR 0 or 1
PSBR (Quad characteristic)

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

Enable pilot distance zone controlled by PSBR (Mho
11 21M.Pilot.En_PSBR 0 or 1
characteristic)
Enable pilot distance zone controlled by PSBR (Quad
12 21Q.Pilot.En_PSBR 0 or 1
characteristic)
13 21.I_PSBR Current setting for power swing blocking (0.050~30.000)×In (ohm)
7.3.1.11 Distance SOTF Protection Settings (21SOTF)

1 21SOTF.En Enable distance SOTF protection 0 or 1
Enable zone 2 of distance SOTF protection for
2 21SOTF.Z2.En_ManCls 0 or 1
manual closing
Enabling/disabling zone 3 of distance SOTF
protection for manual closing
manual closing
5 21SOTF.Z2.En_3PAR 0 or 1
3-pole reclosing
3-pole reclosing
3-pole reclosing
Enable zone 2 controlled by PSB of distance
8 21SOTF.Z2.En_PSBR 0 or 1
SOTF protection for 3-pole reclosing
Enable distance SOTF protection under pole
11 21SOTF.En_PDF 0 or 1
discrepancy conditions
Time delay of distance protection operating under
12 21SOTF.t_PDF 0.000~10.000 (s)
pole discrepancy conditions
13 SOTF.U_Ddl Undervoltage setting of deadline detection 0~Unn (V)
14 SOTF.t_Ddl Time delay of deadline detection 0.000~600.000 (s)

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
ManClsBI
CBPos
15 SOTF.Opt_Mode_ManCls Option of manual SOTF mode ManClsBI/ CBPos
AutoInit
All
7.3.1.12 Optical Pilot Channel Settings

1 FO.LocID Indentity code of the device at local end 0-65535
2 FO.RmtID Indentity code of the device at remote end 0-65535
3 FO.BaudRate Baud rate of optical pilot channel 64 or 2048
4 FO.Protocol It is used to select protocol type, G.703 or C37.94 G.703 or C37.94
The setting for the times of 64kbits/s, which is an
5 FOx.Nx64k_C37.94 1-12
N*64kbits/s standard defined by IEEE C37.94 standard
6 FOx.En_IntClock Option of internal clock or external clock 0 or 1
7 FOx.En Enable channel x 0 or 1
7.3.1.13 Pilot Distance Protection Settings (85)

POTT
1 85.Opt_PilotMode Option of pilot scheme PUTT
Blocking
Option of phase-segregated signal scheme or
2 85.Opt_Ch_PhSeg 0 or 1
three-phase signal scheme
3 85.En_WI Enable weak infeed scheme 0 or 1
4 85.U_UV_WI Undervoltage setting of weak infeed logic 0~Unn (V)
5 85.Z.En Enable pilot distance protection 0 or 1
6 85.En_Unblocking1 Enable unblocking scheme 0 or 1
Time delay for blocking scheme of pilot distance
7 85.t_DPU_Blocking1 0.000~1.000 (s)
protection operation
8 85.t_DPU_CR1 Time delay pickup for current reversal logic 0.000~1.000 (s)
9 85.t_DDO_CR1 Time delay dropoff for current reversal logic 0.000~1.000 (s)
10 85.ZX.En Enable zone extension protection 0 or 1
Pickup time delay for zone extension protection
11 85.t_DPU_ZX 0.000~10.000 (s)
operation
7.3.1.14 Pilot Directional Earth-fault Protection Settings (85)

1 85.DEF.En Enable pilot directional earth-fault protection 0 or 1
Enable pilot directional earth-fault protection operate
2 85.DEF.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
to block AR

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
Enable independent pilot channel for pilot directional

3 85.DEF.En_IndepCh 0 or 1
Enable unblocking scheme for pilot DEF via pilot
4 85.En_Unblocking2 0 or 1
channel 2
Current setting of pilot directional earth-fault
5 85.DEF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
6 85.DEF.t_DPU Time delay of pilot directional earth-fault protection 0.001~10.000 (s)
Time delay pickup for current reversal logic when pilot
7 85.t_DPU_CR2 directional earth-fault protection adopts independent 0.000~1.000 (s)
pilot channel 2
Time delay dropoff for current reversal logic when
8 85.t_DDO_CR2 pilot directional earth-fault protection adopts 0.000~1.000 (s)
7.3.1.15 Current Direction Settings

The characteristic angle of directional phase
1 RCA_OC 30.00~89.00 (deg)
overcurrent element
The characteristic angle of directional earth fault
2 RCA_ROC 30.00~89.00 (deg)
element
3 RCA_NegOC 30.00~89.00 (deg)
negative-sequence overcurrent element
4 Z0_Comp Zero-sequence compensation impedance setting (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
5 Z2_Comp Negative-sequence compensation impedance setting (0.000~4Unn)/In (ohm)
7.3.1.16 Phase Overcurrent Protection Settings (50/51P)

Setting of second harmonic component for blocking
1 50/51P.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000
phase overcurrent elements
Current setting for stage 1 of phase overcurrent
2 50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
Time delay for stage 1 of phase overcurrent
3 50/51P1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
protection
4 50/51P1.En Enable stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection 0 or 1
Enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 1 of
5 50/51P1.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
phase overcurrent protection operates
Enable stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection is
6 50/51P1.En_VTS_Blk 0 or 1
blocked by VT circuit failure
Non_Directional
Direction option for stage 1 of phase overcurrent
7 50/51P1.Opt_Dir Forward
protection
Reverse
Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 1 of
8 50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
phase overcurrent protection

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage 1 of phase ANSIE
9 50/51P1.Opt_Curve
overcurrent protection ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
UserDefine
Time multiplier setting for stage 1 of inverse-time
10 50/51P1.TMS 0.010~200.000
Minimum operating time for stage 1 of inverse-time
11 50/51P1.tmin 0.000~20.000 (s)
Constant “α” for stage 1 of customized inverse-time
12 50/51P1.Alpha 0.010~5.000
characteristic phase overcurrent protection
Constant “C” for stage 1 of customized inverse-time
13 50/51P1.C 0.000~20.000
Constant “K” for stage 1 of customized inverse-time
14 50/51P1.K 0.050~20.000
15 50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
16 50/51P2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
protection
18 50/51P2.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
19 50/51P2.En_VTS_Blk 0 or 1
Non_Directional
protection
Reverse
21 50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage 2 of phase
22 50/51P2.Opt_Curve ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
23 50/51P2.TMS 0.010~200.000
phase overcurrent protection.
24 50/51P2.tmin 0.000~20.000 (s)
25 50/51P3.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
26 50/51P3.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
protection
28 50/51P3.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
29 50/51P3.En_VTS_Blk 0 or 1
Non_Directional
protection
Reverse
31 50/51P3.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings

33 50/51P3.TMS 0.010~200.000
34 50/51P3.tmin 0.000~20.000 (s)
35 50/51P4.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
36 50/51P4.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
protection
38 50/51P4.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
39 50/51P4.En_VTS_Blk 0 or 1
Non_Directional
protection
Reverse
41 50/51P4.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
43 50/51P4.TMS 0.010~200.000
44 50/51P4.tmin 0.010~20.000 (s)
7.3.1.17 Earth Fault Protection Settings (50/51G)

Setting of second harmonic component for blocking
1 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000
earth fault elements
2 50/51G1.3I0_Set Current setting for stage 1 of earth fault protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
3 50/51G1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of earth fault protection 0.000~20.000 (s)
4 50/51G1.En Enable stage 1 of earth fault protection 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

5 50/51G1.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
earth fault protection operates
Non_Directional
6 50/51G1.Opt_Dir Direction option for stage 1 of earth fault protection Forward
Reverse
7 50/51G1.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
earth fault protection
Enable blocking for stage 1 of earth fault protection
8 50/51G1.En_Abnor_Blk 0 or 1
under abnormal conditions
9 50/51G1.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1
under CT failure conditions
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage 1 of earth ANSIE
10 50/51G1.Opt_Curve
fault protection ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
UserDefine
11 50/51G1.TMS 0.010~200.000
12 50/51G1.tmin 0.050~20.000 (t)
13 50/51G1.Alpha 0.010~5.000
characteristic earth fault protection
14 50/51G1.C 0.000~20.000
15 50/51G1.K 0.050~20.000
18 50/51G2.t_ShortDly Short time delay for stage 2 of earth fault protection 0.000~20.000 (s)
Enable short time delay for stage 2 of earth fault
20 50/51G2.En_ShortDly 0 or 1
protection
21 50/51G2.En_BlkAR 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
Non_Directional
Reverse
23 50/51G2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
Enable blocking for stage 2 of earth faultv protection
25 50/51G2.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage 2 of earth
26 50/51G2.Opt_Curve ANSIE
fault protection
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
27 50/51G2.TMS 0.010~200.000
28 50/51G2.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
34 50/51G3.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
Non_Directional
Reverse
36 50/51G3.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
38 50/51G3.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
fault protection
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
40 50/51G3.TMS 0.010~200.000
41 50/51G3.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
47 50/51G4.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
Non_Directional
Reverse
49 50/51G4.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1
51 50/51G4.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
fault protection
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
53 50/51G4.TMS 0.010~200.000
54 50/51G4.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
7.3.1.18 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings (50/51Q)

Current setting for stage 1 of negative-sequence
1 50/51Q1.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
Ratio coefficient (I2/I1) for stage 1 of
2 50/51Q1.I2/I1_Set 0.00~1.00
negative-sequence overcurrent protection
Time delay for stage 1 of negative-sequence
3 50/51Q1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
Enable stage 1 of negative-sequence overcurrent
4 50/51Q1.En 0 or 1
protection
5 50/51Q1.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
negative-sequence overcurrent protection operates
Non_Directional
Direction option for stage 1 of negative-sequence
6 50/51Q1.Opt_Dir Forward
Reverse
Enable blocking for stage 1 of negative-sequence
7 50/51Q1.En_Abnor_Blk 0 or 1
overcurrent protection under abnormal conditions
8 50/51Q1.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1
overcurrent protection under CT failure conditions

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage 1 of ANSIE
9 50/51Q1.Opt_Curve
negative-sequence overcurrent protection ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
UserDefine
10 50/51Q1.TMS 0.010~200.000
11 50/51Q1.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
12 50/51Q1.Alpha characteristic negative-sequence overcurrent 0.010~5.000
protection
13 50/51Q1.C characteristic negative-sequence overcurrent 0.000~20.000
protection
14 50/51Q1.K characteristic negative-sequence overcurrent 0.050~20.000
protection
15 50/51Q2.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
16 50/51Q2.I2/I1_Set 0.00~1.00
17 50/51Q2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
18 50/51Q2.En 0 or 1
protection
19 50/51Q2.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
Non_Directional
Reverse

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings

22 50/51Q2.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage 2 of
23 50/51Q2.Opt_Curve ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
24 50/51Q2.TMS 0.010~200.000
25 50/51Q2.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
26 50/51Q3.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
27 50/51Q3.I2/I1_Set 0.00~1.00
28 50/51Q3.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
29 50/51Q3.En 0 or 1
protection
30 50/51Q3.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
Non_Directional
Reverse
33 50/51Q3.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
35 50/51Q3.TMS 0.010~200.000
36 50/51Q3.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
37 50/51Q4.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
38 50/51Q4.I2/I1_Set 0.00~1.00
39 50/51Q4.t_Op 0.000~20.000 (s)
40 50/51Q4.En 0 or 1
protection
41 50/51Q4.En_Trp 0 or 1
protection operate to trip or alarm.
42 50/51Q4.En_BlkAR 0 or 1
Non_Directional
Reverse
45 50/51Q4.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
47 50/51Q4.TMS 0.010~200.000
48 50/51Q4.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
7.3.1.19 Overcurrent Protection Settings for VT Circuit Failure (50PVT/50GVT)

Current setting of phase overcurrent protection
1 50PVT.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
when VT circuit failure
Time delay of definite-time phase overcurrent
2 50PVT.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
Enable phase overcurrent protection when VT
3 50PVT.En 0 or 1
circuit failure
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
Option of characteristic curve for inverse-time IECLT
4 50PVT.Opt_Curve phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit ANSIE
failure ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
Time multiplier setting for inverse-time phase
5 50PVT.TMS 0.010~200.000
overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure
Minimum operating time for inverse-time phase
6 50PVT.tmin 0.000~20.000 (s)
7 50GVT.3I0_Set Current setting of ground overcurrent protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
when VT circuit failure

Time delay of definite-time ground overcurrent
8 50GVT.t_Op 0.000~10.000 (s)
Enable ground overcurrent protection when VT
9 50GVT.En 0 or 1
circuit failure
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
Option of characteristic curve for inverse-time IECLT
10 50GVT.Opt_Curve ground overcurrent protection when VT circuit ANSIE
failure ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
Time multiplier setting for inverse-time ground
11 50GVT.TMS 0.010~200.000
Minimum operating time for inverse-time ground
12 50GVT.tmin 0.000~20.000 (s)
7.3.1.20 Residual Current SOTF Protection Settings (50GSOTF)

1 50GSOTF.3I0_Set Current setting of residual current SOTF protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
2 50GSOTF.En Enable residual current SOTF protection 0 or 1
7.3.1.21 Overvoltage Protection Settings (59P)

1 59P1.U_Set Voltage setting for stage 1 of overvoltage protection Un~2Unn (V)
2 59P1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of overvoltage protection 0.000~30.000 (s)
3 59P1.En Enable stage 1 of overvoltage protection 0 or 1
Option of 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for stage
4 59P1.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1
1 of overvoltage protection
Option of phase-to-phase voltage or phase voltage for
5 59P1.Opt_Up/Upp 0 or 1
stage 1 of overvoltage protection
Enable stage 1 of overvoltage protection for alarm
6 59P1.En_Alm 0 or 1
purpose
Enable transfer trip controlled by CB open position for
7 59P1.En_52b_TT 0 or 1
Enable stage 1 of overvoltage protection operate to
8 59P1.En_TT 0 or 1
initiate transfer trip

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
Option of characteristic curve for stage 1 of overvoltage
9 59P1.Opt_Curve ANSIE
protection
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
10 59P1.TMS 0.010~200.000
Minimum delay for stage 1 of inverse-time overvoltage
11 59P1.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
14 59P2.En Enable stage x of overvoltage protection 0 or 1
15 59P2.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1
17 59P2.En_Alm 0 or 1
purpose
18 59P2.En_52b_TT 0 or 1
19 59P2.En_TT 0 or 1
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
protection
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

21 59P2.TMS 0.010~200.000
22 59P2.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
25 59P3.En Enable stage 3 of overvoltage protection 0 or 1
26 59P3.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1
28 59Px.En_Alm 0 or 1
purpose
29 59P3.En_52b_TT 0 or 1
30 59P3.En_TT 0 or 1
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
protection
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
32 59P3.TMS 0.010~200.000
33 59P3.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
7.3.1.22 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection Settings (59Q)

Voltage setting for negative-sequence overvoltage
1 59Q.U_Set 0~Un (V)
protection
Time delay for negative-sequence overvoltage
2 59Q.t_Op 0.000~30.000 (s)
protection
3 59Q.En Enable negative-sequence overvoltage protection 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
7.3.1.23 Undervoltage Protection Settings (27P)

1 27P1.U_Set Voltage setting for stage 1 of undervoltage protection 0~Unn (V)
2 27P1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of undervoltage protection 0.000~30.000 (s)
3 27P1.En Enable stage 1 of undervoltage protection 0 or 1
Enable stage 1 of undervoltage protection controlled by
4 27P1.En_FD_Ctrl 0 or 1
FD element reflecting current
5 27P1.En_Curr_Ctrl 0 or 1
current condition
6 27P1.En_VTS_Blk 0 or 1
VT circuit failure
7 27P1.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1
1 of undervoltage protection
Option of voltage criterion adopting phase-to-phase
8 27P1.Opt_Up/Upp voltage or phase voltage for stage 1 of undervoltage 0 or 1
protection
Enable stage 1 of undervoltage protection operate to
9 27P1.En_Alm 0 or 1
alarm
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
undervoltage protection
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
11 27P1.TMS 0.010~200.000
Minimum delay for stage 1 of inverse-time undervoltage
12 27P1.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
current condition

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

VT circuit failure
19 27P2.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1
protection
21 27P2.En_Alm 0 or 1
alarm
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
23 27P2.TMS 0.010~200.000
24 27P2.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
current condition
VT circuit failure
31 27P3.Opt_1P/3P 0 or 1
protection
33 27P3.En_Alm 0 or 1
alarm

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
DefTime
IECN
IECV
IECE
IECST
IECLT
ANSIV
ANSI
ANSIM
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
35 27P3.TMS 0.010~200.000
36 27P3.tmin 0.050~20.000 (s)
protection
7.3.1.24 Frequency Protection Settings (81O and 81U)

1 81O.f_Pkp Frequency pickup setting for overfrequency protection 50.000~65.000 (Hz)
Frequency setting for stage 1 of overfrequency
2 81O.OF1.f_Set 50.000~65.000 (Hz)
protection
3 81O.OF1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of overfrequency protection 0.050~20.000 (s)
4 81O.OF1.En Enable stage 1 of overfrequency protection 0 or 1
5 81O.OF2.f_Set 50.000~65.000 (Hz)
protection
8 81O.OF3.f_Set 50.000~65.000 (Hz)
protection
11 81O.OF4.f_Set 50.000~65.000 (Hz)
protection
Frequency pickup setting for underfrequency
14 81U.f_Pkp 45.000~60.000 (Hz)
protection
Rate of frequency change for blocking
15 81U.df/dt_Blk 0.200~20.000 (Hz/s)
Frequency setting for stage 1 of underfrequency
16 81U.UF1.f_Set 45.000~60.000 (Hz)
protection

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
17 81U.UF1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of underfrequency protection 0.050~30.000 (s)

18 81U.UF1.En Enable stage 1 of underfrequency protection 0 or 1
Enable rate of frequency change to block stage 1 of
19 81U.UF1.En_df/dt_Blk 0 or 1
20 81U.UF2.f_Set 45.000~60.000 (Hz)
protection
24 81U.UF3.f_Set 45.000~60.000 (Hz)
protection
28 81U.UF4.f_Set 45.000~60.000 (Hz)
protection
7.3.1.25 Breaker Failure Protection Settings (50BF)
NOTICE!
PCS-902 can be configured to support single circuit breaker application or double

circuit breakers application by PCS-Exploerer. The prefix “CBx.” is added to all settings
for circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2).

1 CBx.50BF.I_Set Current setting of phase current criterion for BFP (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
Current setting of zero-sequence current criterion
2 CBx.50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
for BFP
Current setting of negative-sequence current
3 CBx.50BF.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
criterion for BFP
4 CBx.50BF.t_ReTrp Time delay of re-tripping for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)
5 CBx.50BF.t1_Op Time delay of stage 1 for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)
6 CBx.50BF.t2_Op Time delay of stage 2 for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)
7 CBx.50BF.En Enable breaker failure protection 0 or 1

8 CBx.50BF.En_ReTrp Enable re-trip function for BFP 0 or 1
Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP
9 CBx.50BF.En_3I0_1P 0 or 1
initiated by single-phase tripping contact

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP

10 CBx.50BF.En_3I0_3P 0 or 1
initiated by three-phase tripping contact
Enable negative-sequence current criterion for BFP
11 CBx.50BF.En_I2_3P 0 or 1
initiated by three-phase tripping contact
Enable breaker failure protection can be initiated by
12 CBx.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl 0 or 1
normally closed contact of circuit breaker
7.3.1.26 Thermal Overload Protection Settings (49)

The factor setting for stage 1 of thermal overload
1 49-1.K protection which is associated to the thermal state 1.000~3.000
formula
The factor setting for stage 2 of thermal overload
2 49-2.K protection which is associated to the thermal state 1.000~3.000
formula
The reference current setting of the thermal
3 49.Ib_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
overload protection
The time constant setting of the IDMT overload
4 49.Tau 0.100~100.000 (min)
protection
Enable stage 1 of thermal overload protection for
5 49-1.En_Alm 0 or 1
alarm purpose
6 49-1.En_Trp 0 or 1
trip purpose
7 49-2.En_Alm 0 or 1
alarm purpose
8 49-2.En_Trp 0 or 1
trip purpose
7.3.1.27 Stub Differential Protection Settings (87STB)
No. Name Remark Range

1 87STB.I_Pkp Pickup current setting of stub differential protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
2 87STB.I_ Alm Current setting of differential current alarm (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
3 87STB.Slope Slope of current differential protection 0.5~1
4 87STB.t_Op Time delay of stub differential protection 0.000~10.000 (s)
5 87STB.En Enable stub differential protection 0 or 1
6 87STB.En_Alm Enable differential current alarm function 0 or 1
Enable stub differential protection controlled by CT
7 87STB.En_CTS_Blk 0 or 1
circuit failure
7.3.1.28 Dead Zone Protection Settings (50DZ)
NOTICE!


1 CBx.50DZ.I_Set Current setting of dead zone protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
2 CBx.50DZ.t_Op Time delay of dead zone protection 0.000~10.000 (s)

3 CBx.50DZ.En Enable dead zone protection 0 or 1
7.3.1.29 Pole Discrepancy Protection Settings (62PD)
NOTICE!


Current setting of residual current criterion for
1 CBx.62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
pole discrepancy protection
Current setting of negative-sequence current
2 CBx.62PD.I2_Set (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)
criterion for pole discrepancy protection
3 CBx.62PD.t_Op Time delay of pole discrepancy protection 0.000~600.000 (s)
4 CBx.62PD.En Enable pole discrepancy protection 0 or 1

Enable residual current criterion and
5 CBx.62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl negative-sequence current criterion for pole 0 or 1
discrepancy protection
7.3.1.30 Broken Conductor Protection Settings (46BC)

Minimum operation current of broken conductor
1 46BC.I_Min (0.050~30.000)×In (A)
protection
Ratio setting (negative-sequence current to
2 46BC.I2/I1_Set positive-sequence current) of broken conductor 0.20~1.00
protection
3 46BC.t_Op Time delay of broken conductor protection 0.000~600.000 (s)
Enable broken conductor protection to operate to
4 46BC.En_Trp 0 or 1
trip
Enable broken conductor protection to operate to
5 46BC.En_Alm 0 or 1
alarm
7.3.1.31 Reverse Power Protection Settings (32R)

Power setting of stage 1 of reverse power
1 32R1.P_Set (0.100~50.000)×In (W)
protection
Time delay of stage 1 of reverse power protection
2 32R1.t_Trp 0.100~3000.000 (s)
for tripping purpose
Time delay of stage 1 of reverse power protection
3 32R1.t_Alm 0.100~3000.000 (s)
for alarm purpose
Enable stage 1 of reverse power protection to
4 32R1.En_Trp 0 or 1
operate to trip
5 32R1.En_Alm 0 or 1
operate to alarm

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
Power setting of stage 2 of reverse power

6 32R2.P_Set (0.100~50.000)×In (W)
protection
7 32R2.t_Trp Time delay of stage 2 of reverse power protection 0.100~3000.000 (s)
8 32R2.En_Trp 0 or 1
operate to trip
The directionality option of reverse power Forward direction
9 32R.Opt_Dir
protection Reverse direction
7.3.1.32 Synchrocheck Settings (25)
NOTICE!


Ua
Ub
Uc
1 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL1 Voltage selecting mode of line 1.
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Ua
Ub
Uc
2 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB1 Voltage selecting mode of bus 1.
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Ua
Ub
Uc
3 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL2 Voltage selecting mode of line 2.
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Ua
Ub
Uc
4 CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB2 Voltage selecting mode of bus 2.
Uab
Ubc
Uca

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
NoVoltSel
Option of circuit breaker configuration, and it
DblBusOneCB
5 CBx.CBConfigMode should be set as “NoVoltSel” if no voltage selection
3/2BusCB
is adopted.
3/2TieCB
6 CBx.25.U_Dd Voltage threshold of dead check 0.05Un~0.8Un (V)
7 CBx.25.U_Lv Voltage threshold of live check 0.5Un~Un (V)
8 CBx.25.K_Usyn Compensation coefficient for synchronism voltage 0.20-5.00

Phase difference limit of synchronism check for
9 CBx.25.phi_Diff 0~ 89 (deg)
AR
Compensation for phase difference between two
10 CBx.25.phi_Comp 0~359 (deg)
synchronism voltages
Frequency difference limit of synchronism check
11 CBx.25.f_Diff 0.02~1.00 (Hz)
for AR
Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for
12 CBx.25.U_Diff 0.02Un~0.8Un (V)
AR
13 CBx.25.t_DdChk Time delay to confirm dead check condition 0.010~25.000 (s)
Time delay to confirm synchronism check

14 CBx.25.t_SynChk 0.010~25.000 (s)
condition
15 CBx.25.En_fDiffChk Enable frequency difference check 0 or 1
16 CBx.25.SetOpt Synchrocheck mode selection 0, 1
17 CBx.25.En_SynChk Enable synchronism check 0 or 1
18 CBx.25.En_DdL_DdB Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check 0 or 1
19 CBx.25.En_DdL_LvB Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check 0 or 1
20 CBx.25.En_LvL_DdB Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check 0 or 1
21 CBx.25.En_NoChk Enable AR without any check 0 or 1
22 CBx.25.En_3PLvChk Enable live three-phase check of line 0 or 1
7.3.1.33 Auto-reclosing Settings (79)
NOTICE!


1 CBx.79.N_Rcls Maximum number of reclosing attempts 1~4
2 CBx.79.t_Dd_1PS1 Dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
3 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS1 Dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
4 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS2 Dead time of second shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
5 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS3 Dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
6 CBx.79.t_Dd_3PS4 Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
Time delay of circuit breaker in closed position

7 CBx.79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 (s)
before reclosing
Time delay to wait for CB healthy, and begin to
timing when the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is
8 CBx.79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 (s)
de-energized and if it is not energized within this
time delay, AR will be blocked.
9 CBx.79.t_Wait_Chk Maximum wait time for synchronism check 0.000~600.000 (s)
Time delay allow for CB status change to conform
10 CBx.79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 (s)
reclosing successful
11 CBx.79.t_PW_AR Pulse width of AR closing signal 0.000~600.000 (s)
12 CBx.79.t_Reclaim Reclaim time of AR 0.000~600.000 (s)
Time delay of excessive trip signal to block
13 CBx.79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 (s)
auto-reclosing
Drop-off time delay of blocking AR, when blocking
14 CBx.79.t_DDO_BlkAR signal for AR disappears, AR blocking condition 0.000~600.000 (s)
drops off after this time delay
15 CBx.79.t_AddDly Additional time delay for auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)
Maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal
16 CBx.79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 (s)
from master AR
Time delay of discriminating another fault, and begin
to times after 1-pole AR initiated, 3-pole AR will be
17 CBx.79.t_SecFault initiated if another fault happens during this time 0.000~600.000 (s)
delay. AR will be blocked if another fault happens
after that.
Enable auto-reclosing blocked when a fault occurs
18 CBx.79.En_PDF_Blk 0 or 1
under pole disagreement condition
Enable auto-reclosing with an additional dead time
19 CBx.79.En_AddDly 0 or 1
delay
20 CBx.79.En_CutPulse Enable adjust the length of reclosing pulse 0 or 1
Enable confirm whether AR is successful by
21 CBx.79.En_FailCheck 0 or 1
checking CB state
22 CBx.79.En Enable auto-reclosing 0 or 1
Enable AR by external input signal besides logic
23 CBx.79.En_ExtCtrl 0 or 1
setting [79.En]
Enable AR be initiated by open state of circuit
24 CBx.79.En_CBInit 0 or 1
breaker
25 CBx.79.Opt_Priority Option of AR priority None, High or Low
26 CBx.79.SetOpt Control option of AR mode 0 or 1
27 CBx.79.En_1PAR Enable 1-pole AR mode 0 or 1
28 CBx.79.En_3PAR Enable 3-pole AR mode 0 or 1
29 CBx.79.En_1P/3PAR Enable 1/3-pole AR mode 0 or 1

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
7.3.1.34 Transfer Trip Settings (TT)

1 TT.t_Op Time delay of transfer trip 0.000~600.000 (s)
2 TT.En_FD_Ctrl Enable transfer trip controlled by local fault detector 0 or 1
7.3.1.35 Tripping Logic Settings
NOTICE!


Enable auto-reclosing blocked when multi-phase fault
1 En_MPF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
happens
Enable auto-reclosing blocked when three-phase fault
2 En_3PF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
happens
Enable auto-reclosing blocked when selection of faulty
3 En_PhSF_Blk_AR 0 or 1
phase fails
The dwell time of tripping command, empirical value is
4 t_Dwell_Trp 0.000~10.000 (s)
0.04
Enable three-phase tripping mode for any fault
5 CBx.En_Trp3P 0 or 1
conditions
7.3.1.36 VT Circuit Supervision Settings (VTS)

1 VTS.t_DPU Pickup time delay of VT circuit supervision 0.200~100.000
2 VTS.t_DDO Dropoff time delay of VT circuit supervision 0.200~100.000
3 VTS.En_Out_VT VT is not connected to the protection device 0 or 1
If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement
comes from line side (for example, 3/2 breaker), it
4 VTS.En_LineVT 0 or 1
should be set as “1”. If three-phase voltage comes from
busbar side, it should be set as “0”.
5 VTS.En Enable alarm function of VT circuit supervision 0 or 1
7.3.2 Access Path

MainMenu“Settings”“Prot Settings”
7.4 Logic Link Settings

The logic link settings are used to determine whether the relevant function of this device is
enabled or disabled. If this device supports the logic link function, it will have a corresponding
submenu in the submenu “Logic Links” for the logic link settings.
Each logic link settings is an “AND” condition of enabling the relevant function with the

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
corresponding binary input and logic setting. Through SAS or RTU, logic link settings can be set
as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant function can be in service or out of service through
remote command. It provides convenience for operation management.

7.4.1.1 Function Link Settings
The function link settings can be defined according to project specification through the
configuration tool, PCS-Explorer.

1 Link_01 Function link setting 01 0 or 1
7.4.2 Access Path

MainMenu“Settings”“Logic Links”
7.5 Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing Settings

NOTICE!


7.5.1.1 Function Settings

Enable alarm function when VT circuit is
1 MCBrd.CBx.En_Alm_VTS 0 or 1
abnormal

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings
7.5.1.2 Synchronism Settings

Ua
Ub
Uc
1 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL1 Voltage selecting mode for line 1
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Ua
Ub
Uc
2 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB1 Voltage selecting mode for bus 1
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Ua
Ub
Uc
3 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UL2 Voltage selecting mode for line 2
Uab
Ubc
Uca
Ua
Ub
Uc
4 MCBrd.CBx.25.Opt_Source_UB2 Voltage selecting mode for bus 2
Uab
Ubc
Uca
5 MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Dd Voltage threshold of dead check 1.000~100.000 (V)
6 MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Lv Voltage threshold of live check 1.000~100.000 (V)
Compensation coefficient for
7 MCBrd.CBx.25.K_Usyn 0.20-5.00
synchronism voltage
Phase difference limit of synchronism
8 MCBrd.CBx.25.phi_Diff 0.10~ 180.00 (deg)
Compensation for phase difference
9 MCBrd.CBx.25.phi_Comp 0~360 (deg)
between two synchronous voltages
10 MCBrd.CBx.25.f_Diff 0.00~3.00 (Hz)
synchronism check for manual closing
Voltage difference limit of synchronism
11 MCBrd.CBx.25.U_Diff 1.000~100.000 (V)
Synchrocheck mode selection for manual
12 MCBrd.CBx.25.SetOpt 0, 1
closing
13 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_SynChk Enable synchronism check 0 or 1
Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB)
14 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_DdL_DdB 0 or 1
check

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB)

15 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_DdL_LvB 0 or 1
check
Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB)
16 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_LvL_DdB 0 or 1
check
17 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_NoChk Enable manual closing without any check 0 or 1
Threshold of rate of frequency change
18 MCBrd.CBx.25.df/dt between both sides of CB for 0.10~5.00 (Hz/s)
synchronism-check.
Circuit breaker closing time. It is the time
19 MCBrd.CBx.25.t_Close_CB from receiving closing command pulse till 0~1000 (ms)
the CB is completely closed.
From receiving a closing command, this
device will continuously check whether
between incoming voltage and reference
voltage involved in synchronism check
(or dead check) can meet the criteria. If
20 MCBrd.CBx.25.t_Wait_Chk 5.000~30.000 (s)
the synchronism check (or dead check)
criteria are not met within the duration of
this time delay, the failure of
synchronism-check (or dead check) will
be confirmed.
Enable block synchronism check for
21 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_VTS_Blk_SynChk manual closing when VT circuit is 0 or 1
abnormal
Enable block dead check for manual
22 MCBrd.CBx.25.En_VTS_Blk_DdChk 0 or 1
closing when VT circuit is abnormal
7.5.1.3 Dual Point Binary Input Settings
Thses settings are applied to configure the status change confirmation time for No.xx double point
binary inputs. Up to 15 virtual double point binary inputs are provided in this device.
If a double point binary input changes from normal status to invalid status, i.e.: double point error
occurs, [CSWIxx.t_DPU_DPS] will be applied as the debouncing time for No.xx double point
binary input. (xx=01, 02….15)
It is applied to configure the debouncing time for

1 CSWI01.t_DPU_DPS 0~60000 (ms)
dual-point binary input No.01.


4 CSWI04.t_DPU_DPS It is applied to configure the debouncing time for 0~60000 (ms)

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings











7.5.1.4 Control Settings
It is applied to configure the holding time to open CB or

1 CSWI01.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)
disconnector for binary output No.01.
It is applied to configure the holding time to close CB or

2 CSWI01.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)




7 CSWI04.t_PW_Opn It is applied to configure the holding time to open CB or 0~60000 (ms)

Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings



10 CSWI05.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

11 CSWI06.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

12 CSWI06.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

13 CSWI07.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

14 CSWI07.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

15 CSWI08.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

16 CSWI08.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

17 CSWI09.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

18 CSWI09.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

19 CSWI10.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)
It is applied to configure the holding time of close CB or

20 CSWI10.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

21 CSWI11.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

22 CSWI11.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

23 CSWI12.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

24 CSWI12.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

25 CSWI13.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

26 CSWI13.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

Date: 2017-06-08
7 Settings

27 CSWI14.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

28 CSWI14.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)

29 CSWI15.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 (ms)

30 CSWI15.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 (ms)
7.5.1.5 Interlock Settings
Enable open output of binary output No.01 controlled by

1 CSWI01.En_Opn_Blk 0 or 1
the interlocking logic
Enable closing output of binary output No.01 controlled by

2 CSWI01.En_Cls_Blk 0 or 1













Date: 2017-06-08
-09-07
7 Settings
















7.5.2 Access Path

MainMenu“Settings”“BCU Settings”

Date: 2017-06-08
Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface ................................................................ 8-a
8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Keypad Operation ................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 LED Indications .................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Front Communication Port ................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2 Menu Tree ........................................................................................................ 8-5

8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.2 Main Menus ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 Sub Menus ........................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3 Access Authority Management .................................................................... 8-26

8.3.1 Authority Classification ...................................................................................................... 8-27
8.3.2 Authority Identification........................................................................................................ 8-28
8.4 LCD Display ................................................................................................... 8-29

8.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-29
8.4.2 Function Shortcuts Key...................................................................................................... 8-30
8.4.3 Normal Display .................................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.4 Display Disturbance Records ............................................................................................ 8-34
8.4.5 Display Supervision Event ................................................................................................. 8-36
8.4.6 Display IO Events .............................................................................................................. 8-37
8.4.7 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-37
8.5 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-38

8.5.1 View Device Measurements .............................................................................................. 8-38
8.5.2 View Device Status ............................................................................................................ 8-39
8.5.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-39

Date: 2017-06-09
8.5.4 Print Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-39
8.5.5 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-40
8.5.6 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-41
8.5.7 Copy Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-44
8.5.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-44
8.5.9 Delete Device Records ...................................................................................................... 8-45
8.5.10 Remote Control via Menu ................................................................................................ 8-46
8.5.11 Remote Control via SLD .................................................................................................. 8-49
8.5.12 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-51
8.5.13 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-52
8.5.14 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-52
8.5.15 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-53
8.5.16 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-53
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons ...................................................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 LED indications ...................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102D ................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree ................................................................................................................ 8-7
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4
Table 8.4-1 Tripping report messages ..................................................................................... 8-36
Table 8.4-2 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-38
Table 8.4-1 Primary equipment symbols in SLD .................................................................... 8-49

Date: 2017-06-09
The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the
protective device is possible using a computer via a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel.
Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation
system via rear RS485 port or rear Ethernet port. The operator is able to check the protective
device status at any time.
This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator an instruction about
how to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering
value, including r.m.s. current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. Procedures to change
active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in details.
NOTICE!
About the measurements and metering in menu “Measurements”, please refer to the
following description:
“Measurements1” is used to display measured values from protection calculation DSP.

The measurement values can be displayed in primary value or secondary value by the
setting [Opt_Display_Status].
“Measurements2” is used to display measured values from fault detector DSP. The
measurement values can be displayed in primary value or secondary value by the
setting [Opt_Display_Status].
“Measurements3” is used to display measured values of other calculated quantities

related to the measurement and control. The measurement values are always
displayed in primary value.
“Metering” is used to display metering values of active and reactive energy. The
metering values are always displayed in primary value.
8.1 Overview
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user.
1 11
HEALTHY PCS-902
2 12
5
ALARM
3 13
4 14
GRP
5 15
6 16 ENT
ESC
7 17
4
8 18
1
9 19
3
10 20
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel

Date: 2017-06-09
The HMI module helps to draw your attention to something that has occurred which may activate a
LED or a report displayed on the LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the
keypad. The function of HMI module:
No. Item Description

A 320×240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting
1 LCD conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed when there is
operation implemented.
20 status indication LEDs, 2 LEDs are fixed as the signals of “HEALTHY”
2 LED (green) and “ALARM” (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with selectable
color among green, yellow and red.
3 Keypad Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device
4 Communication port a multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of device
8.1.1 Keypad Operation

P
GR
ENT
ESC
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons
1. “ESC”:
 Cancel the operation
 Quit the current menu
2. “ENT”:
 Execute the operation
 Confirm the interface
3. “GRP”
 Activate the switching interface of setting group
4. leftward and rightward direction keys (“◄” and “►”):
 Move the cursor horizontally
 Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu
5. upward and downward direction keys (“▲” and “▼”)
 Move the cursor vertically
 Select command menu within the same level of menu

Date: 2017-06-09
6. plus and minus sign keys (“＋” and “－”)
 Modify the value
 Modify and display the message number
 Page up/down
8.1.2 LED Indications
HEALTHY
ALARM
Figure 8.1-3 LED indications
A brief explanation has been made as bellow.
LED Display Description

When the equipment is out of service or any hardware error is defected during
Off
HEALTHY self-check.
Steady Green Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.
Off When equipment in normal operating condition.

ALARM
Steady Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm is issued.
NOTICE!
“HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device and no abnormality
detected.
“ALARM” LED is turned on when abnormalities of device occurs like above mentioned
and can be turned off after abnormalities are removed except alarm report [CTS.Alm]
which can only be reset only when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted or
re-energized.
Other LED indicators with no labels are configurable and user can configure them to be
lit by signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according
to requirement through PCS-Explorer software, but as drawn in figure, 2 LEDs are fixed
as the signals of “HEALTHY” (green) and “ALARM” (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable
with selectable color among green, yellow and red.

Date: 2017-06-09
8.1.3 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
P2
P1
P3
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel
In the above figure and the following table:
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal Device side Computer side

Core color Function
No. (Left) (Right)
1 Orange & white TX+ of the ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange TX- of the ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white P1-7
The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P3-5
8 Brown P1-8
8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102D
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC

Date: 2017-06-09
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.
NR1102D
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
Network C
Network D
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102D
NOTICE!
If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must
be set as “1”.
8.2 Menu Tree

8.2.1 Overview
Press “▲” of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and
“▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous
menu. Press “ESC” back to main menu directly. For sake of entering the command menu again, a
command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its execution. Five latest command
menus can be recorded in the quick menu. When five command menus are recorded, the latest
command menu will cover the earliest one, adopting the “first in first out” principle. It is arranged
from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.

Date: 2017-06-09
Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
MainMenu
Language
Clock
Quick Menu
For the first powered device, there is no record in quick menu. Press “▲” to enter the main menu
with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
The descriptions about menu are based on the maximized configuration, for a specific project, if
some function is not available, the corresponding submenu will hidden.
8.2.2 Main Menus

The menu of PCS-902 is organized into main menu and submenus, much like a PC directory
structure. The menu of PCS-902 is divided into 10 sections:

Date: 2017-06-09
Main Menu
Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Information
Test
Clock
Language
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree
Under main interface, press “▲” to enter main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”, “▼”
and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all main menus (first-level menus) under menu tree of the
device.
8.2.3 Sub Menus

8.2.3.1 Measurements
Main Menu
Measurements
Measurements1
Measurements2
Measurements3
Metering
This menu is used to display real-time measured values, including AC voltage, AC current, phase
angle and calculated quantities. These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This
menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to section “Measurement” about the detailed
measured values.

Date: 2017-06-09
No. Item Function description
1 Measurements1 Display measured values from protection calculation DSP
2 Measurements2 Display measured values from fault detector DSP
Display measured values of other calculated quantities related to the

3 Measurements3
measurement and control
4 Metering Display metering values of active and reactive energy
8.2.3.2 Status
Main Menu
Status
Inputs
Outputs
Superv State
This menu is used to display real time input signals, output signals and alarm signals of the device.
These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This menu comprises following
submenus. Please respectively refer to section “Signal List” about the detailed introduction of input
signals and output signals, and section “Supervision Alarms” about the detailed introduction of
alarm signals.
1 Inputs Display all input signal states
2 Outputs Display all output signal states
3 Superv State Display supervision alarm states
The submenu “Inputs” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Status
Inputs
Contact Inputs
GOOSE Inputs
Prot Ch Inputs
1 Contact Inputs Display states of binary inputs derived from opto-isolated channels

Date: 2017-06-09
2 GOOSE Inputs Display states of GOOSE binary inputs.
3 Prot Ch Inputs Display states of binary inputs received from protection channel.
The submenu “Outputs” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Status
Outputs
Contact Outputs
GOOSE Outputs
Interlock Status
Prot Ch Outputs
1 Contact Outputs Display states of contact binary outputs
2 GOOSE Outputs Display states of GOOSE binary outputs
3 Interlock Status Display states of interlock result of each remote control.
4 Prot Ch Outputs Display states of channel outputs
The submenu “Superv State” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Status
Superv State
Prot Superv
FD Superv
GOOSE Superv
SV Superv
BCU Superv
1 Prot Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from protection calculation DSP
2 FD Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from fault detector DSP

Date: 2017-06-09
3 GOOSE Superv Display states of GOOSE self-supervision signals
4 SV Superv Display states of SV self-supervision signals
5 BCU Superv Display states of measurement and control self-supervision signals
8.2.3.3 Records
Main Menu
Records
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Logs
Control Logs
Clear Records
This menu is used to display all kinds of records, including the disturbance records, supervision
events, binary events and device logs, so that the operator can load to view and use as the
reference of analyzing accidents and repairing the device. All records are stored in non-volatile
memory, it can still record them even if it loses its power.
This menu comprises the following submenus.

1 Disturb Records Display disturbance records of the device
2 Superv Events Display supervision events of the device
3 IO Events Display binary events of the device
4 Device Logs Display device logs of the device
5 Control Logs Display control logs of the device
6 Clear Records Clear all records.
8.2.3.4 Settings
Main Menu
Settings
System Settings
Prot Settings
BCU Settings
Logic Links
Device Setup

Date: 2017-06-09
This menu is used to check the device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic
links settings, as well as modifying any of the above setting items. Moreover, it can also execute
the setting copy between different setting groups.
1 System Settings Check or modify the system parameters
2 Prot Settings Check or modify the protection settings
3 BCU Settings Check or modify the measurement and control settings
Check or modify the logic links settings, including function links, SV links,
4 Logic Links
GOOSE links and spare links
5 Device Setup Check or modify the device setup
The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
Main Menu
Settings
Prot Settings
Line Settings BFP Settings
FD Settings Deadzone Settings
AuxE Settings OV Settings
Direction Settings UV Settings
Pilot Scheme Settings NegOV Settings
Rmt CommCh Settings ThOvld Settings
DPFC Dist Settings PD Settings
LoadEnch Settings Stub Settings
Dist Settings FreqProt Settings
ROC Settings OOS Settings
NegOC Settings MiscProt Settings
SOTF Settings VTS/CTS Settings
OC Settings Trip Logic Settings
VTF OC Settings CB1 AR/Syn Settings
RevPower Settings CB2 AR/Syn Settings
BRC Settings Copy Settings

Date: 2017-06-09
1 Line Settings Check or modify line parameters
2 FD Settings Check or modify fault detector element settings
3 AuxE Settings Check or modify auxiliary element settings
4 Direction Settings Check or modify direction control element settings
Check or modify pilot distance protection and pilot directional earth-fault

5 Pilot Scheme Settings
protection settings
6 Rmt CommCh Settings Check or modify optical pilot channel settings
7 DPFC Dist Settings Check or modify DPFC distance protection settings
8 LoadEnch Settings Check or modify load encroachment settings
9 Dist Settings Check or modify distance protection settings
10 ROC Settings Check or modify directional earth-fault protection settings
11 NegOC Settings Check or modify negative-sequence overcurrent protection settings
12 SOTF Settings Check or modify SOTF distance and overcurrent protection settings
13 OC Settings Check or modify phase overcurrent protection settings
14 VTF OC Settings Check or modify overcurrent protection settings for VT circuit failure
15 RevPower Settings Check or modify reverse power protection settings
16 BRC Settings Check or modify broken conductor protection settings
17 BFP Settings Check or modify breaker failure protection settings
18 Deadzone Settings Check or modify dead zone settings
19 OV Settings Check or modify overvoltage protection settings
20 UV Settings Check or modify undervoltage protection settings
21 NegOV Settings Check or modify negative-sequence overvoltage protection settings
22 ThOvld Settings Check or modify thermal overload protection settings
23 PD Settings Check or modify pole discrepancy protection settings
24 Stub Settings Check or modify stub overcurrent protection settings
25 FreqProt Settings Check or modify frequency protection settings
26 OOS Settings Check or modify out-of-step protection settings
27 MiscProt Settings Check or modify miscellaneous settings
28 VTS/CTS Settings Check or modify VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision settings
29 Trip Logic Settings Check or modify trippling logic settings
Check or modify synchronism check and auto-reclosing settings of circuit

30 CB1 AR/Syn Settings
breaker No.1
Check or modify synchronism check and auto-reclosing settings of circuit

breaker No.2
32 Copy Settings Copy setting between different setting groups

Date: 2017-06-09
The submenu “BCU Settings” includes the following command menus.
Main Menu
Settings
BCU Settings
FUN Settings
CB1 Syn Settings
CB2 Syn Settings
BI Settings
Control Settings
Interlock Settings
1 FUN Settings Check or modify function settings
2 CB1 Syn Settings Check or modify manual sysnchronism check settings for circuit breaker 1
3 CB2 Syn Settings Check or modify manual sysnchronism check settings for circuit breaker 2
4 BI Settings Check or modify binary input settings
5 Control Settings Check or modify control settings
6 Interlock Settings Check or modify interlock settings
The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Settings
Logic Links
Function Links
GOOSE Send Links
GOOSE Recv Links
SV Links
1 Function Links Check or modify function links settings
2 GOOSE Send Links Check or modify GOOSE sending links settings

Date: 2017-06-09
3 GOOSE Recv Links Check or modify GOOSE receiving links settings
4 SV Links Check or modify SV links settings
The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Settings
Device Setup
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
1 Device Settings Check or modify the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Check or modify the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Check or modify the label settings of each protection element.
8.2.3.5 Print
Main Menu
Print
Device Info
Settings
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Prot Ch Superv
Prot Ch Statistics
Device Status
Waveforms
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print
This menu is used to print device description, settings, all kinds of records, waveforms, information
related with IEC60870-5-103 protocol, channel state and channel statistic.

Date: 2017-06-09
Print the description information of the device, including software

1 Device Info
version.
Print device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic

links settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all
2 Settings
settings of the device. Besides, it can also print the latest modified
settings.
3 Disturb Records Print the disturbance records
4 Superv Events Print the supervision events
5 IO Events Print the binary events
Print the self-check information of optical fibre channel, which is made of

6 Prot Ch Superv some hexadecimal characters and used to developer analyze channel
state
Print the statistic report of optical fibre channel, which is formed A.M.
7 Prot Ch Statistics
9:00 every day
Print the current state of the device, including the sampled value of
8 Device Status
voltage and current, the state of binary inputs, setting and so on
9 Waveforms Print the recorded waveforms
Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN),

10 IEC103 Info information serial number (INF), general classification service group
number, and channel number (ACC)
11 Cancel Print Cancel the print command
The submenu “Settings” comprises the following submenus.
Main Menu
Print
Settings
System Settings
Prot Settings
BCU Settings
Logic Links
Device Setup
All Settings
Latest Chgd Settings

Date: 2017-06-09
1 System Settings Print the system parameters
2 Prot Settings Print the protection settings
3 BCU Settings Print the measurement and control settings
4 Logic Links Print the logic links settings
5 Device Setup Print the settings related to device setup
Print all settings including device setup, system parameters, protection

6 All Settings
settings and logic links settings
7 Latest Chgd Settings Print the setting latest modified
The submenu “Prot Settings” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Print
Settings
Prot Settings
Line Settings BFP Settings
FD Settings Deadzone Settings
AuxE Settings OV Settings
Direction Settings UV Settings
Pilot Scheme Settings NegOV Settings
Rmt CommCh Settings ThOvld Settings
DPFC Dist Settings PD Settings
LoadEnch Settings Stub Settings
Dist Settings FreqProt Settings
ROC Settings OOS Settings
NegOC Settings MiscProt Settings
SOTF Settings VTS/CTS Settings
OC Settings Trip Logic Settings
VTF OC Settings CB1 AR/Syn Settings
RevPower Settings CB2 AR/Syn Settings
BRC Settings All Settings
1 Line Settings Print line parameters
2 FD Settings Print fault detector element settings

Date: 2017-06-09
3 AuxE Settings Print auxiliary element settings
4 Direction Settings Print direction control element settings
Print pilot distance protection and pilot directional earth-fault protection

5 Pilot Scheme Settings
settings
6 Rmt CommCh Settings Print optical pilot channel settings
7 DPFC Dist Settings Print y DPFC distance protection settings
8 LoadEnch Settings Print load encroachment settings
9 Dist Settings Print distance protection settings
10 ROC Settings Print directional earth-fault protection settings
11 NegOC Settings Print negative-sequence overcurrent protection settings
12 SOTF Settings Print SOTF distance and overcurrent protection settings
13 OC Settings Print phase overcurrent protection settings
14 VTF OC Settings Print overcurrent protection settings for VT circuit failure
15 RevPower Settings Print reverse power protection settings
16 BRC Settings Print broken conductor protection settings
17 BFP Settings Print breaker failure protection settings
18 Deadzone Settings Print dead zone settings
19 OV Settings Print overvoltage protection settings
20 UV Settings Print undervoltage protection settings
21 NegOV Settings Print negative-sequence overvoltage protection settings
22 ThOvld Settings Print thermal overload protection settings
23 PD Settings Print pole discrepancy protection settings
24 Stub Settings Print stub overcurrent protection settings
25 FreqProt Settings Print frequency protection settings
26 OOS Settings Print out-of-step protection settings
27 MiscProt Settings Print miscellaneous settings
28 VTS/CTS Settings Print VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision settings
29 Trip Logic Settings Print trippling logic settings
Print synchronism check and auto-reclosing settings of circuit breaker

No.1
Print synchronism check and auto-reclosing settings of circuit breaker

No.2
32 All Settings Print all settings included in “Prot Settings” submenu
The submenu “BCU Settings” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2017-06-09
Main Menu
Print
Settings
BCU Settings
FUN Settings
CB1 Syn Settings
CB2 Syn Settings
BI Settings
Control Settings
Interlock Settings
All Settings
1 FUN Settings Print function settings
2 CB1 Syn Settings Print manual sysnchronism check settings for circuit breaker 1
3 CB2 Syn Settings Print manual sysnchronism check settings for circuit breaker 2
4 BI Settings Print binary input settings
5 Control Settings Print control settings
6 Interlock Settings Print interlock settings
7 All Settings Print all settings included in “BCU Settings” submenu
The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.

Date: 2017-06-09
Main Menu
Print
Settings
Logic Links
Function Links
GOOSE Send Links
GOOSE Recv Links
SV Links
All Settings
1 Function Links Print function links settings
2 GOOSE Send Links Print GOOSE sending links settings
3 GOOSE Recv Links Print GOOSE receiving links settings
4 SV Links Print SV links settings
5 All Settings Print all settings included in “Logic Links” submenu
The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Print
Settings
Device Setup
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
All Settings
1 Device Settings Print the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Print the label settings of each protection element.

Date: 2017-06-09
4 All Settings Print all settings included in “Device Setup” submenu
The submenu “Prot Ch Superv” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Print
Prot Ch Superv
Channel 1
Channel 2
Print the self-check information of optical fibre channel 1, which is made of some
1 Channel 1
hexadecimal characters and used to developer analyze channel state
Print the self-check information of optical fibre channel 2, which is made of some
2 Channel 2
hexadecimal characters and used to developer analyze channel state
The submenu “Prot Ch Statistics” includes the following command menus.
Main Menu
Print
Prot Ch Statistics
Channel 1
Channel 2
Print the statistic report of optical fibre channel 1, which is formed A.M. 9:00 every
1 Channel 1
day
Print the statistic report of optical fibre channel 2, which is formed A.M. 9:00 every
2 Channel 2
day
The submenu “Waveforms” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2017-06-09
Main Menu
Print
Waveforms
Wave
1 Wave Print the recorded current and voltage waveforms
8.2.3.6 Local Cmd
Main Menu
Local Cmd
Reset Target
Trig Oscillograph
Control
Download
Clear Counter
Clear CB1 AR Counter
Clear CB2 AR Counter
Clear Energy Counter
This menu is used to reset the tripping relay with latch, indicator LED, LCD display, and as same
as the reset function of binary inputs. This menu provides a method of manually recording the
current waveform data of the device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.
Besides, it can send out the request of program download, clear statistic information about
GOOSE, SV, AR, FO channel and energy.
1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, indicator LED, LCD display and so on
2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording
3 Control Manually operating to trip, close output or for signaling purpose
4 Download Send out the request of downloading program
5 Clear Counter Clear GOOSE, SV and FO channel statistic data
6 Clear CB1 AR Counter Clear AR statistic data of circuit breaker No.1

Date: 2017-06-09
7 Clear CB2 AR Counter Clear AR statistic data of circuit breaker No.2
Clear all energy metering values (i.e., PHr+_Pri, PHr-_Pri, Qr+_Pri,

8 Clear Energy Counter
QHr-_Pri)
8.2.3.7 Information
Main Menu
Information
Version Info
Board Info
MOT Info
In this menu, LCD can display software information of all kinds of intelligent plug-in modules,
which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence
number. Besides, plug-in module information and MOT information can also be viewed.
This menu comprises the following command menus.
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.
2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
3 MOT Info Display ordering code
8.2.3.8 Test
Main Menu
Test
Prot Ch Counter
GOOSE Comm Counter
SV Comm Counter
Device Test
Internal Signal
AR Counter
HMI Setup
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the
device. It can be used to fulfill the communication test function. It is also used to generate all kinds

Date: 2017-06-09
of reports or events to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to debug the
communication on site. Besides, it can also display statistic information about GOOSE, SV, AR
and FO channel.
1 Prot Ch Counter Check communication statistics data of protection FO channel
2 GOOSE Comm Counter Check communication statistics data of GOOSE
3 SV Comm Counter Check communication statistics data of SV (Sampled Values)
Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to SCADA,

including disturbance records, self-supervision events and binary events. It
4 Device Test
can realize the report uploading by different classification, as well as the
uploading of all kinds of reports
5 Internal Signal This submenu is only reserved for the manufacturer
6 AR Counter Check AR counters
7 HMI Setup Configure LCD display and check LCD display and LED indicators
The submenu “Prot Ch Counter” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Test
Prot Ch Counter
Ch1 Counter
Ch2 Counter
1 Ch1 Counter Check communication statistic information of channel 1
2 Ch2 Counter Check communication statistic information of channel 2
The submenu “Device Test” comprises the following submenus.

Date: 2017-06-09
Main Menu
Test
Device Test
Disturb Events
Superv Events
IO Events
View the relevant information about disturbance records (only used for
1 Disturb Events
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about supervision events (only used for
2 Superv Events
debugging persons)
View the relevant information about binary events (only used for debugging
3 IO Events
persons)
Users can respectively execute the test automatically or manually by selecting commands “All
Test” or “Select Test”.
The submenu “Disturb Events” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Test
Device Test
Disturb Events
All Test
Select Test
1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements
2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification
The submenu “Superv Events” comprises the following command menus.

Date: 2017-06-09
Main Menu
Test
Device Test
Superv Events
All Test
Select Test
1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions
The submenu “IO Events” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Test
Device Test
IO Events
All Test
Select Test
1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs
The submenu “AR Counter” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Test
AR Counter
CB1 AR Counter
CB2 AR Counter

Date: 2017-06-09
1 CB1 AR Counter Check AR counters of circuit breaker No.1
2 CB2 AR Counter Check AR counters of circuit breaker No.2
The submenu “HMI Setup” comprises the following command menus.
Main Menu
Test
HMI Setup
Contrast
BacklitDur
LgtIntnsty
SupervLCD
SupervLED
1 Contrast To adjust the contrast of LCD display
2 BacklitDur To adjust the duration of LCD backlight
3 Lgtlntnsty To adjust the brightness of LCD display
4 SupervLCD To find out dead pixel of LCD display
5 SupervLED To find out broken LED indicator 03~20
8.2.3.9 Clock
The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.3.10 Language
This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language.
8.3 Access Authority Management

In order to conveniently manage access authority, the device support setup up to 40 users and
allow each user to own different password (user password can support 8 characters at most and
must include one lowercase letter, one capital letter and one number at least) and access authority
(such as modify settings, view records, remote control)
According to different access authority, the corresponding operations to the device by LCD panel
can be allowed to perform. For the operation that requires authorization, the corresponding user

Date: 2017-06-09
logs in and the correct password must be input after the operation can be performed.
8.3.1 Authority Classification

The devie provide four kinds of authorities: View, Control, Setting, Project. The default
configuration of the device is no multi-users. Each item of different authority class can be enabled
or disabled independently, and the operation without access authority can be performed directly
no password provided. The valid time of the password can be set, and the password need not be
input again within the valid time ,which ensure both security and convenience.
Taking “User1” as an example, four kinds of authorities: View, Control, Setting, Project are shown
as below.

Date: 2017-06-09
8.3.2 Authority Identification

The operation is as follows:
1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu, the following interface will be shown when performing
an operation. (Multi-users have been configured in advance)
2. Press the “◄” or “►” to select username, and press the “ESC” to exit this menu
Username User1
Password
3. Press the “ENT” or “▼” to move, and the following interface will be shown after the username
is confirmed.
Username User1
Password ******
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [OK]
4. Press the “◄” or “►” to select number or letter, and press “ENT” to ensure selected character.
5. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down to select previous group or next group characters.
6. Press the “GRP” to switch uppercase or lowercase to be choosen characters.
7. When the password reaches to 8 bits, the device will verify whether the username and

Date: 2017-06-09
password are correctly. If the password is shorter than 8 bits, select and press “OK” to begin
to verify whether the username and password are correctly.
8. Press the “ESC” to cancel entered character during entering password, and the password will
be cleared if the password check fails. When the password is cleared, press the “ESC” to
select the username again.
9. The device provides the function of password memory, the following interface will be shown if
the valid time of the password is set and last entered password is no timeout.
Username User1
Password *******
10. Press the “ENT” to verify the password, press the “◄” or “►” to switch the username and the
password will be cleared, and press the “ESC” to exit the interface.
11. If the password is correct and the user owns the authority of the operation performed, the
operation will be performed.
If the password is incorrect, the device will issue an alarm signal “Password Error”. If the password
is correct but the user has no the authority of the operation performed, the device will issue an
alarm signal “Unauthorized”. If the password is incorrect or the user has no the authority of the
operation performed more than three times, the device will issue an alarm signal “PWD Error or
Unauthorized, Screen Locked” and the device will return to main interface after the screen is
locked for 1 minutes, which will be recorded in device log.
8.4 LCD Display

8.4.1 Overview
There are some kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, disturbance records,
supervison events, IO events, control logs and device logs. Disturbance records and supervison
events will not disappear until them are acknowledged by pressing the “RESET” button in the
protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). If any event is detected, the
corresponding event display will pop up automatically, and user can keep pressing “ENT” and then
press “ESC” to switch between normal display and event display. IO events will be displayed for 5s

Date: 2017-06-09
and then it will return to the previous display interface automatically. Device logs will not pop up
and can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.
8.4.2 Function Shortcuts Key

The device provide some function shortcuts key, which can be configured by PCS-Explorer and be
fulfilled by combination key of devices' keypad, to execute some operation quickly.
8.4.2.1 Shortcuts Key Configuration
1. Right-click the menu “LCD Graph”, and select the menu item “Edit Shortcut Key” to display
the configuration interface of function key shortcuts as shown below.
2. In configuration interface, double-click the table item in the list of “Extend Command” to select
LCD extend command of dropdown list corresponding with keypads in front panel as shown
below. Select the first blank item in dropdown list to cancel the setup.

Date: 2017-06-09
3. Double-click the table item in the list of “Attribute” to edit the attribute of keypad in front panel
as shown below. When the attribute is set as “1”, the corresponding operation can not execute
unless input correct password. When the attribute is set as “0” or blank, password is not
required. After finishing configuration, click the button “OK”.
4. The name description of extend command can be modified in signal setup interface, the
operation “Refresh” in the interface of “Source” must be execute at first before configuring
function shortcuts key or generating drive file package.
5. Right-click device node and execute the menu “Compress Driver File” to generate drive file
package of the device. The file “LCDConfig.txt” in drive file package of the device records
related contents about shortcuts key. If shortcuts keys are not required, set “Extend
Command” corresponding with function shortcuts key as blank, and generate drive file
package of the device again.

Date: 2017-06-09
In general, the function of “GRP” is switch setting group, however, the original function of “GRP” is
blocked when configuring function shortcuts key. (the setting group can be switched by shortcuts
key, binary input or modifying the setting) Under main interface, press “GRP” to display the
interface of function shortcuts key and press “ESC” to return to main interface.
Shortcut keys
[ ] LCD.ExtCmd04
[ ] LCD.ExtCmd05
[ ] LCD.ExtCmd06
[ ] LCD.ExtCmd07
[ + ] LCD.ExtCmd08
[ - ] LCD.ExtCmd09
[ ENT ] LCD.ExtCmd10
The device support 10 extended command, LCD.ExtCmd01~LCD.ExtCmd10, and the name can
be modified by PCS-Explorer. The first three extend command is fixed in program, so only
LCD.ExtCmd04~LCD.ExtCmd10 are configurable, and configured as any of seven function
shortcuts key (“▲”, “▼”, “◄”, “►”, “＋”, “－” and “ENT”).

Date: 2017-06-09
Password:
000
Under the interface of function shortcuts key, press a shortcuts key to execute corresponding
operation. If the attribute of the extend command is set as “1”, the corresponding operation can not
execute unless input correct password. The extend command executed by shortcuts key outputs a
pulse signal with 500ms, and for the operation requiring latching signal, the device provides
“T_FF” and “RS_FF” to fulfill the application, which can be configured by PCS-Explorer.
8.4.3 Normal Display

After the device is powered and entered into the initiating interface, it takes tens of seconds to
complete the initialization of the device. During the initialization of the device, the “HEALTHY”
indicator lamp of the device goes out.
The device can display single line diagram (SLD) and primary operation information, it can support
wiring configuration function. LCD configuration file can be downloaded via the network. Remote
control operation through single line diagram is also supported.
Under normal condition, LCD will display the following interface. LCD adopts white color as its
backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, moreover, the backlight will be
extinguished automatically if no keyboard operation is detected for a duration.

Date: 2017-06-09
S 2010-06-08 10:10:00
Ia 0.00A
Ib 0.00A
Ic 0.00A
3I0 0.00A
Ua 0.02V
Ub 0.00V
Uc 0.00V
3U0 0.02V
U_Syn 0.00V
f 50.00Hz
Addr 24343 Group 01
The content displayed on the screen contains: the current date and time of the device (with a
format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the active setting group number, three-phase current sampling
value, residual current sampling value, three-phase voltage sampling value, residual voltage
sampling value, the synchronism voltage sampling value, line frequency and the address relevant
to IP address of Ethernet A. If all the sampling values of the voltage and the current can’t be fully
displayed within one screen, they will be scrolling-displayed automatically from the top to the
bottom.
If IP address of Ethernet A is “xxx.xxx.a.b”, the displayed address equals to (a×256+b). For

example, If IP address of Ethernet A is “198.087.095.023”, the displayed address will be “95×
256+23=24343”.
If the device has detected any abnormal state, it′ll display the self-check alarm information.
“S” indicates that device clock is synchronized. If “S” disappears, it means that device clock is not
synchronized.
8.4.4 Display Disturbance Records

This device can store up to 32 groups of disturbance records with fault waveform. Each group
consists of disturbance records of operation elements and corresponding fault detector elements.
Up to 1024 disturbance records can be stored in this device. If there is protection element
operation, LCD will automatically display the latest group of disturbance records, and two kinds of
LCD display interfaces will be available depending on whether there are supervision events or not.
For the situation that the disturbance records and the supervision events coexist, the upper half
part is the disturbance record, and the lower half part is the supervision event. The following items
are listed in the upper half part: record No., record name, generation time of the disturbance
record. If there is protection element operation, faulty phase and relative operation time (with
reference to the corresponding fault detector element) will be displayed. If the disturbance records
can not be displayed in one page, they will be displayed in several pages alternately.

Date: 2017-06-09
If there is no supervision event, disturbance records will be displayed as shown in the following
figure.
NO.001 2013-01-15 13:22:23:669 Disturb
0000ms FD.DPFC.Pkp
0024ms AB 21Q.Z1.Op
If the device has the supervision event, the display interface will show the disturbance record and
the supervision event at the same time.
NO.001 2013-01-15 13:22:23:669 Disturb
0000ms FD.DPFC.Pkp
0024ms AB 21Q.Z1.Op
Superv Events
Alm_Device
NO.001 shows the SOE No. of the disturbance record.
2013-01-15 13:22:23:669 shows the time of the disturbance record, the format is
“yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:fff”.
Disturb shows the title of the disturbance record.

Date: 2017-06-09
0000ms FD.DPFC.Pkp shows fault detector element and its operation time (set as
“0000ms” fixedly).
0024ms AB 21Q.Z1.Op shows operation element and its relative operation time (with
reference to the corresponding fault detector element).
All the protection elements have been listed in chapter “Operation Theory”, and please refer to
each protection element for details. The reports related to oscillography function are showed in the
following table.
Table 8.4-1 Tripping report messages
No. Message Description

1 TrigDFR_Man Oscillography function is triggered manually.
2 TrigDFR_Rmt Oscillography function is triggered remotely.
Oscillography function is triggered by binary input [BI_TrigDFR]. The
3 TrigDFR_BI binary input [BI_TrigDFR] is configurable, and it can be designated to
internal signal or external input.
8.4.5 Display Supervision Event

This device can store 1024 pieces of supervision events. During the running of the device, the
supervision event of hardware self-check errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.
S Superv Events
Alm_Device
Alm_Version
S indicates that device clock is synchronized. If “S” disappears, it

means that device clock is not synchronized.
Superv Events shows the title of the supervision events.
Alm_Device shows the contents of supervision events.

Date: 2017-06-09
Alm_Version
8.4.6 Display IO Events

This device can store 1024 pieces of binary events. During the running of the device, the binary
input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e. from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”.
NO.001 2013-01-15 13:31:23:669 IO Chg
BI_Maintenance 0 1
NO.001 shows the No. of the binary event.
2013-01-15 13:31:23:669 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
“yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:fff”.
IO Chg shows the title of the binary event.
BI_Maintenance 0→1 shows the state change of binary input, including binary input
name, original state and final state.
8.4.7 Display Device Logs

This device can store 1024 pieces of device logs. Please refer to section “8.5.3” for LCD operation

Date: 2017-06-09
4. Device Logs NO.4

2008-11-28 10:18:47:569ms
Reboot
Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the device log
2008-11-28 10:18:47:569 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Reboot shows the manipulation content of the device log
User operating information listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.4-2 User operating event list
No. Message Description

1 Reboot The device has been reboot.
2 Settings_Chgd The device′s settings have been changed.
3 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
4 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (Device logs can not be deleted)
5 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
6 Process_Exit A process has exited.
7 Counter_Cleared Clear counter
It will be displayed on LCD before disturbance records and supervision events are confirmed. Only
pressing both “ENT” and “ESC” at the same time can switch among disturbance records,
supervision events and the normal running state of the device to display it. IO events will be
displayed for 5s and then it will return to the previous display interface automatically.
8.5 Keypad Operation

8.5.1 View Device Measurements
1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then press

Date: 2017-06-09
the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);
5. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;
6. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu);
8.5.2 View Device Status

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
the key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).
8.5.3 View Device Records

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down;
5. Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record;
7. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu);
8.5.4 Print Device Records


Date: 2017-06-09
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the “ENT” or
“►” to enter the menu;
 Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious
or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”,
and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer
doesn’t complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will
display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”).
 Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the
key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
4. If selecting the command menu “Device Info”, “Device Status“ or “IEC103 Info”, press
the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”).
5. If selecting the “Settings”, press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the next level of menu.
6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and
then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. If selecting any item to
printing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to be printed. After pressing the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).
7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the waveform
item to be printed and press ”ENT” to enter. If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will
display “No Waveform Data!” (Before executing the command menu “Waveforms”, it is
necessary to execute the command menu “Trig Oscillograph” in the menu “Local Cmd”,
otherwise the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”). With waveform data existing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD
will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and
the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Waveforms”).
8.5.5 View Device Setting


Date: 2017-06-09
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;
5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;
7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
NOTICE!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side
of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu
and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.
8.5.6 Modify Device Setting

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;
5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;
7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” );
8. If selecting the command menu “System Settings”, move the cursor to the setting item
to be modified, and then press the “ENT”;
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the “◄” or “►”
to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value), press the
“ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu
“System Settings”. Press the “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed
interface of the command menu “System Settings”).
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press the “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”. Directly press the “ESC” or
press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the “Cancel”, and then press the “ENT” to

Date: 2017-06-09
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu “System
Settings”).
Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the “ENT”, all modified setting item
will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the “ENT”, the LCD will
display password input interface.
Password:
____
Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” and “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,
and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface
of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is correct, LCD will display “Save
Setting Now…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu “System Settings”), with all modified setting items as modified values.
NOTICE!
For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification
methods are the same. The following is ditto.
9. If selecting the submenu “Prot Settings”, and press “ENT” to enter. After selecting
different command menu, the LCD will display the following interface: (take “FD
Settings” as an example)

Date: 2017-06-09
FD Settings
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group: 01
Selected Group: 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ENT” to enter it. Move the cursor to
the setting item to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter.
Take the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set] as an example is selected to modify, then press the “ENT” to
enter and the LCD will display the following interface. Press “＋” or “－” to modify the value and
then press the “ENT” to confirm.
FD.DPFC.I_Set
Current Value 0.200
Modified Value 0.202
Min Value 0.050
Max Value 30.000
NOTICE!
After modifying protection settings in current active setting group or system parameters
of the device, the “HEALTHY” LED indicator the device will be lit off, and the MON
module will check the new settings. If the abnormality is detected during the setting
check, corresponding alarm signals will be issued. Moreover, if the critical error is
detected, the device will be blocked.

Date: 2017-06-09
8.5.7 Copy Device Setting

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
Copy Settings
Active Group: 01
Copy To Group: 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the “ESC”, and return to the menu “Settings”.
Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,
continue inputting it, press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the menu
“Settings”. If the password is correct, the LCD will display “Settings Copied!”, and exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Settings”).
8.5.8 Switch Setting Group

1. Exit the main menu;
2. Press the “GRP”

Date: 2017-06-09
Change Active Group
Active Group: 01
Change To Group: 02
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to
the main menu). After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the
password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input
interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp
of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If
the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD
will return to its original state.
8.5.9 Delete Device Records

1. Exit the main menu;
2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and “ENT”; Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to
the original state). Press the “ENT” to carry out the deletion.
Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit

Date: 2017-06-09
NOTICE!
The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the
protection device, including disturbance records, supervision events, binary events, but
not including device logs. Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so
the application of the function shall be cautious.
8.5.10 Remote Control via Menu

Control operation method is introduced as below:
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Local Cmd”, and
then press the key “ENT” to enter submenus. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the
cursor to the command menu “Control”, and then press the key “ENT” to enter and the
following display will be shown on LCD.
Password:
000
Input a 3-bit password (“111”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the
“ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface of the command
menu “Control”. If the password is correct, it will go to the following step.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the control object and press the key
“ENT” to select control object.

Date: 2017-06-09
Control
Step1: select Control Object
1. CSWI01
2. CSWI02
3. CSWI03
4. CSWI04
5. CSWI05
6. CSWI06
7. CSWI07
8. CSWI08
9. CSWI09
10. CSWI10
4. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select control command press the key “ENT” to the next step.
Three control commands are optional:
1) Open (Lower): Remote open
2) Close (Raise): Remote close
3) (Stop): Reserved
CSWI01
Step2: select Control Command
Open(Lower) Close(Raise) (Stop)
NoCheck SynchroCheck DeadCheck

LoopCheck EF Line Selection
InterlockChk InterlockNotChk
Select Execute Cancel
Result
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select synchronism check mode and press the key “ENT” to
the next step.
Five synchronism check modes are optional:
1) NoCheck: Without any check
2) SynchroCheck: Synchronism-check mode

Date: 2017-06-09
3) DeadCheck: Dead check mode
4) LoopCheck: Reserved
5) EF Line Selection: Reserved
CSWI01
Step3: select Execution Condition

InterlockChk InterlockNotChk
Result
6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select interlock mode and press the key “ENT” to next step.
Two interlock check modes are optional:
1) InterlockChk: Check interlocking criteria
2) InterlockNotChk: Not check interlocking criteria
CSWI01
Step4: select Interlock Condition

InterlockChk InterLockNotChk
Result
7. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select control type and press the key “ENT”.
As shown in the following figure, operation results will be shown after “Result” at the bottom of the
LCD.

Date: 2017-06-09
Three synchronism control types are optional:
1) Select: Select control object
2) Execute: Execute control operation
3) Cancel: Cancel control operation
CSWI01
Step5: select Control Type

InterlockChk InterLockNotChk
Result
NOTICE!
“Exectue” operation must be operated after “Select” operation.
8.5.11 Remote Control via SLD

The control operation (close or open) also can be executed on the single line diagram (SLD) of the
default display under normal operation condition. The signs of the circuit breaker (abbreviated as
CB) and switch (DS or ES) are listed in the following table.
Table 8.5-1 Primary equipment symbols in SLD
Sign Explanation Sign Explanation
Position of CB: Open Position of switch: Open
Position of CB: Closed Position of switch: Closed
? Position of CB: Intermediate state ? Position of switch: Intermediate state
× Position of CB: Bad state × Position of switch: Bad state
An example of normal display with SLD is shown in the following figure. The single line diagram of
the default display on the LCD is shown as below when the device is in normal situation, if this
device adopts the single line diagram as default display.

Date: 2017-06-09
S Addr:150 2008-11-28 10:10:00 Group 01
Bus1
Bus2
M011 M0112
M0131
M01
M0151
M0171
Feeder M01
Press key “▼” continuously to select a circuit breaker or a switch which will be opened or closed.
Then press key “ENT” to start to control the selected circuit breaker or switch. If it is the first time to
do control operation after a long time, it needs to input a correct password. The control operation
window will be valid for 150s after inputting correct password. The password for control operation
is fixed, and it is “111”.
S Addr:150 2008-11-28 10:10:00 Group 01
Bus1
Bus2
M011 M0112
M0131
M01
M0151
M0171 Password：
Feeder M01 000
After inputting correct password, press key “ENT” to control the selected circuit breaker or switch.
Press key “▼” continuously to select the expected circuit breaker or switch with closed position,
and then press key “ENT” to start to open the selected circuit breaker or switch.

Date: 2017-06-09
S Addr:150 2008-11-28 10:10:00 Group 01
Bus1
Bus2
M011 M0112
M0131
M01
M0151
M0171
Feeder M01 Open Close?
If control operation is succeed, the following figure will be shown.
S Addr:150 2008-11-28 10:10:00 Group 01
Bus1
Bus2
M011 M0112
M0131
M01
M0151
M0171
Feeder M01 Op Success
8.5.12 Modify Device Clock

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the “ENT”
to enter clock display
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;
4. Press the “+” or “-” to modify value, and then press the “ENT” to save the modification
and return to the main menu;
5. Press the “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

Date: 2017-06-09
NOTICE!
Move the cursor to select the item “Format” to setup time display format. Press the “+”
or “-” to modify from the following options.
1. YYYY-MM-DD (Default display format)
2. YYYY/MM/dd
3. DD-MM-YYYY
4. DD/MM/YYYY
5. MM-DD-YYYY
6. MM/DD/YYYY
Clock
Year: 2008
Month: 11
Day: 28
Hour: 20
Minute: 59
Format: YYYY/MM/DD
8.5.13 View Module Information

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the
3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and then
press the “ENT” to enter the menu;
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar;
5. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.5.14 Check Software Version

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu.

Date: 2017-06-09
2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the submenu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and
then press the key “ENT” to display the software version.
4. Press the “ESC” to return to the main menu.
8.5.15 Communication Test

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the submenu “Device Test”, and then
press the key “ENT” to enter the submenu,to select test item. If “Disturb Events”
“Superv Events” or “IO Events” is selected, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are
provided.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu
“All Test” or “Select Test”. If selecting the “All Test”, press the “ENT”, and the device will
successively carry out all operation element message test one by one.
5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down,
and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding message.
NOTICE!
If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and
return to the “Test” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication Test
Timeout and Exiting...”.
Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Test”, at this moment, the LCD will
display “Communication Test Exiting…”.
8.5.16 Select Language

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Language”, and
then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on
LCD.

Date: 2017-06-09
Please Select Language:
1 中文
2 English
3 XXXX
Third language selected by the user
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the language user preferred and press
the key “ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD
will return to the menu “Language”, and the display language is changed. Otherwise,
press the key “ESC” to cancel language switching and return to the menu “Language”.
NOTICE!
LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for explaining
specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual device may be some
different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.

Date: 2017-06-09
Table of Contents
9 Configurable Function ...................................................................... 9-a
9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software ........................................................ 9-1
9.3 Signal List ........................................................................................................ 9-2
9.3.1 Input Signal .......................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.2 Output Signal ..................................................................................................................... 9-21
List of Tables
Table 9.3-1 Input signals ............................................................................................................. 9-2
Table 9.3-2 Output signals ........................................................................................................ 9-21

Date: 2017-06-09

Date: 2017-06-09
9.1 Overview
By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make device configuration, function

configuration, LCD configuration, binary input and binary output configuration, LED indicator
configuration and programming logic for PCS-902.
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software
PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC

platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand.
After function configuration is finished, disabled protection function will be hidden in the device and
in setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer Software. The user can select to show or hide some
setting by this way, and modify the setting value.
Please refer to the instruction manual “PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software” for details.
Overall functions:
 Programmable logic
 Device configuration
 Function configuration
 LCD configuration
 LED indicators configuration
 Binary signals configuration
 Setting configuration
 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device
 Display of sequence of report (SOE)
 Analysis of waveform
 File downloading/uploading
 LCD function shortcut keys configuration
 DNP communication information map configuration
 Export RIO file

Date: 2017-06-09
 Multi-user access authority management
9.3 Signal List
If an input signal or output signal is gray in PCS-Explorer, it means that the input signal or output
signal is not configurable. Otherwise, it is configurable signal.
NOTICE!

circuit breakers application by PCS-Exploerer. The prefix “CBx.” is added to all signals
for circuit breaker No.x (x=1 or 2). The related protection functions include circuit
breaker position supervision, breaker failure protection, dead zone protection, pole
discrepancy protection, synchrocheck, automatic reclosure, trip logic, CT circuit
supervision, control and synchrocheck for manual closing.
9.3.1 Input Signal
All input signals of this device are listed in the following table.
Table 9.3-1 Input signals

Circuit breaker position supervision
1 CBx.52b_PhA Normally closed contact of A-phase of circuit breaker No.x
2 CBx.52b_PhB Normally closed contact of B-phase of circuit breaker No.x
3 CBx.52b_PhC Normally closed contact of C-phase of circuit breaker No.x
Maintenance status binary input of circuit breaker No.x
If any circuit breaker is in maintenance and out of service, CBx.52b or
4 CBx.Test CBx.Test should be set as “1” in fixed, and CB No.x will be not take effect
in corresponding protection logics. (CB position supervision is still kept.)
It is only available for double circuit breakers mode.
External manual closing binary input of circuit breaker No.x, it is only
5 CBx.ManCls
applied to SOTF logic
6 CBx.52b Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker No.x
7 CBx.52a Normally open contact of three-phase of circuit breaker No.x
Control circuit failure of circuit breaker No.x (normally closed contacts of
8 CBx.TCCS.Input tripping position (52b) and closing position (52a) of three-phase circuit
breaker are all de-energized due to DC power loss of control circuit)
Auxiliary element
Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
9 AuxE.OCD.En
Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
10 AuxE.OCD.Blk
Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
11 AuxE.ROC1.En

Date: 2017-06-09

Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
12 AuxE.ROC1.Blk
13 AuxE.ROC2.En
14 AuxE.ROC2.Blk
15 AuxE.ROC3.En
16 AuxE.ROC3.Blk
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered
17 AuxE.OC1.En
Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered
18 AuxE.OC1.Blk
19 AuxE.OC2.En
20 AuxE.OC2.Blk
21 AuxE.OC3.En
22 AuxE.OC3.Blk
Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
23 AuxE.UVD.En
Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
24 AuxE.UVD.Blk
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is
25 AuxE.UVG.En
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.
Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is
26 AuxE.UVG.Blk
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is
27 AuxE.UVS.En
Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is
28 AuxE.UVS.Blk
Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from
29 AuxE.ROV.En
Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from
30 AuxE.ROV.Blk
Distance protection
DPFC distance protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input
31 21D.En
32 21D.Blk DPFC distance protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input

Date: 2017-06-09

Load trapezoid characteristic enabling input, it is triggered from binary
33 LoadEnch.En
Load trapezoid characteristic blocking input, it is triggered from binary
34 LoadEnch.Blk
35 21.En
36 21.Blk
Zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance protection enabling input, default
37 21M1.ZG.En
value is “1”
Zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance protection blocking input, default
38 21M1.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
Zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance protection enabling input, default
39 21M1.ZP.En
value is “1”
Zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance protection blocking input, default
40 21M1.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
41 21M1.En_Instant Enable zone 1 of distance protection operates without time delay
42 21M2.ZG.En
value is “1”
43 21M2.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
44 21M2.ZP.En
value is “1”
45 21M2.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
46 21M2.En_ShortDly Enable accelerating zone 2 of distance protection
47 21M2.Blk_ShortDly Accelerating zone 2 of distance protection is disabled
48 21M3.ZG.En
value is “1”
49 21M3.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
50 21M3.ZP.En
value is “1”
51 21M3.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
54 21M4.ZG.En
value is “1”
55 21M4.ZG.Blk
value is “0”

Date: 2017-06-09

56 21M4.ZP.En
value is “1”
57 21M4.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
60 21M5.ZG.En
value is “1”
61 21M5.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
62 21M5.ZP.En
value is “1”
63 21M5.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
66 21Q1.ZG.En
value is “1”
67 21Q1.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
68 21Q1.ZP.En
value is “1”
69 21Q1.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
70 21Q1.En_Instant Enable zone 1 of distance protection operates without time delay
71 21Q2.ZG.En
value is “1”
72 21Q2.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
73 21Q2.ZP.En
value is “1”
74 21Q2.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
75 21Q2.En_ShortDly Enable accelerating zone 2 of distance protection
76 21Q2.Blk_ShortDly Accelerating zone 2 of distance protection is disabled
77 21Q3.ZG.En
value is “1” (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
78 21Q3.ZG.Blk
value is “0” (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
79 21Q3.ZP.En
value is “1” (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
80 21Q3.ZP.Blk Zone 3 of phase-to-phase distance protection blocking input, default

Date: 2017-06-09

value is “0” (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
81 21Q3.En_ShortDly Enable accelerating zone 3 of distance protection (x=2, 3, 4, 5)
82 21Q3.Blk_ShortDly Accelerating zone 3 of distance protection is disabled (x=2, 3, 4, 5)
83 21Q4.ZG.En
value is “1”
84 21Q4.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
85 21Q4.ZP.En
value is “1”
86 21Q4.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
89 21Q5.ZG.En
value is “1”
90 21Q5.ZG.Blk
value is “0”
91 21Q5.ZP.En
value is “1”
92 21Q5.ZP.Blk
value is “0”
Out-of-step protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
95 78.En
Out-of-step protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
96 78.Blk
97 78.Clr_Counter Clear the counter
98 21M1.En_PSBR Enabling power swing blocking releasing of zone 1 (Mho characteristic)
99 21Q1.En_PSBR Enabling power swing blocking releasing of zone 1 (Quad characteristic)
100 21M1.Blk_PSBR Blocking power swing blocking releasing of zone 1 (Mho characteristic)
101 21Q1.Blk_PSBR Blocking power swing blocking releasing of zone 1 (Quad characteristic)

Date: 2017-06-09

Enabling power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Mho
118 21M.Pilot.En_PSBR
characteristic)
Blocking power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Mho
119 21M.Pilot.Blk_PSBR
characteristic)
Enabling power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Quad
120 21Q.Pilot.En_PSBR
characteristic)
Blocking power swing blocking releasing of pilot distance zone (Quad
121 21Q.Pilot.Blk_PSBR
characteristic)
Distance SOTF protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input
122 21SOTF.En
Distance SOTF protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
123 21SOTF.Blk
Optical pilot channel
124 FOx.En Enabling channel x
125 FOx.Send1 Sending signal 1 of channel x
Sending signal 9 of channel x (it is configured by fault as sending
133 FOx.Send9 permissive signal 1 or sending A-phase permissive signal (only for
phase-segregated command scheme))
134 FOx.Send10 B-phase permissive signal (only for phase-segregated command
scheme))
135 FOx.Send11 C-phase permissive signal (only for phase-segregated command
scheme))
136 FOx.Send12 permissive signal 2 only for pilot directional earth-fault protection
adopting independent pilot channel 2)
Pilot distance protection and pilot directional earth-fault protection
137 85-x.Z.En1 Pilot distance protection x enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary

Date: 2017-06-09

Pilot distance protection x enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
138 85-x.Z.En2
Pilot distance protection x blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
139 85-x.Z.Blk
or programmable logic etc. (x=1 or 2)
Input signal of indicating that pilot channel 1 is abnormal for pilot
140 85-x.Abnor_Ch1
distance protection x (x=1 or 2)
Input signal of receiving permissive signal via channel No.1 for pilot
distance protection x, or input signal of receiving permissive signal of
141 85-x.Recv1
A-phase via channel No.1 for pilot distance protection x (only for
phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)
Input signal of receiving permissive signal of B-phase via channel No.1
142 85-x.RecvB for pilot distance protection x (only for phase-segregated command
scheme, x=1 or 2)
Input signal of receiving permissive signal of C-phase via channel No.1
143 85-x.RecvC for pilot distance protection x (only for phase-segregated command
scheme, x=1 or 2)
Input signal of initiating sending permissive signal from external tripping
144 85-x.ExTrp
signal for pilot distance protection x (x=1 or 2)
145 85-x.Unblocking1 Unblocking signal 1 of pilot distance protection x (x=1 or 2)
Zone Extension enabling input 1 of pilot distance protection x, it is
146 85-x.ZX.En1
triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1 or 2)
Zone Extension enabling input 2 of pilot distance protection x, it is
147 85-x.ZX.En2
Zone Extension blocking input 1 of pilot distance protection x, it is
148 85-x.ZX.Blk1
Zone Extension blocking input 2 of pilot distance protection x, it is
149 85-x.ZX.Blk2
Pilot directional earth-fault protection x enabling input 1, it is triggered
150 85-x.DEF.En1
from binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1 or 2)
Pilot directional earth-fault protection x enabling input 2, it is triggered
151 85-x.DEF.En2
from binary input or programmable logic etc. (x=1 or 2)
Pilot directional earth-fault protection x blocking input, it is triggered from
152 85-x.DEF.Blk
153 85-x.Abnor_Ch1
directional earth-fault protection x (x=1 or 2)
154 85-x.Abnor_Ch2
Input signal of receiving permissive signal via channel 1 for pilot
155 85-x.Recv1
Input signal of receiving permissive signal via channel 2 for pilot
156 85-x.Recv2
157 85-x.ExTrp Input signal of initiating sending permissive signal from external tripping

Date: 2017-06-09

signal (x=1 or 2)
Phase overcurrent protection
Stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered
160 50/51P1.En1
161 50/51P1.En2
Stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered
162 50/51P1.Blk
163 50/51P2.En1
164 50/51P2.En2
165 50/51P2.Blk
166 50/51P3.En1
167 50/51P3.En2
168 50/51P3.Blk
169 50/51P4.En1
170 50/51P4.En2
171 50/51P4.Blk
Earth fault protection
Stage 1 of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from
172 50/51G1.En1
173 50/51G1.En2
Stage 1 of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
174 50/51G1.Blk
175 50/51G2.En1
176 50/51G2.En2
177 50/51G2.Blk
178 50/51G2.En_ShortDly Short time delay for stage 2 of earth fault protection enabling input, it is

Date: 2017-06-09

Short time delay for stage 2 of earth fault protection blocking input, it is
179 50/51G2.Blk_ShortDly
180 50/51G3.En1
181 50/51G3.En2
182 50/51G3.Blk
Short time delay for stage 3 of earth fault protection enabling input, it is
183 50/51G3.En_ShortDly
185 50/51G4.En1
186 50/51G4.En2
187 50/51G4.Blk
Short time delay for stage 4 of earth fault protection enabling input, it is
188 50/51G4.En_ShortDly
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection
Stage 1 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it
190 50/51Q1.En1
is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.
191 50/51Q1.En2
Stage 1 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection blocking input, it is
192 50/51Q1.Blk
193 50/51Q2.En1
194 50/51Q2.En2
195 50/51Q2.Blk
196 50/51Q3.En1
197 50/51Q3.En2
198 50/51Q3.Blk

Date: 2017-06-09

199 50/51Q4.En1
200 50/51Q4.En2
201 50/51Q4.Blk
Overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure
Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 1, it is
202 50PVT.En1
Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 2, it is
203 50PVT.En2
Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure blocking input, it is
204 50PVT.Blk
Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 1, it is
205 50GVT.En1
Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure enabling input 2, it is
206 50GVT.En2
Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure blocking input, it is
207 50GVT.Blk
Residual SOTF protection
Residual current SOTF protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from
208 50GSOTF.En1
Residual current SOTF protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from
209 50GSOTF.En2
Residual current SOTF protection blocking input, it is triggered from
210 50GSOTF.Blk
Voltage protection
Stage 1 of overvoltage protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from
211 59P1.En1
212 59P1.En2
Stage 1 of overvoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from
213 59P1.Blk
214 59P2.En1
215 59P2.En2
216 59P2.Blk
217 59P3.En1
218 59P3.En2 Stage 3 of overvoltage protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from

Date: 2017-06-09

219 59P3.Blk
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection enabling input 1, it is
220 59Q.En1
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection enabling input 2, it is
221 59Q.En2
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered
222 59Q.Blk
Stage 1 of undervoltage protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from
223 27P1.En1
224 27P1.En2
Stage 1 of undervoltage protection blocking input, it is triggered from
225 27P1.Blk
226 27P2.En1
227 27P2.En2
228 27P2.Blk
229 27P3.En1
230 27P3.En2
231 27P3.Blk
Frequency protection
Overfrequency protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
232 81O.En1
Overfrequency protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
233 81O.En2
Overfrequency protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
234 81O.Blk
Underfrequency protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
235 81U.En1
Underfrequency protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
236 81U.En2
Underfrequency protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
237 81U.Blk
Breaker failure protection
238 CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_L Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection

Date: 2017-06-09

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or
239 CBx.50BF.ExTrp3P_GT
transformer protection
240 CBx.50BF.ExTrpA Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device
241 CBx.50BF.ExTrpB Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device
242 CBx.50BF.ExTrpC Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device
Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it
is energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is
243 CBx.50BF.ExTrp_WOI
chosen in addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker
failure timers.
244 CBx.50BF.En Input signal of enabling breaker failure protection
Breaker failure protection blocking input, such as function blocking
binary input.
245 CBx.50BF.Blk
When the input is 1, breaker failure protection is reset and time delay is
cleared.
Thermal overload protection
246 49.Clr_Cmd Input signal of clear thermal accumulation value
Thermal overload protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary
247 49.En
Thermal overload protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
248 49.Blk
Stub differential protection
Stub differential protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary
249 87STB.En1
Stub differential protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
250 87STB.En2
Stub differential protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input
251 87STB.Blk
252 87STB.89b_DS Normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector
Normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector in remote end
253 87STB.89b_DS_Rmt In general, it is configured as receiving the signal [87STB.On_Local]
from the remote end.
Dead zone protection
Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it can be binary inputs or logic
254 CBx.50DZ.En1
link.
Dead zone protection enabling input 2, it can be binary inputs or logic
255 CBx.50DZ.En2
link.
Dead zone protection blocking input, such as function blocking binary
256 CBx.50DZ.Blk input. When the input is 1, dead zone protection is reset and time delay
is cleared.
257 CBx.50DZ.Init Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.
Pole discrepancy protection
258 CBx.62PD.En1 Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary

Date: 2017-06-09

Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary
259 CBx.62PD.En2
Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
260 CBx.62PD.Blk
Broken conductor protection
Enable broken conductor protection input 1, it is triggered from binary
261 46BC.En1
Enable broken conductor protection input 2, it is triggered from binary
262 46BC.En2
Broken conductor protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary
263 46BC.Blk
Reverse power protection
Enable stage 1 of reverse power protection input 1, it is triggered from
264 32R1.En
Stage 1 of reverse power protection blocking input, it is triggered from
265 32R1.Blk
Enable stage 2 of reverse power protection input 2, it is triggered from
266 32R2.En
Stage 2 of reverse power protection blocking input, it is triggered from
267 32R2.Blk
Synchrocheck
268 CBx.25.Blk_Chk Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.
Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the
269 CBx.25.Blk_SynChk
output of synchronism check is “0”.
270 CBx.25.Blk_DdChk Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.
Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal
271 CBx.25.Start_Chk
of AR from auto-reclosing module.
Input signal of starting live three-phase check, usually it was starting
272 CBx.25.Start_3PLvChk
signal of 1-pole AR
273 CBx.25.Sel_ SynChk Synchronism check is selected.
274 CBx.25.Sel_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus check is selected.
275 CBx.25.Sel_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus check is selected.
276 CBx.25.Sel_ LvL_DdB Live line and live bus check is selected.
277 CBx.25.Sel_ NoChk No check is selected.
278 CBx.25.Blk_VTS_Usyn VT circuit supervision (Usyn) is blocked
279 CBx.25.Blk_VTS_Uref VT circuit supervision (Uref) is blocked

Date: 2017-06-09

Auto-reclosing
Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
292 CBx.79.En
enabling AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input
Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,
293 CBx.79.Blk
disabling AR will be controlled by the external input
294 CBx.79.Sel_1PAR
breaker
295 CBx.79.Sel_3PAR
breaker
Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit
296 CBx.79.Sel_1P/3PAR
breaker
297 CBx.79.Trp Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
298 CBx.79.Trp3P Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
299 CBx.79.TrpA Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
300 CBx.79.TrpB Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
301 CBx.79.TrpC Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR
Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the
302 CBx.79.LockOut operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection and
busbar differential protection, etc.
303 CBx.79.PLC_Lost Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost
Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master AR
304 CBx.79.WaitMaster
(when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to
305 CBx.79.CB_Healthy
perform the close function
306 CBx.79.Clr_Counter Clear the reclosing counter
307 CBx.79.Ok_Chk Synchrocheck condition of AR is met
308 CBx.79.Ok_3PLvChk Live three-phase check condition of AR is met
Transfer trip
309 TT.Init Input signal of initiating transfer trip after receiving transfer trip
Transfer trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
310 TT.En
Transfer trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
311 TT.Blk
Trip logic
312 CBx.TRP.En Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable

Date: 2017-06-09

logic etc.
Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable

313 CBx.TRP.Blk
logic etc.
Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping
314 CBx.PrepTrp3P When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any
kind of faults.
VT circuit supervision
VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
315 VTS.En
VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
316 VTS.Blk
VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary
317 VTNS.En
VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary
318 VTNS.Blk
319 VTS.MCB_VT Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact
CT circuit supervision
CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or
320 CBx.CTS.En
CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or
321 CBx.CTS.Blk
Control and synchrocheck for manual closing
From receiving a closing command, this device will continuously check
whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage)
involved in synchronism check (or dead check) can meet the criteria.
322 MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk Within the duration of [MCBrd.CBx.25.t_Wait_Chk], if the synchronism
check (or dead check) criteria are not met, [MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk] will
be set as “0”; if the synchronism check (or dead check) criteria are met,
[MCBrd.CBx.25.Ok_Chk] will be set as “1”.
323 CSWI01.CILO.EnOpn
No.01.
324 CSWI01.CILO.EnCls
output No.01.
It is used to select the local control to binary output No.01. When the
325 CSWI01.LocCtrl
local control is active, binary output No.01 can only be locally controlled.
It is used to select the remote control to binary output No.01. When the
326 CSWI01.RmtCtrl remote control is active, binary output No.01 can only be remotely
327 CSWI01.CILO.Disable the signal “CSWI01.CILO.Disable” is “1”, binary output No.01 will not be
328 CSWI02.CILO.EnOpn It is used to indicate the interlock status of open output for binary output

Date: 2017-06-09

No.02.
output No.02.
330 CSWI02.LocCtrl
No.03.
output No.03.
335 CSWI03.LocCtrl
No.05.
output No.05.
340 CSWI04.LocCtrl
No.05.
output No.05.
345 CSWI05.LocCtrl
346 CSWI05.RmtCtrl
remote control is active, binary output No.05 can only be remotely

Date: 2017-06-09

No.06.
output No.06.
350 CSWI06.LocCtrl
No.07.
output No.07.
355 CSWI07.LocCtrl
No.08.
output No.08.
360 CSWI08.LocCtrl
No.09.

Date: 2017-06-09

output No.09.
365 CSWI09.LocCtrl
No.10.
output No.10.
370 CSWI10.LocCtrl
No.11.
output No.11.
375 CSWI11.LocCtrl
No.12.
output No.12.
380 CSWI12.LocCtrl

Date: 2017-06-09

No.13.
output No.13.
385 CSWI13.LocCtrl
No.14.
output No.14.
390 CSWI14.LocCtrl
No.15.
output No.15.
395 CSWI15.LocCtrl
It is used to select the local control to all binary outputs. When the local
398 BIinput.LocCtrl
control is active, all binary outputs can only be locally controlled.
It is used to select the remote control to all binary outputs. When the
399 BIinput.RmtCtrl
remote control is active, all binary outputs can only be remotely

Date: 2017-06-09

400 BIinput.CILO.Disable the signal “BIinput.CILO.Disable” is “1”, all binary outputs will not be
401 CSWI01.ManSynCls “CSWI01.ManSynCls” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlCls01] is closed
to execute manually closing the circuit breaker with synschrochcek.
402 CSWI01.ManOpn “CSWI01.ManOpn” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlOpn01] is closed to
execute manually open the circuit breaker.
“CSWI02.ManSynCls” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlCls02] is closed
403 CSWI02.ManSynCls
to execute manually closing the circuit breaker with synschrochcek. (for
double circuit breakers application)
“CSWI02.ManOpn” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlOpn02] is closed to
404 CSWI02.ManOpn
execute manually open the circuit breaker. (for double circuit breakers
application)
405 MCBrd.CBx.25.Sel_SynChk Synchronism check for manual closing is selected.
406 MCBrd.CBx.25.Sel_NoChk No check for manual closing is selected.
9.3.2 Output Signal

All output signals of this device have been listed in the following table.
Table 9.3-2 Output signals
No. Signal Description

Circuit breaker position supervision
1 CBx.Alm_52b Circuit breaker No.x position is abnormal
2 CBx.TCCS.Alm Control circuit of circuit breaker No.x is abnormal
Fault detector
4 FD.DPFC.Pkp DPFC current fault detector element operates.
5 FD.ROC.Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates.
6 FD.NOC.Pkp Negative-sequence fault detector element operates.
Auxiliary element
7 AuxE.St Any auxiliary element of the device operates.
8 AuxE.OCD.St_DDO Current change auxiliary element operates.
9 AuxE.OCD.On Current change auxiliary element is enabled.
10 AuxE.ROC1.St Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element operates.
11 AuxE.ROC1.On Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled.

Date: 2017-06-09

16 AuxE.OC1.St Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates.
17 AuxE.OC1.StA Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).
18 AuxE.OC1.StB Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).
19 AuxE.OC1.StC Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).
20 AuxE.OC1.On Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled.
31 AuxE.UVD.St Voltage change auxiliary element operates.
32 AuxE.UVD.St_DDO Voltage change auxiliary element operates.
33 AuxE.UVD.On Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled.
34 AuxE.UVG.St Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.
35 AuxE.UVG.StA Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).
36 AuxE.UVG.StB Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).
37 AuxE.UVG.StC Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).
38 AuxE.UVG.On Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled.
39 AuxE.UVS.St Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.
40 AuxE.UVS.StAB Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).
41 AuxE.UVS.StBC Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).
42 AuxE.UVS.StCA Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).
43 AuxE.UVS.On Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled.
44 AuxE.ROV.St Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.
45 AuxE.ROV.On Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled.
Distance protection
46 21D.Op DPFC distance protection operates.
47 21D.On DPFC distance protection is enabled.
48 LoadEnch.St Measured impedance into the load area
49 LoadEnch.On Load trapezoid characteristic is enabled.
50 21M1.On Zone 1 of distance protection is enabled
51 21M1.Op Zone 1 of distance protection operates
52 21Q1.On Zone 1 of distance protection is enabled
53 21Q1.Op Zone 1 of distance protection operates

Date: 2017-06-09

70 78.On Out-of-step protection is enabled.
71 78.St Out-of-step protection starts.
72 78.St_Zone Zone detector element of out-of-step protection starts.
73 78.Op Out-of-step protection operates.
74 21M1.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release zone 1 (Mho characteristic)
75 21Q1.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release zone 1 (Quad characteristic)
84 21M.Pilot.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release pilot distance zone (Mho characteristic)
85 21Q.Pilot.Rls_PSBR PSBR operates to release pilot distance zone (Quad characteristic)
Accelerate distance protection to trip when manual closing or
86 21SOTF.Op
auto-reclosing to fault
87 21SOTF.On Accelerate distance protection is enabled.
Accelerate distance protection to trip when another fault happening
88 21SOTF.Op_PDF
under pole discrepancy conditions
Optical pilot channel
89 FOx.On Channel x is enabled.
90 FOx.Recv1 Receiving signal 1 of channel x

Date: 2017-06-09

Receiving signal 9 of channel x (it is configured by fault as receiving
permissive signal via channel No.1, or receiving permissive signal of
98 FOx.Recv9
A-phase via channel No.1 (only for phase-segregated command
scheme))
99 FOx.Recv10 permissive signal of B-phase via channel No.1 (only for
100 FOx.Recv11 permissive signal of C-phase via channel No.1 (only for
101 FOx.Recv12 permissive signal 2 only for pilot directional earth-fault protection
adopting independent pilot channel 2)
102 FOx.Alm Channel x is abnormal
Received ID from the remote end is not as same as the setting
103 FOx.Alm_ID
[FO.RmtID] of the device in local end
Pilot distance protection and pilot directional earth-fault protection
104 85-x.Z.On Pilot distance protection x is enabled. (x=1 or 2)
Zone extension protection of pilot distance protection x is enabled.
105 85-x.ZX.On
(x=1 or 2)
106 85-x.Op_Z Pilot distance protection x operates. (x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending permissive signal 1 or sending A-phase
107 85-x.Send1 permissive signal of pilot distance protection x (only for
phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending B-phase permissive signal of pilot distance
108 85-x.SendB
protection x (only for phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending C-phase permissive signal of pilot distance
109 85-x.SendC
protection x (only for phase-segregated command scheme, x=1 or 2)
Zone extension protection of pilot distance protection x operates. (x=1
110 85-x.Op_ZX
or 2)
Zone extension protection of pilot distance protection x starts (x=1 or
111 85-x.ZX_St
2)
112 85-x.DEF.On Pilot directional earth-fault protection x is enabled. (x=1 or 2)
113 85-x.Op_DEF Pilot directional earth-fault protection x operates. (x=1 or 2)
Pilot directional earth-fault protection x operates to block AR. (x=1 or
114 85-x.DEF_BlkAR
2)
Output signal of sending permissive signal 1 for pilot directional
115 85-x.Send1
earth-fault protection x when pilot directional earth-fault protection

Date: 2017-06-09

sharing pilot channel 1 with pilot distance protection (x=1 or 2)
Output signal of sending permissive signal 2 for pilot directional
116 85-x.Send2 earth-fault protection x when pilot directional earth-fault protection
adopting independent pilot channel 2 (x=1 or 2)
Current direction
117 FwdDir_ROC The forward direction of zero-sequence power
118 RevDir_ROC The reverse direction of zero-sequence power
119 FwdDir_NegOC The forward direction of negative-sequence power
120 RevDir_NegOC The reverse direction of negative-sequence power
121 FwdDir_A The forward direction of phase-A current
122 FwdDir_B The forward direction of phase-B current
123 FwdDir_C The forward direction of phase-C current
124 RevDir_A The reverse direction of phase-A current
125 RevDir_B The reverse direction of phase-B current
126 RevDir_C The reverse direction of phase-C current
127 FwdDir_AB The forward direction of phase-AB current
128 FwdDir_BC The forward direction of phase-BC current
129 FwdDir_CA The forward direction of phase-CA current
130 RevDir_AB The reverse direction of phase-AB current
131 RevDir_BC The reverse direction of phase-BC current
132 RevDir_CA The reverse direction of phase-CA current
Phase overcurrent protection
133 50/51P1.On Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled.
134 50/51P1.Op Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates.
135 50/51P1.St Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts.
136 50/51P1.StA Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).
137 50/51P1.StB Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).
138 50/51P1.StC Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).
139 50/51P2.On Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled.
140 50/51P2.Op Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates.
141 50/51P2.St Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts.
142 50/51P2.StA Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).
143 50/51P2.StB Stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).
144 50/51P2.StC Stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).
145 50/51P3.On Stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection is enabled.
146 50/51P3.Op Stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection operates.
147 50/51P3.St Stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection starts.
148 50/51P3.StA Stage 3 of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).
151 50/51P4.On Stage 4 of phase overcurrent protection is enabled.
152 50/51P4.Op Stage 4 of phase overcurrent protection operates.

Date: 2017-06-09

153 50/51P4.St Stage 4 of phase overcurrent protection starts.
154 50/51P4.StA Stage 4 of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).
Earth fault protection
157 50/51G1.On Stage 1 of earth fault protection is enabled.
158 50/51G1.St Stage 1 of earth fault protection starts.
159 50/51G1.Op Stage 1 of earth fault protection operates.
161 50/51G2.On_ShortDly Short time delay for stage 2 of earth fault protection is enabled.
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection
172 50/51Q1.On Stage 1 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection is enabled.
173 50/51Q1.St Stage 1 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection starts.
174 50/51Q1.Op Stage 1 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection operates.
Stage 4 of negative-sequence overcurrent protection operates to
184 50/51Q4.Alm
alarm.
Overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure
185 50PVT.On Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure is enabled.
186 50PVT.Op Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure operates.
187 50PVT.St Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts.
188 50PVT.StA Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts (A-Phase).
189 50PVT.StB Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts (B-Phase).
190 50PVT.StC Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts (C-Phase).

Date: 2017-06-09

191 50GVT.On Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure is enabled.
192 50GVT.Op Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure operates.
193 50GVT.St Ground overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure starts.
Residual SOTF protection
194 50GSOTF.On Residual current SOTF protection is enabled.
195 50GSOTF.Op Residual current SOTF protection operates.
196 50GSOTF.St Residual current SOTF protection starts.
Voltage protection
197 59P1.On Stage 1 of overvoltage protection is enabled.
198 59P1.Op Stage 1 of overvoltage protection operates.
199 59P1.St Stage 1 of overvoltage protection starts.
200 59P1.St1 Stage 1 of overvoltage protection starts (A or AB).
201 59P1.St2 Stage 1 of overvoltage protection starts (B or BC).
202 59P1.St3 Stage 1 of overvoltage protection starts (C or CA).
203 59P1.Op_InitTT Stage 1 of overvoltage protection operates to initiate transfer trip.
204 59P1.Alm Stage 1 of overvoltage protection alarms.
221 59Q.On Negative-sequence overvoltage protection is enabled.
222 59Q.Op Negative-sequence overvoltage protection operates.
223 59Q.St Negative-sequence overvoltage protection starts.
224 27P1.On Stage 1 of undervoltage protection is enabled.
225 27P1.Op Stage 1 of undervoltage protection operates.
226 27P1.Alm Stage 1 of undervoltage protection alarms.
227 27P1.St Stage 1 of undervoltage protection starts.
228 27P1.St1 Stage 1 of undervoltage protection starts (A or AB).
229 27P1.St2 Stage 1 of undervoltage protection starts (B or BC).
230 27P1.St3 Stage 1 of undervoltage protection starts (C or CA).

Date: 2017-06-09

No AC voltage input after the device powered on for stage 1 of
231 27P1.U_Absent
239 27P2.U_Absent
247 27P3.U_Absent
Frequency protection
248 81O.OF1.On Stage 1 of overfrequency protection is enabled.
249 81O.OF1.Op Stage 1 of overfrequency protection operates.
256 81O.St Overfrequency protection starts.
257 81U.UF1.On Stage 1 of underfrequency protection is enabled.
258 81U.UF1.Op Stage 1 of underfrequency protection operates.
265 81U.St Underfrequency protection starts.
Breaker failure protection
266 CBx.50BF.On Breaker failure protection is enabled
267 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpA Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker

Date: 2017-06-09

268 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpB Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker
269 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrpC Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit
270 CBx.50BF.Op_ReTrp3P
breaker
Thermal overload protection
273 49.On Thermal overload protection is enabled.
274 49.St Thermal overload protection starts.
275 49-1.Op Stage 1 of thermal overload protection operates to trip.
276 49-2.Op Stage 2 of thermal overload protection operates to trip.
277 49-1.Alm Stage 1 of thermal overload protection operates to alarm.
278 49-2.Alm Stage 2 of thermal overload protection operates to alarm.
Stub differential protection
Stub differential protection is enabled. (Based on disconnector position
279 87STB.On
signal in both local end and remote end)
Stub differential protection is enabled. (Based on disconnector position
280 87STB.On_Local
signal in local end)
281 87STB.Op Stub differential protection operates.
282 87STB.St Stub differential protection starts.
283 87STB.StA Phase A of stub differential protection starts.
284 87STB.StB Phase B of stub differential protection starts.
285 87STB.StC Phase C of stub differential protection starts.
286 87STB.Alm_Diff The alarm signal of differential current abnormality
287 87STB.Alm_DS The alarm signal of disconnector position abnormality
Dead zone protection
288 CBx.50DZ.On Dead zone protection is enabled.
289 CBx.50DZ.St Dead zone protection starts.
290 CBx.50DZ.Op Dead zone protection operates.
Pole discrepancy protection
291 CBx.62PD.On Pole discrepancy protection is enabled.
292 CBx.62PD.Op Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip
293 CBx.62PD.St Pole discrepancy protection starts
Broken conductor protection
294 46BC.On Broken-conductor protection is enabled.
295 46BC.St Broken-conductor protection starts
296 46BC.Op Broken-conductor protection operates to trip.
297 46BC.Alm Broken-conductor protection operates to alarm.
Reverse power protection
298 32R1.On Stage 1 of reverse power protection is enabled.
299 32R1.St Stage 1 of reverse power protection starts.
300 32R1.Op Stage 1 of reverse power protection operates to trip.

Date: 2017-06-09

301 32R1.Alm Stage 1 of reverse power protection operates to alarm.
302 32R2.On Stage 2 of reverse power protection is enabled.
303 32R2.St Stage 2 of reverse power protection starts.
304 32R2.Op Stage 2 of reverse power protection operates to trip.
Synchrocheck
309 CBx.Alm_Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid.
To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check
310 CBx.25.Ok_fDiffChk of AR is met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than
[25.f_Diff].
To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of
311 CBx.25.Ok_UDiffChk AR is met, voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than
[25.U_Diff]
To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is
312 CBx.25.Ok_phiDiffChk met, phase difference between UB and UL is smaller than
[25.phi_Diff].
313 CBx.25.Ok_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus condition is met
314 CBx.25.Ok_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus condition is met
315 CBx.25.Ok_LvL_DdB Live line and dead bus condition is met
316 CBx.25.Chk_LvL Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
317 CBx.25.Chk_DdL Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
318 CBx.25.Chk_LvB Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]
319 CBx.25.Chk_DdB Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]
320 CBx.25.Ok_DdChk To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met
321 CBx.25.Ok_SynChk To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met
322 CBx.25.Ok_Chk To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met
323 CBx.25.Ok_3PLvChk To indicate that live three-phase check condition is met
324 CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Uref Reference voltage circuit is abnormal
325 CBx.25.Alm_VTS_Usyn Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal
326 CBx.25.f_Ref Frequency of the voltage used by protection calculation
327 CBx.25.f_Syn Frequency of the voltage used by synchrocheck
328 CBx.25.U_Diff Voltage difference for synchronism check
329 CBx.25.f_Diff Frequency difference for synchronism check
330 CBx.25.phi_Diff Phase difference for synchronism check
Auto-reclosing
331 CBx.79.On Automatic reclosure is enabled
332 CBx.79.Off Automatic reclosure is disabled
333 CBx.79.Close Output of auto-reclosing signal
334 CBx.79.Ready Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle

Date: 2017-06-09

335 CBx.79.AR_Blkd Automatic reclosure is blocked
336 CBx.79.Active Automatic reclosing logic is actived
337 CBx.79.Inprog Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress
338 CBx.79.Inprog_1P The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress
339 CBx.79.Inprog_3P 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
340 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS1 First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
341 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS2 Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
342 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS3 Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
343 CBx.79.Inprog_3PS4 Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave (when
344 CBx.79.WaitToSlave
reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
operates
Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device
operates
Automatic reclosure status
0: AR is ready.
347 CBx.79.Rcls_Status
1: AR is in progress.
2: AR is successful.
348 CBx.79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails
349 CBx.79.Succ_Rcls Auto-reclosing is successful
350 CBx.79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails
353 CBx.79.Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode
Transfer trip
354 TT.Alm Input signal of receiving transfer trip is abnormal
355 TT.Op Transfer trip operates
356 TT.On Transfer trip is enabled
Trip logic
357 CBx.TRP.On Tripping logic is enabled.
358 CBx.TrpA Tripping A-phase circuit breaker
359 CBx.TrpB Tripping B-phase circuit breaker
360 CBx.TrpC Tripping C-phase circuit breaker
361 CBx.Trp Tripping any phase circuit breaker
362 CBx.Trp3P Tripping three-phase circuit breaker
Protection tripping signal of A-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI
363 CBx.BFI_A
Protection tripping signal of B-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI
364 CBx.BFI_B
Protection tripping signal of C-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI
365 CBx.BFI_ C

Date: 2017-06-09

Protection tripping signal configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be
366 CBx.BFI
reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.
367 CBx.Trp3P_PSFail Initiating three-phase tripping due to failure in fault phase selection
368 CBx.TRP.BlkAR Blocking auto-reclosing
VT circuit supervision
369 VTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails
370 VTNS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails
CT circuit supervision
371 CBx.CTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails
Control and synchrocheck for manual closing
372 CSWI01.Op_Opn Open output of binary output No.01.
373 CSWI01.Op_Cls Closing output of binary output No.01.
402 BIinput.RmtCtrl In order to be convenient to user configure control output, three same

Date: 2017-06-09

403 BIinput.LocCtrl output signals with input signals are available. The relationship with 15
binary output have been configured inside the device. The user only
assigns a specific binary input to input signal, the relevant function can
404 BIinput.CILO.Disable be gained. If some binary output need not be controlled by three
signals, please cancle the configuration by PCS-Explorer, and
configure it independently.
405 MCBrd.CBx.Alm_VTS VT circuit of circuit breaker No.x is abnormal.
Faulty phase selection
406 PhSA Phase-A is selected as faulty phase
407 PhSB Phase-B is selected as faulty phase
408 PhSC Phase-C is selected as faulty phase
409 GndFlt Earth fault

Date: 2017-06-09

Date: 2017-06-09
10 Communication
10 Communication
Table of Contents
10 Communication ............................................................................. 10-a
10.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.4 DNP3.0 Communication .................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.5 General Interrogation ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.6 General Service ............................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.7 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6

10.4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-8
10.4.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11
10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-14
10.4.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-16
10.4.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-19
10.5 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-22

10.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-22

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
10.5.2 Link Layer Functions...................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.4 Application Layer Functions........................................................................................... 10-22
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4
Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-9
Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ..................... 10-10
Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-11

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
10.1 Overview
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485
serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a
remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
EIA RS-485
Master 120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Slave Slave Slave
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that
is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop
bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm 2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
NOTICE!
It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so
will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the
bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume responsibility
for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of
incorrect application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the menu “Settings→Device
Setup→Comm Settings”.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each equipment is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a
star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
also connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment
which has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
SCADA
Switch: Net A
Switch: Net B
……
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103
protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports
to use an Ethernet connection. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings to the protective
device must be configured.
10.2.4 DNP3.0 Communication

The DNP3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol) protocol can support the OSI/EPA model of the ISO
(International Organization for Standards), and it includes four parts: application layer protocol,
transport functions, data link layer protocol and data object library. The DNP3.0 protocol is
recommended to use the Ethernet network. This relay operates as a slave in the system,
responding to commands from a master station.
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface with the
protective device as the slave device. It is properly developed by NR.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
 Initialization (reset)

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
 Time synchronization
 Event record extraction
 General interrogation
 General commands
 Disturbance records
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
Whenever the protective device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective
device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference
is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The protective device time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The protective device will correct for the transmission delay as specified
in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then
the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message
is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization
class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to
set the protective device time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via
the interface will cause the protective device to create an event with the current date and time
taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized using the following information:
 Type identification (TYP)
 Function type (FUN)
 Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operating elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
status of binary signal and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause
of transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
All spontaneous events can be gained by printing, implementing submenu “IEC103 Info” in the
menu “Print”.
10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.6 General Service

The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the
protective device, and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and
ASDU 10. For more details about generic functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
All general classification service group numbers can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
“IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 32 disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault
detector or an operation of the relay can make the protective device store the disturbance records.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
“IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol
10.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
 IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
 IEC 61850-2: Glossary
 IEC 61850-3: General requirements
 IEC 61850-4: System and project management
 IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
 IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
 IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Principles and models
 IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
Common data classes
Compatible logical node classes and data classes
 IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.4.2 Communication Profiles

The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish
communications. These addresses are located in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm
Settings”.
1. MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2. Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.
3. Peer-to-peer

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.
4. Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED configurations and
communication systems according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has
an IED Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The
entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The
SCD file is the combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add
communication system parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the
connection relationship of GOOSE and SV to SCD file.
10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

In order to enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This
section is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally,
single-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels,
while dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above
110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTICE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is
broken.

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
10.4.3.1 Dual-net Full Duplex Mode Sharing the Same RCB Instance
Client Client
Net A Net B Net A Net B
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1

RptEna = true RptEna = true
Report Control Block Report Control Block
IED (Server) IED (Server)

Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link MMS Link
Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance
Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to
“false”.
In normal operation status of this mode, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B.
If one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the
working mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need
not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In this mode, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
10.4.3.2 Dual-net Hot-standby Mode Sharing the Same RCB Instance
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1

RptEna = true RptEna = true

TCP Link Main MMS Link Standby MMS Link
Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
In this mode, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:
 Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.
 Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.
If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will
set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
“keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true”
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited.
NOTICE!
The first mode and second mode, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address
must be the same.
For example, if the subnet mask is “255.255.0.0”, network prefix of Net A is

“198.120.0.0”, network prefix of Net B is “198.121.0.0”, Net A IP address of the IED is
“198.120.1.2”, and then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as
“198.121.1.2”, i.e., Net A IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address
=1x256+2=258, Net A IED host address equals to Net B IED host address.

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
10.4.3.3 Dual-net Full Duplex Mode with 2 Independent RCB Instances
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2 Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2

RptEna = true RptEna = true RptEna = true RptEna = true

TCP Link MMS Link
Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
In this mode, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of any net will not affect the other net at all. Tow report instances are
required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if
there are too many clients.
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion, for the second mode, it’s difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual
nets, however, for the third mode, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too
many clients are applied on site. Considering client treatment and IED implementation, the first
mode (Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS
communication network deployment.
10.4.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
information about the IED logical device.
10.4.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.4.4.2 Analog Values
Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:
 MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
10.4.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes
The following list describes the protection elements for PCS-902 series relays. The specified relay
will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
 PDIS: Phase-to-phase distance, phase-to-ground distance and SOTF distance

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
 PTUC: Undercurrent
 PTOC: Phase overcurrent, zero-sequence overcurrent and overcurrent when VT circuit failure
 PTTR: Thermal overload
 PTUV: Undervoltage
 PTOV: Overvoltage and auxiliary overvoltage
 PTOF: Overfrequency
 PTUF: Underfrequency
 PPDP: Pole discrepancy
 PSCH: Protection scheme
 RBRF:Breaker failure
 RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking
 RREC: Automatic reclosing
 RSYN: Synchronism-check
 RFLO: Fault location
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PTOC1 is “PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For
PCS-902 series relays protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for
the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and BRCB also locates in LLN0.
10.4.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings, system settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:
 MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands
such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and
current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power
flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
accuracy for these functions has to be provided.
 LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
 PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to
a new “operate” of PTRC.
 RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output refers
to the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System”
(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording, independently of the
trigger mode.
10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration

10.4.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
 TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
 OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
 IntgPd: Integrity period.
10.4.5.2 File Transfer
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-900 series relay.
10.4.5.3 Timestamps
The Universal Time Coordinated(UTC for short) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data
items represents the latest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.4.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
 A five or six-character name prefix.
 A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
 A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
10.4.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE logic link
settings in device.
The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
10.4.6 ACSI Conformance

10.4.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used Y N Y
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.4.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.4.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Services Server/Publisher PCS-902

Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y
10.4.7 Logical Nodes

10.4.7.1 Logical Nodes Table
The PCS-902 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes PCS-902
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential －

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
PDIR: Direction comparison －

PDIS: Distance YES
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme YES
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency YES
PTOV: Overvoltage YES
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload YES
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PPDP: Pole discrepancy YES
PTUV: Undervoltage YES
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency YES
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator YES
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking YES
RREC: Autoreclosing YES
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
CILO: Interlocking YES

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller YES
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements －
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering YES
MMXN: Non phase related measurement YES
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance YES
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.5 DNP3.0 Interface
10.5.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 3 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 4. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical)
at the rear side of this relay.
10.5.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.5.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.5.4 Application Layer Functions

10.5.4.1 Function Code
Function Code Function

0 (0x00) Confirm
1 (0x01) Read
2 (0x02) Write
3 (0x03) Select
4 (0x04) Operate
5 (0x05) Direct Operate
6 (0x06) Direct Operate No Acknowledgment

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
Function Code Function

13 (0x0D) Cold Restart
14 (0x0E) Warm Restart
20 (0x14) Enable Unsolicited Responses
21 (0x15) Disable Unsolicited Responses
22 (0x16) Assign Class
23 (0x17) Delay Measurement
10.5.4.2 Supported Object List
The supported object groups and object variations are show in the following table.
Request: Master may issue/Outstation shall parse
Function code: decimalism
Qualifier code: hexadecimal
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION REQUEST

Group/Variation
Description Function code Qualifier code
No.
1 (read) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 0 Binary Input: Any Variation
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 1 Binary Input: Packed format 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
1 2 Binary Input: With flags 1 (read)
2 0 Binary Input Event: Any Variation 1 (read)
07, 08 (limited qty)
2 1 Binary Input Event: Without time 1 (read)
2 2 Binary Input Event: With absolute time 1 (read)
2 3 Binary Input Event: With relative time 1 (read)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation 1 (read)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation 1 (read)
10 1 Binary output: Packed format 2 (write) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
3 (select)
Binary Command: Control relay output block 4 (operate) 17, 28 (index)
12 1
(CROB) 5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack) 17, 28 (index)
1 (read) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 0 Analog Input: Any Variation
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication

Group/Variation
No.
30 1 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
30 2 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
30 3 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag 1 (read)
30 4 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit without flag 1 (read)
30 5 Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag 1 (read)
32 0 Analog Input Event: Any Variation 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
32 1 Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
32 2 Analog Input Event: 16 ~ bit without time 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt 06 (no range, or all)
32 5 1 (read)
without time 07,08 (limited qty)
34 0 Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation 1 (read)
1 (read)
34 1 Analog Input Deadband: 16 ~ bit
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
1 (read)
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
1 (read)
34 3 Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output Status: Any Variation 1 (read)
40 1 Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
40 2 Analog Output Status: 16 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
40 3 1 (read)
flag 06 (no range, or all)

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication

Group/Variation
No.
3 (select)
4 (operate) 17,28 (index)
41 1 Analog Output: 32 ~ bit
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. Op, no ack) 17,28 (index)
3 (select)
41 2 Analog Output: 16 ~ bit
5 (direct op)
3 (select)
41 3 Analog Output: Single ~ prec ft ~ pt
5 (direct op)
1 (read) 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 1 Time and Data: Absolute time
2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded
50 3 2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
time
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,
51 1
synchronized
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,
51 2
unsynchronized
1 (read)
60 1 Class Objects: Class 0 data 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 2 Class Objects: Class 1 data 20 (enable unsol.)
21 (disable unsol.) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 3 Class Objects: Class 2 data 20 (enable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 4 Class Objects : Class 3 data 20 (enable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
Response: Master shall parse\Outstation may issue
Function code: decimalism

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
Qualifier code: hexadecimal
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION RESPONSE

Group/Variation
No.
1 0 Binary Input: Any Variation
1 1 Binary Input: Packed format 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 2 Binary Input: With flags 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
2 0 Binary Input Event: Any Variation
129 (response)
2 1 Binary Input Event: Without time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
2 2 Binary Input Event: With absolute time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
2 3 Binary Input Event: With relative time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation
10 1 Binary output: Packed format
Binary Command: Control relay output block 129 (response) echo of request
12 1
(CROB)
30 0 Analog Input: Any Variation
30 1 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 2 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 3 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 4 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 5 Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
32 0 Analog Input Event: Any Variation
129 (response)
32 1 Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time 17,28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
32 2 Analog Input Event: 16 ~ bit without time 17,28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt without 129 (response)
32 5 17,28 (index)
time 130 (unsol. resp)
34 0 Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation
129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)


34 3 Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt
40 0 Analog Output Status: Any Variation

40 1 Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
40 2 Analog Output Status: 16 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION RESPONSE

Group/Variation
No.
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with
40 3 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
flag
Analog Output: 129 (response) echo of request
41 1
32 ~ bit
41 2
16 ~ bit
41 3
Single ~ prec ft ~ pt
129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 1 Time and Data: Absolute time
Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded

50 3
time
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, 129 (response)
51 1 07 (limited qty = 1)
synchronized 130 (unsol. resp)
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, 129 (response)
51 2 07 (limited qty = 1)
unsynchronized 130 (unsol. resp)
60 1 Class Objects: Class 0 data
60 4 Class Objects : Class 3 data
10.5.4.3 Communication Table Configuration
This relay now supports 4 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP
related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication
table. This relay supports a default communication table and 4 user-defined communication tables,
and the default communication table is fixed by the manufacturer and not permitted to configure by
the user.
The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups “Binary Input”, “Binary Output”, “Analog
Input” and “Analog Output” can be configured according to the practical engineering demand.
10.5.4.4 Analog Input and Output Configuration
To the analog inputs, the attributes “deadband” and “factor” of each analog input can be configured
independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute “factor” of each analog output needs to be
configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to “Analog Input”,
“Object Variation” is 1, 2 and 3; to “Analog Output”, “Object Variation” is 1 and 2.), the analog
values will be multiplied by the “factor” respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode

Date: 2015-05-19
10 Communication
is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly.
The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between
the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the
“factor”, then compare the result with the “deadband” value. If the result is greater than the
“deadband” value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created.
In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a “deadband” value by
reading or modifying the variation in “Group34”.
10.5.4.5 Binary Output Configuration
The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured
into the “Binary Output” group. The supported control functions are listed as below.
Information Point Pulse On/Null Pulse On/Close Pulse On/Trip Latch On/Null Latch Off/Null
Remote Control Not supported Close Trip Close Trip
Logic Link Not supported Set Clear Set Clear
Extended Output See following description
To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command

point will output a high ~ level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the “On ~ time” in the
related “Binary Command” which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the “On ~ time” is set as “0”, the
default pulse width is 500ms.
10.5.4.6 Unsolicited Messages
This relay does not transmit the unsolicited messages if the related logic setting is set as “0”. If the
unsolicited messages want to be transmitted, the related logic setting should be set as “1” or the
DNP3.0 master will transmit “Enable Unsolicited” command to this relay through “Function Code
20” (Enable Unsolicited Messages). If the “Binary Input” state changes or the difference value of
the “Analog Input” is greater than the “deadband” value, this device will transmit unsolicited
messages. If the DNP3.0 master needs not to receive the unsolicited messages, it should forbid
this relay to transmit the unsolicited messages by setting the related logic setting as “0” or through
the “Function Code 21” (Disable Unsolicited Messages).
10.5.4.7 Class Configuration
If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the “Analog
Input”, “Binary Input” and “Analog Output”. The classes of the “Analog Input” and “Binary Input”
can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can
online modify the class of an “Analog Input” or a “Binary Input” through “Function Code 22” (Assign
Class).

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11 Installation ...................................................................................... 11-a
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.3 Checking Shipment ...................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-4
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-4
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-4
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-5
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ..............................................................................11-5
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-6
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ...............................................................................................11-6
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions and panel cut-out of PCS-902 ..................................................... 11-3
Figure 11.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-3
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-5
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay ............................................................................ 11-5
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-7

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care. Choose the place of
installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the front of the device are
easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
WARNING!
ONLY insert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To this
end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
NOTICE!
Industry packs and ribbon cables may ONLY be replaced on a workbench for electronic
equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in
the unit's housing.
Jumper links may ONLY be changed on a workbench for electronic equipment.

Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's
housing.
A module can ONLY be inserted in the slot designated in the chapter 6. Components
can be damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
1. Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.
2. Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
3. Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
4. Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Checking Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.
11.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

NOTICE!
Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of this device.
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of
high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
(visibility of markings).
11.6 Mechanical Installation

NOTICE!
It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle for
heat emission of this device.
The device adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral
faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-902 series is IEC
4U high, and Figure 11.6-1 shows its dimensions and panel cut-out.
Front Side
Cut-Out
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions and panel cut-out of PCS-902
The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 11.2 for
the details.
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 11.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
NOTICE!
All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTICE!
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTICE!
For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a
grounding strip (braided copper).

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
 Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm 2
 Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: stranded conductor, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm 2
 AC voltage inputs: stranded conductor, 1.5mm 2
 AC current inputs: stranded conductor, 2.5mm 2
 Serial communication: 4-core shielded cable
 Ethernet communication: 4-pair twisted shielded cable (category 5E)
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables
DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation
01 02
03 04
Tighten 05 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
01
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables

Date: 2015-05-19
11 Installation

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12 Commissioning ............................................................................. 12-a
12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.3.1 Minimum Equipment Required ........................................................................................ 12-2
12.3.2 Optional Equipment ......................................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2

12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.5.3 Print Fault Report............................................................................................................. 12-8
12.5.4 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................... 12-8
12.6 Final Checks ................................................................................................ 12-9

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
12.1 Overview
This device is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits MUST be short-circuited BEFORE the current

leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
1. The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
2. Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
3. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
4. The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
5. When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
12.3 Commission Tools

NOTICE!
Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
12.3.1 Minimum Equipment Required
1. Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
2. Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440Vac and
0~250Vdc respectively.
3. Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
4. Phase angle meter.
5. Phase rotation meter.
12.3.2 Optional Equipment
1. An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
2. A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
3. EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
4. PCS-900 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 HMI software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
12.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized
This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
1. Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by self-monitoring when the
DC power is supplied.
2. User interfaces test
3. Binary input circuits and output circuits test
4. AC input circuits test
5. Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the
protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
6. Measuring elements test
7. Timers test
8. Measurement and recording test
9. Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
10. On load test
11. Phase sequence check and polarity check

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.
1. Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to see
that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct for the
particular installation.
2. Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section meeting the
requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
3. Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to make
sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
4. Device plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the device on the panel to make sure that they are well installed into
the equipment without any screw loosened.
5. Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
6. Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons work
normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
1. Voltage transformer circuits
2. Current transformer circuits
3. DC power supply

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
4. Optic-isolated control inputs
5. Output contacts
6. Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
WARNING!
Energize this device ONLY if the power supply is within the specified operating range in
Chapter “Technical Data”.
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a super capacitor fitted on MON board, the time and
date will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be
correct and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.
12.5.2.4 Testing HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “ALARM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing AC Current Inputs
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Group No. Item Input Value Input Angle Display Value Display Angle
Three-phase current 1 Ia

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
Ib
Ic
Ia
Three-phase current 2 Ib
Ic
Ia
Three-phase current 3 Ib
Ic
Ia
Three-phase current …… Ib
Ic
Residual current 1 3I0
Residual current …… 3I0
12.5.2.6 Testing AC Voltage Inputs
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Ua
Three-phase voltage 1 Ub
Uc
Ua
Uc
Ua
Uc
Ua
Three-phase voltage……
Ub

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
Uc
Residual voltage 1 3U0
Residual voltage …… 3U0
12.5.2.7 Testing Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the device are functioning correctly. The binary inputs
should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range. The status
of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized input and
sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
Terminal No. Signal Name BI Status on LCD Correct?
12.5.3 Print Fault Report
In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1. Trip event report
2. Binary input when protection devices start
3. Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4. Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5. The setting value when the protection device trips
12.5.4 On-load Checks
The objectives of the on-load checks are:
1. Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
2. Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
3. Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.6 Final Checks
After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Date: 2015-05-19
12 Commissioning

Date: 2015-05-19
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13 Maintenance .................................................................................. 13-a
13.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Failure Tracing and Repair ......................................................................... 13-1
13.4 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-2
13.4.1 Preparation for Replace Module ...................................................................................... 13-2
13.4.2 Replace HMI Module of Front Panel ............................................................................... 13-3
13.4.3 Replace Module ............................................................................................................... 13-3
13.5 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-3

13.6 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-3

Date: 2015-05-19
13 Maintenance

Date: 2015-05-19
13 Maintenance
13.1 Overview
The device is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal processing
circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays are
hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.2 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.3 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv Events” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
1. Test circuit connections are correct
2. Modules are securely inserted in position
3. Correct DC power voltage is applied
4. Correct AC inputs are applied
5. Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

Date: 2015-05-19
13 Maintenance
13.4 Replace Failed Modules
WARNING!
Module can ONLY be replaced while the device power supply is switched off.
ONLY appropriately trained and qualified personnel can perform the replacement by
strictly observing the precautions against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
Five seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
Take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wristband and placing modules
on an earthed conductive mat when handling a module. Otherwise, electronic
components could be damaged.
CAUTION!
Check the device configuration after a replacement of module. Unintended operation of

device may occur.
If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, DSP, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, MON module replaced should
have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have the
same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Version Info”.
13.4.1 Preparation for Replace Module

1. Switch off the DC power supply
2. Disconnect the trip outputs
3. Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

Date: 2015-05-19
13 Maintenance
13.4.2 Replace HMI Module of Front Panel

1. Open the relay front panel
2. Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
3. Detach the HMI module from the relay
4. Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
13.4.3 Replace Module

1. Unscrew the module connector
2. Unplug the connector from the target module.
3. Unscrew the module.
4. Pull out the module
5. Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
6. After replacing the MON or DSP module, input the application-specific setting values again.
13.5 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.6 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40°C to +70°C, but the temperature of from 0°C
to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.

Date: 2015-05-19
13 Maintenance

Date: 2015-05-19
Table of Contents
14 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................. 14-a
14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-1

Date: 2015-05-19

Date: 2015-05-19
14.1 Decommissioning
DANGER!
Switch OFF the circuit breaker for primary CTs and VTs BEFORE disconnecting the
cables of AI module.
WARNING!
Switch OFF the external miniature circuit breaker of device power supply BEFORE
disconnecting the power supply cable connected to the PWR module.
WARNING!
KEEP an adequate safety distance to live parts of the power substation.
1. Switching off
To switch off the PCS-902, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2. Disconnecting Cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
3. Dismantling
The PCS-902 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
14.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
NOTICE!
Strictly observe all local and national laws and regulations when disposing the device.

Date: 2015-05-19

Date: 2015-05-19

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
R1.00 2011-07-06  Form the original manual
R1.00  Add frequency protection
R1.00 R1.01 2011-08-18
 Add stub overcurrent protection
 Add the description about C37.94

 Rewrite datas of ambient temperature and humidity
range and binary input
 Amend fault detector (FD)
 Add load encroachment element
 Delete blinder element
R1.01 R1.02 2011-12-23
 Add broken conductor protection
 Amend descriptions of supervision alarms
R1.10
 Add remote control function
 Add explanations about that external CT circuit is closed
itself
 Rewrite configurable function based on PCS-Explorer
 Modify remote control function

R1.02 R1.03 2012-03-15
 Add GOOSE alarm signals
 Modify setting range of underfrequency protection
R1.03 R1.04 2012-05-09
 Add blocking AR logic
2012-07-02  Add dead zone protection
 Modify logic of power swing blocking releasing
2012-07-07
 Modify logic of reclosing failure and success
R1.04 R1.05 R2.00
2012-08-14  Add zone 5 of distance protection
2012-11-27  Modify logic of broken conductor protection
2012-11-30  Add common alarm signal [Alm_Insuf_Memory]
2012-12-10  Modify the breaking capacity of binary output contact
 Add symbol corresponding relationship about phase
sequence
2013-02-19
 Modify mechanical installation size of the device
R1.05 R1.06 R2.11
 Modify the logic of AR
 Add output sigals of function enabled and element
2013-05-29 operation ahead time delay.
 Add FD condition for all function logics

Date: 2017-06-09

Source New Version
 Modify function number of overcurrent protection for VT
circuit failure
 Modify the setting description of clock synchronization
 Add settings for broken conductor protection and modify
the logic
 Add function block diagram for power swing blocking
releasing, current direction, trip logic, faulty phase
2013-09-12 selection and fault location
R1.05 R1.06 R2.12  Add frequency upper limit setting and frequency lower
limit setting for alarm
 Add the setting [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] (the address
of the standby SNTP time synchronization server) for
communication settings
 Modify LCD displays and descriptions of human
machine interface
 Modify setting range of current direction settings
2013-11-11
 Modify the logic of VT circuit supervision
 Delete the setting [phi0_Reach] (Phase angle of line
zero-sequence impedance)
 Add the seting items of communication setting
([Opt_Display_Status], [t_Dly_Net_DNP],
R1.06 R1.07 2013-12-25
[Fmt_Setting_DNP])
 Add the setting items of Quadrilateral Distance
Protection ([21Q.ZGx.RCA], [21Q.ZPx.RCA], x=1, 2, 3,
R2.14
4)
R1.07 R1.08 2014-02-28  Add reverse power protection
 Delete the settings [21M.ZG4.En_BlkAR],
[21M.ZP4.En_BlkAR], [21Q.ZP4.En_BlkAR] and
R1.08 R1.09 2014-05-29 [21Q.ZG4.En_BlkAR]
 First four binary signals (BI_01, BI_02, BI_03, BI_04) are
changed to be configurable .
 Modify distance protection logic (5 zones, 1 forwards
zone and 4 settable forward or reverse zones)
 Modify the setting range of primary rated current
 Modify mechanical installation size of the device
 Add the corresponding descriptions about the control
R1.09 R2.00 R3.00 2014-07-29 and protection to double circuit breakers mode
 Add negative-sequence overvoltage protection
 Modify the logic of voltage protection (including
overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection)
 Add the setting [En_MDisk] and related descriptions
 Add synchronism voltage switchover in synchrocheck

Date: 2017-06-09

Source New Version
module
 Add the corresponding descriptions about dual-channels
pilot distance protection and pilot directional earth-fault
protection
 Add new fault detectors
 Modify the setting items of the settings
[50/51Px.Opt_Curve], [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve],
[59Px.Opt_Curve] and [27Px.Opt_Curve] from Integer to
enumeration type
2014-10-27  Modify the logic of breaker failure protection
 Modify the schematic diagram of debouncing technique
2014-12-01
 Modify the logic of dead zone protection
 Add new AC plug-in module, NR1408
2015-04-16  Add the schematic to explain ON/OFF value of binary
inputs
 Delete power swing detection
 Add out-of-step protection
2015-05-05
 Add short time delay for stage 2, 3, 4 of earth fault
protection
 Stub overcurrent protection is changed stub differential
2015-05-05
protection
 Modlfy the logic of synchrocheck, add the setting
[CBx.25.SetOpt]
 Modify the logic of control and synchrocheck for manual
closing, supporting double circuit breakers application
2015-05-07
 Add new BI plug-in module, NR1503AR, NR1504AR,
NR1508A
 Add new CH plug-in module, NR1213F, NR1213F-100
 Add new BO plug-in module, NR1580A
 Modify the measurement value
 Add the metering value
2015-05-15  Add the setting [Opt_Display_Status]
 Modify the indication of Warning, Caution, Danger and
Notice
 Add the output signal “Output_q” and its corresponding
descriptions
2015-05-18
 Add function shortcuts key
 Modify the menu
2015-05-19  Update DNP 3.0
2015-07-15  Update the age of corresponding IEC standards
R1.09 R2.00
2015-07-20  Add the caution lable about optical fibre and its interface

Date: 2017-06-09

Source New Version
 Modify the technical datas of protection class for front
R2.00 R2.01 2015-10-19
side and terminal
 Modify the logic of negative-sequence overcurrent
2015-10-21 protection
 Add residual overvoltage protection
 Modify the logic of distance SOTF protection
 Modify the logic of residual SOTF protection
2015-10-22  Add phase current SOTF protection
R2.00 R2.01
 Modify the logic of overcurrent protection for VT circuit
failure
2016-03-09  Add access authority management
 Update faulty phase selection
2016-07-28  Add quadrilateral characteristic for mho phase-to-ground
distance element
 Correct spelling mistake
R3.10  Delete phase current SOTF protection
 Delete residual overvoltage protection
 Modify the logics of phase overcurrent protection and
 Add the logic of pole open states
 Delete some settings of distance SOTF protection,
R2.01 R2.02 2016-10-14 residual current SOTF protection, negative-sequence
overcurrent protection and overcurrent protection for VT
vircuit failure
 Modify the trip logic
 Add the descriptions about signals controlled by fault
detector and without controlled by fault detector
 Modify the logic of manual closing signal
 Modify negative-sequence overcurrent protection
 Add the settings [En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg] and
[Opt_DualNetMode_MMS] in “device settings”
2017-05-24  Add the setting [IEDNAME] in “communication settings”
 Add the menu “HMI Setup”
R2.02 R2.10 R3.11
 Add MOT information in LCD display
 Adaptive to ABC or ACB
 Modify the number of control outputs from 10 to 15
2017-06-09  Add the keypad operation: modify the time display
format and remote control via SLD

Date: 2017-06-09

PCS-902 - X - Instruction Manual - EN - Overseas General - X - R2.10 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-902 - X - Instruction Manual - EN - Overseas General - X - R2.10 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-902 - X - Instruction Manual - EN - Overseas General - X - R2.10 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Line Distance Relay

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay i

Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.

ii PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

environment free of abnormal vibration.

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

Copyright © 2017 NR. All rights reserved.

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

P/N: ZL_PCS-902_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R2.10

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay iii

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

8 Human Machine Interface

iv PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following symbols are used in drawings:

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay v

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship

vi PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Figure 1.1-3 Functional diagram of PCS-902............................................................................ 1-3

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 1-a

1-b PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

PCS-902 Optical fibre channel or PLC channel PCS-902

Communication channel via direct dedicated fibre, MUX or PLC

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of PCS-902 for single circuit breaker

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 1-1

Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of PCS-902 for double circuit breakers

1-2 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

85 21 50/51P 50/51G 50/51Q 50GVT 50PVT 50BF 49 46BC 32R 62PD FR

Figure 1.1-3 Functional diagram of PCS-902

No. Function ANSI

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay 1-3

 Distance protection (including eight zones)

 One zone DPFC distance protection with fixed forward direction

 Load encroachment for mho and quadrilateral characteristic distance element

 Four stages phase overcurrent protection, selectable time characteristic (definite-time or

 Four stages negative-sequence overcurrent protection, selectable time characteristic

 Breaker failure protection

 Optional instantaneously re-tripping

 One stage with two delay timers

 Thermal overload protection

 Stub differential protection

 Dead zone protection

 Pole discrepancy protection

 Broken conductor protection

1-4 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

 Reverse power protection

 Switch onto fault (SOTF)